en_tn/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv

1	Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
2	ACT	front	intro	mw28			0		Introduction to Acts Part 1: General Introduction Outline of the book of Acts The apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem (1:1–6:7) The church expands into Judea and Samaria (6:8–9:31) The church expands to include Gentiles (9:32–12:24) Paul goes to Asia Minor as an apostle to the Gentiles (12:25–16:5) The church expands into the middle Mediterranean area (16:6–19:20) Paul reaches Rome, but as a prisoner and after several trials (19:21–28:31) What is the book of Acts about? The book of Acts tells the story of the early church. It relates how more and more people, from different backgrounds and in different parts of the Roman Empire, became believers in Jesus. It shows the power of the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book begin with the return of Jesus to heaven and they end about 30 years later. How should the title of this book be translated? Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Or translators may choose a different title, for example, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles.” Who wrote the book of Acts? The author of this book does not give his own name. However, the book is dedicated to Theophilus, the same person to whom Luke dedicated his story of the life of Jesus, the Gospel of Luke. Also, in parts of this book, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person who traveled with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that Luke was the author of the book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke. Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He personally witnessed many of the events that he describes in the book of Acts. Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts What is the church? The church is the community of people who believe in Jesus as their Lord and Savior. The church includes both Jewish and Gentile believers. The book of Acts shows God helping the church. It shows God doing signs and wonders to confirm the church’s testimony to Jesus, leading many people to have faith in Jesus, guiding the church about where and how to share the good news, and enabling believers to resolve conflicts and endure persecution. The kingdom of God The “kingdom of God” is a major concept in the book of Acts, as it is in the Gospel of Luke. This concept is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) Part 3: Important Translation Issues Possible translation difficulties in the book of Acts “to the same” The phrase “to the same” occurs five times in this book (1:15, 2:1, 2:44, 2:47, 4:26). It is not entirely clear what this phrase means. In the first three instances it could mean “in the same place,” but it could also mean “in one accord,” that is, “in full agreement.” In 2:47 it seems to mean “to their group.” Paul uses the same phrase in 1 Corinthians 11:20 and 14:23, where it could mean “in the same place” or it could have the sense of full agreement and mean something like “in Christian fellowship.” That sense would fit Acts 2:47, where the phrase could be translated “to their Christian fellowship.” In 4:26 it could mean “to the same place,” but it could also mean “by agreement.” Notes will discuss the different possibilities in each case where the phrase could mean more than one thing. “in/to/into the temple” Luke uses this phrase many times in this book, but it does not refer to the temple building itself. Only priests were allowed to enter that building, so the phrase refers to the courtyard or area around the temple. The phrase “in the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11 makes it clear that Peter and John and the crowd that gathered on the occasion that chapter describes were not inside the temple building. Notes will address this phrase to explain its meaning each time it occurs in the book. What are the major issues in the text of the book of Acts? The following are the most significant textual issues in Acts. Notes will address them where they occur in the book. First, there are some verses that are found in traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. Some modern versions put these verses in square brackets [ ]. The ULT and UST put them in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including these verses if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you put these verses in footnotes. These verses are: Acts 8:37, “Philip said, ‘If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.’ The Ethiopian answered, ‘I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.’” Acts 15:34, “But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.” Acts 24:6-8, “And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you.” Acts 28:29, “When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.” Second, in some verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. The ULT uses the first readings listed below, but it includes the second readings in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider following the same reading that it does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the same reading that ULT does. These verses are: Acts 3:22, “the Lord our God.” Some versions read “the Lord your God,” and other versions read “the Lord God.” Acts 12:25, “They returned from Jerusalem.” Some versions read, “They returned to Jerusalem” (or “to there”). Acts 13:18, “he put up with them.” Some versions read, “he cared for them.” Acts 15:17-18, “This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times.” Some older versions read, “This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3	ACT	1	intro	vyg9			0		Acts 01 General Notes Structure and formatting The UST has set the words “Dear Theophilus” apart from the other words. This is because English speakers often start letters this way. You may want to start this book in the way that people start letters in your culture. Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the two quotations from the book of Psalms in 1:20. Special concepts in this chapter The Ascension This chapter records an event that is commonly known as the “Ascension.” That word describes how Jesus returned to heaven after he became alive again. In the future he will come back to earth again, and his return to earth is known as his “Second Coming.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]]) Baptism Luke uses the word “baptize” with two different meanings in 1:5. In the first instance, it refers literally to the water baptism of John. In the second instance, it refers figuratively to people being filled with the Holy Spirit. Luke uses the term “filled” to mean this same thing in 2:4. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]]) “He spoke things concerning the kingdom of God” Some scholars believe that when Jesus spoke “things concerning the kingdom of God,” as Luke describes in 1:3, he explained to the disciples why the kingdom of God had not come while he was on earth the first time. Other scholars believe that the kingdom of God did begin while Jesus was on earth and that Jesus explained that it had come in a form different from the one the disciples had expected. Since Christians hold different views about the kingdom of God coming, translators should be careful to avoid letting how they understand that issue affect how they translate this verse. Possible translation difficulties in this chapter Long sentence As was common in compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes Luke begins this book with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of 1:1 to the end of 1:3. ULT represents all of this as a single sentence. It may be clearer in your translation to divide it into several sentences, as UST does. The details of the death of Judas There are some differences in detail between the way Luke describes the death of Judas in the book of Acts and the way Matthew describes it in his gospel. Luke says that Judas used the money he got for betraying Jesus to buy a field; Matthew says that Judas returned the money to the Jewish leaders and that they bought the field with it. Luke says that Judas killed himself by falling onto the field from a height; Matthew says that Judas hanged himself. Luke says that the field was named the “Field of Blood” because Judas died a bloody death there; Matthew says the field was given that name because it was purchased with “blood money,” that is, money paid to ensure someone’s death. It is possible to reconcile many of these details. For example, the body of Judas may have fallen and split open on the field if he fell when he tried to hang himself. Luke may say that Judas bought the field because the Jewish leaders would not take back the money that they had paid him, and so in a sense it was still his money when the field was purchased with it. But it would probably be best to avoid trying to reconcile these details within your translation. For example, when Luke says in 1:18 that Judas fell onto the field, instead of saying that he fell when he was trying to hang himself, you can let Luke and Matthew each tell the story the way they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible. The 12 disciples There is one small difference between the list of the 12 disciples that Matthew and Mark provide in their gospels and the list that Luke provides in his gospel and in the book of Acts. All three writers list Simon Peter and his brother Andrew; James and John, the two sons of Zebedee; Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot. But Matthew and Mark say that the twelfth disciple was Thaddeus, while Luke says he was Judas the son of James. However, it is quite likely that Thaddeus was another name by which this other Judas was known. Once again it is not necessary to try to reconcile these details within your translation. Specifically, in 1:13 instead of saying, “Judas the son of James, who was also known as Thaddeus,” you can let each of the biblical writers tell the story in the way that they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.
4	ACT	1	1	q9ep	figs-explicit	τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον ἐποιησάμην	1	I made the first account	Luke assumes that Theophilus will know that by the first account he means the book that has become known as the Gospel of Luke. Since that book was not known by that title at this time, it would not be accurate to put the title in your translation as a name that Luke would have used to describe the book to Theophilus. However, you could explain this in a footnote and use another expression here. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my first volume” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
5	ACT	1	1	a000		ὦ Θεόφιλε	1	O Theophilus	Here Luke is identifying and addressing the man for whom he complied this account of the early church. Since this is like the salutation of a letter, in your translation you may wish to follow your culture’s way of identifying and greeting the addressee of a letter. UST models this by saying “Dear Theophilus” and putting the phrase at the beginning of the sentence.
6	ACT	1	1	ryj5	translate-names	Θεόφιλε	1	Theophilus	Theophilus is the name of a man. It means “friend of God.” It may be his actual name, or it may describe what this man was like. Most translations treat it as his name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
7	ACT	1	1	a001	figs-idiom	περὶ πάντων…ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν	1	all that Jesus began both to do and to teach	Luke is using the word began in an idiomatic way to indicate that Jesus had been doing something else (he had been working as a carpenter), but he then began to do something new when he started his ministry. In many languages it would not be necessary to translate the word began. Alternate translation: “about all that Jesus did and taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
8	ACT	1	1	a002	figs-hyperbole	περὶ πάντων…ὧν ἤρξατο ὁ Ἰησοῦς ποιεῖν τε καὶ διδάσκειν	1	all that Jesus began both to do and to teach	This is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “about some of the most important things that Jesus did and taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
9	ACT	1	2	a003	figs-idiom	ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας	1	until that day when	While this did happen on a specific day, Luke is likely using the word day idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “up to the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
10	ACT	1	2	n435	figs-activepassive	ἀνελήμφθη	1	he was taken up	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
11	ACT	1	2	a424	figs-explicit	ἀνελήμφθη	1	he was taken up	Luke is referring to Jesus being taken up into heaven. See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “he was taken up into heaven” or “God took him up into heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
12	ACT	1	3	a004		οἷς καὶ παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα, μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν, ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις	1	to whom also, after he had suffered, he presented himself living with many proofs	As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Jesus also presented himself alive with many proofs to his apostles after he had suffered”
13	ACT	1	3	dup3	figs-explicit	μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν	1	after he had suffered	This refers to how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. Alternate translation: “after he had suffered and died on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
14	ACT	1	3	a005	figs-explicit	ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις	1	with many proofs	The word translated proofs describes items of evidence that are decisive and convincing. Alternate translation: “with many definitive proofs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
15	ACT	1	3	yc16	figs-explicit	δι’ ἡμερῶν τεσσεράκοντα, ὀπτανόμενος αὐτοῖς, καὶ λέγων	1	appearing to them for 40 days and speaking	While the antecedent of whom is “the apostles whom he had chosen” in the previous verse, Jesus actually appeared to many other disciples besides his apostles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “For 40 days he appeared to his apostles and many of his other disciples, and he spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
16	ACT	1	3	a006	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	things concerning the kingdom of God	See the discussion of the concept of the kingdom of God in Part 2 of the General Introduction to Acts. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun kingdom with a verb such as “rule,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
17	ACT	1	4	a007	figs-doublenegatives	ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι, ἀλλὰ	1	not to depart from Jerusalem, but	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb depart. Alternate translation: “to remain in Jerusalem and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
18	ACT	1	4	vb7g	figs-quotemarks	ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι	1	not to depart from Jerusalem	The content of Jesus’ instructions to the apostles on this occasion begins here. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate and punctuate the material from here to the end of the verse as a direct quotation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
19	ACT	1	4	a008	translate-names	Ἱεροσολύμων	1	Jerusalem	Jerusalem is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
20	ACT	1	4	sg4h	figs-metonymy	τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πατρὸς	1	the promise of the Father	Jesus is referring figuratively to the Holy Spirit by association with the way God made a promise to send the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit, whom the Father promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
21	ACT	1	4	a009	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρὸς	1	of the Father	Father is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “of God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
22	ACT	1	4	tj6r	figs-quotations	ἣν ἠκούσατέ μου	1	which you heard from me	In keeping with his engaging storytelling style, Luke begins a quotation from Jesus here without introducing it with a formula such as “he said.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include an introductory formula in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He said, ‘You heard about this from me’” or “He said, ‘I told you about this’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
23	ACT	1	4	d3kr	figs-you	ἠκούσατέ	1	you heard	Here, you is plural because Jesus is speaking to the apostles, so use the plural form of “you” in your translation if your language marks that distinction. In 1:6, “you” is singular because Jesus alone is being addressed, so the singular form would be accurate there. In general these notes will not discuss whether you is singular or plural when this should be clear from the context, but they will address ambiguous cases where this may not be clear. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
24	ACT	1	5	uu4k	translate-names	Ἰωάννης	1	John	John is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
25	ACT	1	5	fnq5	figs-explicit	Ἰωάννης	1	John	Jesus is referring to the man who was known as John the Baptist because he baptized people. It may help to identify him if you use that title after his name in your translation. However, because the word “Baptist” is associated with a group of churches in many parts of the world, it may be clearer to use a different form of the word as a title, as UST does by saying “Baptizer.” Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Baptizer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
26	ACT	1	5	a075	figs-metaphor	ὑμεῖς…ἐν Πνεύματι βαπτισθήσεσθε Ἁγίῳ	1	you will be baptized in the Holy Spirit	After describing earlier in the verse how John baptized people literally, Jesus is using baptism in this second instance as a metaphor. See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit will come and empower you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
27	ACT	1	5	dzj1	figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς…βαπτισθήσεσθε	1	you will be baptized	You may wish to retain the metaphor of baptism in your translation. If you do, if it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will baptize” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
28	ACT	1	5	a010	figs-litotes	οὐ μετὰ πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας	1	after these not many days	Jesus is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “just a few days from now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
29	ACT	1	6	n9wt	writing-pronouns	οἱ μὲν οὖν συνελθόντες, ἠρώτων αὐτὸν	1	They therefore having assembled, they were asking him	In the first instance, they describes Jesus and the apostles, while in the second instance, they refers to the apostles. (Other disciples could have been present on this occasion, but the instructions that Jesus gives about being “witnesses” in 1:8 apply specifically to the apostles, so it would be good to name them directly.) Alternate translation: “When the apostles were together with Jesus, the apostles were asking him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
30	ACT	1	6	a011	figs-idiom	εἰ ἐν τῷ χρόνῳ τούτῳ, ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ	1	if you are restoring the kingdom to Israel at this time	This is an idiomatic way of asking a question. Alternate translation: “are you restoring the kingdom to Israel at this time” or “will you now restore the kingdom to Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
31	ACT	1	6	f7uj	figs-abstractnouns	εἰ…ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ	1	if you are restoring the kingdom to Israel	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun kingdom with a concrete noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “are you going to give Israel its own king again” or “are you going to become the restored king of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
32	ACT	1	6	a252	translate-names	τῷ Ἰσραήλ	1	to Israel	Israel is the name of a nation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
33	ACT	1	7	a012	figs-explicit	οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν γνῶναι	1	It is not for you to know	Jesus is saying implicitly by this response that he is not going to tell the apostles when the thing they are asking about will happen. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “I am not going to tell you when that will happen, because it is not for you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
34	ACT	1	7	y1fu	figs-doublet	χρόνους ἢ καιροὺς	1	the times or the seasons	The words times and seasons could: (1) refer to different kinds of time. Alternate translation: “the general period of time or the specific date” (2) have similar meanings, being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the exact time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
35	ACT	1	7	a013	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	ὁ Πατὴρ	1	the Father	Father is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
36	ACT	1	7	a014	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ	1	by his own authority	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun authority with a verb such as “control.” Alternate translation: “as the one who controls all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
37	ACT	1	8	ld4k	grammar-connect-logic-result	λήμψεσθε δύναμιν, ἐπελθόντος τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς, καὶ ἔσεσθέ μου μάρτυρες	1	you will receive power when the Holy Spirit has come upon you, and you will be my witnesses	Jesus is using the word translated and to describe a result. Alternate translation: “when the Holy Spirit comes upon you, then you will receive power to be my witnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
38	ACT	1	8	a015	figs-abstractnouns	δύναμιν	1	power	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun power with an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “powerful ability” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
39	ACT	1	8	a016	translate-names	Ἰερουσαλὴμ…Ἰουδαίᾳ…Σαμαρείᾳ	1	Jerusalem … Judea … Samaria	Jerusalem is the name of a city, and Judea and Samaria are the names of regions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
40	ACT	1	8	vb4m	figs-idiom	ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς	1	to the end of the earth	This is a reference to place, not to time. Jesus does not mean “until the world ends.” Alternate translation: “all over the world” or “to the places on the earth that are farthest away from here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
41	ACT	1	9	e1q1	figs-explicit	βλεπόντων αὐτῶν	1	as they were looking	Your language may require you to specify the object of looking. Alternate translation: “as they were looking at him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
42	ACT	1	9	l1cq	figs-activepassive	ἐπήρθη	1	he was raised up	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. (See the discussion of “Ascension” in the General Notes to this chapter.) Alternate translation: “he rose up” or “God raised him up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
43	ACT	1	9	ug58	figs-metonymy	ἀπὸ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν	1	from their eyes	Luke is using the eyes of the apostles figuratively to mean their capacity to see. Alternate translation: “from their sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
44	ACT	1	10	enu1	figs-explicit	ἀτενίζοντες ἦσαν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	they were looking intently into heaven	Since a cloud was able to block the apostles’ view, it is clear that Luke is using the word translated heaven here in one of its specific senses to mean “sky.” It would be good to make clear that the apostles were not seeing into heaven itself. Alternate translation: “gazing at the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
45	ACT	1	10	a017	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἰδοὺ ἄνδρες δύο	1	and behold, two men	Luke is using the term behold to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly these two men appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then two men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
46	ACT	1	10	a018	grammar-connect-time-sequential	καὶ	1	and	Luke uses the word translated And to indicate that the event of the men appearing happened after the event of Jesus going up. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
47	ACT	1	10	a019	figs-explicit	ἄνδρες δύο	1	two men	These were actually angels. Luke calls them men because they appeared in human form. Alternate translation: “two angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
48	ACT	1	10	a020		ἐσθήσεσι λευκαῖς	1	white clothes	In this context, the word white likely has the specific sense of “bright” or “shining.” Alternate translation: “bright clothes” or “shining clothes”
49	ACT	1	11	a021	figs-explicit	οἳ…εἶπαν	1	they said	This could mean: (1) one of the angels had spoken on behalf of both of them. Alternate translation: “one of them said” (2) the two angels had each said different parts of the quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
50	ACT	1	11	a022	figs-verbs	οἳ…εἶπαν	1	they said	If you retain the word they in your translation and if your language uses dual forms for verbs, it would be accurate to use the dual form here, since two men are speaking. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-verbs]])
51	ACT	1	11	gpg3	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι	1	Men, Galileans	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “You Galileans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
52	ACT	1	11	a023	translate-names	ἄνδρες, Γαλιλαῖοι	1	Men, Galileans	Galileans are people who are from the region of Galilee. Alternate translation: “You men from Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
53	ACT	1	11	a024	figs-rquestion	τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν?	1	why do you stand looking into heaven?	The angels are not looking for information. They are using the question form for emphasis. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate their words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no reason for you to stand looking into heaven!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
54	ACT	1	11	a025	figs-idiom	τί ἑστήκατε βλέποντες	1	why do you stand looking	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “why do you keep looking” or “there is no reason for you to keep looking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
55	ACT	1	11	a026		ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς ἀφ’ ὑμῶν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν…ἐθεάσασθε αὐτὸν πορευόμενον εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν	1	who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into heaven	In its second occurrence in this sentence, the term translated heaven likely means “the sky,” as in the previous sentence and in the previous verse. However, in its first occurrence in this sentence, the term likely means “heaven” itself. It would not be accurate to say that Jesus was just “taken up from you into the sky.” Alternate translation: “who has been taken up from you into heaven … you saw him going into the sky”
56	ACT	1	11	a027	figs-activepassive	ὁ ἀναλημφθεὶς	1	who has been taken up	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who has done the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has taken up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
57	ACT	1	11	cue7	figs-idiom	ὃν τρόπον	1	in which manner	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “in the same way in which” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
58	ACT	1	12	x2nk	writing-pronouns	ὑπέστρεψαν	1	they returned	The word they refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the apostles returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
59	ACT	1	12	a028	figs-activepassive	ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος	1	the hill that is called Olivet	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the hill that people call Olivet” or “the hill whose name is Olivet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
60	ACT	1	12	a029	translate-names	ὄρους τοῦ καλουμένου Ἐλαιῶνος	1	the hill that is called Olivet	Olivet is the name of a hill. If your readers might recognize it better if you called it the Mount of Olives, you could use that name in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
61	ACT	1	12	a030	figs-idiom	Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν	1	having a journey of a Sabbath	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “a Sabbath-day’s journey away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
62	ACT	1	12	p19g	figs-explicit	Σαββάτου ἔχον ὁδόν	1	having a journey of a Sabbath	The journey of a Sabbath was the distance that interpreters of the law of Moses had determined people could walk on the Sabbath without that being “work.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the distance in the measurement that your culture uses. Alternate translation: “about a kilometer away” or “about half a mile away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
63	ACT	1	13	vis2	figs-explicit	ὅτε εἰσῆλθον	1	when they arrived	The previous verse explains that the apostles returned to Jerusalem. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that again explicitly here. Alternate translation: “when they arrived back in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
64	ACT	1	13	zt12	translate-unknown	εἰς τὸ ὑπερῷον, ἀνέβησαν οὗ ἦσαν καταμένοντες	1	they went up into the upper chamber where they were staying	In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built on top of other rooms. The expression upper chamber describes such a room, which was reached by stairs. If your culture does not have houses like that, it may be helpful to explain the meaning of the expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “they climbed the stairs to the room where they were staying, which had been built on top of other rooms in the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
65	ACT	1	13	a031	translate-names	Πέτρος…Ἰωάννης…Ἰάκωβος…Ἀνδρέας…Φίλιππος…Θωμᾶς…Βαρθολομαῖος…Μαθθαῖος	1	Peter … John … James … Andrew … Philip … Thomas … Bartholomew … Matthew	These are the names of eight men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
66	ACT	1	13	a032	figs-idiom	Ἰάκωβος Ἁλφαίου…Ἰούδας Ἰακώβου	1	James of Alphaeus … Judas of James	These are two occurrences of an idiom. Alternate translation: “James the son of Alphaeus … Judas the son of James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
67	ACT	1	13	a033	translate-names	Ἰάκωβος…Ἁλφαίου…Ἰούδας…Ἰακώβου	1	James … Alphaeus … Judas … James	These are the names of four men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
68	ACT	1	13	a034	translate-names	Σίμων ὁ Ζηλωτὴς	1	Simon the Zealot	Simon is the name of a man, and Zealot is another name by which he was known. (1) Zealot could be a title that indicates that this man was part of the group of people who wanted to free the Jewish people from Roman rule. Alternate translation: “Simon the Patriot” (2) Zealot could also be a description that indicates that this man was zealous for God to be honored. Alternate translation: “Simon the Passionate One” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names)
69	ACT	1	14	z6cf		ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	unanimously	The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”
70	ACT	1	14	a035	figs-explicit	γυναιξὶν	1	the women	Luke assumes that his readers will know he is referring to the women who accompanied Jesus and his disciples during his ministry. These women provided for them out of their own means, and they had traveled with them to Jerusalem. These women are described in Luke 8:2–3 and 23:49. Alternate translation: “the women who had helped Jesus and his disciples during his ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
71	ACT	1	14	a036	translate-names	Μαρία	1	Mary	Mary is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
72	ACT	1	14	a037	translate-kinship	τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς αὐτοῦ	1	his brothers	These were Jesus’ younger brothers. They were the sons of Mary and Joseph. Since the Father of Jesus was God, and their father was Joseph, they were actually his half-brothers. That detail is not normally translated, but if your language has a specific word for “younger brother,” you may wish to use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
73	ACT	1	15	il8w	writing-newevent	καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	And in those days	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. The phrase refers to the period of time after Jesus ascended, when the disciples were meeting in the upper chamber. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
74	ACT	1	15	cup2	figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	in those days	Luke is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “during that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
75	ACT	1	15	a038	translate-symaction	ἀναστὰς	1	having stood up	Peter stood up to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
76	ACT	1	15	liz1	figs-metaphor	τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	the brothers	Luke is using the term brothers figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “his fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
77	ACT	1	15	a039	figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	the brothers	Although the term brothers is masculine, Luke is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
78	ACT	1	15	tl5m	writing-background	ἦν τε ὄχλος ὀνομάτων ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ὡς ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι	1	and the multitude of names to the same was about 120	Luke provides this background information to help readers appreciate what happens shortly afterwards in the story, when the church grows in one day to many times this size. It may be helpful to put this background information first in the verse as a separate sentence, in which case it would not have to be in parentheses. Alternate translation: “Now the number of people in that one place was about 120.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
79	ACT	1	15	a040	figs-metonymy	ὄχλος ὀνομάτων	1	the multitude of names	Luke is using the term names figuratively to mean “people,” by association with the way that people have names. Alternate translation: “the number of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
80	ACT	1	15	a041		ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	to the same	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in that one place” or “in their Christian fellowship”
81	ACT	1	16	a042	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	Men, brothers	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
82	ACT	1	16	a043	figs-metaphor	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	Men, brothers	See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
83	ACT	1	16	a044	figs-gendernotations	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	Men, brothers	If you decide to retain the metaphor of brothers, you could show that Peter is using the term in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “My brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
84	ACT	1	16	a045	figs-infostructure	ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν, ἣν προεῖπε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ περὶ Ἰούδα, τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν	1	it was necessary for the scripture to be fulfilled that the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus	If it would be clearer in your language, you could put the information that Peter provides to identify this scripture before his statement that it had to be fulfilled. It may be helpful to make that statement a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit spoke before by the mouth of David concerning Judas, who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus. It was necessary for that scripture to be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
85	ACT	1	16	i8tl	figs-activepassive	ἔδει πληρωθῆναι τὴν Γραφὴν	1	it was necessary for the scripture to be fulfilled	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the things needed to take place that the scripture described” or, if you put the background information first as a separate sentence, “What that scripture described needed to take place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
86	ACT	1	16	a046		προεῖπε	1	spoke before	Alternate translation: “spoke beforehand” or “spoke in advance”
87	ACT	1	16	f3um	figs-metonymy	διὰ στόματος Δαυεὶδ	1	by the mouth of David	Peter is using the word mouth figuratively to refer to words that David spoke or sang using his mouth and that he recorded in the book of Psalms, as Peter indicates in 1:20. Alternate translation: “through the words of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
88	ACT	1	16	a047	translate-names	Δαυεὶδ…Ἰούδα	1	David … Judas	David and Judas are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
89	ACT	1	16	a048	figs-synecdoche	τοῦ γενομένου ὁδηγοῦ τοῖς συλλαβοῦσιν Ἰησοῦν	1	who became a guide to the ones who arrested Jesus	Peter is using the act of guiding the ones who arrested Jesus to represent all of the things that Judas did to betray Jesus. This also included meeting beforehand with his enemies, receiving payment for the betrayal, and looking for the best opportunity to catch Jesus away from the crowds. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in more general terms. Alternate translation: “who betrayed Jesus to his enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
90	ACT	1	17	q73y	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1	For	Peter uses the word For to introduce the reason for a result that is described in 1:21–22, after Luke provides further background information and Peter quotes the scripture he referred to in 1:16. The overall meaning is, “Since Judas was one of us apostles, we need to replace him with another witness of the ministry of Jesus.” But since so much material comes between the reason and the result, it may be helpful to give an indication here that Peter has a response in mind. Alternate translation: “There is something important we need to do in response to this scripture being fulfilled, since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
91	ACT	1	17	a049	figs-parallelism	κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν, καὶ ἔλαχεν τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης	1	he was numbered with us and received a share of this ministry	These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “Jesus chose him to be an apostle along with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
92	ACT	1	17	a050		κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν	1	he was numbered with us	Peter is using the term numbered in one of its specific senses. Alternate translation: “he was considered to be one of us apostles”
93	ACT	1	17	a051	figs-activepassive	κατηριθμημένος ἦν ἐν ἡμῖν	1	he was numbered with us	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he belonged to our group of apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
94	ACT	1	17	tmv2	figs-exclusive	ἐν ἡμῖν	1	with us	Although Peter is addressing a larger group of people, he is using the word us to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that us is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “with us apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
95	ACT	1	17	a052	figs-quotemarks	τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης	1	a share of this ministry	Luke temporarily ends his quotation from Peter after this phrase so that he can provide further background information about Judas in 1:18–19. The quotation resumes in 1:20. If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an ending quotation mark or the equivalent after this phrase. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
96	ACT	1	18	tmv1	writing-background	μὲν οὖν	1	Now indeed	Luke is using this expression to introduce further background information that he provides in this verse and the next one about how Judas died and about what people called the field where he died. This is not part of Peter’s speech. You may want to indicate that by putting these verses in parentheses or by using the equivalent convention in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
97	ACT	1	18	dd58	figs-nominaladj	οὗτος	1	this one	Luke is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could say “he” or use the name “Judas.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
98	ACT	1	18	a053	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας	1	from the wage of unrighteousness	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun unrighteousness with an adjective such as “unrighteous.” Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for doing an unrighteous deed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
99	ACT	1	18	w83j	figs-metonymy	ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας	1	from the wage of unrighteousness	Luke is using the term unrighteousness figuratively to describe Judas betraying Jesus, by association with the way that was an unrighteous thing to do. Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for betraying Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
100	ACT	1	18	kg3q	figs-explicit	πρηνὴς γενόμενος	1	having fallen headfirst	Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Judas did not fall down accidentally. Rather, he threw himself onto the field intentionally in order to kill himself. The implications are that he must have done this from a height. Alternate translation: “because he then threw himself down from a height onto that field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
101	ACT	1	18	a054		πρηνὴς γενόμενος	1	having fallen headfirst	The word headfirst describes someone falling forward, as opposed to falling backwards. Alternate translation: “having fallen forward”
102	ACT	1	18	a055	figs-activepassive	ἐξεχύθη πάντα τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ	1	all his entrails were poured out	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “all his inward parts poured out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
103	ACT	1	19	a056		γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	it became known to all those living in Jerusalem	The verb form is not passive here, since known is an adjective rather than a participle. Even so, it may be clearer in your language to make it the object rather than the subject. Alternate translation: “all those living in Jerusalem heard about it”
104	ACT	1	19	a057	figs-hyperbole	γνωστὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	it became known to all those living in Jerusalem	Luke says all as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “it became well known to those living in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
105	ACT	1	19	a058	figs-activepassive	ὥστε κληθῆναι τὸ χωρίον ἐκεῖνο	1	Therefore that field was called	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “So they called that field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
106	ACT	1	19	mxf3	translate-transliterate	Ἁκελδαμάχ	1	Akeldama	Akeldama is an Aramaic word. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds, and then he says what it means, Field of Blood. In your translation you can spell it the way it sounds in your language and then explain its meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
107	ACT	1	20	mz13	figs-quotemarks	γέγραπται γὰρ	1	For it is written	Luke now resumes his quotation of what Peter said on this occasion. If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an opening quotation mark or the equivalent before this phrase. It may also be helpful to indicate explicitly that the quotation resumes here. Alternate translation: “Peter went on to say, ‘For it is written’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
108	ACT	1	20	d7pk	figs-quotesinquotes	γέγραπται…ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν, γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ; καί, τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος	1	it is written in the book of Psalms, ‘Let his habitation be made desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it,’ and ‘Let another take his overseership.’	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “it is written in the book of Psalms that his habitation should be made desolate, with no one dwelling in it, and that another should take his overseership” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
109	ACT	1	20	ip5w	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται…ἐν βίβλῳ Ψαλμῶν	1	it is written in the book of Psalms	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “David wrote in the book of Psalms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
110	ACT	1	20	mc45	figs-parallelism	γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	Let his habitation be made desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Let his habitation be made desolate, yes, let no one dwell in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
111	ACT	1	20	chq4	figs-metaphor	γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος, καὶ μὴ ἔστω ὁ κατοικῶν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	Let his habitation be made desolate, and let not one dwelling be in it	The word habitation likely refers to Judas’ home and is a metaphor for his family line. Alternate translation: “May he leave no descendants, none to continue his family line” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
112	ACT	1	20	lsm2	figs-activepassive	γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ ἔρημος	1	Let his habitation be made desolate	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Let his habitation become desolate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
113	ACT	1	20	a059		τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος	1	Let another take his overseership	The word overseership refers to a position of leadership and supervision. It is the same term that Paul uses for a spiritual leader in 1 Timothy 3:1. Alternate translation: “Let someone else take his leadership position”
114	ACT	1	21	t916	translate-versebridge		0		To make Peter’s main point in this verse and the next one clearer, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put his main point in a first sentence and his further explanation in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “Therefore it is necessary for someone else to become a witness with us of Jesus’ resurrection. It should be one of the men who accompanied us during all the time that the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us, beginning from the baptism of John until the day that he was taken up from us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
115	ACT	1	21	xz69	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν…ἡμᾶς	1	us … us	In the first instance of us, Peter means himself and his fellow apostles, not everyone to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of the word if your language marks that distinction. However, in the second instance of us, Peter could well mean himself and his entire audience, so use the inclusive form in that instance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
116	ACT	1	21	zuf7	figs-idiom	εἰσῆλθεν καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ὁ Κύριος Ἰησοῦς	1	the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us	Peter is speaking in an idiomatic way. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus lived among us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
117	ACT	1	22	qb8j	figs-abstractnouns	ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τοῦ βαπτίσματος Ἰωάννου	1	beginning from the baptism of John	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun baptism with a verb such as “baptize.” Alternate translation: “beginning from when John started baptizing people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
118	ACT	1	22	a060	translate-names	Ἰωάννου	1	John	John is the name of a man. Peter means the man who was known as John the Baptist. See how you translated his name in 1:5. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
119	ACT	1	22	a061	figs-idiom	τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς	1	the day on which	While Jesus was taken up to heaven on a specific day, Peter may be using the word day idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
120	ACT	1	22	a062	writing-pronouns	ἀνελήμφθη…τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ	1	he was taken up … his resurrection	The pronoun he refers to Jesus, not to John the Baptist. The pronoun his also refers to Jesus. For clarity, you may want to use the name Jesus instead of one or both of these pronouns. Alternate translation: “Jesus was taken up … the resurrection of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
121	ACT	1	22	yi3a	figs-activepassive	ἀνελήμφθη ἀφ’ ἡμῶν	1	he was taken up from us	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
122	ACT	1	22	a063	figs-exclusive	ἀφ’ ἡμῶν…σὺν ἡμῖν	1	from us … with us	When Peter says from us, he is referring to God taking Jesus from everyone to whom he is speaking. But when Peter says with us, he means only himself and the other apostles. So the word “us” would be inclusive in the first instance and exclusive in the second instance, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
123	ACT	1	22	mrx7	figs-nominaladj	ἕνα τούτων	1	one of these is	Peter is using the demonstrative adjective these as a noun to refer to specific people, the men whose qualifications he has just described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “one of these men is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
124	ACT	1	22	g3n9	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ	1	of his resurrection	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun resurrection with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “that God made him alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
125	ACT	1	23	lz7y	writing-pronouns	ἔστησαν δύο	1	they stood up two	The pronoun they refers to all of the believers who were present on this occasion. This is the group that Luke describes as “the brothers” in 1:15. Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
126	ACT	1	23	a064	figs-nominaladj	ἔστησαν δύο	1	they stood up two	Luke is using the adjective two as a noun to refer to specific people, two men who met the qualifications Peter described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning, and you could also describe these men more specifically. Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two men” or “the believers stood up two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
127	ACT	1	23	a065	translate-symaction	ἔστησαν δύο	1	they stood up two	When the believers stood up these two men, that is, when they had them stand up within the group, this was a symbolic way of proposing them as candidates to replace Judas. Alternate translation: “the believers proposed two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
128	ACT	1	23	a066	translate-names	Ἰωσὴφ…Βαρσαββᾶν…Ἰοῦστος	1	Joseph … Barsabbas … Justus	Joseph is the name of a man, and Barsabbas and Justus are two other names by which he was known. Barsabbas is probably a patronymic, that is, an indication of who his father was. If your language and culture identify people by patronymics, it may be helpful to translate this name as “the son of Sabbas,” as UST does. Justus is a Roman name, and it may be a name that this man used for official purposes and in interactions with people who spoke Latin. (It would be like the name Paul, by which Saul of Tarsus was also known in the Roman Empire.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
129	ACT	1	23	s1ff	figs-activepassive	τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν, ὃς ἐπεκλήθη Ἰοῦστος	1	the one called Barsabbas, who was named Justus	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say both of these things with active forms. Alternate translation: “whom people called Barsabbas and whose other name was Justus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
130	ACT	1	23	a067	translate-names	Μαθθίαν	1	Matthias	Matthias is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
131	ACT	1	24	a068	translate-versebridge		0		Judas betrayed Jesus and abandoned his position as an apostle. The person who is praying says that in the next verse. As a result, the believers are asking God to show them whom he has chosen to replace Judas, as the person praying says in this verse. You could put the reason before the result by creating a verse bridge. UST provides a model for doing that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
132	ACT	1	24	a069	figs-hendiadys	προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν	1	praying they said	Together the words praying and said indicate that the believers said what they did while praying. Alternate translation: “they said in prayer” or “they prayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
133	ACT	1	24	zd1f	figs-synecdoche	προσευξάμενοι, εἶπαν	1	praying they said	The pronoun they refers to all of the believers, but one of the apostles alone probably spoke these words on behalf of everyone. Alternate translation: “as the believers were all praying together, one of the apostles said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
134	ACT	1	24	a070		σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων	1	You, Lord, heart-knower of all	Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the hearts of all people”
135	ACT	1	24	se6m	figs-metaphor	σὺ Κύριε, καρδιογνῶστα πάντων	1	You, Lord, heart-knower of all	Here, the heart figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “You, Lord, who know the thoughts and motives of all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
136	ACT	1	24	a071	figs-youformal	σὺ Κύριε	1	you, Lord	The word you is singular because the person who is praying is addressing God. If your language has a formal form of “you” that it uses to address a superior respectfully, you may wish to use that form in your translation. However, it might be more natural in your language for someone who has a good, close relationship with God to address God using the informal form of “you.” Use your best judgment about what form to use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
137	ACT	1	24	a072	figs-nominaladj	ὃν ἐξελέξω ἐκ τούτων τῶν δύο ἕνα	1	which one from these two	The person who is praying is using the adjective two as a noun to refer to specific people, the two men whom the believers have proposed. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “which one of these two men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
138	ACT	1	25	mg47	figs-hendiadys	λαβεῖν τὸν τόπον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης καὶ ἀποστολῆς	1	to take this place of ministry and apostleship	The person who is praying is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word apostleship identifies what kind of ministry this is. Alternate translation: “to take this place of apostolic ministry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
139	ACT	1	25	ryv6	figs-metaphor	ἀφ’ ἧς παρέβη Ἰούδας	1	from which Judas turned aside	The expression turned aside figuratively means that Judas stopped performing this ministry. Alternate translation: “which Judas stopped fulfilling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
140	ACT	1	25	tx6n	figs-euphemism	πορευθῆναι εἰς τὸν τόπον τὸν ἴδιον	1	to go to his own place	This phrase uses a mild expression to describe Judas’ death and likely also his judgment after death. Alternate translation: “and died under God’s judgment as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
141	ACT	1	26	a073	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what the believers did as a result of Peter’s speech. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
142	ACT	1	26	r84c	writing-pronouns	ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς	1	they cast lots for them	The pronoun they refers to the believers and the pronoun them refers to Joseph and Matthias. You may want to specify that for clarity. (But if you decide to retain the pronoun them and if your language marks the dual form, them would be dual because it refers to those two men.) Alternate translation: “the believers cast lots to decide between Joseph and Matthias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
143	ACT	1	26	a074	translate-unknown	ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς	1	they cast lots for them	The term lots describes objects with various markings on different sides that were used, most likely by dropping them on the ground, to select between possibilities. The belief was that God would control which way these objects fell and so guide the selection process. Alternate translation: “they threw marked objects on the ground, trusting that God would use these to guide them whether to choose Joseph or Matthias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
144	ACT	1	26	w4ph	figs-idiom	ἔπεσεν ὁ κλῆρος ἐπὶ Μαθθίαν	1	the lot fell to Matthias	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the lot selected Matthias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
145	ACT	1	26	fk4x	figs-activepassive	συνκατεψηφίσθη	1	he was chosen	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the believers chose him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
146	ACT	2	intro	x8fr			0		Acts 02 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35. Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the material that is quoted in 2:31. Special concepts in this chapter Pentecost The events described in this chapter took place on the day of Pentecost. That was a festival that the Jews observed each year 50 days after Passover. It was a harvest festival that celebrated the first produce from the fields. That produce was known as “firstfruits.” Many people believe that the church began to exist when the Holy Spirit came to live inside believers on this particular day of Pentecost. Those believers were the “firstfruits” of all those who would become part of the church down through the years. Tongues The word “tongues” has two meanings in this chapter. In 2:3, Luke describes what came down from heaven as “tongues as if of fire.” A “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire” (as in Isaiah 5:24, for example), so this means “something like flames of fire.” In 2:4, Luke uses the word “tongues” in the different sense of “languages” to describe the languages that the people spoke after the Holy Spirit filled them. Last days In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy from Joel that describes something that will happen in the “last days.” Some scholars understand the “last days” to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. Other scholars understand the “last days” to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this expression where it occurs in 2:17. It may be best not to say more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]]) The prophecy of Joel In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy of Joel about what would happen in the “last days.” Some of the things that prophecy describes did happen on the day of Pentecost, for example, the pouring out of the Spirit (2:17–18). Some other things did not happen, at least not literally, for example, the sun turning to darkness (2:20). Depending on how scholars understand the “last days,” they may say either that these other things await a literal future fulfillment or that they were fulfilled in some spiritual sense on the day of Pentecost. Once again it may be best not to say any more than ULT does and to allow preachers and teachers of the Bible to interpret and explain the meaning of Peter’s statement in 2:16, “this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]]) Baptize In this chapter, the word “baptize” refers to water baptism as an expression of faith in Jesus for the forgiveness of sins. That is how Luke uses the term in 2:38 and 2:41. Jesus did promise the disciples in 1:5 that they would be baptized in the Holy Spirit, and the events that Luke describes in 2:1-11 are the fulfillment of that promise. But Luke does not use the word “baptize” to describe those events in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]]) Wonders and signs These words refer to things that only God could do that showed that Jesus was who the disciples said he was. See the notes to this expression in 2:43. Possible translation difficulties in this chapter “You killed” (2:23) The Romans were the ones who killed Jesus, but they killed him because the Jews captured him, brought him to the Romans, and urged the Romans to kill him. For this reason Peter tells the people in the crowd on the day of Pentecost that they were guilty of killing Jesus. See the note to this phrase in 2:23 for suggestions about how to make clear in your translation what Peter means when he says this. Long sentences There is a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:9 to the end of 2:11. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be clearer in your translation to divide it into several sentences, as UST does. There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:44 to the end of 2:47. Once again it may be clearer in your translation to divide it into several sentences, as UST does. Poetry The quotations from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35 are poetry. For advice about how to represent this literary form in your translation, see: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]])
147	ACT	2	1	i4sa	writing-newevent	καὶ ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	And when the day of Pentecost was completely filled	Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
148	ACT	2	1	a076	figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	when the day of Pentecost was completely filled	This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “when the day of Pentecost had come” or, if your language does not speak of days “coming,” “on the day of Pentecost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
149	ACT	2	1	a425	figs-activepassive	ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	when the day of Pentecost was completely filled	Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to use an active form of the verb “fill” in place of the passive form of that verb here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
150	ACT	2	1	x075	translate-names	τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς	1	the day of Pentecost	Pentecost is the name of a festival. It occurs 50 days after Passover. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
151	ACT	2	1	i4sb	writing-pronouns	ἦσαν πάντες ὁμοῦ	1	they were all together	Here the word they refers to the apostles and the other 120 believers whom Luke mentions in 1:15. Alternate translation: “the apostles and all the other believers were together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
152	ACT	2	1	a077		ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό	1	to the same	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “in united Christian fellowship”
153	ACT	2	2	qjc3		ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	from heaven	The word translated heaven could mean: (1) “the sky.” Alternate translation: “from the sky” (2) the sound came from heaven itself.
154	ACT	2	2	a078	figs-simile	ὥσπερ φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας	1	as of a strong wind being borne along	Luke is using a simile to describe what this wind was like. You could use the same simile in your translation, or you could use a different comparison, to a similar loud sound that your readers would recognize. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “It sounded like a strong wind being borne along” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
155	ACT	2	2	jec5	figs-metaphor	φερομένης πνοῆς βιαίας	1	a strong wind being borne along	Luke speaks figuratively of the wind as if it were being carried through the air. Alternate translation: “a mighty, rushing wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
156	ACT	2	2	a079	figs-metaphor	ἐπλήρωσεν ὅλον τὸν οἶκον	1	it filled the whole house	Luke speaks figuratively of this sound as if it filled the house. Alternate translation: “it could be heard throughout the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
157	ACT	2	2	t4y4		ὅλον τὸν οἶκον	1	the whole house	Luke may be using the word translated house in one of its specific senses to mean a building. So this could have been either a private home or a larger building. Alternate translation: “the entire building”
158	ACT	2	2	a080	figs-idiom	οὗ ἦσαν καθήμενοι	1	where they were sitting	Luke may be using the term sitting idiomatically to mean “meeting.” Alternate translation: “in which they were meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
159	ACT	2	3	re3t		γλῶσσαι ὡσεὶ πυρός	1	tongues as if of fire	This phrase means “something like tongues of fire,” and a “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire.” (The expression is used with that meaning in Isaiah 5:24, for example.) This is not a simile. Luke is describing what these objects looked like. Alternate translation: “objects that looked like flames of fire”
160	ACT	2	3	xtk4		διαμεριζόμεναι	1	distributing themselves	This means that the objects that looked like flames of fire spread out so that there was one on each person. Alternate translation: “spreading around”
161	ACT	2	3	a081	writing-pronouns	ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν	1	they sat upon each one of them	The pronoun they refers to the objects, and the pronoun them refers to the disciples. Alternate translation: “one of the objects sat upon each one of the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
162	ACT	2	3	a082	figs-metaphor	ἐκάθισεν ἐφ’ ἕνα ἕκαστον αὐτῶν	1	they sat upon each one of them	Luke is using the word sat figuratively to indicate that the objects remained in one place once they had spread around. Alternate translation: “one of the objects remained on each one of the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
163	ACT	2	4	v7hi	figs-activepassive	ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	they were all filled with the Holy Spirit	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
164	ACT	2	4	a251	figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν πάντες Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	they were all filled with the Holy Spirit	Luke is speaking figuratively as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “they were all inspired by the Holy Spirit” or “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
165	ACT	2	4	a083		ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις	1	they began to speak in other tongues	Luke is using the word tongues in one of its specific senses to mean “languages.” Alternate translation: “they began to speak in other languages”
166	ACT	2	4	nr9f	figs-explicit	ἤρξαντο λαλεῖν ἑτέραις γλώσσαις	1	they began to speak in other tongues	The implication, as 2:6–11 makes clear, is that the disciples were speaking languages that they did not know. Alternate translation: “they began to speak in languages that they did not know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
167	ACT	2	4	a084		καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγεσθαι αὐτοῖς	1	as the Spirit was giving them to speak out	Here, giving has the sense of enabling. Alternate translation: “as the Spirit was enabling them to speak out”
168	ACT	2	4	a085		καθὼς τὸ Πνεῦμα ἐδίδου ἀποφθέγγεσθαι αὐτοῖς	1	as the Spirit was giving them to speak out	The word translated to speak out means to speak clearly and articulately. To express this meaning, it may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “The Spirit was enabling them to speak these languages clearly and articulately”
169	ACT	2	5	dz1l	grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	Now	Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
170	ACT	2	5	yft2	figs-gendernotations	ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς	1	godly men	Luke is using the term men in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “godly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
171	ACT	2	5	stq9	figs-hyperbole	παντὸς ἔθνους	1	every nation	The word every is a generalization that emphasizes that the people came from many different nations. Alternate translation: “many different nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
172	ACT	2	5	a086	figs-idiom	ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανόν	1	under heaven	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
173	ACT	2	6	bpj7	figs-activepassive	συνεχύθη	1	was confused	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say what did the action. Alternate translation: “what they heard confused them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
174	ACT	2	6	u9hc	writing-pronouns	ἤκουον εἷς ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ λαλούντων αὐτῶν	1	each one was hearing them speaking in his own language	The pronoun them refers to the believers and the pronoun his refers to each person in the multitude. Alternate translation: “each person in the multitude could hear one of the disciples speaking in that person’s own language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
175	ACT	2	7	m8kd	figs-doublet	ἐξίσταντο…καὶ ἐθαύμαζον	1	they were … amazed and were marveling	The terms amazed and marveling mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were … greatly amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
176	ACT	2	7	a087	figs-activepassive	ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ ἐθαύμαζον	1	they were all amazed and were marveling	The expression were … amazed is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed all of them and they were marveling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
177	ACT	2	7	a088	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	Behold is an expression that speakers use to focus the attention of their listeners on what they are about to say. Though it literally means “look” or “see,” the term can be used figuratively to get people to pay attention. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
178	ACT	2	7	wnk2	figs-rquestion	οὐχ…ἅπαντες οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ λαλοῦντες Γαλιλαῖοι	1	are not all these who are speaking Galileans?	The speakers are not looking for information. They are using the question form to express their amazement. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “all of these people who are speaking are Galileans!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
179	ACT	2	7	a089	translate-names	Γαλιλαῖοι	1	Galileans	See how you translated the name Galileans in 1:11. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
180	ACT	2	8	hzm8	figs-rquestion	καὶ πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ ἡμῶν, ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν?	1	And how are we hearing, each in our own language in which we were born?	The speakers do not expect someone to be able to answer this question for them. Rather, they are using the question form to express their amazement. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate their words as an exclamation. Alternate translation: “So we should not each be hearing them speak in our own languages in which we were born!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
181	ACT	2	8	a090	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	The speakers are using the word translated And to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
182	ACT	2	8	a091	figs-explicit	πῶς ἡμεῖς ἀκούομεν ἕκαστος	1	how are we hearing, each	Your language may require you to specify the object of hearing. Alternate translation: “how are we each hearing them speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
183	ACT	2	8	a092	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς…ἡμῶν	1	we … our	The speakers are using the words we and our to refer to themselves and to their listeners, so use the inclusive forms of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
184	ACT	2	8	wb5t	figs-metaphor	ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν	1	in which we were born	The speakers say figuratively that they were born in these languages to mean that they learned them from birth. Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
185	ACT	2	8	a093	figs-activepassive	ἐν ᾗ ἐγεννήθημεν	1	in which we were born	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. However, since this is a metaphor, it would be preferable to use another expression to explain its meaning, rather than to say something like “in which our mothers gave birth to us.” Alternate translation: “that we learned from birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
186	ACT	2	9	f1ve	translate-names	Πάρθοι…Μῆδοι…Ἐλαμεῖται	1	Parthians … Medes … Elamites	These are names of three people groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
187	ACT	2	9	dm23	translate-names	τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν, Ἰουδαίαν;…Καππαδοκίαν, Πόντον…Ἀσίαν	1	Mesopotamia, Judea … Cappadocia, Pontus … Asia	These are names of five areas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
188	ACT	2	10	tmb4	translate-names	Φρυγίαν…Παμφυλίαν, Αἴγυπτον…Λιβύης	1	Phrygia … Pamphylia, Egypt … Libya	These are names of four areas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
189	ACT	2	10	a094	translate-names	Κυρήνην	1	Cyrene	Cyrene is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
190	ACT	2	10	a095	translate-names	οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες Ῥωμαῖοι	1	Romans visiting	Here, Romans is a name for people who are from the city of Rome. Alternate translation: “visitors from Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
191	ACT	2	11	w8jy		Ἰουδαῖοί τε καὶ προσήλυτοι	1	both Jews and proselytes	The term proselytes describes converts to the Jewish religion. The phrase both Jews and proselytes could apply specifically to the visitors from Rome mentioned at the end of the previous verse, or it could apply to the whole list of people in 2:9–11. Alternate translation: “both Jews and converts to the Jewish religion”
192	ACT	2	11	jnp7	translate-names	Κρῆτες…Ἄραβες	1	Cretans and Arabians	These are names of two people groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
193	ACT	2	11	a096		γλώσσαις	1	tongues	As in 2:4, here the word tongues has the specific sense of “languages.” Alternate translation: “languages”
194	ACT	2	11	a097	figs-nominaladj	τὰ μεγαλεῖα τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the great things of God	The speakers are using the adjective great as a noun. (The term is plural; ULT adds things to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the great things that God has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
195	ACT	2	12	el2f	figs-doublet	ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο	1	they were all amazed and were perplexed	The words amazed and perplexed mean similar things. Luke is using them together to emphasize that the people could not understand what was happening. Alternate translation: “they were very perplexed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
196	ACT	2	12	a098	figs-activepassive	ἐξίσταντο…πάντες καὶ διηποροῦντο…λέγοντες	1	they were all amazed and were perplexed, saying	These are not passive verbal forms. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “this amazed and perplexed all of them, and they said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
197	ACT	2	12	a099	figs-idiom	τί θέλει τοῦτο εἶναι	1	What does this want to be	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “What is the explanation for this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
198	ACT	2	13	a100	figs-activepassive	γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν	1	They are filled with sweet wine	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. However, it would be preferable to use an equivalent expression that conveys the meaning rather than to say something like “sweet wine has filled them.” Alternate translation: “They have drunk their fill of sweet wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
199	ACT	2	13	fg59	figs-explicit	γλεύκους μεμεστωμένοι εἰσίν	1	They are filled with sweet wine	The implications of this statement are that the disciples have gotten drunk and are babbling and that this is the explanation for the languages the people think they are hearing. Alternate translation: “They have gotten drunk on sweet wine, and so what we are hearing is just drunken babbling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
200	ACT	2	13	jj1n	translate-unknown	γλεύκους	1	with sweet wine	This refers to wine that is thicker and more intoxicating than ordinary wine. If your readers would not be familiar with this drink, you could use the name of another strong drink that they would recognize, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “with strong liquor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
201	ACT	2	14	k5hr	translate-symaction	σταθεὶς δὲ ὁ Πέτρος σὺν τοῖς ἕνδεκα, ἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ	1	But Peter, having stood with the Eleven, raised up his voice	Peter stood to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles stood with him to show their support for him as he spoke. You could indicate that in your translation, perhaps as a separate sentence, if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “But Peter stood up to show that he had something important to say, and the other apostles stood with him to show their support for him as he spoke. Peter raised up his voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
202	ACT	2	14	c919	figs-nominaladj	τοῖς ἕνδεκα	1	the eleven	Luke is using the adjective eleven as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the other 11 apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
203	ACT	2	14	d9tb	figs-idiom	ἐπῆρεν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀπεφθέγξατο αὐτοῖς	1	raised up his voice and spoke out to them	The idiom raised up his voice means that Peter spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “spoke out to them in a loud voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
204	ACT	2	14	a102	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Men, Jews	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
205	ACT	2	14	a103	figs-gendernotations	ἄνδρες, Ἰουδαῖοι	1	Men, Jews	Peter is using the term men in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the idiomatic form of address in your translation, follow the convention in your language that indicates a mixed group of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
206	ACT	2	14	a104	figs-explicit	οἱ κατοικοῦντες Ἰερουσαλὴμ πάντες	1	all who are inhabiting Jerusalem	This seems to mean implicitly people who are not Jews but who live in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all of you non-Jews who are residents of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
207	ACT	2	14	ei5j		τοῦτο ὑμῖν γνωστὸν ἔστω	1	let this be known to you	This expression means that Peter wants to explain the meaning of what the people are seeing and hearing. Alternate translation: “let me explain this to you” or “I am going to explain this to you”
208	ACT	2	14	a105	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	and	Peter uses the word translated and to indicate what his listeners should do as a result of what he has just told them. Alternate translation: “so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
209	ACT	2	14	qp16	figs-metonymy	ἐνωτίσασθε τὰ ῥήματά μου	1	take my words into your ears	Peter is using the term words figuratively to mean what he is about to say by using words, and he is using the term ears figuratively to mean the capacity for listening. Alternate translation: “listen carefully to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
210	ACT	2	15	a106	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	Peter says for in this first instance to introduce the reason why the crowd should listen to him. Alternate translation: “You should listen to me because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
211	ACT	2	15	a107	figs-nominaladj	οὗτοι	1	these	Peter is using the demonstrative adjective these as a noun to refer to specific people, the disciples who are speaking different languages. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add more information to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “these people who are speaking different languages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
212	ACT	2	15	a108	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	For	Peter says for in this second instance to introduce the reason why the people speaking different languages are not drunk. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They are not drunk, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
213	ACT	2	15	a109		ἔστιν…ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας	1	it is the third hour of the day	In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “it is nine o’clock in the morning”
214	ACT	2	15	h28q	figs-explicit	ἔστιν…ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας	1	it is the third hour of the day	Peter assumes that his listeners will know that people do not get drunk that early in the day. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is only nine o’clock in the morning, and people do not get drunk that early” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
215	ACT	2	15	a110	translate-ordinal	ὥρα τρίτη τῆς ἡμέρας	1	the third hour of the day	If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour three of the day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
216	ACT	2	16	f9hz	figs-activepassive	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ	1	this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “this is what God said through the prophet Joel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
217	ACT	2	16	ktw9	figs-explicit	τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ εἰρημένον διὰ τοῦ προφήτου Ἰωήλ	1	this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel	The implication is that God is now making happen what he said through Joel. Alternate translation: “you are seeing God make happen what he announced earlier through the prophet Joel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
218	ACT	2	17	a111	figs-quotesinquotes	καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα	1	‘“And it will be in the last days,” God says, “I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh”	The material in 2:17–21 contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting Joel, and Joel is quoting God. You could avoid having a third-level quotation by moving the phrase God says to before the quotation from Joel. (The phrase itself does not occur in the passage from Joel that Peter quotes. It appears to be something that Peter supplies within the quotation to show that God is the speaker. Since that is the case, putting it before the quotation would not change the actual biblical text.) Alternate translation: “God said, ‘And it will be in the last days, I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
219	ACT	2	17	a112	figs-quotations	καὶ ἔσται ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις, λέγει ὁ Θεός, ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα	1	‘“And it will be in the last days,” God says, “I will pour out from my Spirit on all flesh”	You could also avoid having a second-level quotation by turning the direct quotation into an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that in the last days he would pour out his Spirit on all flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
220	ACT	2	17	ijl8		καὶ ἔσται	1	And it will be	Alternate translation: “This is what will happen” or “This is what I will do”
221	ACT	2	17	a113		ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις	1	the last days	See the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to this chapter, which recommend not interpreting or explaining it, but representing it simply as ULT does.
222	ACT	2	17	u2d1	figs-metaphor	ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου	1	I will pour out from my Spirit	God says figuratively that he will pour out his Spirit, as if the Spirit were a liquid, to mean that he will give the Spirit generously and abundantly. Alternate translation: “I will lavish my Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
223	ACT	2	17	a114	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ πᾶσαν σάρκα	1	on all flesh	God refers figuratively to flesh to mean people, by association with the way that people are made of flesh. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
224	ACT	2	17	a115	figs-quotations	καὶ προφητεύσουσιν οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν, καὶ αἱ θυγατέρες ὑμῶν; καὶ οἱ νεανίσκοι ὑμῶν ὁράσεις ὄψονται, καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι ὑμῶν ἐνυπνίοις ἐνυπνιασθήσονται	1	and your sons and your daughters will prophesy, and your young men will see visions, and your old men will dream dreams	If you have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation, also do that here in the rest of the verse. It may be helpful to make this a new sentence. Alternate translation: “God said that our sons and our daughters would prophesy and our young men would see visions and our old men would dream dreams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
225	ACT	2	17	a116	figs-exclusive	ὑμῶν	-1	your	If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and translate these instances of your as “our,” use the inclusive form of the word “our” in each instance if your language marks that distinction, since Joel would be referring to himself and his listeners. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
226	ACT	2	17	a117	figs-gendernotations	οἱ νεανίσκοι…οἱ πρεσβύτεροι	1	young men … old men	God speaks separately of sons and daughters in this verse and of “male servants” and “female servants” in the next verse. But here the contrast is between young and old. So the word men could have a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “young people … old people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
227	ACT	2	18	uwd7	figs-quotations	καί γε ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου, ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου, καὶ προφητεύσουσιν	1	And even on my male servants and on my female servants in those days I will pour out from my Spirit, and they will prophesy	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that even on his male servants and on his female servants in those days he would pour out from his Spirit, and they would prophesy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
228	ACT	2	18	nd34		ἐπὶ τοὺς δούλους μου, καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δούλας μου	1	on my male servants and on my female servants	If your language has masculine and feminine forms of the word “servant,” it would be accurate to use those forms here. Other languages can indicate this distinction in other ways, as ULT does with the adjectives “male” and “female.”
229	ACT	2	18	a118	figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις	1	in those days	Here, days idiomatically means a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
230	ACT	2	18	wz2i	figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ…ἐπὶ…ἐκχεῶ ἀπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματός μου	1	on … on … I will pour out from my Spirit	See how you translated this in 2:17. Alternate translation: “to … to … I will give my Spirit abundantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
231	ACT	2	19	a119	figs-quotations	καὶ δώσω	1	And I will give	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that he would give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
232	ACT	2	19	a120		δώσω τέρατα…καὶ σημεῖα	1	I will give wonders … and signs	Alternate translation: “I will show wonders … and signs”
233	ACT	2	19	a121		ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ἄνω	1	in the heaven above	Since God specifies in the next verse that these wonders will affect the sun and the moon, the word translated heaven likely has the specific sense of “sky.” Alternate translation: “in the sky above”
234	ACT	2	19	p5zi	figs-possession	ἀτμίδα καπνοῦ	1	vapor of smoke	Here the possessive form describes vapor that looks smoky or that has smoke in it. Alternate translation: “smoky vapor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
235	ACT	2	20	ylv7	figs-quotations	ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα, πρὶν ἢ ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ	1	The sun will be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord comes	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that sun would be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
236	ACT	2	20	a6yh	figs-activepassive	ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος	1	The sun will be turned to darkness	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will turn the sun to darkness” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “God said that he would turn the sun to darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
237	ACT	2	20	a122	figs-metaphor	ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος	1	The sun will be turned to darkness	God is speaking figuratively as if he would change the sun into something else. Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” or “The sun will no longer shine brightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
238	ACT	2	20	a123	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος	1	The sun will be turned to darkness	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun darkness with an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
239	ACT	2	20	a124	figs-ellipsis	καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα	1	and the moon to blood	Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and the moon will be turned to blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
240	ACT	2	20	a125	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα	1	and the moon to blood	If you decide to supply words as the previous note suggests, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form. Alternate translation: “and I will turn the moon to blood” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “and that he would turn the moon to blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
241	ACT	2	20	f34k	figs-metaphor	καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα	1	and the moon to blood	God is speaking figuratively as if he would change the moon into something else. Alternate translation: “and the moon will look like blood” or “and the moon will appear to be red” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
242	ACT	2	20	swb2	figs-doublet	ἡμέραν…τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ	1	the great and remarkable day	The words great and remarkable mean similar things. They are being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the very great day” or “the truly remarkable day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
243	ACT	2	20	lc4g	figs-idiom	ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου	1	the day of the Lord comes	This is an expression that many of the prophets use. It refers to the time when God will judge and punish people for their sins. Alternate translation: “the time when the Lord judges and punishes people for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
244	ACT	2	20	a126	figs-123person	ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου	1	the day of the Lord comes	In this expression, God is speaking of himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “time arrives when I judge and punish people for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
245	ACT	2	21	a127	figs-quotations	καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται	1	And it will be, everyone who may call on the name of the Lord will be saved	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “And God said it would happen that everyone who called on the name of the Lord would be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
246	ACT	2	21	a128		καὶ ἔσται, πᾶς	1	And it will be, everyone	Alternate translation: “And this is what will happen: Everyone”
247	ACT	2	21	vql5	figs-activepassive	πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου σωθήσεται	1	everyone who may call on the name of the Lord will be saved	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the Lord will save everyone who calls on his name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
248	ACT	2	21	a129	figs-idiom	πᾶς ὃς ἂν ἐπικαλέσηται	1	everyone who may call on	Here, call on is an idiom. Alternate translation: “everyone who may appeal to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
249	ACT	2	21	a130	figs-123person	τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου	1	the name of the Lord	God is speaking of himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “my name” or “me by name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
250	ACT	2	21	a131	figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου	1	the name of the Lord	Here, name figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
251	ACT	2	21	a132	figs-explicit	τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου	1	the name of the Lord	The implication is that people would appeal to God to show them mercy and save them. Alternate translation: “the Lord for mercy and salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
252	ACT	2	21	a133	figs-quotemarks	σωθήσεται	1	will be saved	This is the end of Joel’s quotation of the Lord. If you chose to mark the Lord’s words as a third-level quotation, indicate that ending here with a closing third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. It is also the end of Peter’s quotation of Joel. If you chose to mark Joel’s words as a second-level quotation, similarly indicate the ending of that quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
253	ACT	2	22	sa78	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται	1	Men, Israelites	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
254	ACT	2	22	g6vj	figs-metonymy	ἀκούσατε τοὺς λόγους τούτους	1	hear these words	Peter is using the term words figuratively to mean what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “listen to what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
255	ACT	2	22	a134	translate-names	Ἰησοῦν τὸν Ναζωραῖον	1	Jesus the Nazarene	The word Nazarene describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. Alternate translation: “Jesus of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
256	ACT	2	22	f2t1	figs-activepassive	ἀποδεδειγμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	attested to you by God	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom God proved he had sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
257	ACT	2	22	a135	figs-doublet	δυνάμεσι, καὶ τέρασι, καὶ σημείοις	1	with mighty deeds and wonders and signs	The terms mighty deeds, wonders, and signs mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “by means of many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
258	ACT	2	23	a136	figs-nominaladj	τοῦτον	1	This one	Peter is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “This Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
259	ACT	2	23	i6un	figs-activepassive	τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἔκδοτον	1	given up by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God	The term translated given up is an adjective, not a passive verbal form, but even so you may wish to translate it with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “whom God gave up by his determined counsel and foreknowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
260	ACT	2	23	s38b	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns counsel and foreknowledge with verbs. Alternate translation: “as God had planned in a determined way for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
261	ACT	2	23	a137	figs-activepassive	τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God	The word determined is a passive verbal form that you could express with an active form. Alternate translation: “in a way that God had determined as he planned for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
262	ACT	2	23	f5kn	figs-synecdoche	ἀνείλατε	1	you killed	It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “you demanded to be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
263	ACT	2	23	e38a	figs-metonymy	διὰ χειρὸς ἀνόμων	1	of the lawless	Here, hand refers figuratively to actions. Alternate translation: “through the actions of the lawless” or “by what the lawless did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
264	ACT	2	23	a138	figs-nominaladj	ἀνόμων	1	the lawless	Peter is using the adjective lawless as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can supply the word “people” to show this. Alternate translation: “lawless people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
265	ACT	2	23	f6kd	figs-metonymy	ἀνόμων	1	of the lawless	By lawless, Peter does not mean people who disregard the law and break the law. He is figuratively describing Gentiles (that is, people who are not Jews) by association with the fact that they do not have the Jewish law. Alternate translation: “of the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
266	ACT	2	23	a197		προσπήξαντες	1	having fastened	This is a reference to the crucifixion of Jesus. Alternate translation: “having nailed him to a cross” or “by crucifying him”
267	ACT	2	24	a140		ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν	1	whom God raised up	It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “But God raised him up”
268	ACT	2	24	ei37	figs-idiom	ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἀνέστησεν	1	whom God raised up	The idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God brought back to life” or, as a new sentence, “But God brought him back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
269	ACT	2	24	s8j3	figs-metaphor	λύσας τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου	1	having loosed the agonies of death	Peter speaks figuratively of the agonies of death as if they were ropes with which Jesus had been tied, and of God bringing Jesus back to life as if God had untied those ropes and set him free. Alternate translation: “delivering him from the agonies of death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
270	ACT	2	24	a141	figs-possession	τὰς ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου	1	the agonies of death	Peter uses the possessive form to describe death as something that is characterized by agonies. Alternate translation: “agonizing death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
271	ACT	2	24	a142	figs-explicit	καθότι οὐκ ἦν δυνατὸν κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	because it was not possible for him to be held by it	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly why this was not possible. Alternate translation: “because God is so much stronger than death that it was not possible for him to be held by it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
272	ACT	2	24	ykq4	figs-activepassive	κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	for him to be held by it	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “for death to hold him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
273	ACT	2	24	vuf4	figs-personification	κρατεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	for him to be held by it	Peter speaks of death figuratively as if it were a living thing that held Jesus captive. Alternate translation: “for him to remain dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
274	ACT	2	25	dd5a	figs-quotations	Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ	1	For David says about him, ‘I saw the Lord always before me, for he is at my right so that I should not be moved	In order to avoid having a second-level quotation, you could turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation. (Peter is quoting from Psalm 16:8–11.) Alternate translation: “For David said about him that he saw the Lord always before him, for he was at his right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
275	ACT	2	25	a143	writing-pronouns	Δαυεὶδ γὰρ λέγει εἰς αὐτόν, προορώμην τὸν Κύριον ἐνώπιόν μου διὰ παντός, ὅτι ἐκ δεξιῶν μού ἐστιν, ἵνα μὴ σαλευθῶ	1	For David says about him, ‘I saw the Lord always before me, for he is at my right so that I should not be moved	The pronoun him refers to the Messiah, about whom David is prophesying. This means that within the quotation, the pronouns I and my are spoken by the Messiah. If you turn the direct quotation into an indirect quotation and change these pronouns to “he,” “him,” and “his,” it may be helpful to indicate the references in some cases so that your readers will recognize this. Alternate translation: “For David said about the Messiah that he saw the Lord always before him, for the Lord was at the Messiah’s right so that he should not be moved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
276	ACT	2	25	a144	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	Peter uses the word For to introduce a reason why the crowd should believe him when he says that God brought Jesus back to life. The reason is that the Scriptures predicted this. As a result, the crowd should be confident that it did happen. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You can be confident that God did bring Jesus back to life, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
277	ACT	2	25	a145	figs-explicit	Δαυεὶδ…λέγει εἰς αὐτόν	1	David says about him	Peter assumes that the crowd will know that he is referring to what David says in one of the psalms that he wrote, and that David is prophesying what the Messiah would say. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “David says in one of his psalms that the Messiah will say” or “David wrote in one of his psalms that the Messiah would say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
278	ACT	2	25	n2ls	figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιόν μου	1	before me	The phrase before me, which means “in front of me,” is a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “present with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
279	ACT	2	25	a146	figs-nominaladj	ἐκ δεξιῶν μού	1	at my right	Here the adjective right is being used as a noun to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could say that specifically. Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
280	ACT	2	25	l6xp	figs-metaphor	ἐκ δεξιῶν μού	1	at my right	In this context, to be at someone’s right side figuratively means to be in a position to help and sustain that person. Alternate translation: “there to help me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
281	ACT	2	25	a147	figs-metaphor	μὴ σαλευθῶ	1	I should not be moved	Here, moved means to be taken out of a safe and secure position, and so figuratively it means to be harmed. Alternate translation: “I will not be harmed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
282	ACT	2	25	s4yp	figs-activepassive	μὴ σαλευθῶ	1	I should not be moved	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “no one will harm me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
283	ACT	2	26	a148	figs-quotations	διὰ τοῦτο ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου, καὶ ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου; ἔτι δὲ καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	Because of this, my heart was glad and my tongue exulted. And indeed, my flesh will also dwell in hope	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “Because of this, his heart was glad and his tongue exulted, and indeed his flesh would also dwell in hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
284	ACT	2	26	z8vw	figs-metaphor	ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου	1	my heart was glad	Here, the heart figuratively represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “I felt glad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
285	ACT	2	26	a149	figs-metonymy	ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου	1	my tongue exulted	Here, the tongue figuratively represents the capacity for speech. Alternate translation: “I said joyful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
286	ACT	2	26	zz6k	figs-metonymy	καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	my flesh will also dwell in hope	Here, flesh figuratively means the human body by association with the way that is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “my body will also dwell in hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
287	ACT	2	26	a150	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	my flesh will also dwell in hope	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun hope with an adverb such as “hopefully.” Alternate translation: “my body will also live hopefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
288	ACT	2	26	a151	figs-personification	καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	my flesh will also dwell in hope	The Messiah is speaking figuratively as if his body itself would live hopefully. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope for my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
289	ACT	2	26	a152	figs-explicit	καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι	1	my flesh will also dwell in hope	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly what hope the Messiah had for his body. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope that God will bring my body back to life after I die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
290	ACT	2	27	m3ij	figs-quotations	ὅτι οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	For you will not abandon my soul to Hades, nor will you allow your Holy One to see decay	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be necessary to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah knew that God would not abandon his soul to Hades and that God would not allow his Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
291	ACT	2	27	a153	figs-parallelism	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	you will not abandon my soul to Hades, nor will you allow your Holy One to see decay	These two statements mean similar things. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it may be helpful to show that to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than nor in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon my soul to Hades, no, you will not allow your Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
292	ACT	2	27	whi3	figs-youformal	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις…οὐδὲ δώσεις…σου	1	you will not abandon … nor will you allow your	The words you and your are singular, and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in your translation in 1:24 in a similar case where God is addressed as “you.” You may have decided in such cases to use a formal form of “you” that your language may have, or you may have decided to use an informal form of “you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
293	ACT	2	27	a154	figs-synecdoche	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην	1	you will not abandon my soul to Hades	The Messiah says my soul figuratively to mean himself, using one part of his being to represent his whole being. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
294	ACT	2	27	a155	translate-names	οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην	1	you will not abandon my soul to Hades	Hades is the name for the realm of the dead. If your readers would not be familiar with that name, you could express its meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “you will not abandon me to the realm of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
295	ACT	2	27	a156	figs-explicit	τὸν Ὅσιόν σου	1	your Holy One	The expression Holy One is a title for the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your Messiah” or “your holy Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
296	ACT	2	27	rld3	figs-123person	τὸν Ὅσιόν σου	1	your Holy One	The Messiah is referring to himself in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “me, your Holy One” or “me, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
297	ACT	2	27	a157	figs-idiom	ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	to see decay	Here the word see is being used idiomatically to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “to experience decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
298	ACT	2	27	l5cd	figs-explicit	ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	to see decay	The term decay refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to experience the decomposition of his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
299	ACT	2	28	a158	figs-quotations	ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς; πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου	1	You made known to me the paths of life; you will fill me with gladness with your face	You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation of David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be helpful to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah said that God had made known to him the paths of life and that God would fill him with gladness with his face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
300	ACT	2	28	a159	figs-youformal	ἐγνώρισάς…πληρώσεις…σου	1	You made known … you will fill … your	The words you and your are singular and they refer to God. See what you decided to do in the similar case in 1:24. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
301	ACT	2	28	xhi3	figs-metaphor	ἐγνώρισάς μοι ὁδοὺς ζωῆς	1	You made known to me the paths of life	The Messiah speaks figuratively of life as if it consisted of paths that a person walked along. Those represent the various pursuits and adventures that people have in life. The word known refers to experiential knowledge. Alternate translation: “You enabled me to experience the adventures of life once again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
302	ACT	2	28	ej5m	figs-metaphor	πληρώσεις με εὐφροσύνης	1	you will fill me with gladness	The Messiah speaks figuratively as if he were a container that God could fill with gladness. Alternate translation: “you will give me great gladness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
303	ACT	2	28	y7gf	figs-metaphor	μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου	1	with your face	Here, the word face figuratively represents the presence of a person. Alternate translation: “by your presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
304	ACT	2	28	a161	figs-quotemarks	μετὰ τοῦ προσώπου σου	1	with your face	This is the end of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark David’s words as a second-level quotation, in your translation you can indicate this ending with a closing second-level quotation mark or whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
305	ACT	2	29	pv1x	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	Men, brothers	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
306	ACT	2	29	ps7c	figs-metaphor	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	Men, brothers	See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” or “My brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
307	ACT	2	29	wh97	figs-metaphor	τοῦ πατριάρχου Δαυεὶδ	1	the patriarch David	A patriarch is literally the ancestor of a group of people. David was not the ancestor of all the Jews to whom Peter is speaking. So he is likely using the term figuratively to identify David as the king who established the Israelite kingdom as a lasting dynasty. Alternate translation: “David, the founder of our kingdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
308	ACT	2	29	vtc6	figs-activepassive	ἐτάφη	1	he was buried	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “people buried him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
309	ACT	2	29	a162	figs-idiom	ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης	1	to this day	Peter is using the word day idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “at this time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
310	ACT	2	30	a163	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Therefore	Peter uses the word Therefore to introduce the logical result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “We can therefore conclude that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
311	ACT	2	30	a164	figs-explicit	προφήτης…ὑπάρχων, καὶ εἰδὼς	1	being a prophet and having known	Peter is still speaking about David. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “because David was a prophet and he knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
312	ACT	2	30	x11q	figs-metonymy	ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ	1	to set from the fruit of his loins upon his throne	Peter is using the word loins figuratively to represent David himself by association with the way the reproductive organs are in the loins. He is using the word fruit in a broad sense to mean what someone or something produces, in this case a descendant. Alternate translation: “to set one of his descendants upon his throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
313	ACT	2	30	hq71	figs-synecdoche	ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ	1	to set from the fruit of his loins upon his throne	When Peter says that God promised to set one of David’s descendants upon his throne, he is using that one action figuratively to represent God’s promise to David that this descendant would succeed him as king. Alternate translation: “to make one of his descendants succeed him as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
314	ACT	2	31	a165	writing-pronouns	ἐλάλησεν… ἐνκατελείφθη…αὐτοῦ	1	he spoke … was he abandoned … his	The first instance of he refers to David, and the second instance of he and the pronoun his refer to Christ. Alternate translation: “David spoke … was Christ abandoned … Christ’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
315	ACT	2	31	a166	figs-abstractnouns	ἐλάλησεν περὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	he spoke about the resurrection of the Christ	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun resurrection with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “he described how God would make Christ alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
316	ACT	2	31	tn4b	figs-activepassive	οὔτε ἐνκατελείφθη εἰς ᾍδην	1	neither was he abandoned to Hades	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “neither did God abandon him to Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
317	ACT	2	31	a167	figs-explicit	τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	the Christ	Christ is the Greek word for “Messiah.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use the term “Messiah” in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
318	ACT	2	31	a168	translate-names	ᾍδην	1	Hades	See how you translated the term Hades in 2:27. Alternate translation: “the realm of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
319	ACT	2	31	a169	figs-idiom	οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	nor did his flesh see decay	Here the word see is being used idiomatically to mean “experience.” Alternate translation: “nor did his flesh experience decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
320	ACT	2	31	a170	figs-metonymy	οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	nor did his flesh see decay	Peter is using the word flesh figuratively to mean the body of Jesus by association with the way the body is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
321	ACT	2	31	up5x	figs-explicit	οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	nor did his flesh see decay	The term decay refers in this context to the decomposition of the body after death. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “nor did his body experience decomposition” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
322	ACT	2	32	udn1	figs-idiom	ἀνέστησεν ὁ Θεός	1	God has raised up	As in 2:24, the idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “God has brought back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
323	ACT	2	32	kw6a	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	we	By we, Peter means himself and the other apostles, so use the exclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
324	ACT	2	33	a171	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Therefore	Peter is using the word Therefore to introduce a result. But it is not the immediate result of what he has just said. He is not saying that Jesus has done what the people see and hear because God raised him from the dead. Instead, this is an overall conclusion. Peter is saying that Jesus sending the Holy Spirit is the reason why the disciples are able to speak in other languages. The crowd should not conclude that they are babbling drunkenly, as some of them have suggested. UST models a way of expressing this sense of the word Therefore. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
325	ACT	2	33	kij2	figs-activepassive	τῇ δεξιᾷ οὖν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑψωθεὶς	1	having been exalted to the right of God	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “now that God has exalted Jesus to his right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
326	ACT	2	33	c9mr	figs-nominaladj	τῇ δεξιᾷ…τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	to the right of God	Peter is using the adjective right as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:25. Alternate translation: “to the right side of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
327	ACT	2	33	a172	figs-explicit	τῇ δεξιᾷ…τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	to the right of God	In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to a place of honor next to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
328	ACT	2	33	a173	figs-possession	τήν τε ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ Πνεύματος τοῦ Ἁγίου	1	the promise of the Holy Spirit from the Father	Peter is using the possessive form to describe the Holy Spirit as someone whom God the Father promised to send. Alternate translation: “the promised Holy Spirit from the Father” or “the Holy Spirit whom the Father promised to send” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
329	ACT	2	33	a174	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Πατρὸς	1	the Father	Father is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
330	ACT	2	33	c1dr	writing-pronouns	ἐξέχεεν	1	he has poured out	The pronoun he refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus has poured out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
331	ACT	2	33	wsg9	figs-metaphor	ἐξέχεεν	1	he has poured out	Peter says figuratively that Jesus has poured out the things that the people are seeing and hearing as if those things were a liquid. Peter means that Jesus has given these things generously and abundantly. See how you translated the similar statement in 2:17, to which Peter is likely alluding here. Alternate translation: “he has generously given” or “he has abundantly given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
332	ACT	2	34	m7fy	figs-quotesinquotes	λέγει…αὐτός, εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου, κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	he himself says, ‘The Lord said to my Lord, “Sit at my right	The material in 2:34–35 contains a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. Luke is quoting Peter, Peter is quoting another psalm by David (Psalm 110:1), and David is quoting God. You could avoid having second-level and third-level quotations by translating this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “he himself says that the Lord told his Lord to sit at his right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
333	ACT	2	34	i8wu	figs-explicit	εἶπεν Κύριος τῷ Κυρίῳ μου	1	The Lord said to my Lord	The Lord means God here, and my Lord means the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God said to the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
334	ACT	2	34	a175	figs-nominaladj	ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	at my right	Here the adjective right is used as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:25. Alternate translation: “at my right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
335	ACT	2	34	kvn8	figs-explicit	ἐκ δεξιῶν μου	1	at my right	In this culture, the place at the right side of a ruler was a position of honor. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in a place of honor next to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
336	ACT	2	35	nf1x	figs-metaphor	ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	until I make your enemies a stool for your feet	The psalm says figuratively that God would make the Messiah’s enemies a stool for his feet to mean that God would conquer those enemies and make them submit to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “until I conquer your enemies for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
337	ACT	2	35	a176	figs-quotemarks	τῶν ποδῶν σου	1	for your feet	This is the end of David’s quotation of the Lord and of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark these in your translation as a third-level and a second-level quotation, indicate that ending here with the appropriate closing quotation marks or the comparable punctuation or convention in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
338	ACT	2	36	a177	grammar-connect-logic-result	οὖν	1	Therefore	Peter is using the word Therefore to introduce the result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “Since David was not talking about himself, but about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
339	ACT	2	36	pnp5	figs-metaphor	πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ	1	all the house of Israel	Here, house means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the house of Israel figuratively means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the entire nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
340	ACT	2	37	s85q	figs-activepassive	ἀκούσαντες…κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	hearing this, they were pierced in the heart	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what they heard Peter say pierced their heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
341	ACT	2	37	xan1	writing-pronouns	κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	they were pierced in the heart	Here the word they refers to the people in the crowd to whom Peter spoke. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in the heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
342	ACT	2	37	w1ma		κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	they were pierced in the heart	Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of heart. Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd were pierced in their hearts”
343	ACT	2	37	l15x	figs-metaphor	κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν	1	they were pierced in the heart	Luke is speaking figuratively. The people were not literally pierced in the heart by anything. He means that the people felt guilty and became very sad. Alternate translation: “they felt guilty and became very sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
344	ACT	2	37	zls6	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	Men, brothers	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “Our brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
345	ACT	2	37	a178	figs-metaphor	ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί	1	Men, brothers	See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “Our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
346	ACT	2	37	a179	figs-exclusive	τί ποιήσωμεν	1	what should we do	The people in the crowd are asking about themselves but not the apostles, so use the exclusive form of we in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
347	ACT	2	38	a180	figs-you	μετανοήσατε…βαπτισθήτω ἕκαστος ὑμῶν…τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν…λήμψεσθε	1	Repent … each of you be baptized … of your sins … you will receive	The words you and your are plural, you will receive is a plural verb form, and the implied “you” in the imperative Repent is also plural. But the implied “you” in the imperative be baptized is singular, since the subject is each. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
348	ACT	2	38	cmb7	figs-activepassive	βαπτισθήτω	1	be baptized	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “allow us to baptize you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
349	ACT	2	38	geb2	figs-idiom	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	in the name of Jesus Christ	Peter has just finished demonstrating that God sent Jesus as the Christ or Messiah 2:36. He is saying here that people should acknowledge that as the basis of their baptism for the forgiveness of their sins. So in the name here is an idiomatic way of saying “on the basis of naming.” Alternate translation: “on the basis of naming Jesus as the Christ” or “upon acknowledging that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
350	ACT	2	38	a181	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ἄφεσιν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν	1	for the forgiveness of your sins	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun forgiveness with a verb such as “forgive.” Alternate translation: “to show that you want God to forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
351	ACT	2	39	a182	figs-metonymy	ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία	1	the promise is	Peter is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit by association with the way God promised to send the Holy Spirit, as Peter says specifically in 2:33. Alternate translation: “God has promised the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
352	ACT	2	39	a183	figs-explicit	ὑμῖν…καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν	1	to you and to your children	Peter showed the people in 2:17 that God’s promise through Joel to pour out his Spirit included their “sons” and “daughters.” So the implication could be that the people in the crowd should not think that any of them have to reach a certain age before professing faith in Jesus and being baptized. Alternate translation: “to all of you, no matter what your age,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
353	ACT	2	39	a184	figs-metaphor	ὑμῖν…καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν	1	to you and to your children	Peter could also be using the word children in a figurative sense to mean “descendants.” In that case, he would be saying that faith in Jesus as the Messiah was not something just for the people living at this time, but also for people living at all times in the future. That would parallel what he says next about faith in Jesus not being just for those who are present in this place, but for people living in all places. Alternate translation: “to you and your descendants” or “to you and everyone who will live after you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
354	ACT	2	39	v8vi	figs-explicit	πᾶσι τοῖς εἰς μακρὰν	1	to all who are at a distance	Since Peter is speaking to Jews as a fellow Jew, this is likely an implicit reference to the Jews who were living in other parts of the Roman Empire. However, this statement took on greater meaning when the church realized that “God has also given repentance unto life to the Gentiles,” as its leaders say in 11:18. So you could either express the likely initial meaning here in your translation, or you could leave the statement more general. Alternate translation: “to the Jews living in faraway parts of the empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
355	ACT	2	39	a185	figs-exclusive	Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν	1	the Lord our God	By the Lord our God, Peter means the God of the Jews. He is speaking of himself and his fellow apostles and of the people in the crowd, so use the inclusive form of the word our in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
356	ACT	2	39	a186	figs-idiom	ἂν προσκαλέσηται	1	may call	Peter is using the word call in an idiomatic sense here. Alternate translation: “may bring to salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
357	ACT	2	40	a187	figs-metonymy	ἑτέροις…λόγοις πλείοσιν	1	with many other words	Luke is using the term words figuratively to mean things that Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “by saying many other things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
358	ACT	2	40	v6ip	figs-hendiadys	διεμαρτύρατο, καὶ παρεκάλει αὐτοὺς	1	he testified and urged them	Here Luke is expressing a single idea by using two words connected with and. The word urged tells in what way Peter testified further about faith in Jesus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “he testified urgently to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
359	ACT	2	40	a188	figs-activepassive	σώθητε	1	Be saved	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “Let God save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
360	ACT	2	40	wtd5	figs-explicit	ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης	1	from this perverse generation	The implication is that God is going to punish this perverse generation. Alternate translation: “from the punishment that this perverse generation will suffer if it does not repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
361	ACT	2	40	a189	figs-explicit	τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς σκολιᾶς ταύτης	1	this perverse generation	The word perverse describes things or actions that do not conform to what is right and expected. Peter may be referring implicitly to how the people of this generation rejected and killed Jesus. Alternate translation: “this wicked generation that rejected and killed Jesus” or “the wicked people of this time who rejected and killed Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
362	ACT	2	41	k1kj	writing-endofstory	οὖν	1	Therefore	Luke uses the word Therefore to introduce information about what happened after the story of Pentecost as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
363	ACT	2	41	r9qz	figs-idiom	ἀποδεξάμενοι τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ	1	having received his word	Here, received means that the people in the crowd accepted that what Peter said was true. Alternate translation: “because they believed his word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
364	ACT	2	41	a190	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ	1	his word	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean what Peter said by using words. Alternate translation: “what Peter said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
365	ACT	2	41	kz64	figs-activepassive	οἱ…ἐβαπτίσθησαν	1	they were baptized	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. The apostles themselves may have baptized all these people, but because so many people repented and wanted to be baptized, it is possible that some of the other believers may have baptized some of them. Alternate translation: “the apostles baptized them” or “the believers baptized them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
366	ACT	2	41	sv5j	figs-synecdoche	ψυχαὶ	1	souls	Luke is using one part of these people, their souls, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
367	ACT	2	41	a47f	figs-activepassive	προσετέθησαν	1	were added	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “became part of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
368	ACT	2	42	a191	figs-abstractnouns	ἦσαν…προσκαρτεροῦντες τῇ διδαχῇ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῇ κοινωνίᾳ, τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου, καὶ ταῖς προσευχαῖς	1	they were continuing in the teaching of the apostles and in fellowship, in the breaking of bread and in prayers	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns teaching and fellowship with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “they continued to learn from what the apostles taught and to share life with one another, and to break bread together and to pray together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
369	ACT	2	42	gc59	figs-synecdoche	τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου	1	in the breaking of bread	Luke could be using the word breaking to mean “eating,” and he could be using the word bread to mean “food.” In each case he would be figuratively using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing meals together. Alternate translation: “in sharing meals” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
370	ACT	2	42	a192	figs-explicit	τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου	1	in the breaking of bread	By the breaking of bread, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it and also sharing a cup of wine. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in observing the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
371	ACT	2	43	a193	figs-personification	ἐγίνετο…πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος	1	fear was coming on every soul	Here the word fear describes a deep respect for God. Luke describes this fear figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Alternate translation: “every soul began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
372	ACT	2	43	gi9v	figs-synecdoche	ἐγίνετο…πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος	1	fear was coming on every soul	Luke is using one part of a person, the soul, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
373	ACT	2	43	a194	figs-hyperbole	ἐγίνετο…πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος	1	fear was coming on every soul	Luke says every as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “very many people began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
374	ACT	2	43	ys3y	figs-explicit	πολλά…τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα διὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐγίνετο	1	many wonders and signs were happening through the apostles	Since Luke says that these things happened through the apostles, the implication is that God was doing them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could make God the subject of this sentence and wonders and signs the object. Alternate translation: “God performed many wonders and signs through the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
375	ACT	2	43	q6dm	figs-doublet	πολλά…τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα	1	many wonders and signs	The terms wonders and signs mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:22. Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
376	ACT	2	44	u8qk		ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	to the same	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “in the same place” or “united in Christian fellowship”
377	ACT	2	44	jy2w	figs-hyperbole	εἶχον ἅπαντα κοινά	1	had all things in common	Luke may be saying all as a generalization to emphasize the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. The next verse explains more specifically how the believers showed this generosity, and you could give some indication of that here. Alternate translation: “shared their belongings with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
378	ACT	2	45	h8tn	figs-doublet	τὰ κτήματα καὶ τὰς ὑπάρξεις ἐπίπρασκον	1	they were selling their properties and their possessions	The words properties and possessions mean similar things. Luke may be using these words together for emphasis. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were selling many valuable things that they owned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
379	ACT	2	45	f74s	writing-pronouns	καὶ διεμέριζον αὐτὰ	1	they were distributing them	Here the pronoun they refers to believers who sold things they owned, and the pronoun them refers to the money they received from these sales. Alternate translation: “the believers who sold these things were distributing the money that they received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
380	ACT	2	45	n9hi		πᾶσιν, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν	1	to all, as anyone might have need	Alternate translation: “to everyone who needed help”
381	ACT	2	46	in43		καθ’ ἡμέραν τε προσκαρτεροῦντες ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	and, continuing unanimously	The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in 1:14. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Continuing to meet with one accord” or “Continuing to meet harmoniously”
382	ACT	2	46	a427	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	in the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so here the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
383	ACT	2	46	q1ge	figs-synecdoche	κλῶντές…κατ’ οἶκον ἄρτον	1	breaking bread in each house	See how you translated the similar expression in 2:42. There were two possible meanings there, but here breaking bread seems to mean specifically sharing meals. Alternate translation: “having meals together in their homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
384	ACT	2	46	i2yk	figs-metaphor	ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας	1	with exultation and sincerity of heart	Here, the heart figuratively represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “with feelings of exultation and sincerity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
385	ACT	2	46	a195	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας	1	with exultation and sincerity of heart	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns exultation and sincerity with adverbs that would indicate feelings. Alternate translation: “joyfully and sincerely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
386	ACT	2	47	z6ig	figs-hyperbole	αἰνοῦντες τὸν Θεὸν καὶ ἔχοντες χάριν πρὸς ὅλον τὸν λαόν	1	praising God and having favor with the whole people	Luke says the whole people as a generalization to emphasize how widely the people favored the believers. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They praised God and enjoyed wide favor with the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
387	ACT	2	47	kc42	figs-activepassive	τοὺς σῳζομένους	1	those who were being saved	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom he was saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
388	ACT	2	47	a196		ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό	1	to the same	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “to their Christian fellowship”
389	ACT	3	intro	hpd9			0		Acts 03 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter The covenant God made with Abraham This chapter explains that Jesus came to the Jews in fulfillment of the covenant that God made with Abraham. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “Servant” Twice in this chapter Peter uses the word “Servant” as a title to mean “Messiah” (3:13, 3:26). He and other believers use the word in the same sense twice in chapter 4 as well (4:27, 4:30). The word takes on this meaning by allusion to the book of Isaiah, where Isaiah uses it to mean the person whom God has chosen for the special purpose of bringing salvation. In your translation, indicate in some way that “Servant” is a Messianic title. Jesus was not a servant of God in the more ordinary sense, in which the believers apply it to themselves in 4:29, for example. Jesus was fully the Son of God, sent to earth on a special mission. If you would not be able to make this clear by using the word “Servant,” you may wish to use the word “Messiah” instead. “You killed” (3:15) For the same reasons as when he was speaking on the day of Pentecost (2:23), Peter tells people in this chapter that they were guilty of killing Jesus. But he also tells them that they are the first ones to whom God has sent Jesus’ followers to invite them to repent (3:26). For further information and suggestions for how to make clear in your translation what Peter means, see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to chapter 2 and the notes to this phrase in 2:23 and 3:15. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]]) Important textual issues in this chapter “the Lord our God” (3:22) In 3:22, some ancient manuscripts read “the Lord our God.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the Lord your God,” and still other ancient manuscripts read simply “the Lord God.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
390	ACT	3	1	b5rm	grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	Now	Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
391	ACT	3	1	br7i	figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	to the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “to the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
392	ACT	3	1	a198		τὴν ἐνάτην	1	the ninth hour	In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this time in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “three o’clock in the afternoon”
393	ACT	3	1	a199	translate-ordinal	τὴν ἐνάτην	1	the ninth hour	If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour nine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
394	ACT	3	2	f227	figs-activepassive	καί τις ἀνὴρ, χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ ὑπάρχων, ἐβαστάζετο, ὃν ἐτίθουν καθ’ ἡμέραν πρὸς τὴν θύραν τοῦ ἱεροῦ	1	And a certain man, being lame from the womb of his mother, was being carried, whom each day they placed at the gate of the temple	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form was being carried. Alternate translation: “And there was a certain man who had been lame since birth whom people would carry to the temple every day and place at the gate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
395	ACT	3	2	u6nu	writing-background	καί τις ἀνὴρ	1	And a certain man	In this verse, Luke provides background information about this man to help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
396	ACT	3	2	j68t	figs-metonymy	ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	from the womb of his mother	Luke is figuratively describing the time of the lame man’s birth by association with the way he came from the womb of his mother when he was born. Alternate translation: “since birth” or “since he was born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
397	ACT	3	2	a200	figs-activepassive	τὴν λεγομένην	1	that is called	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
398	ACT	3	2	a201	translate-names	Ὡραίαν	1	Beautiful	Beautiful is the name of one of the gates of the Jerusalem temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
399	ACT	3	2	a202	figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ ἱερόν	1	into the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
400	ACT	3	3	a203	figs-explicit	ἠρώτα ἐλεημοσύνην λαβεῖν	1	asked to receive alms	The man specifically asked Peter and John to give him alms (that is, a charitable gift). Alternate translation: “asked to receive alms from them” or “asked them to give him alms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
401	ACT	3	4	xq4u		ἀτενίσας…Πέτρος εἰς αὐτὸν σὺν τῷ Ἰωάννῃ εἶπεν	1	Peter, looking intently at him with John, said	This means that both Peter and John looked at the man. It does not mean that Peter looked at the man and at John, and it does not mean that both Peter and John spoke to the man. Alternate translation: “Peter and John looked intently at him, and Peter said”
402	ACT	3	4	e3c6	figs-exclusive	βλέψον εἰς ἡμᾶς	1	Look at us	Peter is asking the man to look at him and John, not to look at himself as well, so use the exclusive form of us in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
403	ACT	3	6	x6bm	figs-metonymy	ἀργύριον καὶ χρυσίον	1	silver and gold	Peter is referring figuratively to money by association with the way that silver and gold were used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
404	ACT	3	6	zi9t	figs-explicit	ὃ δὲ ἔχω, τοῦτό σοι δίδωμι	1	but what I have, this I give to you	What happens next in the story shows that by what I have, Peter implicitly means the authority that Jesus has given him to heal. Alternate translation: “but Jesus has given me the authority to heal, and I will use it on your behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
405	ACT	3	6	t2vf	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου	1	In the name of Jesus Christ the Nazarene	Here the name of Jesus figuratively represents his authority. Alternate translation: “By the authority of Jesus Christ the Nazarene, I command you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
406	ACT	3	6	a204	translate-names	Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου	1	of Jesus Christ the Nazarene	The word Nazarene describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. See how you translated it in 2:23. Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
407	ACT	3	6	a205	figs-imperative	περιπάτει	1	walk	This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “I give you the ability to walk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
408	ACT	3	7	ec6j	writing-pronouns	πιάσας αὐτὸν τῆς δεξιᾶς χειρὸς, ἤγειρεν αὐτόν; παραχρῆμα δὲ ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά	1	seizing him by the right hand, he raised him up, and immediately his feet and ankles were made strong	In this verse, the pronoun he refers to Peter, while the pronouns him and his refer to the lame man. You could indicate that specifically in at least some of the cases if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “seizing the man by the right hand, Peter raised him up, and immediately the man’s feet and ankles were made strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
409	ACT	3	7	a206	figs-activepassive	ἐστερεώθησαν αἱ βάσεις αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σφυδρά	1	his feet and ankles were made strong	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “his feet and ankles became strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
410	ACT	3	8	a207	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	Luke is using the word translated And to indicate that the events in this verse happened as a result of the events in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
411	ACT	3	8	abc1	writing-pronouns	ἔστη καὶ περιεπάτει, καὶ εἰσῆλθεν σὺν αὐτοῖς	1	he stood and began to walk, and he entered with them	The pronoun he refers to the man who had been lame, and the pronoun them refers to Peter and John. You could indicate that specifically if it would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the man stood and began to walk, and the man entered with Peter and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
412	ACT	3	8	zp7x	figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	into the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
413	ACT	3	9	a208	figs-hyperbole	πᾶς ὁ λαὸς	1	all the people	The word all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was in the courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
414	ACT	3	10	zy7h		ἐπεγίνωσκον…αὐτὸν, ὅτι αὐτὸς ἦν ὁ…καθήμενος	1	they recognized him, that he was the one sitting	Alternate translation: “they realized that he was the man who had been sitting”
415	ACT	3	10	p2zh	translate-names	τῇ Ὡραίᾳ Πύλῃ	1	the Beautiful Gate	This was the name of one of the entrances to the temple area. See how you translated the similar expression in 3:2. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
416	ACT	3	10	a209	figs-activepassive	ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ	1	they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with wonder and amazement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
417	ACT	3	10	j6zf	figs-doublet	ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ	1	they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him	The words wonder and amazement mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. You can combine the words in your translation if that might be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with complete amazement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
418	ACT	3	10	a210	figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ	1	they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him	Luke is speaking figuratively as if the people were containers that these responses could fill. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him made them completely amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
419	ACT	3	10	a211	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ	1	they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns wonder and amazement with verbs. Alternate translation: “they wondered and marveled greatly at what had happened to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
420	ACT	3	11	a212	figs-hyperbole	πᾶς ὁ λαὸς	1	all the people	The word all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
421	ACT	3	11	rk1m	translate-names	τῇ στοᾷ τῇ καλουμένῃ Σολομῶντος	1	the porch that is called Solomon’s	This is the name of a covered walkway in the Jerusalem temple courtyard. It consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. People had named this porch after King Solomon. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
422	ACT	3	11	rj43	figs-activepassive	τῇ καλουμένῃ	1	that is called	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
423	ACT	3	12	ndi3	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται	1	Men, Israelites	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
424	ACT	3	12	uyg1	figs-rquestion	τί θαυμάζετε ἐπὶ τούτῳ	1	why do you marvel at this?	Peter does not expect the crowd to tell him why they are marveling. He is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not marvel at this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
425	ACT	3	12	j6ld	figs-rquestion	ἢ ἡμῖν τί ἀτενίζετε, ὡς ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ πεποιηκόσιν τοῦ περιπατεῖν αὐτόν?	1	Or why do you look intently at us, as if we have made him to walk by our own power or godliness?	Peter is using the question form for emphasis. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Do not stare at us. We did not make him walk by our own power or godliness!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
426	ACT	3	12	g4y1	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν…ἰδίᾳ	1	at us … our own	By us and our own, Peter means himself and John but not also the people in the crowd. So use the exclusive forms of us and our in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
427	ACT	3	12	mwd9	figs-hendiadys	ἰδίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ εὐσεβείᾳ	1	by our own power or godliness	Peter may be expressing a single idea by using two words connected with or. The term godliness describes what the crowd may consider the source or nature of the power that he and John have. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “by our own godly power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
428	ACT	3	13	q8q2	translate-names	Ἀβραὰμ…Ἰσαὰκ…Ἰακώβ	1	Abraham … Isaac … Jacob	These are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
429	ACT	3	13	a213	figs-metaphor	τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	our fathers	Peter is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
430	ACT	3	13	a214		τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦν	1	his Servant Jesus	See the discussion of the term Servant in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “Jesus his Messiah”
431	ACT	3	13	a215		παρεδώκατε	1	delivered up	Alternate translation: “handed over for trial”
432	ACT	3	13	cp1j	figs-idiom	κατὰ πρόσωπον Πειλάτου	1	before the face of Pilate	Here the phrase before the face of means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “in the presence of Pilate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
433	ACT	3	13	a216	translate-names	Πειλάτου	1	Pilate	Pilate is the name of a man. His full name was Pontius Pilate. He was the governor of Judea during the time of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
434	ACT	3	13	yy96	figs-nominaladj	κρίναντος ἐκείνου ἀπολύειν	1	when that one had decided to release him	Peter is using the demonstrative adjective that as a noun to refer to a certain person, Pilate. (ULT adds one to indicate that.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could indicate specifically whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “when Pilate had decided to release him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
435	ACT	3	14	a217	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	Peter uses this word to introduce a contrast between what Pilate wanted to do and what these people demanded he do instead. Alternate translation: “Even though Pilate wanted to release Jesus,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
436	ACT	3	14	a218	figs-nominaladj	τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον	1	the Holy and Righteous One	Peter is using both the adjective Holy and the adjective Righteous to indicate a certain person, Jesus. (ULT adds One to indicate that.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could indicate specifically whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who was holy and righteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
437	ACT	3	14	a219	figs-doublet	τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον	1	the Holy and Righteous One	The terms Holy and Righteous mean similar things. Peter is using the two terms together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Supremely Holy One” or “Jesus, who was supremely holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
438	ACT	3	14	a220	figs-explicit	τὸν Ἅγιον καὶ Δίκαιον	1	the Holy and Righteous One	This description of Jesus is an implicit assertion that he is the Messiah. Alternate translation: “Jesus, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
439	ACT	3	14	s6qj	figs-activepassive	ᾐτήσασθε ἄνδρα, φονέα χαρισθῆναι ὑμῖν	1	for a man, a murderer, to be granted to you	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “asked Pilate to release to you a man who was a murderer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
440	ACT	3	15	a221	figs-synecdoche	ἀπεκτείνατε	1	you killed	It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:23. Alternate translation: “you demanded the death of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
441	ACT	3	15	ljn8	figs-explicit	τὸν…Ἀρχηγὸν τῆς ζωῆς	1	the Originator of Life	Peter is using the expression the Originator of Life as another title for Jesus. This expression could be a reference to the way Jesus, as the Son of God, took part in the original creation of all life. It could also be a reference to the way Jesus gives spiritual life to all who believe in him. Or it could mean both things. In any event, Peter is drawing a contrast between the life-giving Jesus whom the people rejected and the life-taking murderer whom they asked Pilate to release. It may be best in your translation to bring out this contrast while leaving the specific meaning open. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who gives life rather than taking it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
442	ACT	3	15	a222	figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
443	ACT	3	15	jwb1	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	we	Peter is speaking at least of himself and John, and perhaps also of the other apostles, but not of the people he is addressing. So use the exclusive form of we in your translation if your language marks that distinction. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that we is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we and the other apostles whom Jesus chose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
444	ACT	3	15	a223	writing-pronouns	ἡμεῖς	1	we	If you conclude that Peter is referring only to himself and John, and if your language uses dual forms, use the dual form of the pronoun we here, since it would apply to two people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
445	ACT	3	16	abc2	figs-infostructure	ἐπὶ τῇ πίστει τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ, τοῦτον ὃν θεωρεῖτε καὶ οἴδατε, ἐστερέωσεν τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	by faith in his name, this one whom you see and know, his name has made strong	Your language might naturally present the phrases in this sentence in a different order. Alternate translation: “this man whom you see and know had faith in his name, and his name has made him strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
446	ACT	3	16	qt8w	writing-pronouns	τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ…τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	in his name … his name	The pronoun his refers to Jesus in both of these instances. Alternate translation: “in the name of Jesus … that name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
447	ACT	3	16	a224	figs-metonymy	τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ…τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	in his name … his name	Peter is using the name of Jesus figuratively to mean his authority or power. Alternate translation: “in the authority of Jesus … the authority of Jesus” or “in the power of Jesus … the power of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
448	ACT	3	16	abc3	writing-pronouns	ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ	1	the faith that is through him has given to him	The first instance of the pronoun him refers to Jesus, and the second instance refers to the man who had been lame. Alternate translation: “the faith that is through Jesus has given to this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
449	ACT	3	16	a225	figs-personification	ἡ πίστις ἡ δι’ αὐτοῦ, ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ τὴν ὁλοκληρίαν ταύτην	1	the faith that is through him has given to him this complete health	Peter is speaking of faith figuratively as if it were a living thing that could have given complete health to the man. Alternate translation: “because this man had faith in Jesus, Jesus has given him this complete health” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
450	ACT	3	17	v45t		καὶ νῦν	1	And now	Peter uses the expression And now to shift the people’s attention away from the lame man so that he can speak to them directly. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose.
451	ACT	3	17	a226	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Peter addresses the people figuratively as his brothers because they are related to him as fellow descendants of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “my kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
452	ACT	3	17	a227	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although the term brothers is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
453	ACT	3	17	x62k	figs-explicit	κατὰ ἄγνοιαν ἐπράξατε	1	you acted in ignorance	Peter likely means that the people acted in ignorance of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you acted in ignorance of the fact that Jesus was the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
454	ACT	3	17	a228	figs-ellipsis	ὥσπερ καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες ὑμῶν	1	as also your rulers	Peter is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and that your rulers also acted in ignorance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
455	ACT	3	18	gcc1	figs-infostructure	ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἃ προκατήγγειλεν διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, παθεῖν τὸν Χριστὸν αὐτοῦ, ἐπλήρωσεν οὕτως	1	But what God foretold through the mouth of all the prophets, that his Christ would suffer, he has fulfilled thus	Your language might naturally put first in this sentence the information that God fulfilled prophecies when Christ suffered. Alternate translation: “But in this way God has fulfilled what he foretold through the mouth of all the prophets, that his Christ would suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
456	ACT	3	18	ms6d		διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν	1	through the mouth of all the prophets	Since Peter is speaking of a group of people, the prophets, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of mouth. Alternate translation: “through the mouths of all the prophets”
457	ACT	3	18	z3l7	figs-metonymy	διὰ στόματος πάντων τῶν προφητῶν	1	through the mouth of all the prophets	Peter is figuratively using the mouth of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what all the prophets said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
458	ACT	3	18	a229	figs-hyperbole	πάντων τῶν προφητῶν	1	of all the prophets	Peter is using the word all as a generalization. It is true that the overall witness of Old Testament prophecy is that the Messiah would come first in humility and suffering, but not every prophet spoke specifically of the sufferings of Christ. Alternate translation: “of many prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
459	ACT	3	19	cw18	figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψατε	1	turn back	Peter is speaking of his listeners figuratively as if they were traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to turn back onto the right way. Alternate translation: “start obeying the Lord again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
460	ACT	3	19	zm6y	figs-activepassive	πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας	1	for your sins to be wiped away	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God will wipe away your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
461	ACT	3	19	a230	figs-metaphor	πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας	1	for your sins to be wiped away	Peter is speaking of sins as if they would be physically wiped away when God forgave them. Alternate translation: “so that God will forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
462	ACT	3	20	a231	figs-personification	ὅπως ἂν ἔλθωσιν καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου	1	so that times of refreshment may come from the face of the Lord	Peter is speaking of these times figuratively as if they could actively come to his listeners on their own. Alternate translation: “so that the Lord may send you times of refreshing from his face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
463	ACT	3	20	x3ca	figs-abstractnouns	καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως	1	times of refreshment	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun refreshment with an adjective such as “refreshing” or “restful.” Alternate translation: “refreshing times” or “restful times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
464	ACT	3	20	f2wm	figs-metaphor	ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου	1	from the face of the Lord	Peter is using the term face figuratively to represent the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
465	ACT	3	20	h3nk	figs-explicit	ἀποστείλῃ	1	he may send	Peter is referring implicitly to Christ’s coming again. Alternate translation: “he may again send” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
466	ACT	3	20	yzr6	figs-activepassive	τὸν προκεχειρισμένον ὑμῖν	1	the one appointed for you	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the one whom he has appointed for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
467	ACT	3	21	vgn8	figs-personification	ὃν δεῖ οὐρανὸν μὲν δέξασθαι	1	whom it is necessary for heaven to receive	Peter is speaking figuratively of heaven as if it were a person who has welcomed Jesus into his home. Alternate translation: “who must remain in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
468	ACT	3	21	x2f3	figs-abstractnouns	ἄχρι χρόνων ἀποκαταστάσεως πάντων	1	the times of the restoration of all things	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun restoration with a verb such as “restore.” Alternate translation: “until the times when God will restore all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
469	ACT	3	21	a2m8	figs-idiom	ἀπ’ αἰῶνος	1	from the age	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
470	ACT	3	21	a12i	figs-metonymy	διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων…αὐτοῦ προφητῶν	1	through the mouth of his holy prophets	Peter is figuratively using the mouth of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what his holy prophets said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
471	ACT	3	22	a232	figs-quotesinquotes	Μωϋσῆς μὲν εἶπεν, ὅτι προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα, ὅσα ἂν λαλήσῃ πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	Moses indeed said, ‘The Lord our God will raise up for you a prophet like me from your brothers. You will listen to him according to everything—whatever he may speak to you	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses indeed said that the Lord our God would raise up a prophet like himself for us Israelites from among our brothers. Moses said that we were to listen to him according to everything—whatever he might speak to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
472	ACT	3	22	a233	translate-names	Μωϋσῆς	1	Moses	Moses is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
473	ACT	3	22	a249	translate-textvariants	Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν	1	The Lord our God	See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter to decide whether to use this reading or one of two other possible readings, “The Lord your God” or “The Lord God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
474	ACT	3	22	a250	figs-exclusive	Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν	1	The Lord our God	Moses is speaking of himself and his fellow Israelites, whom he is addressing, so use the inclusive form of the word our in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
475	ACT	3	22	v5nf	figs-idiom	ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει	1	will raise up for you	Here the expression raise up does not mean “bring back to life,” as it did in 2:24 and 2:32. In this context, it refers instead to God giving someone the mission to go as a prophet to certain people with a message for them. Alternate translation: “will send to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
476	ACT	3	22	t8di	figs-metaphor	τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν	1	your brothers	Moses is using the term brothers to mean people who are fellow descendants with his listeners of the founders of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “your kinsmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
477	ACT	3	22	a234	figs-declarative	αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα	1	You will listen to him according to everything	Moses is using a future statement to give a command. Alternate translation: “You must listen to everything he tells you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
478	ACT	3	22	a235	figs-idiom	αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα	1	You will listen to him according to everything	Here, listen is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “You must obey every command that he gives you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
479	ACT	3	23	a236	figs-quotesinquotes	ἔσται δὲ πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ	1	But it will be that every soul that does not listen to that prophet will be destroyed from the people	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses also said that every soul that did not listen to that prophet would be destroyed from the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
480	ACT	3	23	t8a5	figs-activepassive	πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ	1	every soul that does not listen to that prophet will be destroyed from the people	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “God will destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
481	ACT	3	23	a237	figs-declarative	πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου, ἐξολεθρευθήσεται ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ	1	every soul that does not listen to that prophet will be destroyed from the people	Moses could be using a future statement to give a command, in which case he would be telling the people to take this action. Alternate translation: “you must destroy from the people every soul that does not listen to that prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
482	ACT	3	23	a238	figs-synecdoche	πᾶσα ψυχὴ, ἥτις	1	every soul that	Moses is using one part of a person, the soul, to mean the entire person. Alternate translation: “every person who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
483	ACT	3	23	a239	figs-idiom	ἥτις ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ τοῦ προφήτου ἐκείνου	1	does not listen to that prophet	Here, listen is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “does not obey that prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
484	ACT	3	24	u6x3	figs-hyperbole	πάντες…οἱ προφῆται	1	all the prophets	Here the phrase all the prophets is probably not the same kind of generalization that it seems to be in 3:18. It is true in a more literal sense that all the prophets announced these days. There was something in the messages of each one of them that pointed to the culmination of God’s work in the coming of Jesus. So even if your language does not use generalizations for emphasis, you can translate these words just as Peter says them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
485	ACT	3	24	xp9h		ἀπὸ Σαμουὴλ καὶ τῶν καθεξῆς	1	from Samuel and those after him	Alternate translation: “beginning with Samuel and continuing with those who lived after he did”
486	ACT	3	24	a240	translate-names	Σαμουὴλ	1	Samuel	Samuel is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
487	ACT	3	24	m9pr	figs-idiom	τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας	1	these days	Peter is using the word days idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “this time” or “these times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
488	ACT	3	24	a241	figs-explicit	τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας	1	these days	Peter is referring to a specific time to mean implicitly what is happening at that time. Alternate translation: “the things that are happening now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
489	ACT	3	25	rh2n	figs-metonymy	ὑμεῖς ἐστε οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	You are the sons of the prophets	Peter is using the word sons figuratively in the sense of “heirs,” by association with the way that children inherit from their parents. He means that the Israelites living at this time are going to receive something as a legacy from those who lived before them. Alternate translation: “You are the ones who are going to receive what the prophets promised” or “You are the ones who are going to experience what the prophets foretold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
490	ACT	3	25	a242	figs-gendernotations	οἱ υἱοὶ	1	the sons	Although the term sons is masculine, Peter is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, you could say “the sons and daughters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
491	ACT	3	25	a243	figs-metonymy	καὶ τῆς διαθήκης ἧς διέθετο ὁ Θεὸς πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν	1	and of the covenant that God made with your fathers	The figurative sense of sons as “heirs” continues in this phrase. Alternate translation: “and who are going to receive what God promised to your fathers when he made a covenant with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
492	ACT	3	25	a244	figs-quotesinquotes	πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν, λέγων πρὸς Ἀβραάμ, καὶ ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς	1	with your fathers, saying to Abraham, ‘And in your seed will all the families of the earth be blessed’	If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “with your fathers when he said to Abraham that in his seed all the families of the earth would be blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
493	ACT	3	25	a245	figs-metaphor	τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν	1	your fathers	Here, fathers figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “your ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
494	ACT	3	25	mad5	figs-metaphor	ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου	1	in your seed	The term seed figuratively means “offspring.” It is a word picture. Just as plants produce seeds that grow into many more plants, so people can have many offspring. Alternate translation: “through your descendants” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
495	ACT	3	25	a246	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ σπέρματί σου	1	in your seed	As the apostle Paul notes in Galatians 3:16, God used the singular form of the word seed when he said this to Abraham, and so the ultimate fulfillment of this promise came when God sent Jesus as the Savior for everyone in the world who would believe in him. That may also be what Peter has in view here, since he refers in the next verse to God’s “Servant,” meaning the Messiah. Alternate translation: “through the Messiah, who will be your descendant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
496	ACT	3	25	a247	figs-activepassive	ἐνευλογηθήσονται πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς	1	will all the families of the earth be blessed	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will bless all the families of the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
497	ACT	3	25	g31m	figs-metonymy	πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς	1	all the families of the earth	Here, families refers figuratively to people groups or nations by association with the way that many of them consist of people who have a common ancestry. Alternate translation: “all the nations of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
498	ACT	3	26	b7tz	figs-idiom	ἀναστήσας ὁ Θεὸς τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, ἀπέστειλεν αὐτὸν	1	God, having raised up his Servant, sent him	The expression raised up has the same meaning here as in 3:22. See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “When God appointed Jesus as the Messiah, he sent him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
499	ACT	3	26	z5q6		τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ	1	his Servant	See the discussion of the term Servant in the General Notes to this chapter, and see how you translated that term in 3:13. Alternate translation: “his Messiah”
500	ACT	3	26	x8ss	figs-metaphor	τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν	1	by turning each of you from your wickedness	Here, turning someone from something figuratively means leading that person to stop doing that thing. See how you translated the similar expression in 3:19. Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to repent of your wickedness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
501	ACT	3	26	a248	figs-abstractnouns	τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν	1	by turning each of you from your wickedness	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun wickedness with an adjective such as “wicked.” Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to stop doing wicked things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
502	ACT	4	intro	pv3a			0		Acts 04 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:25–26. Special concepts in this chapter Unity The first Christians wanted very much to be united. They wanted to believe the same things and share everything they owned and help those who needed help. “Signs and wonders” This phrase refers to things that only God can do. The Christians wanted God to do what only he could do so that people would believe that what they said about Jesus was true. Important figures of speech in this chapter The “head of the corner” or cornerstone (4:11) The cornerstone was the first piece of stone that people put down when they were building a building out of stone. Peter refers to it as the “head of the corner” in 4:11. This is a metaphor for the most important part of something, the part on which everything else depends. To say that Jesus is the cornerstone of the church is to say that nothing in the church is more important than Jesus and that everything in the church depends on Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “no other name” (4:12) “There is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved” (Acts 4:12). As a note to this verse explains, in this expression the term “name” figuratively represents a person. So with these words, Peter was saying that no other person who has ever been on the earth or who will ever be on earth can save people. This statement might cause some controversy in some places today, but it is an essential part of the Christian message, and it should be translated so that its meaning is clear.
503	ACT	4	1	abc4	writing-pronouns	λαλούντων…αὐτῶν	1	as they were speaking	The pronoun they refers to Peter and John. Alternate translation: “as Peter and John were speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
504	ACT	4	1	ew3l	figs-explicit	ὁ στρατηγὸς τοῦ ἱεροῦ	1	the captain of the temple	The temple had its own guards, and this man was their commanding officer. Alternate translation: “the commander of the temple guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
505	ACT	4	1	a253	translate-names	οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι	1	the Sadducees	Sadducees is the name of a group of Jewish priests. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
506	ACT	4	1	m74s	figs-explicit	οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι	1	the Sadducees	The Sadducees would have been particularly upset that Peter and John were saying that God raised Jesus from the dead, because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that explicitly here. Alternate translation: “the Sadducees, who do not believe in the resurrection,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
507	ACT	4	1	d3tv	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι	1	the Sadducees	Luke is using the name of the whole group to mean some of its members. Alternate translation: “some of the Sadducees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
508	ACT	4	2	abc5	writing-pronouns	διαπονούμενοι διὰ τὸ διδάσκειν αὐτοὺς	1	greatly troubled because they were teaching	The pronoun they refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “These men were greatly troubled because Peter and John were teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
509	ACT	4	2	mg5l	figs-abstractnouns	καταγγέλλειν ἐν τῷ Ἰησοῦ τὴν ἀνάστασιν, τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	proclaiming in Jesus the resurrection that is from the dead	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun resurrection with an equivalent phrase. Peter and John were saying that God would raise people from the dead in the same way that he had raised Jesus. Translate this in a way that allows the resurrection to refer to both Jesus’ resurrection and the general resurrection of other people. Alternate translation: “proclaiming that God makes people alive again who have died, just as God had done for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
510	ACT	4	2	np5g	figs-nominaladj	τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
511	ACT	4	3	a254	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	Luke is using the word translated And to introduce what the men who came up to Peter and John did because they were so troubled by their teaching. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
512	ACT	4	3	a255	writing-pronouns	ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας	1	they laid hands on them	The pronoun they refers to the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees. The pronoun them refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees laid hands on Peter and John” or “the men who had come up to Peter and John laid hands on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
513	ACT	4	3	zla7	figs-metonymy	ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας	1	they laid hands on them	The expression laid hands on figuratively means to arrest someone, by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their hands. Alternate translation: “they arrested them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
514	ACT	4	3	a256	figs-abstractnouns	ἔθεντο εἰς τήρησιν	1	put them in custody	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun custody with a verb such as “imprison.” Alternate translation: “they imprisoned them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
515	ACT	4	3	h5f9	figs-explicit	ἦν γὰρ ἑσπέρα ἤδη	1	since it was already evening	The implication is that the ruling council, which Luke describes in 4:5–6, would not meet to question anyone at night. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “since it was already evening and the council would not meet to question them at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
516	ACT	4	4	a257	writing-endofstory	δὲ	1	But	Luke uses the word But to introduce information about what happened after this much of the story as a result of the events within the story itself. This is not the end of the whole story, but it is the end of a significant part of it. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
517	ACT	4	4	a258	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	the word	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
518	ACT	4	4	bm1f	figs-gendernotations	ἀριθμὸς τῶν ἀνδρῶν	1	the number of the men	Luke is not using the word men in a generic sense here. The figure of 5,000 is the number of the men alone. It does not include women and children. So it would not be accurate to translate men as “people.” Instead, if it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this distinction explicitly. Alternate translation: “the number of the men alone, not counting the women and children,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
519	ACT	4	4	qd8g	figs-explicit	ἐγενήθη…ὡς χιλιάδες πέντε	1	became about 5,000	The word translated became could mean: (1) the community of believers in Jesus grew to a total of 5,000 as a result of the professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “in the community of believers grew to about 5,000” (2) “was,” and that would indicate that 5,000 men made professions of faith on this day. Alternate translation: “who put their faith in Jesus that day was about 5,000” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
520	ACT	4	5	lw2d	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	And it happened that	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
521	ACT	4	5	cdj1	figs-explicit	συναχθῆναι αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς	1	their rulers and elders and scribes were gathered together	Luke is implicitly describing the Sanhedrin, the Jewish ruling council, which consisted of these three groups of people. Luke describes this council explicitly as “the Sanhedrin” in 4:15. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could identify it by name here. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, consisting of their rulers and elders and scribes, was gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
522	ACT	4	5	j6p8	writing-pronouns	αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς	1	their rulers and elders and scribes	The pronoun their refers to the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the rulers and elders and scribes of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
523	ACT	4	5	i9tj	figs-activepassive	συναχθῆναι	1	were gathered together	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
524	ACT	4	6	a259	figs-explicit	Ἅννας ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς, καὶ Καϊάφας	1	Annas the high priest, and Caiaphas	Luke describes Annas as the high priest, but the actual situation was complicated. At this time the Romans were appointing the high priests for Judea. One Roman official had appointed Annas some years earlier, but ten years after that, another official deposed him and named his son-in-law Caiaphas high priest instead. However, the Jews still recognized Annas’ claim to the position. If you decide to clarify this for your readers, it would probably be best to state the matter as simply as possible. Alternate translation: “Annas, whom the Jews recognized as the high priest, and Caiaphas, whom a Roman official had appointed as the high priest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
525	ACT	4	6	l44n	translate-names	Ἅννας…Καϊάφας…Ἰωάννης…Ἀλέξανδρος	1	Annas … Caiaphas … John … Alexander	These are the names of four men. The John mentioned here was a member of the high priest’s family. This is not the same John as the apostle. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
526	ACT	4	6	a260		ὅσοι ἦσαν ἐκ γένους ἀρχιερατικοῦ	1	as many as were from the high priestly family	Alternate translation: “all the other members of the high priestly family who were members of the council”
527	ACT	4	7	abc6	writing-pronouns	στήσαντες αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ μέσῳ, ἐπυνθάνοντο	1	having set them in their midst, they asked them	The pronoun them refers to Peter and John, and the pronouns their and they refer to the council members. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the council members had set Peter and John in their midst, the members asked them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
528	ACT	4	7	t1eq	figs-doublet	ἐν ποίᾳ δυνάμει ἢ ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι ἐποιήσατε τοῦτο ὑμεῖς?	1	By what power or in what name have you done this?	The words power and name (meaning authority; see next note) mean similar things. The council members may be using them together to ask a comprehensive or emphatic question. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “By whatever means were you able to do this?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
529	ACT	4	7	jc21	figs-metonymy	ἐν ποίῳ ὀνόματι	1	in what name	Here, name refers figuratively to authority. Alternate translation: “by what authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
530	ACT	4	7	a261	figs-youdual	ὑμεῖς	1	you	Since the council members are speaking to two men, you would be dual if your language uses that form. (All other pronouns in this account that refer to Peter and John would also be dual, such as them in its two instances in this verse.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
531	ACT	4	8	su5x	figs-activepassive	Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν	1	Peter, filled with the Holy Spirit, said	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the comparable expression in 2:4. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
532	ACT	4	8	a262	figs-metaphor	Πέτρος πλησθεὶς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου, εἶπεν	1	Peter, filled with the Holy Spirit, said	Luke is speaking figuratively of Peter as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired Peter and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
533	ACT	4	8	a263	figs-merism	ἄρχοντες τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ πρεσβύτεροι	1	Rulers of the people and elders	Peter is addressing the entire council by referring to its two components. Some of the members had ruling responsibilities. Others, the elders, were added to the council to bring its total membership up to 70, since according to Exodus 24:1, that was the number of elders who accompanied Moses when God confirmed the covenant with Israel at Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “You members of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
534	ACT	4	8	a264	figs-explicit	τοῦ λαοῦ	1	of the people	Here, the people means specifically the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
535	ACT	4	9	pq85	figs-irony	εἰ ἡμεῖς σήμερον ἀνακρινόμεθα ἐπὶ εὐεργεσίᾳ ἀνθρώπου ἀσθενοῦς, ἐν τίνι οὗτος σέσωσται	1	if we are being questioned today concerning a good deed to a sick man, by what means he was made well	Peter is not suggesting seriously that the subject of the questioning is uncertain. He knows the subject, but he is suggesting ironically that it is uncertain so that he can describe it from his own perspective. The council asked by what power or authority he and John did “this,” implying that “this” was something bad, a public disturbance that troubled the authorities. In response, Peter asserts that “this” was instead something good, a good deed to a sick man. If it would be helpful to your readers, in your translation you could indicate the meaning that Peter is communicating through this irony. Alternate translation: “what we actually did was a good deed for a sick man, and if you want to know by what means he was made well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
536	ACT	4	9	je6d	figs-activepassive	ἡμεῖς…ἀνακρινόμεθα	1	we are being questioned	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you are questioning us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
537	ACT	4	9	b92n	figs-activepassive	οὗτος σέσωσται	1	he was made well	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “he became healthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
538	ACT	4	10	snd5	figs-activepassive	γνωστὸν ἔστω πᾶσιν ὑμῖν καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραὴλ	1	let it be known to you all and to all the people of Israel	The word translated known is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers to use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. Alternate translation: “then we want you and all the people of Israel to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
539	ACT	4	10	j3px	writing-pronouns	πᾶσιν ὑμῖν	1	to you all	The pronoun you refers to the council members. Alternate translation: “to all of you council members” or “to all of you who are questioning us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
540	ACT	4	10	khn7	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι	1	in the name	Here, name refers figuratively to power and authority. Alternate translation: “through the power” or “by the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
541	ACT	4	10	a265	translate-names	Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου	1	of Jesus Christ the Nazarene	See how you translated this in 2:22 and 3:6. Alternate translation: “of Jesus Christ of Nazareth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
542	ACT	4	10	a266	figs-synecdoche	ὃν ὑμεῖς ἐσταυρώσατε	1	whom you crucified	It was the Romans who literally crucified Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that these Jewish leaders crucified him because their demands led to his death. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:23. Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
543	ACT	4	10	jyj6	figs-idiom	ὃν ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	whom God raised from the dead	As in 2:24, the idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “whom God made alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
544	ACT	4	10	a267	figs-nominaladj	ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	Peter is using the adjective dead as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
545	ACT	4	11	nwg6	writing-pronouns	οὗτός	1	He	The pronoun He refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
546	ACT	4	11	w195	figs-metaphor	ὁ λίθος ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων, ὁ γενόμενος εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1	the stone that was rejected by you, the builders, which has been made into the head of the corner	Peter is quoting from Psalm 118:22, and the quotation contains a metaphor. This psalm is figuratively describing the Messiah as if he were a stone that builders chose not to use. This means that people will reject him. When the psalm says that this stone became the cornerstone, this means figuratively that God will nevertheless make the Messiah the ruler of these people. However, since this is a quotation from Scripture, we recommend that you translate the words directly rather than providing a non-figurative explanation of them, even if your language does not customarily use such figures of speech. If you want to explain the meaning of the metaphor, we recommend that you do that in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
547	ACT	4	11	c1bh	figs-activepassive	ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων	1	that was rejected by you, the builders	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that you, the builders, rejected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
548	ACT	4	11	f1nx	figs-idiom	κεφαλὴν γωνίας	1	the head of the corner	The phrase the head of the corner is an idiom that refers to a large stone with straight edges that builders would place down first and use as a reference to make sure that the walls of a stone building were straight and that the building was oriented in the right direction. Your language may have its own term for such a stone. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the reference stone for the whole building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
549	ACT	4	12	a268	figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία	1	there is no salvation in anyone else	In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “there is no salvation in no one else.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he is the only one in whom there is salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
550	ACT	4	12	tq3z	figs-abstractnouns	οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία	1	there is no salvation in anyone else	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun salvation with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “he is the only one who is able to save” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
551	ACT	4	12	l66w	figs-activepassive	οὐδὲ…ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν τὸ δεδομένον	1	there is no other name under heaven given	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God has not given any other name under heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
552	ACT	4	12	iz7k	figs-metonymy	οὐδὲ…ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον…ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς	1	there is no other name … by which we must be saved	Here, name figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “there is no other person … by whom we must be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
553	ACT	4	12	jm25	figs-idiom	ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	under heaven	This is an idiom. See how you translated it in 2:5. Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
554	ACT	4	12	a269	figs-gendernotations	ἐν ἀνθρώποις	1	among men	Peter is using the term men in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “among people” or “to people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
555	ACT	4	12	gg8h	figs-activepassive	ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς	1	by which we must be saved	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that can save us” or, if you translate “name” as “person,” “who can save us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
556	ACT	4	12	tdw8	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	we	Peter is using the word we to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
557	ACT	4	13	r6d6	figs-idiom	θεωροῦντες	1	seeing	Luke is using the word seeing idiomatically to mean that the council members noticed this and found it significant. Alternate translation: “taking note of” or “impressed with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
558	ACT	4	13	t6kc	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν τοῦ Πέτρου παρρησίαν καὶ Ἰωάννου	1	the boldness of Peter and John	Here the abstract noun boldness refers to the way in which Peter and John responded to the Jewish leaders. It can be translated with an adverb or an adjective. Alternate translation: “how boldly Peter and John had spoken” or “how bold Peter and John were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
559	ACT	4	13	qaa5	figs-explicit	καταλαβόμενοι	1	realizing	The implication is that the Jewish leaders realized this because of the way Peter and John spoke. Alternate translation: “realizing from the way they spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
560	ACT	4	13	xn39	writing-pronouns	ἐθαύμαζον; ἐπεγίνωσκόν τε αὐτοὺς, ὅτι σὺν τῷ Ἰησοῦ ἦσαν	1	they marveled, and they recognized them, that they had been with Jesus	Here the pronoun they refers in its first two instances to the council members, and in its third instance it refers to Peter and John, as does the pronoun them. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this and to state the meaning here more concisely. Alternate translation: “the council members marveled, and they recognized that Peter and John had been with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
561	ACT	4	13	erv7	figs-doublet	ἄνθρωποι ἀγράμματοί εἰσιν καὶ ἰδιῶται	1	they were uneducated and ordinary men	The words uneducated and ordinary mean similar things. Both words indicate that Peter and John had no formal education. Luke uses them together for emphasis, to express from the council members’ perspective how amazed they were. Alternate translation: “they had no formal education at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
562	ACT	4	14	h3cy	figs-activepassive	τόν…ἄνθρωπον…τὸν τεθεραπευμένον	1	the man who had been healed	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
563	ACT	4	14	a270	writing-pronouns	σὺν αὐτοῖς ἑστῶτα, τὸν τεθεραπευμένον, οὐδὲν εἶχον	1	standing with them, they had nothing	The pronoun them refers to Peter and John, and the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “standing with Peter and John, the council members had nothing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
564	ACT	4	14	fq4w	figs-explicit	οὐδὲν εἶχον ἀντειπεῖν	1	they had nothing to say in opposition	The implication is that anything the council members said in opposition would have been in an attempt to discredit the claim that the man had been healed in the name of Jesus. But there was nothing they could say, since the evidence that the claim was true was right in front of them in the person of the formerly lame man standing on his own. Alternate translation: “they had nothing to say to discredit the account” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
565	ACT	4	15	ql31	writing-pronouns	κελεύσαντες…αὐτοὺς ἔξω τοῦ Συνεδρίου ἀπελθεῖν, συνέβαλλον πρὸς ἀλλήλους	1	having commanded them to go outside the Sanhedrin, they conferred among themselves	The pronoun them refers at least to Peter and John, and probably also to the man who was healed, while the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having commanded Peter and John and the man who was healed to go outside the Sanhedrin, the council members conferred among themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
566	ACT	4	15	a271	translate-names	τοῦ Συνεδρίου	1	the Sanhedrin	Sanhedrin is the name of the Jewish ruling council. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
567	ACT	4	15	a272	figs-metonymy	τοῦ Συνεδρίου	1	the Sanhedrin	Luke is figuratively using the name of the Jewish ruling council to mean the meeting place of that council. Alternate translation: “the place where the Sanhedrin met” or “the council chamber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
568	ACT	4	16	p4g6	figs-rquestion	τί ποιήσωμεν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις?	1	What should we do to these men?	This could mean: (1) the Jewish leaders were using the question form to express their frustration because they realize that they cannot punish Peter and John. As 4:21 indicates explicitly, and as the leaders suggest here, they are afraid of how the people might respond if they do. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “It is very difficult to know what we should do to these men!” (2) the leaders were asking one another a genuine question, because ultimately they do decide to do something to Peter and John. They warn them not to speak or teach in the name of Jesus, with an implied threat of punishment if they do. In that case it would be accurate to translate this as a question. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
569	ACT	4	16	jn12	figs-hyperbole	πᾶσιν τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	everyone who lives in Jerusalem	This is a generalization that the leaders are making to emphasize how widely the news of the healing has spread. Alternate translation: “people who live throughout Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
570	ACT	4	16	nh5s		γνωστὸν σημεῖον	1	a notable sign	Here the word sign has the same sense that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in 2:22 and 2:43. It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “a remarkable miracle”
571	ACT	4	17	a273	figs-activepassive	ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ	1	so that it may not be spread	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “so that it does not spread” or “so that they will not spread it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
572	ACT	4	17	f71l	figs-explicit	ἵνα μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον διανεμηθῇ	1	so that it may not be spread	By it, the council members do not mean the news of the man’s healing, since they have already said that everyone in Jerusalem knows about it. They mean the teaching that Jesus is Messiah, since they then try to prevent this from spreading by not allowing the apostles to speak to anyone about Jesus. Alternate translation: “so that this teaching about Jesus does not spread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
573	ACT	4	17	a274		ἐπὶ πλεῖον	1	unto more	Alternate translation: “any further”
574	ACT	4	17	w52j	figs-metonymy	λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ	1	to speak in this name	Here, name figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “to speak about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
575	ACT	4	17	a275	figs-doublenegatives	μηκέτι λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων	1	no longer to speak in this name to any of men	In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “no longer to speak in this name to none of men.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “to stop speaking in this name to any of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
576	ACT	4	17	a276	figs-gendernotations	μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων	1	to any of men	Here, men has a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “to any person” or “to anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
577	ACT	4	18	a277	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	So	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what the council members did as a result of their discussion. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
578	ACT	4	18	a278	writing-pronouns	καλέσαντες αὐτοὺς, παρήγγειλαν	1	summoning them, they commanded them	The pronoun them refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “summoning Peter and John, the council members commanded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
579	ACT	4	18	a279	figs-doublet	μὴ φθέγγεσθαι μηδὲ διδάσκειν	1	neither to speak nor to teach	The words speak and teach mean similar things. The council members may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “not to say anything publicly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
580	ACT	4	18	a280	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	in the name of Jesus	Here, name figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
581	ACT	4	19	a281	figs-hendiadys	ὁ…Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον	1	answering, Peter and John said	Together the words answering and said mean that Peter and John responded to the council. Alternate translation: “Peter and John responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
582	ACT	4	19	a282	figs-explicit	ὁ…Πέτρος καὶ Ἰωάννης ἀποκριθέντες εἶπον	1	answering, Peter and John said	This could mean: (1) Peter and John each said different parts of the quotation in 4:19–20. (2) Peter spoke these words on behalf of both of them, since the Holy Spirit had inspired him to speak to the council in 4:8–12. Alternate translation: “Peter responded on their behalf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
583	ACT	4	19	jf1d	figs-metonymy	εἰ δίκαιόν ἐστιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Whether it is right before God	Here the phrase before God refers to God’s opinion, by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “Whether God thinks it is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
584	ACT	4	19	a283	figs-idiom	ὑμῶν ἀκούειν μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	to listen to you rather than to God	Here, listen is an idiom that means “obey.” Alternate translation: “to obey you rather than God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
585	ACT	4	20	a284	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	Peter and John are using the word For to introduce the reason why the council needs to judge whether it would be right for them to obey the council rather than God. Alternate translation: “The reason why you must judge whom we should obey is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
586	ACT	4	20	hf3u	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς…εἴδαμεν καὶ ἠκούσαμεν	1	we … we have seen and heard	Peter and John are using the word we to refer to themselves but not to their listeners, so use the exclusive form of the word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
587	ACT	4	20	a285	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ δυνάμεθα…ἡμεῖς…μὴ λαλεῖν	1	we are not able not to speak	You could state the meaning of this double negative positively. Alternate translation: “we must speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
588	ACT	4	21	y5y1	writing-pronouns	οἱ δὲ προσαπειλησάμενοι ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς	1	having warned them further, they released them	The pronoun them refers in both instances to Peter and John, and the pronoun they refers to the council members. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this. Alternate translation: “having warned Peter and John further, the council members released them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
589	ACT	4	21	z2bx	figs-explicit	διὰ τὸν λαόν	1	on account of the people	The implication is that the Jewish leaders were afraid that the people would riot if they punished Peter and John. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They were afraid that if they did punish Peter and John, the people would riot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
590	ACT	4	21	jbl6	figs-hyperbole	πάντες ἐδόξαζον τὸν Θεὸν	1	they were all glorifying God	Here, all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “large numbers of them were glorifying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
591	ACT	4	22	gy8d	writing-background	ἐτῶν γὰρ ἦν πλειόνων τεσσεράκοντα ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως	1	For the man to whom this sign of healing had happened was more than 40 years old	In this verse, Luke provides background information about the age of the man who was healed to help readers understand why the people considered his healing such a remarkable miracle. In your translation, present this background information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
592	ACT	4	22	a286	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	Luke is using the word For to introduce the reason why the people were glorifying God. Alternate translation: “The people were glorifying God because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
593	ACT	4	22	ju4w	figs-personification	ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ἐφ’ ὃν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως	1	the man to whom this sign of healing had happened	Luke is speaking figuratively as if the healing had happened on its own. Alternate translation: “the man whom Peter and John had miraculously healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
594	ACT	4	22	a287	figs-possession	τὸ σημεῖον τοῦτο τῆς ἰάσεως	1	this sign of healing	Luke is using the possessive form to describe a sign that consisted of a healing. The word sign has the same sense here that it has in the phrase “wonders and signs” in 2:22 and 2:43. It means a miracle. Alternate translation: “this miraculous healing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
595	ACT	4	23	a288	figs-activepassive	ἀπολυθέντες	1	having been released	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “after the council members had released Peter and John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
596	ACT	4	23	a289	figs-go	ἦλθον πρὸς τοὺς ἰδίους	1	they came to their own people	In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of came. Alternate translation: “they went to their own people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
597	ACT	4	23	j2cx	figs-explicit	τοὺς ἰδίους	1	their own people	The phrase their own people refers to the community of believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
598	ACT	4	23	a290	figs-merism	οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι	1	the chief priests and the elders	As Peter does in 4:8, here Luke is referring to the entire council by naming its two components. Alternate translation: “the members of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
599	ACT	4	24	j3ap	writing-pronouns	οἱ…ἀκούσαντες…ἦραν	1	having heard, they raised	The phrase having heard refers to the other believers, but the pronoun they seems to include Peter and John as well, since those who pray ask for boldness to keep speaking the message about Jesus (4:29). It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the other believers heard this report, together with Peter and John they raised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
600	ACT	4	24	a291		ἦραν φωνὴν	1	they raised their voice	Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of voice. Alternate translation: “they raised their voices”
601	ACT	4	24	zu28	figs-idiom	ἦραν φωνὴν	1	they raised their voice	The expression they raised their voice is an idiom that means they spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “they prayed loudly” or “they prayed out loud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
602	ACT	4	24	a292		ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	unanimously	The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in 1:14. Alternate translation: “with one accord” or “harmoniously”
603	ACT	4	24	a293	figs-youformal	σὺ	1	you	The word you is singular, and it refers to God. The same is true of the words “you” and “your” in 4:25–30. You may have decided to use a formal form of “you” in your translation in such cases. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youformal]])
604	ACT	4	24	a160	figs-merism	ποιήσας τὸν οὐρανὸν, καὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς	1	who made the heaven and the earth and the sea and all that is in them	The believers are referring to all of creation by naming its components. Alternate translation: “who created everything that exists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
605	ACT	4	24	a294		τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	the heaven	The believers are using the word translated heaven in one of its specific senses to mean the sky. Alternate translation: “the sky”
606	ACT	4	25	ka83	figs-metonymy	ὁ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών	1	the one who said by the Holy Spirit from the mouth of our father David, your servant	The word mouth refers figuratively to what David said by using his mouth. Alternate translation: “the one whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
607	ACT	4	25	vc5z	figs-quotesinquotes	τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν, διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου στόματος Δαυεὶδ παιδός σου εἰπών, ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά?	1	who said by the Holy Spirit from the mouth of our father David, your servant, ‘Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things?’	As the believers pray together, they quote from one of the psalms that David composed, Psalm 2:1–2. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “whose Holy Spirit inspired our father David, your servant, to ask why the Gentiles raged and why the peoples imagined useless things.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
608	ACT	4	25	a295	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν	1	our	The believers are using the word our to refer to themselves but not to God, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
609	ACT	4	25	kat6	figs-metaphor	τοῦ πατρὸς	1	father	Here, father figuratively means “ancestor.” Alternate translation: “ancestor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
610	ACT	4	25	a296		παιδός	1	servant	The believers are using the word servant here in its ordinary sense, not as a title for the Messiah, so it would not be appropriate to translate it as “Messiah,” as you may have done when it was a title in 3:13 and 3:26.
611	ACT	4	25	a297	figs-ellipsis	ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά	1	Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things	Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “Why did the Gentiles rage, and why did the peoples imagine useless things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
612	ACT	4	25	a298	figs-parallelism	ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά	1	Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things	These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Why did the Gentiles rage, indeed, why did the peoples imagine useless things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
613	ACT	4	25	f1x6	figs-rquestion	ἵνα τί ἐφρύαξαν ἔθνη, καὶ λαοὶ ἐμελέτησαν κενά?	1	Why did the Gentiles rage, and the peoples imagine useless things?	In this psalm, David uses the question form to emphasize the futility of opposing God. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The Gentiles should not have raged, and the peoples should not have imagined useless things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
614	ACT	4	25	h6rc	translate-names	ἔθνη	1	the Gentiles	Gentiles is the name for people groups that are not Jewish. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
615	ACT	4	25	w622	figs-explicit	κενά	1	useless things	The phrase useless things implicitly describes plans to oppose God, which can never succeed. Alternate translation: “ways to oppose God, which always prove useless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
616	ACT	4	26	fb5a	figs-quotesinquotes	παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ κατὰ τοῦ Κυρίου, καὶ κατὰ τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	The kings of the earth took their stand and the rulers were gathered to the same against the Lord and against his Christ	This is the rest of the quotation from Psalm 2 that the believers started in 4:25. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “David said that the kings of the earth had taken their stand and the rulers had gathered to the same against the Lord and against his Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
617	ACT	4	26	w2by	figs-parallelism	παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	The kings of the earth took their stand and the rulers were gathered to the same	In keeping with the conventions of Hebrew poetry, these two phrases mean basically the same thing. If the repetition might be confusing for your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than and in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth took their stand, yes, the rulers were gathered to the same” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
618	ACT	4	26	w64b	figs-idiom	παρέστησαν οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς	1	The kings of the earth took their stand	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “The kings of the earth lined up their troops for battle” or “The kings of the earth formed their battle lines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
619	ACT	4	26	a299	figs-activepassive	οἱ ἄρχοντες συνήχθησαν	1	the rulers were gathered	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the rulers gathered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
620	ACT	4	26	a300		ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ	1	to the same	See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Here it could mean “by agreement” or “in the same place.” You could use either phrase as an alternate translation.
621	ACT	4	26	yv19	figs-explicit	τοῦ Κυρίου…τοῦ Χριστοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	the Lord … his Christ	Here the word Lord refers to God and the word Christ refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “God the Lord … his Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
622	ACT	4	27	a301	translate-names	Ἡρῴδης	1	Herod	Herod is the name of a man. He was the official whom the Romans appointed to rule Galilee during the time of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
623	ACT	4	27	a302	translate-names	Πόντιος Πειλᾶτος	1	Pontius Pilate	This is the full name of the man who was the governor of Judea during the time of Jesus. See how you translated the name Pilate in 3:13. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
624	ACT	4	27	b1g9	figs-activepassive	συνήχθησαν	1	were gathered together	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
625	ACT	4	27	nuc1	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ	1	in this city	The phrase this city refers to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “here in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
626	ACT	4	27	ca33		παῖδά	1	Servant	Here the word Servant is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to chapter 3, and see how you translated it in 3:13 and 3:26. Alternate translation: “Messiah”
627	ACT	4	27	a303	figs-metaphor	ὃν ἔχρισας	1	whom you anointed	In the Old Testament, ceremonial oil was poured on a person who was being given the authority to assume an office or to do a special task. The believers are speaking figuratively of anointing to indicate that God appointed Jesus to be the Messiah. Alternate translation: “whom you appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
628	ACT	4	28	yz7m	figs-metonymy	ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι	1	all that your hand and your counsel had predetermined to happen	Here, hand figuratively means God’s power and counsel figuratively means God’s plan. Alternate translation: “all that your power and your plan had predetermined to happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
629	ACT	4	28	a304	figs-hendiadys	ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι	1	all that your hand and your counsel had predetermined to happen	The words hand and counsel, joined by and, are expressing a single idea. The word hand, meaning “power,” tells by what means God intended to carry out his counsel, that is, his plan. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
630	ACT	4	28	a305	figs-personification	ὅσα ἡ χείρ σου, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ σου προώρισεν γενέσθαι	1	all that your hand and your counsel had predetermined to happen	The believers are speaking figuratively of God’s hand and his counsel (that is, his power and his plan) as if they had predetermined what would happen to Jesus. They mean that God himself had done this. Alternate translation: “all that you planned in advance to make happen by your power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
631	ACT	4	29	b38z		καὶ τὰ νῦν	1	And now	The believers use the expression And now to direct God’s attention to the request they are making in light of what they have said to this point in their prayer. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose.
632	ACT	4	29	t5qm	figs-idiom	ἔπιδε ἐπὶ τὰς ἀπειλὰς αὐτῶν	1	look upon their threats	The phrase look upon is an idiomatic way of asking God to pay attention to the threats that the Jewish leaders have made against the believers. Alternate translation: “pay attention to the threats they have made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
633	ACT	4	29	a306	figs-123person	τοῖς δούλοις σου	1	to your servants	The believers are speaking of themselves in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “to us, your servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
634	ACT	4	29	zh7j	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον σου	1	your word	The believers are using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
635	ACT	4	29	a307	figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ παρρησίας πάσης	1	with all boldness	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun boldness with an adverb such as “boldly.” The word all is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
636	ACT	4	30	x9r1	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ τὴν χεῖρά σου, ἐκτείνειν σε εἰς ἴασιν, καὶ σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα, γίνεσθαι	1	as you stretch out your hand to heal and for signs and wonders to happen	Here the hand figuratively represents God’s power. To stretch out the hand means to use it. So this is a prayer for God to do powerful things. Alternate translation: “as you do powerful things to heal people and to make signs and wonders happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
637	ACT	4	30	a308	figs-doublet	σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα	1	signs and wonders	The terms signs and wonders mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:43. Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
638	ACT	4	30	t5uw	figs-metonymy	διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος	1	through the name	Here, name refers figuratively to authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
639	ACT	4	30	txb5		τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ ἁγίου παιδός σου, Ἰησοῦ	1	the name of your holy Servant Jesus	Here the word Servant is a title for the Messiah. See the discussion of that term in the General Notes to chapter 3, and see how you translated it in 3:13, 3:26, and 4:27. Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus, your holy Messiah”
640	ACT	4	31	a309	writing-endofstory	καὶ	1	And	This verse is the end of the whole story of how the lame man was healed and how Peter and John were arrested as a result. Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
641	ACT	4	31	a310	figs-activepassive	ἐν ᾧ ἦσαν συνηγμένοι	1	in which they were gathered together	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “where they had gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
642	ACT	4	31	x9b3	figs-activepassive	ἐσαλεύθη	1	was shaken	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “shook” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
643	ACT	4	31	ps3m	figs-activepassive	ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	they were all filled with the Holy Spirit	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the same expression in 2:4. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
644	ACT	4	31	a311	figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	they were all filled with the Holy Spirit	Luke is speaking figuratively as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit filled. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
645	ACT	4	31	a312	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the word of God	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
646	ACT	4	31	a313	figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ παρρησίας	1	with boldness	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun boldness with an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
647	ACT	4	32	a314	grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	Now	Luke uses the word Now to introduce background information in 4:32–37 that will help readers understand further episodes in the story. These verses introduce Barnabas, who will be an important character in the book, and they also help account for what happens to Ananias and Sapphira in the next chapter. You can translate the word Now with a term or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
648	ACT	4	32	xu3j	figs-metonymy	ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία	1	was one in heart and soul	Here the word heart seems to represent the emotions and the word soul seems to represent the desires. Alternate translation: “thought the same way and desired the same things” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
649	ACT	4	32	a315	figs-doublet	ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία	1	was one in heart and soul	The terms heart and soul mean similar things, and Luke may be using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine the terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “was genuinely united” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
650	ACT	4	32	a316		τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ	1	of the things that were to him	Alternate translation: “of the things that he owned”
651	ACT	4	32	zyp5	figs-hyperbole	ἦν αὐτοῖς πάντα κοινά	1	everything was common to them	The word everything may be a generalization that emphasizes the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:44. Alternate translation: “they shared their belongings with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
652	ACT	4	33	a317	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	of the resurrection of the Lord Jesus	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun resurrection with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “of how God made the Lord Jesus alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
653	ACT	4	33	a318	writing-pronouns	χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς	1	great grace was upon them all	The pronoun them refers back to “the multitude of those who believed” in 4:32. It does not refer just to the apostles, who are mentioned in this verse. Alternate translation: “great grace was upon all of the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
654	ACT	4	33	d8dr	figs-abstractnouns	χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς	1	great grace was upon them all	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun grace with an equivalent expression. The word could describe: (1) how God was blessing the believers. Alternate translation: “God was blessing all of the believers in wonderful ways” (2) how the people in Jerusalem held the believers in high esteem. Alternate translation: “the people of Jerusalem thought very highly of all the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
655	ACT	4	34	a331	translate-versebridge	οὐδὲ γὰρ ἐνδεής τις ἦν ἐν αὐτοῖς	1	For there was not anyone needy among them	This statement expresses the result of the rest of what Luke says in this verse and what he says in the next verse. If it would be clearer in your language to put this result after the reasons for it, you could create a verse bridge by moving this statement to the end of the next verse and beginning it with the word “So” instead of For. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
656	ACT	4	34	a319	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	For	Luke uses the word For in its first instance in this verse to introduce the evidence or reason for his statement at the end of the previous verse that “great grace was upon them all.” The meaning here depends on the meaning there. Alternate translation: (1) “The way God was blessing the believers could be seen in the fact that” or (2) “One thing that made the people think very highly of the believers was that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
657	ACT	4	34	a320	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	2	for	Luke uses the word for in its second instance in this verse to introduce the reason why no one in the community of believers was needy. Alternate translation: “and the reason for this was that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
658	ACT	4	34	gw3v	figs-hyperbole	ὅσοι γὰρ κτήτορες χωρίων ἢ οἰκιῶν ὑπῆρχον	1	all who were owners of lands or houses	The word all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many believers who owned lands or houses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
659	ACT	4	34	l938	figs-activepassive	τὰς τιμὰς τῶν πιπρασκομένων	1	the price of the things being sold	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the money that they received from the things they sold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
660	ACT	4	35	a321	translate-symaction	ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	they were laying it at the feet of the apostles	The expression laying it at the feet indicates that believers who sold possessions were putting the money they got on the ground in front of the apostles. In this culture, that was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction)
661	ACT	4	35	vv4z	translate-symaction	ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	they were laying it at the feet of the apostles	In this culture, putting the money on the ground in front of the apostles was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
662	ACT	4	35	a322	figs-activepassive	διεδίδετο	1	it was being distributed	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles were distributing it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
663	ACT	4	35	ps4s	figs-abstractnouns	ἑκάστῳ, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν	1	to each one, according as anyone had need	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun need with a verb such as “need.” Alternate translation: “to every person in the amount that he needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
664	ACT	4	36	uc2a	writing-participants	Ἰωσὴφ δὲ	1	Then Joseph	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
665	ACT	4	36	a323	translate-names	Ἰωσὴφ…Βαρναβᾶς	1	Joseph … Barnabas	Joseph and Barnabas are two names for the same man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
666	ACT	4	36	a324	figs-activepassive	ὁ ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς, ἀπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	who was called Barnabas by the apostles	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles called Barnabas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
667	ACT	4	36	a325	figs-activepassive	ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως	1	which, being translated, is Son of Encouragement	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning of the passive verbal form being translated with an active form. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
668	ACT	4	36	a326	figs-explicit	ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως	1	which, being translated, is Son of Encouragement	Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name Barnabas means when translated from the Aramaic language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement in Aramaic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
669	ACT	4	36	nr4v	figs-idiom	υἱὸς παρακλήσεως	1	Son of Encouragement	The expression Son of figuratively describes a person who shares the qualities of something. The apostles used this name to describe Joseph’s behavior and character, since he was a person who encouraged others. Alternate translation: “the Encourager” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
670	ACT	4	36	a327	figs-abstractnouns	υἱὸς παρακλήσεως	1	Son of Encouragement	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun Encouragement with a verb such as “encourage.” Alternate translation: “the One who Encourages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
671	ACT	4	36	a328	translate-names	Λευείτης	1	a Levite	The name Levite describes a person from the tribe of Levi. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
672	ACT	4	36	a329	translate-names	Κύπριος	1	Cyprus	Cyprus is the name of an island. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
673	ACT	4	37	a330		ὑπάρχοντος αὐτῷ	1	that was to him	See how you translated the similar expression in 4:32. Alternate translation: “that he owned”
674	ACT	4	37	gtv5	translate-symaction	ἔθηκεν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	laid it at the feet of the apostles	See how you translated the similar expression in 4:35. Alternate translation: “presented it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
675	ACT	5	intro	k2uh			0		Acts 05 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter “Why has Satan filled your heart for you to lie to the Holy Spirit?” (5:3) No one knows for sure whether Ananias and Sapphira were truly Christians when they decided to lie about the land that they sold (5:1-10), because Luke does not say. However, Peter knew that they lied to the believers, and he knew that they had listened to and obeyed Satan. When they lied to the believers, they also lied to the Holy Spirit. This is because the Holy Spirit lives inside believers. Possible translation difficulties in this chapter Long sentences Acts 5:36 consists of a single long sentence. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be clearer in your translation to divide it into several sentences, as UST does. There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 5:38 to nearly the end of 5:39. In this case as well it may be clearer in your translation to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.
676	ACT	5	1	v27a	writing-participants	ἀνὴρ δέ τις	1	Now a certain man	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
677	ACT	5	1	ysl9	translate-names	Ἁνανίας	1	Ananias	Ananias is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
678	ACT	5	1	a332	writing-participants	σὺν Σαπφείρῃ τῇ γυναικὶ αὐτοῦ	1	with Sapphira his wife	Luke uses this phrase to introduce another new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
679	ACT	5	1	a333	translate-names	Σαπφείρῃ	1	Sapphria	Sapphira is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
680	ACT	5	2	a334	figs-explicit	ἐνοσφίσατο ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς	1	he kept back from the price	The implication, as the story later makes clear, is that Ananias did not tell anyone except his wife that he was keeping some of the money for himself. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly, and you could say why he did this. Alternate translation: “he kept some of the money from the sale for himself, but he did not admit that he was doing that, because he wanted everyone to think he was being completely generous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
681	ACT	5	2	xm1t		συνειδυίης καὶ τῆς γυναικός, καὶ ἐνέγκας μέρος τι…ἔθηκεν	1	his wife also knowing, and bringing a certain portion, he laid	It may be helpful to make two new sentences here, particularly if you add information to the previous phrase as suggested in the preceding note. Alternate translation: “His wife also knew that he was keeping back part of the sale money. He brought a certain portion of the money and laid it”
682	ACT	5	2	dy8b	figs-idiom	παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων ἔθηκεν	1	he laid it at the feet of the apostles	This means that he presented to money to the apostles. See how you translated the same expression in 4:37. Alternate translation: “he presented it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
683	ACT	5	3	grr9	figs-rquestion	διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου, ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου?	1	why has Satan filled your heart for you to lie to the Holy Spirit and to keep back from the price of the land?	Peter is using the question form to rebuke Ananias. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “you should not have let Satan fill your heart so that you lied to the Holy Spirit and kept back from the price of the land!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
684	ACT	5	3	pqd4	figs-metaphor	διὰ τί ἐπλήρωσεν ὁ Σατανᾶς τὴν καρδίαν σου	1	why has Satan filled your heart	Peter is speaking figuratively of the heart of Ananias as if it were a container that Satan had filled. Alternate translation: “why have you allowed Satan to influence your heart so strongly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
685	ACT	5	3	a335	figs-metaphor	τὴν καρδίαν σου	1	your heart	Here, the heart figuratively represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
686	ACT	5	3	a426	figs-events	ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς τοῦ χωρίου	1	for you to lie to the Holy Spirit and to keep back from the price of the land	Ananais first withheld some of the money, then he lied to the Holy Spirit about this by pretending he was giving all of the money. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “for you to keep back from the price of the land and lie to the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
687	ACT	5	3	zz5u	figs-metonymy	ψεύσασθαί σε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1	for you to lie to the Holy Spirit	Ananias did not lie literally to the Holy Spirit, but he did lie to the apostles and to all of the believers who would have learned about his gift, and the Holy Spirit was present in them. So by lying to them, he was effectively also lying to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “for you to lie to the Holy Spirit, who is present in us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
688	ACT	5	3	a336	figs-explicit	καὶ νοσφίσασθαι ἀπὸ τῆς τιμῆς	1	and to keep back from the price of the land	The implication of what Peter says here is that Ananias claimed or pretended that he was giving the entire amount that he had received from selling his land. Alternate translation: “by pretendng that you were giving us the entire amount when you had kept back some for yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
689	ACT	5	4	vu7g	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ μένον σοὶ ἔμενεν, καὶ πραθὲν ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν?	1	While it remained, did it not remain yours, and being sold, was it not in your authority?	Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this as a statement. Alternate translation: “While it remained, it remained yours, and after it was sold, it was still in your authority.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
690	ACT	5	4	vi8w		ἔμενεν	1	While it remained	Alternate translation: “While it remained unsold” or “Before you sold it”
691	ACT	5	4	k7nc	figs-activepassive	πραθὲν	1	being sold	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “once you had sold it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
692	ACT	5	4	a337	writing-pronouns	ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν	1	was it not in your authority	The pronoun it refers to the money that Ananias received from the sale of the land. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could still do whatever you wanted with the money you received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
693	ACT	5	4	a338	writing-pronouns	ἐν τῇ σῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ὑπῆρχεν	1	was it not in your authority	The implications are that Ananias was not obligated to give all of the money to the apostles. He was free to keep some if he wished or if he needed it. He could simply have acknowledged that he was doing that, and giving the rest of the money would still have been a generous act because there was no compulsion. Alternate translation, as a statement: “you could have kept some and acknowledged that and you would have still been making a generous gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
694	ACT	5	4	i5dw	figs-rquestion	τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο?	1	How is it that you placed this thing in your heart?	Peter continues to use the question form to rebuke Ananias. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have placed this thing in your heart!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
695	ACT	5	4	a339	figs-metaphor	τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο?	1	How is it that you placed this thing in your heart?	Here, the heart figuratively represents the thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not have placed this thing in your thoughts!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
696	ACT	5	4	a340	figs-metaphor	τί ὅτι ἔθου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ σου τὸ πρᾶγμα τοῦτο?	1	How is it that you placed this thing in your heart?	Peter speaks figuratively of this thing, that is, the plan to keep back some of the money, as if Ananias had placed it in his heart, meaning his thoughts. Alternate translation, as an exclamation: “You should not even have thought of doing such a thing!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
697	ACT	5	4	a341	figs-metonymy	οὐκ ἐψεύσω ἀνθρώποις, ἀλλὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1	You have not lied to men, but to God	Ananaias actually has lied to men, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of his act. As in the previous verse, where Peter says that Ananias has lied to the Holy Spirit, here he means that Ananias has lied to the apostles and other believers, and God is present in them. So by lying to them, he has effectively also lied to God. Alternate translation: “You have not lied merely to men, but also to God, who is present in us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
698	ACT	5	4	a342	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1	to men	Peter is using the term men in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “to human beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
699	ACT	5	5	a343	figs-metonymy	ἀκούων δὲ…τοὺς λόγους τούτους	1	And hearing these words	Luke is using the term words figuratively to mean what Peter used words to say. Alternate translation: “When he heard what Peter said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
700	ACT	5	5	cc5y	figs-euphemism	πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν	1	falling down, expired	The word translated expired means that Ananias “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that he died. Alternate translation: “fell down and died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
701	ACT	5	5	a344	figs-events	πεσὼν ἐξέψυξεν	1	falling down, expired	Ananias fell down because he died. He did not die because he fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to say first that he died and then that he fell. Alternate translation: “died and fell to the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
702	ACT	5	5	a345	figs-personification	ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας	1	great fear came upon all who heard	Luke describes this fear figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Here the word fear describes a deep respect for God. Alternate translation: “everyone who heard about it came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
703	ACT	5	6	a346	figs-idiom	ἀναστάντες δὲ, οἱ νεώτεροι συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν	1	rising up, the young men wrapped him up	Here the expression rising up means that the young men took an action that they recognized they needed to take. It does not mean that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “the young men took action and wrapped him up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
704	ACT	5	6	a347	figs-explicit	οἱ νεώτεροι	1	the young men	This could refer to: (1) some strong young men who were present who realized that burying Ananias was a task they could help with. Alternate translation: “some strong young men who were present” (2) a group of young men among the believers who regularly helped the apostles with tasks that required physical strength. Alternate translation: “the young men who regularly helped the apostles with physical tasks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
705	ACT	5	6	a348	translate-unknown	συνέστειλαν αὐτὸν	1	wrapped him up	It was the custom in this culture to wrap linen cloths around the bodies of people who had died, in order to prepare the bodies for burial. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could describe it more specifically, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “wrapped a linen burial cloth around his body” or “prepared his body for burial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
706	ACT	5	7	a349	figs-idiom	ἐγένετο δὲ ὡς ὡρῶν τριῶν διάστημα, καὶ	1	And an interval of about three hours happened, and	This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time passing. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “After about three hours had gone by,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
707	ACT	5	7	ry54	writing-pronouns	ἡ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ	1	his wife	The pronoun his refers to Ananias. Alternate translation: “the wife of Ananias” or “Sapphira” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
708	ACT	5	7	k3c9	figs-explicit	τὸ γεγονὸς	1	what had happened	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly what this means. Alternate translation: “that Peter had exposed their lie and that her husband was dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
709	ACT	5	8	a350		ἀπεκρίθη…πρὸς αὐτὴν	1	said to her	The word translated said means to continue or resume a conversation. Alternate translation: “asked her, based on what her husband had said”
710	ACT	5	8	a351	figs-youdual	ἀπέδοσθε	1	you sold	Since Peter is speaking of two people, Ananaias and Sapphira, you would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
711	ACT	5	8	bcf6	figs-explicit	τοσούτου… ναί, τοσούτου	1	for so much … yes, for so much	This refers to the amount of money that Ananias had given to the apostles. Peter may be naming the amount or, as UST suggests, he may be showing Sapphira the money. Alternate translation: “for this amount of money … yes, for that amount of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
712	ACT	5	9	v7sw	figs-rquestion	τί ὅτι συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου?	1	How is it that it was agreed together by you to test the Spirit of the Lord?	Peter is using the question form to rebuke Sapphira. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should not have agreed together to test the Spirit of the Lord!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
713	ACT	5	9	hc22	figs-activepassive	συνεφωνήθη ὑμῖν	1	it was agreed together by you	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “you agreed together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
714	ACT	5	9	w1lb	figs-you	ὑμῖν…σου…σε	1	by you … your … you	The word you in its first instance refers to two people, Ananias and Sapphira, so it would be dual if your language uses that form. Otherwise, it would be plural. The word your and the word you in its second instance refer only to Sapphira, so those words are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
715	ACT	5	9	pg1e		πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου	1	to test the Spirit of the Lord	Here the word test means to challenge. Ananias and Sapphira were trying to see if they could get away with lying about how much they received for the land they sold. Alternate translation: “to challenge the Spirit of the Lord”
716	ACT	5	9	a352	figs-metonymy	πειράσαι τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου	1	to test the Spirit of the Lord	Ananias and Sapphira actually tested or challenged the apostles, but Peter is speaking of the ultimate implications of their act, as he does similarly in 5:3 and 5:4. Since the Spirit of the Lord was present in the apostles, by challenging them, Ananias and Sapphira effectively lied to the Spirit. Alternate translation: “to test the Spirit of the Lord, who is present in us apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
717	ACT	5	9	a353	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, οἱ πόδες	1	Behold, the feet	Peter says Behold to get Sapphira to focus her attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “And now the feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
718	ACT	5	9	xj1l	figs-metonymy	οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ	1	the feet of those who buried your husband are at the door	Peter is referring figuratively to the return of the young men who buried Ananaias. Their feet represent them by association with the way they are using their feet to walk back. The door represents their return by association with the way they will come through the door when they return. Alternate translation: “the young men who buried your husband are just now returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
719	ACT	5	9	a354	figs-explicit	οἱ πόδες τῶν θαψάντων τὸν ἄνδρα σου ἐπὶ τῇ θύρᾳ	1	the feet of those who buried your husband are at the door	Peter is telling Sapphira implicitly that her husband died as a judgment from God when Peter confronted him with the lie about the price of the land. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “your husband died as a judgment from God when I confronted him with the lie you both told about the price of the land, and the young men who buried him are just now returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
720	ACT	5	9	a355	figs-explicit	καὶ ἐξοίσουσίν σε	1	and they will carry you out	The implications are that Sapphira is also going to die and that the same young men will carry her out to bury her. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You are also going to die as a judgment from God, and those same young men are going to carry you out and bury you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
721	ACT	5	10	s7en	figs-euphemism	ἔπεσεν…πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν	1	she fell down at his feet and expired	The word translated expired means that Sapphira “breathed out for the last time.” It is a mild way of saying that she died. Alternate translation: “she fell down at his feet and died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
722	ACT	5	10	a356	figs-events	ἔπεσεν…πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐξέψυξεν	1	she fell down at his feet and expired	Sapphira fell down because she died. She did not die because she fell down. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to to say first that she died and then that she fell. Alternate translation: “she died and fell down at his feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
723	ACT	5	10	nwb9	figs-metonymy	ἔπεσεν…πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ	1	she fell down at his feet	This means that she fell to the ground in front of Peter. This expression should not be confused with the idea of “falling down at a person’s feet,” that is, bowing down to the ground in front of someone as a sign of humility. Alternate translation: “she collapsed onto the ground in front of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
724	ACT	5	10	a357	figs-explicit	οἱ νεανίσκοι	1	the young men	See how you translated this expression in 5:6. However, it may not be necessary to explain again here who these young men were in terms of their role in the community. Instead, you could identify them by their role in the story. Alternate translation: “the same young men who had buried Ananias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
725	ACT	5	11	vym8	writing-endofstory	καὶ	1	And	This verse is the end of the story about Ananias and Sapphira. Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information about what happened after the story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
726	ACT	5	11	a358	figs-personification	ἐγένετο φόβος μέγας ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, καὶ ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας ταῦτα	1	great fear came upon the whole church and upon all those hearing these things	Luke describes this fear figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. See how you translated the similar expression in 5:5. Alternate translation: “the whole church and everyone who heard about these things came to feel a very deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
727	ACT	5	12	c2e7	grammar-connect-time-background	δὲ	1	And	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce background information in 5:12–16 that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. You can translate this word with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
728	ACT	5	12	sri8	figs-metonymy	διὰ…τῶν χειρῶν τῶν ἀποστόλων, ἐγίνετο σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα πολλὰ	1	many signs and wonders were happening through the hands of the apostles	Luke is using the hands of the apostles figuratively to represent their actions. Alternate translation: “the apostles were doing many signs and wonders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
729	ACT	5	12	ux3n	figs-doublet	σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα	1	signs and wonders	The terms signs and wonders mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated this expression in 4:30. Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
730	ACT	5	12	aud2	writing-pronouns	ἦσαν…πάντες	1	they were all	The pronoun they refers to the whole community of believers. Alternate translation: “the whole community of believers was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
731	ACT	5	12	a359		ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	unanimously	The word unanimously indicates that the apostles and other believers shared a common commitment and purpose and that there was no strife among them. See how you translated the same expression in 1:14. Alternate translation: “meeting together with one accord” or “meeting together harmoniously”
732	ACT	5	12	k99k	translate-names	τῇ Στοᾷ Σολομῶντος	1	the Porch of Solomon	This was a covered walkway that consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. It was named after King Solomon. See how you translated the phrase “the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11, which is a description of this same walkway. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
733	ACT	5	13	a360	figs-explicit	τῶν…λοιπῶν, οὐδεὶς	1	none of the others	The expression the others refers to people who were not believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “none of the people who were not believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
734	ACT	5	13	a361	figs-explicit	ἐτόλμα κολλᾶσθαι αὐτοῖς	1	dared to join them	If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly why no unbelievers dared to join them. The reason seems to be that the Jewish leaders had commanded the apostles not to speak or teach about Jesus (4:18), but they were still doing that. Later in this chapter, in 5:28, the Sanhedrin indicates that it has arrested the apostles for violating that command. Alternate translation: “would meet with them, because the apostles were still preaching about Jesus even though the Jewish leaders had commanded them not to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
735	ACT	5	14	a362	figs-metonymy	προσετίθεντο…τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	were being added to the Lord	Luke says the Lord figuratively to mean the community of people who believed in the Lord. Alternate translation: “were being added to the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
736	ACT	5	14	m9wx	figs-activepassive	προσετίθεντο…τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	were being added to the Lord	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:41. Alternate translation: “were becoming part of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
737	ACT	5	15	a364	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	so that	Luke says so that to introduce a result, but it is not the direct result of what he said just before, that many men and women became part of the church. It is the result of what he said in 5:12, that the apostles were doing “many signs and wonders.” All of 5:12–15 could be understood as a single sentence, and in that case what Luke says here would more clearly follow logically and grammatically from what he says in 5:12. However, ULT divides the material into several sentences, which is another way in which it can be understood. UST models a way to show how what Luke says here introduces a result of what he said in 5:12 about the “signs and wonders” that the apostles were doing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
738	ACT	5	15	l9bs	writing-pronouns	ἐκφέρειν	1	they … carried	The pronoun they refers to the people who lived in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “people who lived in Jerusalem … carried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
739	ACT	5	15	a365	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἀσθενεῖς	1	the sick	Luke is using the adjective sick as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
740	ACT	5	15	a366	figs-doublet	κλιναρίων καὶ κραβάττων	1	cots and mats	The words cots and mats mean similar things. Luke could be using them together for emphasis, although he could also be describing two different ways that people managed to make their sick relatives and friends reasonably comfortable as they waited in the streets for Peter to walk by. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “improvised beds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
741	ACT	5	15	y2ev	figs-explicit	ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν	1	his shadow might overshadow any one of them	The implication is that God was healing sick people whom Peter’s shadow touched. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “his shadow might overshadow any one of them and God would heal that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
742	ACT	5	15	a367		ἡ σκιὰ ἐπισκιάσῃ τινὶ αὐτῶν	1	his shadow might overshadow	Luke is using a construction in which the subject and verb come from the same root. You may be able to use the same construction in your language to express the meaning here. Alternatively, your language may have its own way of describing this. Alternate translation: “his shadow might fall on”
743	ACT	5	16	a368	figs-nominaladj	ἀσθενεῖς	1	the sick	See how you translated the expression the sick in 5:15. Alternate translation: “people who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
744	ACT	5	16	fu1a	figs-activepassive	ὀχλουμένους ὑπὸ πνευμάτων ἀκαθάρτων	1	those afflicted by unclean spirits	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom unclean spirits were afflicting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
745	ACT	5	16	lyc7	figs-activepassive	οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες	1	who were all healed	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “and the apostles healed them all” or “and God used the apostles to heal them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
746	ACT	5	16	a369	figs-hyperbole	οἵτινες ἐθεραπεύοντο ἅπαντες	1	who were all healed	It does not appear that all is a generalization for emphasis in this case. So it would not be accurate to treat all as figurative and say something like “and large numbers of them were healed.” Luke is describing what remarkable things God did through the apostles at this time, and he does seem to mean that every sick person whom the people brought to Jerusalem was healed. So it would be appropriate to say in your translation just what ULT says here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
747	ACT	5	17	x2ed	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	But	Luke uses the word But to introduce a strong contrast into the story. Your language may have its own way of introducing a contrasting narrative. You could also refer back to the previous action in order to highlight the contrast. Alternate translation: “But even though the apostles were doing so much good,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
748	ACT	5	17	f9ye	figs-events	ἀναστὰς…ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου,	1	rising up, the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy	The high priest and these Sadducees were first filled with jealousy and then they rose up (took action) against the apostles. To make this clear in your translation, it may be helpful to describe the events in that order. Alternate translation: “the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy and they rose up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]])
749	ACT	5	17	pc45	figs-activepassive	ἀναστὰς…ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου,	1	rising up, the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form were filled. Alternate translation: “jealousy filled the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) and they rose up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
750	ACT	5	17	a370	figs-idiom	ἀναστὰς	1	rising up	Here the expression rising up means that the high priest decided to take action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “taking action” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
751	ACT	5	17	a371	figs-explicit	πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων	1	all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees)	The phrase all those with him means specifically all the other priests who joined the high priest in taking action against the apostles. Luke observes here that those other priests were from the group known as the Sadducees. As a note to 4:1 explains, they opposed the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and all of the priests from the group known as the Sadducees who wanted to oppose the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
752	ACT	5	17	a372	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου	1	were filled with jealousy	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun jealousy with an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
753	ACT	5	17	a373	figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου	1	were filled with jealousy	Luke is speaking figuratively as if the high priest and his allies were containers that jealousy filled. Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
754	ACT	5	18	j58p	figs-metonymy	ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους	1	they laid hands on the apostles	The expression laid hands on figuratively means to arrest someone, by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their hands. Alternate translation: “they arrested the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
755	ACT	5	18	a374	figs-synecdoche	ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους	1	they laid hands on the apostles	The high priest and his allies did not arrest the apostles personally. They would have ordered the temple guards to arrest them. But Luke speaks figuratively as if the high priest and his allies did this action because they had a significant part in it by ordering it. Alternate translation: “they had the temple guards arrest the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
756	ACT	5	19	wd37	writing-pronouns	ἐξαγαγών…αὐτοὺς	1	bringing them out	The pronoun them refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “bringing the apostles out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
757	ACT	5	20	qm16	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	in the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
758	ACT	5	20	z1x3	figs-metonymy	πάντα τὰ ῥήματα τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης	1	all the words of this life	The angel is using the term words figuratively to mean the message that the apostles were to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the entire message about this life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
759	ACT	5	20	a375		τῆς ζωῆς ταύτης	1	of this life	Alternate translation: “about the everlasting life that God gives through Jesus” or “about the new way of living that people can have as followers of Jesus”
760	ACT	5	21	a376	figs-idiom	ἀκούσαντες	1	having heard this	Luke may be using the word “hear” in an idiomatic sense to mean “obey.” Alternate translation: “in obedience to this command from the angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
761	ACT	5	21	df1u	figs-explicit	εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	into the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
762	ACT	5	21	l7uf	figs-explicit	ὑπὸ τὸν ὄρθρον	1	about daybreak	The implication is that although the angel led the apostles out of the jail during the night, the sun was rising by the time they reached the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “as it was beginning to get light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
763	ACT	5	21	a377	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	δὲ	1	And	Luke is using the word translated And to introduce other events that took place around the same time as the events he has just described. Alternate translation: “Meanwhile,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
764	ACT	5	21	a378	figs-explicit	παραγενόμενος	1	having arrived	This does not mean that the high priest and his allies arrived in the temple courtyard where the apostles were. Rather, it means that they went into the chamber where the Sanhedrin met so that they could summon the rest of its members to join them there. Alternate translation: “having arrived in the council chamber” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
765	ACT	5	21	a379	figs-explicit	τὸ Συνέδριον καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν Γερουσίαν τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ	1	the Sanhedrin, even all the elders of the sons of Israel	The phrase even all the elders of the sons of Israel clarifies the name Sanhedrin by describing it membership. Luke is using the word elders here in a general sense to mean “leaders.” He is not making a distinction between “elders” and “rulers” as he does in 4:5. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, which was composed of the leaders of the sons of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
766	ACT	5	21	a380	figs-metaphor	τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ	1	the sons of Israel	Here, sons figuratively means “descendants.” Luke is identifying the Israelites as descendants of their ancestor Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
767	ACT	5	21	li6a	figs-ellipsis	ἀπέστειλαν εἰς τὸ δεσμωτήριον	1	sent to the prison	Luke is leaving out a word that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. He means that the high priest and his allies sent someone to the prison to get the apostles. Alternate translation: “sent someone to the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
768	ACT	5	23	a381	figs-activepassive	τὸ δεσμωτήριον εὕρομεν κεκλεισμένον ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ, καὶ τοὺς φύλακας	1	We found the prison shut in all security and the guards	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an active verbal form in place of the passive form shut, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “We found that the guards had shut the prison in all security and we found the guards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
769	ACT	5	23	a382	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ	1	in all security	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun security with an adverb such as “securely.” The word all is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very securely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
770	ACT	5	23	a383	figs-explicit	ἀνοίξαντες	1	having opened	Your language may require you to specify the object of opened. Alternate translation: “once we opened the doors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
771	ACT	5	23	ld7d	figs-hyperbole	ἔσω οὐδένα εὕρομεν	1	we found no one inside	By no one, the officers mean that they found none of the men they had been sent to bring, that is, none of the apostles. It is possible that other people were also being held in the prison, but the angel would not have released them, and they would still have been inside. Alternate translation: “we did not find any of the apostles inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
772	ACT	5	24	k5g6	figs-metonymy	τοὺς λόγους τούτους	1	these words	Luke is using the term words figuratively to mean the report that the officers gave. Alternate translation: “this report” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
773	ACT	5	24	baw2	writing-pronouns	περὶ αὐτῶν	1	concerning them	The pronoun them does not refer to the apostles but to the words that the officers spoke in giving their report. Alternate translation: “about the things the officers had told them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
774	ACT	5	24	p78m	figs-idiom	τί ἂν γένοιτο τοῦτο	1	as to what this might become	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “wondering what would happen as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
775	ACT	5	25	a384	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, οἱ ἄνδρες	1	Behold, the men	This person says Behold to get the council members to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Right now the men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
776	ACT	5	25	a8dz	figs-you	ἔθεσθε	1	you put	Here the word you refers to the captain of the temple and the chief priests and so it is plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
777	ACT	5	25	c1am	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, ἑστῶτες	1	standing in the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
778	ACT	5	26	e24h	writing-pronouns	τότε ἀπελθὼν, ὁ στρατηγὸς σὺν τοῖς ὑπηρέταις ἦγεν αὐτούς, οὐ μετὰ βίας, ἐφοβοῦντο γὰρ τὸν λαόν, μὴ λιθασθῶσιν	1	Then the captain, going with the officers, brought them back, not with violence, for they feared the people, lest they stone them	The first instance of them refers to the apostles, but the second instance of them refers to the captain and the officers. The captain and officers were not afraid that the people would stone the apostles. They were afraid that they would be stoned themselves if they used violence against the apostles. You could reword this to make the referents clear. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “Then the captain went with the officers and brought the apostles back. But the captain and officers did not use any violence, because they were afraid that the people would stone them if they did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
779	ACT	5	27	iq7w	writing-pronouns	ἀγαγόντες δὲ αὐτοὺς	1	And having brought them	The pronoun them refers to the apostles in all three instances in this verse. It may be helpful to specify this here in the first instance. Alternate translation: “Once they had brought the apostles back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
780	ACT	5	28	a385		παραγγελίᾳ παρηγγείλαμεν ὑμῖν	1	We commanded you with a command	For emphasis, the high priest is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. If your language uses the same construction for emphasis, it would be appropriate to use it here in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of conveying this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we commanded you very strictly”
781	ACT	5	28	f7pz	figs-you	ὑμῖν…πεπληρώκατε…ὑμῶν…βούλεσθε	1	you … you have filled … your … you desire	In this verse the words you and your refer to the apostles, and so those words are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
782	ACT	5	28	g2hi	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ	1	in this name	Here, name figuratively means the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in 4:17. Alternate translation: “about this person Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
783	ACT	5	28	a386	figs-metaphor	ἰδοὺ, πεπληρώκατε	1	behold, you have filled	The high priest says behold to get the apostles to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “nevertheless you have filled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
784	ACT	5	28	j4kr	figs-metaphor	πεπληρώκατε τὴν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τῆς διδαχῆς ὑμῶν	1	you have filled Jerusalem with your teaching	The high priest is speaking figuratively of Jerusalem as if it were a container that the apostles had filled with their teaching. Alternate translation: “you have taught people who live in every part of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
785	ACT	5	28	a387	figs-metaphor	βούλεσθε ἐπαγαγεῖν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς	1	you desire to bring upon us	The high priest is speaking figuratively as if the apostles wanted to put the blood of Jesus on him and his fellow Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “you want to make us responsible for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
786	ACT	5	28	a388	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1	us	By us, the high priest means himself and his fellow Jewish leaders, but not the apostles to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
787	ACT	5	28	ym1k	figs-metonymy	τὸ αἷμα	1	the blood	The high priest is using the term blood figuratively to mean death, by association with the way Jesus’ blood was shed when he died. Alternate translation: “the death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
788	ACT	5	28	a389	figs-explicit	τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τούτου	1	this man	The phrase this man refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “this man Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
789	ACT	5	29	a390	figs-hendiadys	ἀποκριθεὶς…Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν	1	answering, Peter and the apostles said	Together the words answering and said mean that Peter and the other apostles responded to the high priest. Alternate translation: “Peter and the apostles responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
790	ACT	5	29	di9u	figs-explicit	Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι εἶπαν	1	Peter and the apostles said	Luke seems to mean implicitly that Peter said what follows on behalf of all of the apostles. Alternate translation: “Peter said on behalf of all of the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
791	ACT	5	29	a391	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1	men	Peter is using the term men in a generic sense to mean “human beings.” Alternate translation: “human beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
792	ACT	5	30	a392	figs-metaphor	τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	of our fathers	Peter is using the term fathers figuratively to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “of our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
793	ACT	5	30	r7av	figs-idiom	ἤγειρεν Ἰησοῦν	1	raised up Jesus	As in 2:24, the idiom raised up means that God made Jesus alive again after he died. Alternate translation: “brought Jesus back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
794	ACT	5	30	a393	figs-you	ὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε	1	whom you killed	The word you is plural. Even though Peter is responding to the high priest, who has been interrogating the apostles, Peter is referring here to the entire council. If your language does not use separate forms for singular and plural “you,” you could indicate that in some other way. Alternate translation: “whom you Sanhedrin members killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
795	ACT	5	30	a394	figs-synecdoche	ὃν ὑμεῖς διεχειρίσασθε	1	whom you killed	It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that the Sanhedrin members killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “whom you demanded to be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
796	ACT	5	30	pu5j	figs-metonymy	κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου	1	having hung him on a tree	The word translated as tree can mean either an actual tree or something made of wood. Peter is using the word to refer to the cross, which was made out of wood. Alternate translation: “having hung him on a wooden cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
797	ACT	5	30	a395	figs-explicit	κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου	1	having hung him on a tree	In some languages the word hung would suggest a different method of execution. For clarity, you could use a different word that might indicate the actual meaning better. Alternate translation: “having suspended him from a wooden cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
798	ACT	5	31	a396	figs-nominaladj	τοῦτον	1	this one	Peter is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “this Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
799	ACT	5	31	a397	figs-nominaladj	τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ	1	to his right	Peter is using the adjective right as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:25. Alternate translation: “to his right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
800	ACT	5	31	uh2d	translate-symaction	τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ	1	to his right	God placing Jesus at his right side was a symbolic way of giving him great honor. Alternate translation: “to a place of great honor next to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
801	ACT	5	31	mr1d	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ δοῦναι μετάνοιαν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ καὶ ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν	1	to give repentance and forgiveness of sins to Israel	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns repentance and forgiveness with verbs. Alternate translation: “to give the people of Israel an opportunity to repent and have God forgive their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
802	ACT	5	31	q1il	figs-personification	Ἰσραὴλ	1	Israel	Peter is referring figuratively to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
803	ACT	5	32	a398	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	we	Peter is addressing the Sanhedrin, but he is using the word we to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that we is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
804	ACT	5	32	a399	figs-ellipsis	καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ	1	and the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those obeying him	Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those obeying him, is also a witness of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
805	ACT	5	32	yml6	figs-explicit	ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ	1	whom God has given to those obeying him	Here at the end of his response to the high priest, Peter is echoing what he said at the beginning: “It is necessary to obey God rather than men.” He is defining himself and his fellow apostles as people who are committed to obeying God and to testifying about Jesus even if the authorities forbid them to do that. Peter is saying that God has given the apostles the Holy Spirit to empower them to give that testimony in obedience to him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “whom God has given us to empower us to obey him by testifying about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
806	ACT	5	33	abx6	writing-pronouns	οἱ…ἀκούσαντες διεπρίοντο, καὶ ἐβούλοντο ἀνελεῖν αὐτούς	1	having heard this, they were furious and wanted to kill them	The pronoun they refers to the council members and the pronoun them refers to the apostles. Alternate translation: “the council members were furious when they heard this, and they wanted to kill the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
807	ACT	5	34	i2rr	writing-participants	τις…Φαρισαῖος ὀνόματι Γαμαλιήλ	1	a certain Pharisee, Gamaliel by name	Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
808	ACT	5	34	a400	translate-names	Φαρισαῖος	1	Pharisee	The name Pharisee describes a member of a group of Jewish priests. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
809	ACT	5	34	a401	translate-names	Γαμαλιήλ	1	Gamaliel	Gamaliel is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
810	ACT	5	34	a402	writing-background	νομοδιδάσκαλος τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	a law teacher, honored by all the people	Luke provides this background information about Gamaliel to help readers understand what happens next in the story, when the council members follow Gamaliel’s advice to be patient rather than acting immediately against the apostles. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. It may be helpful to do that in a separate sentence, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
811	ACT	5	34	fpr4	figs-activepassive	τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	honored by all the people	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom all the people honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
812	ACT	5	34	a403	figs-hyperbole	τίμιος παντὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	honored by all the people	The word all is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “whom the people greatly honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
813	ACT	5	34	a404	translate-symaction	ἀναστὰς	1	rising up	Here, rising up means that Gamaliel stood up. He did that to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
814	ACT	5	34	xk6g	figs-explicit	ἐκέλευσεν ἔξω…τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ποιῆσαι	1	commanded to put the apostles outside	Your language may require you to specify the object of commanded. Alternate translation: “commanded the officers to take the apostles outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
815	ACT	5	34	a405	figs-nominaladj	βραχὺ	1	for a little	Luke is using the adjective little as a noun in order to indicate a length of time. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can supply a word such as “while” to show this. Alternate translation: “for a little while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
816	ACT	5	35	a406	grammar-connect-time-sequential	τε	1	And	Luke is using the word translated And to indicate that Gamaliel spoke after the officers had taken the apostles out of the council chamber. Alternate translation: “Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]])
817	ACT	5	35	a407	figs-idiom	ἄνδρες, Ἰσραηλεῖται	1	Men, Israelites	This is an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
818	ACT	5	35	ae1u	figs-explicit	προσέχετε ἑαυτοῖς ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τούτοις τί μέλλετε πράσσειν	1	pay attention to yourselves, what you are about to do to these men	Gamaliel is warning the council members not to do something that they will later regret. He means “be very careful about what you do to these men,” and you could say that as an alternate translation. However, the implication is that the council should not kill the apostles, as 5:33 says they want to do. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you need to be very cautious and not kill these men, because you might deeply regret that later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
819	ACT	5	36	a408	figs-idiom	πρὸ…τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν	1	before these days	Gamaliel is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “some time ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
820	ACT	5	36	a409	translate-names	Θευδᾶς	1	Theudas	Theudas is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
821	ACT	5	36	uaj6	figs-metaphor	ἀνέστη	1	rose up	In this context, rose up figuratively means that Theudas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
822	ACT	5	36	b3nl	figs-idiom	λέγων εἶναί τινα ἑαυτόν	1	saying himself to be somebody	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “saying that he was somebody important” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
823	ACT	5	36	a410	figs-activepassive	ᾧ προσεκλίθη ἀνδρῶν ἀριθμὸς	1	to whom was joined a number of men	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom a number of men joined” or, as a new sentence, “A number of men joined him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
824	ACT	5	36	ie3x	figs-activepassive	ὃς ἀνῃρέθη	1	who was killed	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. It may be helpful to begin another new sentence here. Alternate translation: “whom the Romans killed” or, as a new sentence, “But the Romans killed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
825	ACT	5	36	juz1	figs-activepassive	ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ	1	as many as were persuaded by him	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
826	ACT	5	36	a411	figs-activepassive	διελύθησαν	1	were dispersed	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “dispersed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
827	ACT	5	36	rzg5		καὶ ἐγένοντο εἰς οὐδέν	1	and they came to nothing	Alternate translation: “and their plans did not succeed”
828	ACT	5	37	f33y	figs-nominaladj	μετὰ τοῦτον	1	After this one	Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective this as a noun to refer to a specific person, Theudas. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “After him” or “After Theudas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
829	ACT	5	37	a412	translate-names	Ἰούδας ὁ Γαλιλαῖος	1	Judas the Galilean	Judas is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name in 1:13 and 1:16. (Those verses describe two other men with this name, not the same Judas as here.) Galilean is the name for someone who is from the region of Galilee. See how you translated that name in 1:11. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
830	ACT	5	37	a413	figs-metaphor	ἀνέστη	1	rose up	As in 5:36, rose up here figuratively means that Judas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
831	ACT	5	37	p56f	figs-idiom	ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῆς ἀπογραφῆς	1	in the days of the census	Gamaliel is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time of the census” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
832	ACT	5	37	kz4s	figs-idiom	ἀπέστησε λαὸν ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ	1	drew away people after him	Here, drew away is an idiom that means Judas persuaded people to rebel with him against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “persuaded people to join him in rebellion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
833	ACT	5	37	a414	figs-nominaladj	κἀκεῖνος	1	That one also	Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective that as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding one.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “He also” or “Judas also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
834	ACT	5	37	a415	figs-activepassive	ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ	1	as many as were persuaded by him	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “as many as he had persuaded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
835	ACT	5	37	a416	figs-activepassive	διεσκορπίσθησαν	1	were scattered	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “scattered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
836	ACT	5	38	i4bw		καὶ τὰ νῦν λέγω ὑμῖν	1	And now I say these things to you	Gamaliel uses this expression to shift the council members’ attention away from the stories of Theudas and Judas so that he could give them some direct advice. In your translation, use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this same purpose.
837	ACT	5	38	a417	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	Gamaliel is using the word translated And to introduce what he wants the council to conclude as a result of the two examples he has given. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
838	ACT	5	38	wz89		ἀπόστητε ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων τούτων καὶ ἄφετε αὐτούς	1	keep away from these men and release them	When Gamaliel tells the council to keep away from these men, he implicitly means that they should not execute them, as 5:33 says they wanted to do. Alternate translation: “do not execute these men or put them back in prison”
839	ACT	5	38	zh1d		ἐὰν ᾖ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, ἡ βουλὴ αὕτη ἢ τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο	1	if this counsel or this work is from men	Alternate translation: “if men have devised this plan or are doing this work”
840	ACT	5	38	a418	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1	men	Gamaliel is using the term men in a generic sense to mean “humans.” Since he contrasts from men here with “from God” in the next verse, it may be appropriate to add the word “mere” to help show that contrast. Alternate translation: “mere humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
841	ACT	5	38	uql8	figs-activepassive	καταλυθήσεται	1	it will be destroyed	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “someone will destroy it” or “it will not last” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
842	ACT	5	39	a419	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	but	Gamaliel uses this word to introduce a contrast between what would happen if the work the apostles are doing were “from men” and what would happen if it were from God. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation, as a new sentence: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
843	ACT	5	39	j819	writing-pronouns	εἰ…ἐκ Θεοῦ ἐστιν	1	if it is from God	Here the pronoun it refers back to the phrase “this counsel or this work” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “if God has devised this plan or commanded these men to do this work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
844	ACT	5	39	a420	figs-explicit	μήποτε	1	lest	It may be helpful to state the implications of the word lest explicitly. Alternate translation: “and if you do try to destroy them,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
845	ACT	5	39	a421	figs-activepassive	καὶ θεομάχοι εὑρεθῆτε	1	you may even be found	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. However, since this is also an idiom (see next note), it would only be meaningful to do that in your translation if your language uses the verb “find” in the same idiomatic sense. Alternate translation: “people may even find you to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
846	ACT	5	39	a422	figs-activepassive	εὑρεθῆτε	1	be found	The expression be found is an idiom. Alternate translation: “turn out to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
847	ACT	5	39	cyp1	figs-activepassive	ἐπείσθησαν…αὐτῷ	1	they were persuaded by him	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Gamaliel persuaded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
848	ACT	5	40	z31c	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	1	And	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce what the Sanhedrin did as a result of Gamaliel’s advice. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
849	ACT	5	40	p6lz	figs-synecdoche	προσκαλεσάμενοι τοὺς ἀποστόλους, δείραντες παρήγγειλαν	1	summoning the apostles, having beaten them, they commanded them	The Sanhedrin would have ordered their officers to bring back the apostles and beat them. They did not do those things personally. But Luke speaks figuratively as if they did do those things because they ordered them to be done. Alternate translation: “they had their officers bring back the apostles and beat them, and then they commanded them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
850	ACT	5	40	fca9	figs-metonymy	λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	to speak in the name of Jesus	Here, name figuratively means the person of Jesus. See how you translated the similar expression in 4:17. Alternate translation: “to speak about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
851	ACT	5	41	a423	figs-metaphor	ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Συνεδρίου	1	from the face of the Sanhedrin	Luke is using the word face figuratively to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
852	ACT	5	41	cv8y	figs-activepassive	κατηξιώθησαν	1	they had been considered worthy	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “God had considered them worthy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
853	ACT	5	41	lk82	figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος	1	for the Name	Here, the Name figuratively means Jesus. Alternate translation: “for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
854	ACT	5	42	jj94	writing-endofstory	τε	1	And	Luke uses the word translated And to introduce information about what happened after this story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
855	ACT	5	42	kyp6	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	in the temple	Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so the temple means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
856	ACT	5	42	x424	figs-litotes	οὐκ ἐπαύοντο, διδάσκοντες καὶ εὐαγγελιζόμενοι	1	they did not cease teaching and proclaiming the gospel	Luke is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “they continued to teach and to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
857	ACT	6	intro	z5r5			0		Acts 06 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter The distribution to the widows The believers in Jerusalem gave food every day to women whose husbands had died. All of them had been raised as Jews, but some of them spoke Hebrew and had lived mostly in Judea, while others spoke Greek and may have lived in Gentile areas. Those who gave out the food gave it to the Hebrew-speaking widows but not equally to the Greek-speaking widows. To please God, the church leaders appointed Greek-speaking men to make sure the Greek-speaking widows received their share of the food. One of these Greek-speaking men was Stephen. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “His face was like the face of an angel” No one knows for sure what it was about Stephen’s face that was like the face of an angel, because Luke does not tell us. A note to this phrase offers one suggestion, which you may choose to follow. However, you might also decide to say only what the ULT says about this.
858	ACT	6	1	f8br	writing-newevent	ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	Now in those days	Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
859	ACT	6	1	cg5t	figs-idiom	ἐν…ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις	1	in those days	Luke is using the term days idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
860	ACT	6	1	e7vb	translate-names	τῶν Ἑλληνιστῶν	1	of the Hellenists	Hellenists was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
861	ACT	6	1	ftz8	translate-names	τοὺς Ἑβραίους	1	the Hebrews	In this context, Luke is using the name Hebrews to mean Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke Aramaic, a language closely related to Hebrew, and who did not follow Greek customs. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
862	ACT	6	1	s4qy	figs-activepassive	παρεθεωροῦντο ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ αἱ χῆραι αὐτῶν	1	their widows were being overlooked in the daily service	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who was doing the action. Alternate translation: “those who were distributing food each day were overlooking their widows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
863	ACT	6	1	rde8	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ	1	in the daily service	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun service with an equivalent expression. Alternate translations: “by those who were distributing food each day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
864	ACT	6	2	kwvo	grammar-connect-logic-result	δὲ	0	So	Luke is using the word So to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
865	ACT	6	2	n5r4	figs-nominaladj	οἱ δώδεκα	1	the Twelve	Luke is using the adjective Twelve as a noun in order to indicate a group of people, the apostles who led the church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
866	ACT	6	2	is74	translate-names	οἱ δώδεκα	1	the Twelve	Alternatively, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns, you may be able to do that in this case, since this is a title by which the apostles were known. Even though it is a number, if you translate it as a title, as ULT does, follow the conventions for titles in your language. For example, capitalize main words and write out numbers rather than use digits. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
867	ACT	6	2	jm17	figs-metaphor	καταλείψαντας τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	to leave behind the word of God	The apostles are speaking figuratively as if they would walk away from the word of God and leave it behind them. Alternate translation: “to stop preaching and teaching the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
868	ACT	6	2	w9re	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the word of God	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
869	ACT	6	2	fwk6	figs-metaphor	διακονεῖν τραπέζαις	1	to serve tables	To describe the work that would be required for them personally to monitor the church’s program of distributing food to people in need, the apostles speak figuratively as if they would be bringing food to people who were sitting at tables. Alternate translation: “to give our attention to food distribution” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
870	ACT	6	3	lcyx	figs-metaphor	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	See how you translated the term brothers in 1:15. Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
871	ACT	6	3	p1yz	figs-activepassive	ἄνδρας…μαρτυρουμένους	1	men being attested	The expression being attested is a passive verbal form. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the same meaning with an active form. Alternate translation: “men to whose honesty people attest” or “men whom people say they trust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
872	ACT	6	3	mgid	figs-metaphor	πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας	1	full of the Spirit and of wisdom	The apostles are speaking figuratively of these men as if they were containers that the Holy Spirit and wisdom could fill. Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who possess great wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
873	ACT	6	3	pxe5	figs-abstractnouns	πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας	1	full of the Spirit and of wisdom	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun wisdom with an adverb such as “wisely.” Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who act very wisely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
874	ACT	6	3	i27a	figs-metaphor	ἐπὶ τῆς χρείας ταύτης	1	over this task	When the apostles say that they will appoint these men over the work of food distribution, they are using a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “to be responsible for this task” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
875	ACT	6	4	b3bj	figs-metonymy	τοῦ λόγου	1	of the word	The apostles are using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to teach and preach by using words. Alternate translation: “of teaching and preaching the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
876	ACT	6	5	wh9t	figs-metonymy	ἤρεσεν ὁ λόγος ἐνώπιον παντὸς τοῦ πλήθους	1	the statement was pleasing before the whole multitude	Luke is using the word before to refer to the opinion of the believers, since people assess things that come to to their attention in front of them. Alternate translation: “what the apostles recommended pleased all of the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
877	ACT	6	5	jayc	grammar-connect-logic-result	καὶ	2	And	Luke is using the word translated And to introduce what the believers did as a result of the apostles’ request. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
878	ACT	6	5	ajq1	translate-names	Στέφανον…Φίλιππον…Πρόχορον…Νικάνορα…Τίμωνα…Παρμενᾶν…Νικόλαον	1	Stephen…Philip…Prochorus…Nicanor…Timon…Parmenas…Nicolaus	These are the names of seven men. They are all Greek names, and this suggests that all of the men selected were from the group of Greek-speaking Jews among the believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
879	ACT	6	5	vsyk	figs-metaphor	ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	a man full of faith and of the Holy Spirit	Luke is speaking figuratively of Stephen as if they were a container that faith and the Holy Spirit had filled. Alternate translation: “a man who possessed great wisdom and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
880	ACT	6	5	yqsj	figs-abstractnouns	ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	a man full of faith and of the Holy Spirit	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun faith with a verb such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “a man who confidently trusted in God and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
881	ACT	6	5	cg5s	translate-names	Ἀντιοχέα	1	an Antiochian	The name Antiochian describes a person who comes from the city of Antioch. Alternate translation: “who came from Antioch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
882	ACT	6	6	wu1y	translate-symaction	ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας	1	and placed their hands upon them	The apostles placed their hands on the seven men to show publicly that they were giving them the responsibility and authority to oversee the food distribution. Alternate translation: “and placed their hands on them to show that they were giving them responsibility and authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
883	ACT	6	7	x48w	writing-endofstory		0		As the outline in the General Introduction indicates, this verse is the end of the first major section of the book of Acts. That section describes how the apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem. Luke uses this verse to summarize what happened as a result of the events within this whole section of the book. You language may have its own way of indicating how such a summary relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
884	ACT	6	7	wu4l	figs-metaphor	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν	1	the word of God was growing	Luke is speaking figuratively of the way the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were growing. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
885	ACT	6	7	ueie	figs-metonymy	ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν	1	the word of God was growing	Luke is using the term word figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
886	ACT	6	7	jg8y	figs-synecdoche	ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει	1	became obedient to the faith	Luke speaks generally of the faith (that is, belief in Jesus) to indicate that these priests became obedient to one part of it, Jesus’ teachings about how to live. But that obedience showed that the priests genuinely embraced faith in Jesus as Messiah in its entirety. Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
887	ACT	6	7	qq3l	figs-abstractnouns	ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει	1	became obedient to the faith	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun faith with a verb such as “believe.” Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
888	ACT	6	8	et2j	writing-participants	Στέφανος δὲ	1	Now Stephen	Luke uses this phrase to introduce Stephen as the main character in this part of the story. Your language may have its own way of doing that. If so, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
889	ACT	6	8	pzr0	figs-metaphor	Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει	1	Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing	Luke is speaking figuratively as if Stephen were a container that grace and power were filling. Alternate translation: “Stephen had abundant grace and power, and so he was doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
890	ACT	6	8	h8sg	figs-hendiadys	Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει	1	Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing	Luke may be using the two words grace and power together to express a single idea. The word grace would describe the character of the power that Stephen had. Specifically, it would be power that God was giving him. Alternate translation: “Stephen, full of gracious power, was doing” or “Stephen, full of power from God, was doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
891	ACT	6	8	xscq	figs-abstractnouns	Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει	1	Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns grace and power with adverbs. Alternate translation: “Stephen was supernaturally and powerfully doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
892	ACT	6	8	m0zh	figs-doublet	τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα μεγάλα	1	great wonders and signs	The terms wonders and signs mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in 2:22. Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
893	ACT	6	9	d74m	figs-idiom	ἀνέστησαν	1	rose up	Here the expression rose up means that these people took action, specifically to oppose Stephen, not that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “took action to oppose Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
894	ACT	6	9	nei0	figs-activepassive	τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων	1	the synagogue called Freedmen	If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the synagogue whose name was Freedmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
895	ACT	6	9	k88n	figs-explicit	τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων	1	the synagogue called Freedmen	The word Freedmen probably refers to former slaves. Alternate translation: “the synagogue that former slaves attended” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
896	ACT	6	9	e7b0	translate-names	Κυρηναίων…Ἀλεξανδρέων…Κιλικίας…Ἀσίας	1	of the Cyrenians…of the Alexandrians…Cilicia…Asia	Cyrenians is the name for people from the city of Cyrene, and Alexandrians is the name for people from the city of Alexandria. Cilicia and Asia are the names of two Roman provinces. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
897	ACT	6	10	v5ia	figs-idiom	οὐκ ἴσχυον ἀντιστῆναι	1	they were not able to stand against	The expression stand against is an idiom. Alternate translation: “they could not argue successfully against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
898	ACT	6	10	fnb2	figs-hendiadys	τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει	1	the wisdom and the Spirit with which he spoke	Luke may be using the two words wisdom and Spirit together to express a single idea. The word Spirit would describe the source and character of the wisdom that Stephen was displaying. The word Spirit refers to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Spirit-inspired wisdom by which he spoke” or “the wisdom that the Holy Spirit gave him as he spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
899	ACT	6	10	psha	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει	1	the wisdom and the Spirit with which he spoke	If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract noun wisdom with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise things he said as the Spirit inspired him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
900	ACT	6	11	ren5	figs-explicit	ὑπέβαλον ἄνδρας λέγοντας	1	they instigated men to say	The word instigated means that Stephen’s opponents in some way persuaded these men to lie about what Stephen was saying. They may have offered them money, or they may have convinced them that Stephen was a dangerous person who needed to be stopped. Since Luke does not specify the means, it may be best not to suggest a means in your translation. But it would be appropriate to indicate that what these men were recruited to say about Stephen was a lie. Alternate translation: “recruited some men to lie about Stephen by saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
901	ACT	6	11	s2cl	figs-exclusive	ἀκηκόαμεν	1	We have heard	The men are using the word We to refer only to themselves, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
902	ACT	6	11	x747	figs-metonymy	λαλοῦντος ῥήματα βλάσφημα	1	speaking blasphemous words	The men are using the term words figuratively to mean the things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying blasphemous things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
903	ACT	6	11	dgxi	translate-names	Μωϋσῆν	1	Moses	Moses is the name of a man. God gave him the law to give to Israel. See how you translated his name in 3:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
904	ACT	6	12	tqk9	writing-pronouns	συνεκίνησάν	1	They…stirred up
905	ACT	6	12	l251	figs-metaphor	συνεκίνησάν τε τὸν λαὸν, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς	1	They also stirred up the people, the elders, and the scribes	Luke says figuratively that Stephen’s opponents stirred up these other groups to mean that they said things to make them very upset with Stephen. Alternate translation: “They also said things that made the people, the elders, and the scribes very upset with Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
906	ACT	6	12	dkbj	translate-names	Συνέδριον	1	Sanhedrin	Sanhedrin is the name of the Jewish ruling council. See how you translated it in 4:14. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
907	ACT	6	13	zv6s	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ παύεται λαλῶν	1	does not stop speaking	If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle not and the negative verb stop. Alternate translation: “continually speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
908	ACT	6	13	ju6w	figs-metonymy	λαλῶν ῥήματα	1	speaking words	The men are using the term words figuratively to mean things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
909	ACT	6	13	o3j2	figs-metonymy	τοῦ τόπου τοῦ ἁγίου	1	the holy place	The men are describing the temple in Jerusalem figuratively by referring to it by something associated with it, that it is a holy place. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
910	ACT	6	14	c5l9	translate-names	ὁ Ναζωραῖος	1	the Nazarene	The word Nazarene describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. See how you translated it in 2:23. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
911	ACT	6	14	uok4	figs-explicit	τὸν τόπον τοῦτον	1	this place	By this place, the false witnesses mean the temple, which they described as “the holy place” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
912	ACT	6	14	vak4	figs-metonymy	τὰ ἔθη ἃ παρέδωκεν ἡμῖν Μωϋσῆς	1	the customs that Moses handed down to us	The phrase handed down is an idiom that refers to something that is passed from generation to generation. The false witnesses are describing how the ancestors of the Jews have passed on the teachings originally received from Moses to each successive generation. Alternate translation: “the customs that our ancestors learned from Moses and have taught each successive generation ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
913	ACT	6	15	k8rw	figs-simile	εἶδον τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, ὡσεὶ πρόσωπον ἀγγέλου	1	saw his face as the face of an angel	Luke offers this comparison but he does not say specifically in what way Stephen’s face was like the face of an angel. However, this may mean that his face was shining brightly, since descriptions of angels in the Bible often say they were shining brightly. So you might choose to say that in your translation. Alternate translation: “saw that his face was shining brightly, like the face of an angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
914	ACT	7	intro	p9h4			0		Acts 07 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 7:42-43 and 49-50. It appears that 8:1 is part of the narrative of this chapter. Special concepts in this chapter “Stephen said” Stephen told the history of Israel very briefly. He paid special attention to the times that the Israelites had rejected the people God had chosen to lead them. At the end of the story, he said that the Jewish leaders he was talking to had rejected Jesus just as the evil Israelites had always rejected the leaders God had appointed for them. “Full of the Holy Spirit” The Holy Spirit completely controlled Stephen so that he said only and all of what God wanted him to say. Foreshadowing When an author speaks of something that is not important at that time but will be important later in the story, this is called foreshadowing. Luke mentions Saul, also known as Paul, here, even though he is not an important person in this part of the story. This is because Paul is an important person in the rest of the Book of Acts. Important figures of speech in this chapter Implied information Stephen was talking to Jews who knew the law of Moses well, so he did not explain things that his hearers already knew. But you may need to explain some of these things so that your readers will be able to understand what Stephen was saying. For example, you may need to make explicit that when Joseph’s brothers “sold him into Egypt” (Acts 7:9), Joseph was going to be a slave in Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) Metonymy Stephen spoke of Joseph ruling “over Egypt” and over all of Pharaoh’s household. By this he meant that Joseph ruled over the people of Egypt and of the people and possessions in Pharaoh’s household. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter Background knowledge The Jewish leaders to whom Stephen spoke already knew much about the events he was telling them about. They knew what Moses had written in the Book of Genesis. If the Book of Genesis has not been translated into your language, it may be difficult for your readers to understand what Stephen said.
915	ACT	7	1	pt4h	figs-you		0	General Information:	The word “our” includes both Steven, the Jewish council to whom he spoke, and the entire audience. The word “your” is singular refers to Abraham. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
916	ACT	7	1	hy9r			0	Connecting Statement:	The part of the story about Stephen, which began in Acts 6:8, continues. Stephen begins his response to the high priest and the council by talking about things that happened in Israel’s history. Most of this history comes from Moses’ writings.
917	ACT	7	2	abc7		ὁ δὲ ἔφη	1	Then he said	Stephen is speaking.
918	ACT	7	2	v5si		ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες, ἀκούσατε	1	brothers, and fathers, listen to me	Stephen was being very respectful to the council in greeting them as extended family.
919	ACT	7	4	pfg3			0	General Information:	In verse 4 the words “he,” “his,” and “him” refer to Abraham. In verse 5 the words “He” and “he” refer to God, but the word “him” refers to Abraham.
920	ACT	7	4	pfg4	figs-you	ὑμεῖς	1	you	Here the word you refers to the Jewish council and audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
921	ACT	7	5	ax1j		οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ κληρονομίαν ἐν αὐτῇ	1	he did not give him an inheritance in it	“he did not give any of it to him as an inheritance”
922	ACT	7	5	qff6	figs-idiom	οὐδὲ βῆμα ποδός	1	not even a stride of a foot	Possible meanings for this phrase are (1) enough ground to stand on or (2) enough ground to take a step. Alternate translation: “not even a very tiny piece of ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
923	ACT	7	5	u6iw		αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν…καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν	1	to him for a possession, and to his seed after him	“for Abraham to own and to give to his descendants”
924	ACT	7	6	tn6b		ἐλάλησεν…οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς	1	God spoke to him like this	It may be helpful to state that this occurred later than the statement in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Later God told Abraham”
925	ACT	7	6	t1h9	translate-numbers	ἔτη τετρακόσια	1	400 years	“four hundred years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
926	ACT	7	7	f7fw	figs-metonymy	τὸ ἔθνος…κρινῶ ἐγώ	1	I will judge the nation	Here nation refers to the people in it. Alternate translation: “I will judge the people of the nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
927	ACT	7	7	q7y6		τὸ ἔθνος ᾧ ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν	1	the nation that will enslave him	“the nation that they will serve”
928	ACT	7	8	mwc9	figs-explicit	ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ διαθήκην περιτομῆς	1	God gave him the covenant of circumcision	The Jews would have understood that this covenant required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family. Alternate translation: “made a covenant with Abraham to circumcise the males of his family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
929	ACT	7	8	g4bb		οὕτως ἐγέννησεν τὸν Ἰσαὰκ	1	so he became the father of Isaac	The story transitions to Abraham’s descendants.
930	ACT	7	8	ams1	figs-ellipsis	Ἰακὼβ τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας	1	Jacob of the 12 patriarchs	“Jacob became the father of the 12 patriarchs.” Stephen shortened this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
931	ACT	7	9	n981		οἱ πατριάρχαι	1	the patriarchs	“Jacob’s older sons” or “Joseph’s older brothers”
932	ACT	7	9	tik7	figs-explicit	ἀπέδοντο εἰς Αἴγυπτον	1	sold him into Egypt	The Jews knew their ancestors sold Joseph to be a slave in Egypt. Alternate translation: “sold him as a slave in Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
933	ACT	7	9	w1is	figs-idiom	ἦν…μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1	was with him	This is an idiom for helping someone. Alternate translation: “helped him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
934	ACT	7	10	yr7m	figs-metonymy	ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον	1	over Egypt	This refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over all the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
935	ACT	7	10	pb4p	figs-metonymy	ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ	1	over all his household	This refers to all his possessions. Alternate translation: “over everything he owned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
936	ACT	7	11	p42j		ἦλθεν…λιμὸς	1	came a famine	“a famine came.” The ground stopped producing food.
937	ACT	7	11	p37v	figs-explicit	οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	our fathers	This refers Jacob and his sons, who were the ancestors of the Jewish people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
938	ACT	7	12	pia8		σιτία	1	grain	Grain was the most common food at that time.
939	ACT	7	12	mbg8		τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν	1	our fathers	Here this phrase refers to Jabob’s sons, Joseph’s older brothers.
940	ACT	7	13	ce2b	translate-ordinal	ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	On their second time	“On their next trip” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
941	ACT	7	13	m37e		ἀνεγνωρίσθη	1	was made known	Joseph revealed to his brothers his identity as their brother.
942	ACT	7	13	jxk8	figs-activepassive	φανερὸν ἐγένετο τῷ Φαραὼ τὸ γένος Ἰωσήφ	1	the family of Joseph became known to Pharaoh	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh learned that they were Joseph’s family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
943	ACT	7	14	aam5		ἀποστείλας	1	sending them back	“after sending his brothers back to Canaan” or “after sending his brothers back home”
944	ACT	7	15	w2sm		ἐτελεύτησεν αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	he and our fathers died	Make sure it does not sound as though he died as soon as he arrived in Egypt. Alternate translation: “eventually Jacob and our ancestors died”
945	ACT	7	15	fe56		αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	he and our fathers	“Jacob and his sons who became our ancestors”
946	ACT	7	16	slg3	figs-activepassive	μετετέθησαν…καὶ ἐτέθησαν	1	they were carried over … and laid	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s descendants carried Jacob’s body and his son’s bodies over … and buried them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
947	ACT	7	16	la8a		τιμῆς ἀργυρίου	1	for a price in silver	“with money”
948	ACT	7	17	np3u	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	The word “our” includes Stephen and his audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
949	ACT	7	17	tuq2		καθὼς δὲ ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας…ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη	1	And as the time of the promise … approached, the people increased and multiplied	In some languages it may be helpful to say that the people increased in number before saying that the time of the promise arrived.
950	ACT	7	17	tlh9		ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας	1	the time of the promise … approached	It was close to the time that God would fulfill his promise to Abraham.
951	ACT	7	18	whe7		ἀνέστη βασιλεὺς ἕτερος ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον	1	there arose over Egypt another king	“another king began to rule over Egypt”
952	ACT	7	18	g2wq	figs-metonymy	ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον	1	over Egypt	Here Egypt refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
953	ACT	7	18	e2y6	figs-metonymy	ὃς οὐκ ᾔδει τὸν Ἰωσήφ	1	who did not know Joseph	Here Joseph refers to the reputation of Joseph. Alternate translation: “who did not know that Joseph had helped Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
954	ACT	7	20	q66s	writing-participants	ἐν ᾧ καιρῷ ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς	1	At that time Moses was born	This introduces Moses into the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
955	ACT	7	20	cd5z	figs-idiom	ἦν ἀστεῖος τῷ Θεῷ	1	he was beautiful to God	This phrase is an idiom that means Moses was very beautiful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
956	ACT	7	20	pnb1	figs-activepassive	ἀνετράφη	1	was nourished	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “his parents nourished him” or “his parents cared for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
957	ACT	7	21	w3iu	figs-activepassive	ἐκτεθέντος δὲ αὐτοῦ	1	But when he was exposed	Moses was exposed because of Pharaoh’s command. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “When his parents placed him outside” or “When they abandoned him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
958	ACT	7	21	url3		ἡ θυγάτηρ Φαραὼ, καὶ ἀνεθρέψατο αὐτὸν ἑαυτῇ εἰς υἱόν	1	the daughter of Pharaoh … and raised him for herself as a son	She did for him every good thing a mother would do for her own son. Use your language’s normal word for what a mother does to make sure her son becomes a healthy adult.
959	ACT	7	21	mbp7		εἰς υἱόν	1	as a son	“as if he were her own son”
960	ACT	7	22	c9nw	figs-activepassive	ἐπαιδεύθη Μωϋσῆς	1	Moses was educated	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “The Egyptians educated Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
961	ACT	7	22	att9	figs-hyperbole	πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων	1	in all the wisdom of the Egyptians	This is an exaggeration to emphasize that he was trained in the best schools in Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
962	ACT	7	22	m3dm		δυνατὸς ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις αὐτοῦ	1	mighty in his words and works	“effective in his speech and actions” or “influential in what he said and did”
963	ACT	7	23	fj9s	figs-metonymy	ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ	1	it came into his heart	Here heart is a metonym for “mind.” The phrase it came into his heart is an idiom that means to decide something. Alternate translation: “it came into his mind” or “he decided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
964	ACT	7	23	x493	figs-explicit	ἐπισκέψασθαι τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ	1	to visit his brothers, the sons of Israel	This refers to his people, and not just to his family. Alternate translation: “to see how his own people, the children of Israel, were doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
965	ACT	7	24	l4zv	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἰδών τινα ἀδικούμενον, ἠμύνατο καὶ ἐποίησεν ἐκδίκησιν τῷ καταπονουμένῳ, πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον	1	And seeing a certain one being mistreated, he defended him and made vengeance for the one being oppressed by striking the Egyptian	This can be stated in active form by rearranging the order. Alternate translation: “Seeing an Egyptian mistreating an Israelite, Moses defended and avenged the Israelite by striking the Egyptian who was oppressing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
966	ACT	7	24	abc8		ἠμύνατο	1	he defended him	Moses defended the Israelite who was being mistreated.
967	ACT	7	24	r2e8		πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον	1	by striking the Egyptian	Moses hit the Egyptian so hard that he died.
968	ACT	7	25	wm3j		ἐνόμιζεν	1	he thought	“he imagined”
969	ACT	7	25	nhb9	figs-metonymy	διὰ χειρὸς αὐτοῦ δίδωσιν σωτηρίαν αὐτοῖς	1	by his hand was giving salvation to them	Here hand refers to the actions of Moses. Alternate translation: “was rescuing them through what Moses was doing” or “was using the actions of Moses to rescue them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
970	ACT	7	26	t1hw	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “us” refers to the Israelites but does not include Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
971	ACT	7	26	t2vc	figs-explicit	αὐτοῖς μαχομένοις	1	to them as they were quarreling	The audience would have known from the account in Exodus that these were two Israelite men, but Stephen does not specify that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
972	ACT	7	26	mpc7		συνήλλασσεν αὐτοὺς εἰς εἰρήνην	1	he urged them to peace	“urged them to stop fighting”
973	ACT	7	26	zzt4		ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί ἐστε	1	Men, you are brothers	Moses was addressing the Israelites who were fighting.
974	ACT	7	26	k1ku	figs-rquestion	ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους?	1	Why is it that you are hurting each other?	Moses asked this question to encourage them to stop fighting. Alternate translation: “You should not hurt each other!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
975	ACT	7	27	q2r4	figs-rquestion	τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν?	1	Who appointed you a ruler and a judge over us?	The man used this question to rebuke Moses. Alternate translation: “You have no authority over us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
976	ACT	7	28	hk1g		μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον?	1	You do not want to kill me in the same way you killed the Egyptian yesterday, do you?	The man used this question to warn Moses that he and probably others knew Moses had killed the Egyptian.
977	ACT	7	29	l149	figs-explicit		0	General Information:	Stephen’s audience already knew that Moses had married a Midianite woman when he fled Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
978	ACT	7	29	q8qv	figs-explicit	ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1	at this statement	The implied information is that Moses understood that the Israelites knew that he had killed an Egyptian the day before (Acts 7:28). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
979	ACT	7	30	zx1c	figs-explicit	καὶ πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα	1	And when 40 years were past	“And after 40 years had passed.” This was the amount of time Moses had been in Midian. Alternate translation: “And 40 years after Moses fled from Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
980	ACT	7	30	f7yu	figs-explicit	ὤφθη…ἄγγελος	1	an angel appeared	Stephen’s audience knew that God spoke through the angel. The UST makes this explicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
981	ACT	7	31	q6w6	figs-explicit	ἐθαύμασεν τὸ ὅραμα	1	he marveled at the sight	Moses was surprised that the bush was not burning up in the fire. This was previously known by Stephen’s audience. Alternate translation: “because the bush was not burning up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
982	ACT	7	31	uk7u		προσερχομένου δὲ αὐτοῦ κατανοῆσαι	1	and as he approached to look at it	This may mean Moses initially drew close to the bush to investigate.
983	ACT	7	32	b4q6		ἐγὼ ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων σου	1	I am the God of your fathers	“I am the God whom your ancestors worshiped”
984	ACT	7	32	tdr7		ἔντρομος δὲ γενόμενος, Μωϋσῆς οὐκ ἐτόλμα κατανοῆσαι	1	And becoming terrified, Moses did not dare to look	This may mean Moses drew back in fear when he heard the voice.
985	ACT	7	32	e19k	figs-explicit	ἔντρομος…γενόμενος, Μωϋσῆς	1	becoming terrified, Moses	Moses shook from fear. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: “And Moses trembled with fear and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
986	ACT	7	33	x7cd	translate-symaction	λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα	1	Untie the sandals	God told Moses this so he would honor God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
987	ACT	7	33	clk4	figs-explicit	ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν	1	for the place on which you are standing is holy ground	The implied information is that where God is present, the immediate area around God is considered or made holy by God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
988	ACT	7	34	yz7b		ἰδὼν, εἶδον	1	I have certainly seen	“I gave seen for sure.” The word certainly adds emphasis to seen.
989	ACT	7	34	x5bg		τοῦ λαοῦ μου	1	of my people	The word my emphasizes that these people belonged to God. Alternate translation: “of the descendants of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob”
990	ACT	7	34	j32c		κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς	1	I have come down to rescue them	“I will personally cause their release”
991	ACT	7	34	sq8y		νῦν δεῦρο	1	now come	“get ready.” God uses an order here.
992	ACT	7	35	x4p2			0	General Information:	Verses 35-38 contains a series of connected phrases referring to Moses. Each phrase begins with statements such as “This Moses” or “This same Moses” or “This is the man” or “It is the same Moses.” If possible, use similar statements to emphasize Moses. After the Israelites left Egypt, they spent 40 years wandering around the wilderness before God led them into the land he had promised them.
993	ACT	7	35	gn6e		τοῦτον τὸν Μωϋσῆν, ὃν ἠρνήσαντο	1	This same Moses, whom they rejected	This refers back to the events recorded in Acts 7:27-28.
994	ACT	7	35	vp7e		λυτρωτὴν	1	a redeemer	“a rescuer”
995	ACT	7	35	yjz9	figs-metonymy	σὺν χειρὶ ἀγγέλου τοῦ ὀφθέντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῇ βάτῳ	1	with the hand of the angel who appeared to him in the bush	Here hand is a metonym for the action performed by the person. In this case, the angel had commanded Moses to return to Egypt. Stephen speaks as if the angel had a physical hand. You may need to make explicit what action the angel did. Alternate translation: “by the action of the angel” or “by having the angel … bush command him to return to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
996	ACT	7	35	abc9		ὀφθέντος αὐτῷ	1	appeared to him	The angel appeared to Moses.
997	ACT	7	36	gz9r	figs-explicit	ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα	1	during 40 years	Stephen’s audience knew about the 40 years the Israelites spent in the wilderness. Alternate translation: “during the 40 years that the Israelite people lived in the wilderness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
998	ACT	7	37	b4sg		προφήτην…ἀναστήσει	1	will raise up a prophet	“will cause a man to be a prophet”
999	ACT	7	37	j2rx		ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν	1	from among your brothers	“from among your own people”
1000	ACT	7	38	l8u7			0	General Information:	The quotation in verse 40 is from the writings of Moses.
1001	ACT	7	38	e8qu		οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ γενόμενος ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	This is the one who was in the assembly	“This is the man Moses who was among the Israelites”
1002	ACT	7	38	fd25		οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ γενόμενος	1	This is the one	The phrase This is the one throughout this passage refers to Moses.
1003	ACT	7	38	y2zu		ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα δοῦναι ὑμῖν	1	who received living words to give to us	God was the one who gave those words. Alternate translation: “to whom God spoke living words to give to us”
1004	ACT	7	38	p3xk	figs-metonymy	λόγια ζῶντα	1	living words	Possible meanings are (1) “a message that endures” or (2) “words that give life.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1005	ACT	7	39	mvz8	figs-metaphor	ἀπώσαντο	1	they pushed him away	This metaphor emphasizes their rejection of Moses. Alternate translation: “they rejected him as their leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1006	ACT	7	39	z3ze	figs-metonymy	ἐστράφησαν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	turned back in their hearts	Here hearts is a metonym for people’s thoughts. To do something in the heart means to desire to do something. Alternate translation: “they desired to turn back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1007	ACT	7	41	w38i			0	General Information:	Stephen’s quotation here is from the prophet Amos.
1008	ACT	7	41	ux1j	figs-explicit	ἐμοσχοποίησαν	1	they made an image of a calf	Stephen’s audience knew the image of a calf they made was a statue to be used as an idol. Alternate translation: “they made as an idol a statue that looked like a calf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1009	ACT	7	41	hh77		ἐμοσχοποίησαν…τῷ εἰδώλῳ…τοῖς ἔργοις τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν	1	they made an image of a calf … to the idol … the work of their hands	These phrases all refer to the same statue of the calf.
1010	ACT	7	42	d3dd	translate-symaction	ἔστρεψεν…ὁ Θεὸς	1	God turned away	This action expresses that God was not pleased with the people and no longer helped them. Alternate translation: “God stopped correcting them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1011	ACT	7	42	rag5		παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς	1	gave them up	“abandoned them”
1012	ACT	7	42	u7lx		τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	the host of heaven	Possible meanings for the original phrase are (1) the stars in the sky or (2) the sun, moon, and stars.
1013	ACT	7	42	f314		βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν	1	the book of the prophets	This was apparently a collection of the writings of several of the Old Testament prophets into one scroll. It would also have included the writings of Amos.
1014	ACT	7	42	gd1b	figs-rquestion	μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ?	1	You did not offer to me slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness, did you, O house of Israel?	God asked this question to show Israel they did not worship Him with their sacrifices. Alternate translation: “You did not honor me when you offered slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness O house of Israel.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1015	ACT	7	42	j4q8	figs-metonymy	οἶκος Ἰσραήλ	1	O house of Israel	This refers to the whole nation of Israel. Alternate translation: “all you Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1016	ACT	7	43	zek5			0	General Information:	The quotation from the prophet Amos continues here.
1017	ACT	7	43	fs4q			0	Connecting Statement:	Stephen continues his response to the high priest and the council which he began in Acts 7:2.
1018	ACT	7	43	rk4z	figs-explicit	ἀνελάβετε	1	you took up	It is implied that they took these idols with them as they traveled in the wilderness. Alternate translation: “you carried with you from place to place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1019	ACT	7	43	im7e		τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ	1	the tabernacle of Molech	the tent that housed the false god Molech
1020	ACT	7	43	cq47		τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν	1	the star of your god Rephan	the star that is identified with the false god Rephan
1021	ACT	7	43	gm4g		τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε	1	and the images that you made	They made statues or images of the gods Molech and Rephan in order to worship them.
1022	ACT	7	43	zgq6		μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος	1	I will carry you away beyond Babylon	“I will remove you to places even farther than Babylon.” This would be God’s act of judgment.
1023	ACT	7	44	m9gw		ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου	1	The tabernacle of the testimony	The tent that housed the ark (a box) with the 10 commandments carved in stone inside it
1024	ACT	7	45	n2sc		ἣν καὶ εἰσήγαγον, διαδεξάμενοι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν μετὰ Ἰησοῦ	1	Our fathers, under Joshua, received it and brought it with them	The phrase under Joshua means that their ancestors did these things in obedience to Joshua’s direction. Alternate translation: “Our fathers, in accordance with Joshua’s instructions, received the tabernacle and brought it with them”
1025	ACT	7	45	n1pp		ἐν τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶν, ὧν ἐξῶσεν ὁ Θεὸς ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	when they took possession of the nations who God drove out from the face of our fathers	This sentence tells why the ancestors were able to take possession of the land. Alternate translation: “when God forced the nations to leave the land before the face of our fathers so they could live in it”
1026	ACT	7	45	spm5	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶν, ὧν ἐξῶσεν ὁ Θεὸς ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν	1	when they took possession of the nations who God drove out from the face of our fathers	Here the face of our fathers refers to the presence of their ancestors. Possible meanings are (1) “when God took the land from the nations and drove them out as our ancestors watched” or (2) “when our ancestors came, God took the land from the nations and drove them out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1027	ACT	7	45	c2fb	figs-metonymy	τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	of the nations	This refers to the people who lived in the land before Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people who previously lived here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1028	ACT	7	45	m9ib		ὧν ἐξῶσεν ὁ Θεὸς	1	whom God drove out	“whom God forced to leave the land”
1029	ACT	7	46	w3cu		σκήνωμα τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ	1	a dwelling place for the house of Jacob	“a house for the ark where the God of Jacob could stay.” David wanted a permanent place for the ark to reside in Jerusalem, not in a tent.
1030	ACT	7	47	a7bx			0	General Information:	In verses 49 and 50, Stephen quotes from the prophet Isaiah. In the quotation, God is speaking about himself.
1031	ACT	7	48	c822	figs-synecdoche	χειροποιήτοις	1	houses made with hands	Here hand is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “houses made by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1032	ACT	7	49	k2vn		ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου	1	Heaven is my throne, and the earth is the footstool for my feet	The prophet is comparing the greatness of God’s presence to how impossible it is for man to build a place for God to rest on earth since the whole earth is nothing but a place for God to rest his feet.
1033	ACT	7	49	wc9m	figs-rquestion	ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι?	1	What kind of house will you build for me?	God asks this question to show how useless man’s efforts are to take care of God. Alternate translation: “You can not build a house adequate enough for me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1034	ACT	7	49	u1ft	figs-rquestion	ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου?	1	or what is the place for my rest?	God asks this question to show man that he cannot provide God any rest. Alternate translation: “and there is no place of rest good enough for me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1035	ACT	7	50	rfk1	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα?	1	Did my hand not make all these things?	God asks this question to show that man did not create anything. Alternate translation: “My hand made all these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1036	ACT	7	51	zei2			0	Connecting Statement:	With a sharp rebuke, Stephen finishes his response to the high priest and the council which he began in Acts 7:2.
1037	ACT	7	51	umq6		σκληροτράχηλοι	1	O stiff-necked	Stephen shifted from identifying with the Jewish leaders to rebuking them.
1038	ACT	7	51	vn7h	figs-idiom	σκληροτράχηλοι	1	O stiff-necked	This does not mean their necks were stiff but rather that they were “stubborn.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1039	ACT	7	51	zp55	figs-metonymy	ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν	1	uncircumcised in heart and ears	The Jews regarded uncircumcised people as disobedient to God. Stephen uses heart and ears to represent to the Jewish leaders who acted the way Gentiles act when they do not obey or listen to God. Alternate translation: “you refuse to obey and hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1040	ACT	7	52	x7kf	figs-rquestion	τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν?	1	Which of the prophets did your fathers not persecute?	Stephen asked this question to show them that they learned nothing from the errors of their forefathers. Alternate translation: “Your forefathers persecuted every prophet!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1041	ACT	7	52	q8wb		τοῦ Δικαίου	1	of the Righteous One	This refers to the Christ, the Messiah.
1042	ACT	7	52	agd9		οὗ νῦν ὑμεῖς προδόται καὶ φονεῖς ἐγένεσθε	1	of whom you have now become betrayers and murderers	“you have also betrayed and murdered him”
1043	ACT	7	53	euw5		τὸν νόμον εἰς διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων	1	the law as ordained by angels	“the law that God caused angels to give to our ancestors”
1044	ACT	7	54	t4u2			0	Connecting Statement:	The council reacts to Stephen’s words.
1045	ACT	7	54	ef2g		ἀκούοντες δὲ ταῦτα	1	Now hearing these things	This is the turning point; the sermon ends and the council members react.
1046	ACT	7	54	u4l7	figs-idiom	διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν	1	they were cut to their hearts	Here “cut to their hearts” is an idiom for making them extremely angry. Alternate translation: “they became extremely angry” or “they became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1047	ACT	7	54	ae9s	translate-symaction	ἔβρυχον τοὺς ὀδόντας ἐπ’ αὐτόν	1	they ground their teeth at him	This action expressed their strong anger at Stephen or hatred of Stephen. Alternate translation: “they became so angry that they ground their teeth together” or “they moved their teeth back and forth as they looked at Stephen”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1048	ACT	7	55	ntp4		ἀτενίσας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν	1	and looking intently into heaven	“and staring up into heaven.” It appears that only Stephen saw this vision and not anyone else in the crowd.
1049	ACT	7	55	bl2j	figs-explicit	εἶδεν δόξαν Θεοῦ	1	he saw the glory of God	People normally experienced the glory of God as a bright light. Alternate translation: “he saw a bright light from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1050	ACT	7	55	vyz3	translate-symaction	καὶ Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	and Jesus standing at the right hand of God	To stand at the right hand of God is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: “and he saw Jesus standing in the place of honor and authority beside God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1051	ACT	7	56	aqp8		Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου	1	Son of Man	Stephen refers to Jesus by the title “Son of Man.”
1052	ACT	7	57	p4cg	translate-symaction	συνέσχον τὰ ὦτα αὐτῶν	1	they covered their ears	“they put their hands on their ears.” They did this to show that they did not want to hear any more of what Stephen said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1053	ACT	7	58	ks1u		ἐκβαλόντες ἔξω τῆς πόλεως	1	throwing him outside the city	“seizing Stephen, they forcefully took him out of the city”
1054	ACT	7	58	wy7n		τὰ ἱμάτια	1	outer garments	These are cloaks or robes they would wear outside to stay warm, similar in function to a jacket or coat.
1055	ACT	7	58	sx2p		παρὰ τοὺς πόδας	1	at the feet	“in front of.” They were placed there so Saul could watch them.
1056	ACT	7	58	e2vl		νεανίου	1	of a young man	Saul was probably around 30 years old at the time.
1057	ACT	7	59	le7k			0	Connecting Statement:	This ends the story of Stephen.
1058	ACT	7	59	k2el		δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου	1	receive my spirit	“take my spirit.” It may be helpful to add “please” to show that this was a request. Alternate translation: “please receive my spirit”
1059	ACT	7	60	u86q	translate-symaction	θεὶς δὲ τὰ γόνατα	1	But having knelt down on his knees	This is an act of submission to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1060	ACT	7	60	tvf8	figs-litotes	μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν	1	do not hold this sin against them	This can be stated in a positive way. Alternate translation: “forgive them for this sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1061	ACT	7	60	r9vi	figs-euphemism	ἐκοιμήθη	1	he fell asleep	Here to fall asleep is a euphemism for dying. Alternate translation: “died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1062	ACT	8	intro	q9d9			0		Acts 08 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 8:32-33. The first sentence of verse 1 ends the description of the events in chapter 7. Luke begins a new part of his history with the words “So there began.” Special concepts in this chapter Receiving the Holy Spirit In this chapter for the first time Luke speaks of people receiving the Holy Spirit (Acts 8:15-19). The Holy Spirit had already enabled the believers to speak in tongues, to heal the sick, and to live as a community, and he had filled Stephen. But when the Jews started putting believers in prison, those believers who could leave Jerusalem did leave, and as they went, they told people about Jesus. When the people who heard about Jesus received the Holy Spirit, the church leaders knew that those people had truly become believers. Proclaimed This chapter more than any other in the Book of Acts speaks of the believers proclaiming the word, proclaiming the good news, and proclaiming that Jesus is the Christ. The word “proclaim” translates a Greek word that means to tell good news about something.
1063	ACT	8	1	tp9e	translate-versebridge		0	General Information:	It may be helpful to your audience to move these parts of the story about Stephen together by using a verse bridge as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
1064	ACT	8	1	a7uc			0	Connecting Statement:	The story shifts from Stephen to Saul in these verses.
1065	ACT	8	1	ez88	writing-background	ἐγένετο…ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, διωγμὸς μέγας ἐπὶ τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, τὴν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις. πάντες δὲ διεσπάρησαν κατὰ τὰς χώρας τῆς Ἰουδαίας καὶ Σαμαρείας, πλὴν τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	there began on that day a great persecution against the church that was in Jerusalem, and they all were scattered throughout the regions of Judea and Samaria, except the apostles	This part of verse 1 is background information about the persecution that began after Stephen’s death. This explains why Saul was persecuting the believers in verse 3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1066	ACT	8	1	vc8x		ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ	1	that day	This refers to the day that Stephen died (Acts 7:59-60).
1067	ACT	8	1	u5pi	figs-hyperbole	πάντες…διεσπάρησαν	1	they were all scattered	The word all is a generalization to express that a large number of the believers left Jerusalem because of the persecution. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1068	ACT	8	1	k5a2	figs-explicit	πλὴν τῶν ἀποστόλων	1	except the apostles	This statement implies that the apostles remained in Jerusalem even though they also experienced this great persecution. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1069	ACT	8	2	sjc8		ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς	1	devout men	“God-fearing men” or “men who feared God”
1070	ACT	8	2	a38x		ἐποίησαν κοπετὸν μέγαν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ	1	made great lamentation over him	“greatly mourned his death”
1071	ACT	8	3	nz28		σύρων τε ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας	1	dragging out both men and women	Saul forcefully took Jewish believers out of their home and put them into prison.
1072	ACT	8	3	yd2i		κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους	1	according to the houses	“houses one by one” or “from house to house”
1073	ACT	8	3	w6vk	figs-explicit	ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας	1	men and women	This refers to men and women who believed in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1074	ACT	8	4	dh3x			0	Connecting Statement:	This begins the story of Philip, whom the people had chosen as a deacon (Acts 6:5).
1075	ACT	8	4	ymy5	figs-activepassive	διασπαρέντες	1	had been scattered	The cause for the scattering, the persecution, was stated previously. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “had fled the great persecution and had gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1076	ACT	8	4	su6i	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	the word	This is a metonym for “the message.” You may need to make explicit that the message was about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1077	ACT	8	5	gz5m		κατελθὼν εἰς τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας	1	went down to the city of Samaria	The phrase went down is used here because Samaria is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.
1078	ACT	8	5	f45b		τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας	1	the city of Samaria	Possible meanings are (1) Luke expected the readers to know which city he was writing about. Alternate translation: “the main city in Samaria” or (2) Luke did not expect his readers to know which city he was writing about. Alternate translation: “a city in Samaria”
1079	ACT	8	5	pk1l	figs-metonymy	ἐκήρυσσεν αὐτοῖς τὸν Χριστόν	1	proclaimed to them the Christ	The title Christ refers to Jesus, the Messiah. Alternate translation: “told them that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1080	ACT	8	6	cnt9		δὲ οἱ ὄχλοι	1	And the crowds	“And the people in the city of Samaria.” The location was specified in Acts 8:5.
1081	ACT	8	6	wm83		προσεῖχον	1	were paying attention to	The reason people paid attention was because of all the healing Philip did.
1082	ACT	8	7	xb2n		ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα	1	having unclean spirits	“who were controlled by unclean spirits”
1083	ACT	8	8	z5z3	figs-metonymy	ἐγένετο δὲ πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ	1	And there was much joy in that city	The phrase that city refers to the people who were rejoicing. Alternate translation: “So the people of the city were rejoicing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1084	ACT	8	9	jm7n	writing-background		0	General Information:	Simon is introduced to the story of Philip. This verse gives the beginning of the background information about Simon and who he was among the Samaritans. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1085	ACT	8	9	bed1	writing-participants	ἀνὴρ δέ τις ὀνόματι Σίμων	1	But … a certain man named Simon	This is a way of introducing a new person into the story. Your language may use different wording to introduce a new person into the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1086	ACT	8	9	cx7a		τῇ πόλει	1	the city	“the city in Samaria” (Acts 8:5)
1087	ACT	8	10	kb9b	writing-background		0	General Information:	Simon is introduced to the story of Philip. This verse continues to give the beginning of the background information about Simon and who he was among the Samaritans. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1088	ACT	8	10	evt7	figs-hyperbole	προσεῖχον πάντες	1	they all … were paying attention	The word all is a generalization. Alternate translation: “many of the Samaritans … were paying attention” or “the Samaritans in the city … were paying attention” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1089	ACT	8	10	ibl1	figs-merism	ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου	1	from least to greatest	These two phrases refer to everyone from one extreme to the other. Alternate translation: “no matter how important they were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1090	ACT	8	10	j3d8		οὗτός ἐστιν ἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη	1	This man is the power of God which is called Great	People were saying that Simon was the divine power known as “The Great Power.”
1091	ACT	8	10	yw5v		ἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη	1	the power of God which is called Great	Possible meanings are (1) the powerful representative of God or (2) God or (3) the most powerful man or (4) and angel. Since the term is unclear, it may be best to simply translate it as “the Great power of God” .
1092	ACT	8	11	pxj8	writing-background		0	General Information:	Simon is introduced to the story of Philip. This verse ends the background information about Simon and who he was among the Samaritans. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1093	ACT	8	12	yiw3			0	Connecting Statement:	These verses give more information about Simon and some of the Samaritans coming to believe in Jesus.
1094	ACT	8	12	vsy8	figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίζοντο	1	they were baptized	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Philip baptized them” or “Philip baptized the new believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1095	ACT	8	13	k2th	figs-rpronouns	ὁ…Σίμων καὶ αὐτὸς ἐπίστευσεν	1	Simon himself also believed	The word himself is here used to emphasize that Simon believed. Alternate translation: “Simon was also one of those who believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1096	ACT	8	13	v91t	figs-activepassive	βαπτισθεὶς	1	having been baptized	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “after Philip had baptized Simon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1097	ACT	8	14	q8wx			0	Connecting Statement:	Luke continues the news of what was happening in Samaria.
1098	ACT	8	14	s7lr	writing-newevent	ἀκούσαντες δὲ οἱ ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις ἀπόστολοι	1	Now when the apostles in Jerusalem heard	This marks the beginning of a new part of the story of the Samaritan’s becoming believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1099	ACT	8	14	ju21	figs-synecdoche	ἡ Σαμάρεια	1	Samaria	This refers to the many people, who had become believers, throughout the district of Samaria. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1100	ACT	8	14	e682		δέδεκται	1	had received	“had believed” or “had accepted”
1101	ACT	8	15	af1n		οἵτινες καταβάντες	1	who, having come down	This refers to Peter and John.
1102	ACT	8	15	hk1m		καταβάντες	1	having come down	This phrase is used here because Samaria is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.
1103	ACT	8	15	bun9		προσηύξαντο περὶ αὐτῶν	1	prayed for them	“prayed for the Samaritan believers”
1104	ACT	8	15	n7vc		ὅπως λάβωσιν Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον	1	so that they might receive the Holy Spirit	“so that the Samaritan believers might receive the Holy Spirit”
1105	ACT	8	16	rn3c	figs-metonymy	μόνον…βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	they had only been baptized into the name of the Lord Jesus	Here name represents authority, and being baptized into his name represents being baptized in order to be under his authority. Alternate translation: “they had only been baptized to become disciples of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1106	ACT	8	16	m1nw	figs-activepassive	μόνον…βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον	1	they had only been baptized	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Philip had only baptized the Samaritan believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1107	ACT	8	17	fwh8		ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	they were laying their hands on them	Peter and John placed their hands on the Samaritan people who had believed Stephen’s message of the gospel.
1108	ACT	8	17	q7gd	translate-symaction	ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	they were laying their hands on them	This symbolic action shows that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to the believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1109	ACT	8	18	rh79	figs-activepassive	διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν τῶν ἀποστόλων δίδοται τὸ Πνεῦμα	1	the Holy Spirit was being given through the laying on of the hands of the apostles	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles gave the Holy Spirit by laying their hands on people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1110	ACT	8	19	fbw9		ἵνα ᾧ ἐὰν ἐπιθῶ τὰς χεῖρας, λαμβάνῃ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον	1	so that whoever I lay my hands on may receive the Holy Spirit	“so that I can give the Holy Spirit to anyone on whom I place my hands”
1111	ACT	8	20	df1j			0	General Information:	Here the words him, your, you, and yours all refer to Simon.
1112	ACT	8	20	jju3		τὸ ἀργύριόν σου, σὺν σοὶ εἴη εἰς ἀπώλειαν	1	Your silver with you is for destruction	“May you and your money be destroyed”
1113	ACT	8	20	gh12		τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the gift of God	Here this refers to the ability to give the Holy Spirit by laying his hands on someone.
1114	ACT	8	21	p2ev	figs-doublet	οὐκ ἔστιν σοι μερὶς οὐδὲ κλῆρος ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ	1	There is to you no part or share in this matter	The words part and share mean the same thing and are used for emphasis. Alternate translation: “You may not participate in this work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
1115	ACT	8	21	xbh2	figs-metonymy	ἡ γὰρ καρδία σου οὐκ ἔστιν εὐθεῖα	1	because your heart is not right	Here heart is a metonym for a person’s thoughts or motives. Alternate translation: “because you are not right in your heart” or “because the motives of your mind are not right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1116	ACT	8	22	ppk5	figs-metonymy	ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου	1	the intention of your heart	Here heart is a metonym for a person’s thoughts. Alternate translation: “what you intended to do” or “what you were thinking of doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1117	ACT	8	22	sa6s		τῆς κακίας…ταύτης	1	this wickedness	“these evil thoughts”
1118	ACT	8	22	pe2u		εἰ ἄρα ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου	1	if therefore the intention of your heart will be forgiven to you	“If he may be willing to forgive you for the desires you had”
1119	ACT	8	23	d3v7	figs-metaphor	εἰς…χολὴν πικρίας	1	in the poison of bitterness	Here in the poison of bitterness is a metaphor for being very envious. It speaks of envy as if it tastes bitter and poisons the person who is envious. Alternate translation: “very envious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1120	ACT	8	23	j696	figs-metaphor	σύνδεσμον ἀδικίας	1	the bond of unrighteousness	The phrase bond of unrighteousness is spoken of as if unrighteousness can restrain Simon and keep him a prisoner. It is metaphor that means Simon is not able to stop himself from sinning. Alternate translation: “because you continue sinning you are like a prisoner” or “you are like a prisoner to unrighteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1121	ACT	8	24	n5cw			0	General Information:	Here the word “you” refers to Peter and John.
1122	ACT	8	24	u1a4		ὅπως μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε	1	so that nothing of which you have spoken may happen to me	This can be stated another way. Alternate translation: “so that the things you have said may not happen to me”
1123	ACT	8	24	sk5w		μηδὲν…ὧν εἰρήκατε	1	nothing … of which you have spoken	This refers to Peter’s rebuke about Simon’s silver perishing along with him.
1124	ACT	8	25	dl9f			0	Connecting Statement:	This is concludes the part of the story about Simon and the Samaritans.
1125	ACT	8	25	uz15		οἱ…διαμαρτυράμενοι	1	when they had testified	Peter and John told what they personally knew about Jesus to the Samaritans.
1126	ACT	8	25	ww9k	figs-metonymy	λαλήσαντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	spoken the word of the Lord	Here word is a metonym for “message.” Peter and John explained the message about Jesus to the Samaritans. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1127	ACT	8	25	eu66	figs-synecdoche	πολλάς…κώμας τῶν Σαμαρειτῶν	1	to many villages of the Samaritans	Here villages refers to the people in them. Alternate translation: “to the people in many Samaritan villages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1128	ACT	8	26	zkc5	writing-background		0	General Information:	Verse 27 gives background information about the man from Ethiopia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1129	ACT	8	26	rnh4			0	Connecting Statement:	This begins the part of the story about Philip and the man from Ethiopia.
1130	ACT	8	26	mbj9	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Now	This marks a transition in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1131	ACT	8	26	w1nk		ἀνάστηθι καὶ πορεύου	1	Arise and go	These verbs work together to emphasize that he should get ready to start a long journey that will take some time. Alternate translation: “Get ready to travel”
1132	ACT	8	26	le2c		τὴν καταβαίνουσαν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Γάζαν	1	that goes down from Jerusalem to Gaza	The phrase “goes down” is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Gaza.
1133	ACT	8	26	a18y	writing-background	αὕτη ἐστὶν ἔρημος	1	This is desert	Most scholars believe Luke added this comment to describe the area through which Philip would travel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1134	ACT	8	27	xy7x	writing-participants	ἰδοὺ	1	behold	The word behold alerts us to a new person in the story. Your language may have a way of doing this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1135	ACT	8	27	s1uf		εὐνοῦχος	1	a eunuch	The emphasis of eunuch here is that the Ethiopian was a high government official, not that his physical state was being castrated.
1136	ACT	8	27	t5t1	translate-names	Κανδάκης	1	of Candace	This was a title for the queens of Ethiopia. It is similar to the way the word Pharaoh was used for the kings of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1137	ACT	8	27	v8q7	figs-explicit	ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	who had come to Jerusalem to worship	This implies that he was a Gentile who believed in God and had come to worship at the Jewish temple. Alternate translation: “who had come to worship God at the temple in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1138	ACT	8	28	d3kv		τοῦ ἅρματος	1	chariot	Possibly “wagon” or “carriage” is more fitting in this context. Chariots are normally mentioned as a vehicle for war, not as a vehicle for long-distance travel. Also, people stood to ride in chariots.
1139	ACT	8	28	bx2j	figs-metonymy	ἀνεγίνωσκεν τὸν προφήτην Ἠσαΐαν	1	was reading the prophet Isaiah	This is the Old Testament book Isaiah. Alternate translation: “was reading from the book of the prophet Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1140	ACT	8	29	llh1	figs-metonymy	κολλήθητι τῷ ἅρματι τούτῳ	1	be joined to this chariot	Philip understood that this meant he was to stay close to the person riding in the chariot. Alternate translation: “accompany the man in this chariot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1141	ACT	8	30	ffh7	figs-metonymy	ἀναγινώσκοντος Ἠσαΐαν τὸν προφήτην	1	reading Isaiah the prophet	This is the Old Testament book Isaiah. Alternate translation: “reading from the book of the prophet Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1142	ACT	8	30	x98i		ἆρά γε γινώσκεις ἃ ἀναγινώσκεις	1	Do you understand what you are reading?	The Ethiopian was intelligent and could read, but he lacked spiritual discernment. Alternate translation: “Do you understand the meaning of what you are reading?”
1143	ACT	8	31	r5g2	figs-rquestion	πῶς…ἂν δυναίμην ἐὰν μή τις ὁδηγήσει με?	1	how would I be able, unless someone will guide me?	This question was asked to state emphatically that he could not understand without help. Alternate translation: “I cannot understand unless someone guides me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1144	ACT	8	31	zx9h	figs-explicit	παρεκάλεσέν…τὸν Φίλιππον, ἀναβάντα καθίσαι σὺν αὐτῷ	1	he summoned Philip, having come up, to sit with him	It is implied here that Philip agreed to travel down the road with him to explain the scriptures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1145	ACT	8	32	nd93			0	General Information:	This a passage from the book of Isaiah. Here the words “he” and “his” refer to the Messiah.
1146	ACT	8	32	lu3j		ὡς ἀμνὸς ἐναντίον τοῦ κείραντος αὐτὸν ἄφωνος	1	like a lamb before its shearer is silent	A shearer is a person who cuts the wool off the sheep so that it may be used.
1147	ACT	8	33	y2a1	figs-activepassive	ἐν τῇ ταπεινώσει, ἡ κρίσις αὐτοῦ ἤρθη	1	In humiliation his justice was taken away	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “He was humiliated and they did not judge him fairly” or “He allowed his accusers to humble him and he suffered injustice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1148	ACT	8	33	k3uz	figs-rquestion	τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται?	1	Who can fully describe his generation?	This question was used to emphasize the he will not have descendants. Alternate translation: “No one will be able to speak about his descendant, for there will not be any.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1149	ACT	8	33	idk8	figs-activepassive	αἴρεται ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς ἡ ζωὴ αὐτοῦ	1	his life was taken from the earth	This referred to his death. It can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “men killed him” or “men took his life from the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1150	ACT	8	34	htb2		δέομαί σου	1	I am begging you	“Please tell me”
1151	ACT	8	35	uw21	figs-metonymy	τῆς Γραφῆς ταύτης	1	this scripture	This refers to Isaiah’s writings in the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “the writings of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1152	ACT	8	36	ip13		ἐπορεύοντο κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν	1	they were going along the road	“they continued to travel along the road”
1153	ACT	8	36	muz2	figs-rquestion	τί κωλύει με βαπτισθῆναι?	1	What is preventing me from being baptized?	The eunuch uses this question as a way of asking Philip for permission to be baptized. Alternate translation: “Please allow me to be baptized.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1154	ACT	8	38	l8wl		ἐκέλευσεν στῆναι τὸ ἅρμα	1	he commanded the chariot to stop	“the eunich told the driver of the chariot to stop”
1155	ACT	8	39	tz5u			0	Connecting Statement:	This is the end of the part of the story about Philip and the man from Ethiopia. The story of Philip ends at Caesarea.
1156	ACT	8	39	xp52		οὐκ εἶδεν αὐτὸν οὐκέτι ὁ εὐνοῦχος	1	the eunuch did not see him anymore	“the eunuch did not see Philip again”
1157	ACT	8	40	r1x7		Φίλιππος…εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον	1	Philip was found at Azotus	There was no indication of Philip’s traveling between where he baptized the Ethiopian and Azotus. He just suddenly disappeared along the road to Gaza and reappeared at the town of Azotus.
1158	ACT	8	40	arh5		διερχόμενος	1	passed through	Philip preached in the area around the town of Azotus.
1159	ACT	8	40	zfn6		τὰς πόλεις πάσας	1	to all the cities	“to all the cities in that region”
1160	ACT	9	intro	jm6x			0		Acts 09 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter “The Way” No one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God. “Letters for the synagogues in Damascus” The “letters” Paul asked for were probably legal papers that permitted him to put Christians in prison. The synagogue leaders in Damascus would have obeyed the letter because it was written by the high priest. If the Romans had seen the letter, they also would have allowed Saul to persecute the Christians, because they permitted the Jews to do as they desired to people who broke their religious laws. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter What Saul saw when he met Jesus It is clear that Saul saw a light and that it was because of this light that he “fell upon the ground.” Some people think that Saul knew that it was the Lord speaking to him without seeing a human form, because the Bible often speaks of God as being light and living in light. Other people think that later in his life he was able to say, “I have seen the Lord Jesus” because it was a human form that he saw here.
1161	ACT	9	1	r4n5	writing-background		0	General Information:	These verses give background information telling us what Saul has been doing since the stoning of Stephen. Here the word “him” refers to the high priest and “he” refers to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1162	ACT	9	1	yt9e			0	Connecting Statement:	The story shifts back to Saul and his salvation.
1163	ACT	9	1	anb6	figs-abstractnouns	ἔτι ἐμπνέων ἀπειλῆς καὶ φόνου εἰς τοὺς μαθητὰς	1	still speaking threats even of murder against the disciples	The noun murder can be translated as a verb. Alternate translation: “still speaking threats, even to murder the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1164	ACT	9	2	v9lw	figs-metonymy	πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς	1	to the synagogues	This refers to the people in the synagogues. Alternate translation: “to the people in the synagogues” or “to the leaders in the synagogues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1165	ACT	9	2	y8f6		ἐάν τινας εὕρῃ	1	if he might find anyone	“whenever he found anyone”
1166	ACT	9	2	pk19		τῆς ὁδοῦ, ὄντας	1	being of the Way	“who belonged to the Way” or “who followed the teachings of Jesus Christ”
1167	ACT	9	2	n94s		τῆς ὁδοῦ	1	of the Way	This term appears to have been a title for Christianity at that time.
1168	ACT	9	2	a6z4	figs-explicit	δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	having bound them, he might bring them to Jerusalem	“he might take them as prisoners to Jerusalem.” Paul’s purpose can be made clear by adding “so that the Jewish leaders could judge and punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1169	ACT	9	3	lv9q			0	Connecting Statement:	After the high priest gave Saul the letters, Saul left for Damascus.
1170	ACT	9	3	jf4g		ἐν…τῷ πορεύεσθαι	1	as he was traveling	Saul had left Jerusalem and was traveling to Damascus.
1171	ACT	9	3	by55	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο	1	it happened that	This is an expression that marks a change in the story to show something different is about to happen. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1172	ACT	9	3	dm6c		αὐτὸν περιήστραψεν φῶς ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	there shone on him a light from heaven	“a light from heaven shone all around him”
1173	ACT	9	3	gua8		ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	from heaven	Possible meanings are (1) heaven, where God lives or (2) the sky. The first meaning is preferable. Use that meaning if your language has a separate word for it.
1174	ACT	9	4	y4u4		πεσὼν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν	1	he fell to the ground	Possible meanings are that (1) “Saul threw himself to the ground” or (2) “The light caused him to fall to the ground” or (3) “Saul fell to the ground the way one who fainted fell.” Saul did not fall accidentally.
1175	ACT	9	4	c9l4	figs-rquestion	τί με διώκεις?	1	why are you persecuting me?	This rhetorical question communicates a rebuke to Saul. In some languages a statement would be more natural (AT): “You are persecuting me!” or a command (AT): “Stop persecuting me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1176	ACT	9	5	q8ge			0	General Information:	Every occurrence of the word “you” here is singular.
1177	ACT	9	5	jaq2		τίς εἶ, κύριε?	1	Who are you, Lord?	Saul was not acknowledging that Jesus is the Lord. He uses that title because he understood that he spoke to someone of supernatural power.
1178	ACT	9	5	abc0		ὁ	1	he	Jesus is speaking. Alternate translation: “he replied”
1179	ACT	9	6	i1kj		ἀνάστηθι καὶ εἴσελθε εἰς τὴν πόλιν	1	get up and enter into the city	“get up and go into Damascus”
1180	ACT	9	6	fbi6	figs-activepassive	λαληθήσεταί σοι	1	it will be told to you	This can be stated in the active form. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1181	ACT	9	7	xu7c		ἀκούοντες μὲν τῆς φωνῆς, μηδένα δὲ θεωροῦντες	1	hearing the voice, but seeing no one	“they heard the voice, but they did not see anyone”
1182	ACT	9	7	f9fe		μηδένα δὲ θεωροῦντες	1	but seeing no one	“but saw no one.” Apparently only Saul experienced the light.
1183	ACT	9	8	puw3	figs-explicit	ἀνεῳγμένων…τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ	1	his eyes being opened	This implies that he had closed his eyes because the light was too bright. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1184	ACT	9	8	dgg8		οὐδὲν ἔβλεπεν	1	he was seeing nothing	“he could not see anything.” Saul was blind.
1185	ACT	9	9	fhn6		ἦν…μὴ βλέπων	1	he was … without sight	“he was … blind” or “he … could not see anything”
1186	ACT	9	9	t8uc		οὐκ ἔφαγεν οὐδὲ ἔπιεν	1	neither ate nor drank	It is not stated whether he chose not to eat or drink as a form of worship, or if he had no appetite because he was too distressed from his situation. It is preferable not to specify the reason.
1187	ACT	9	10	kgn9	translate-names		0	General Information:	The story of Saul continues but Luke introduces another man named Ananias. This is not the same Ananias who died earlier in Acts Acts 5:3. You may translate this name the same way though as you did in Acts 5:1. Though there is more than one Judas mentioned in the New Testament, it is likely this is the only appearance of this Judas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1188	ACT	9	10	j847	writing-participants	ἦν δέ	1	Now there was	This introduces Ananias as a new character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1189	ACT	9	10	vl8k		ὁ…εἶπεν	3	he said	“Ananias said”
1190	ACT	9	11	mn24		πορεύθητι ἐπὶ τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν	1	go to the street which is called Straight	“go to Straight Street”
1191	ACT	9	11	ie1l		οἰκίᾳ Ἰούδα	1	the house of Judas	This Judas is not the disciple who betrayed Jesus. This Judas was owner of a house in Damascus where Saul was staying.
1192	ACT	9	11	u5j8		Σαῦλον ὀνόματι Ταρσέα	1	a man named Saul, from Tarsus	“a man from the city of Tarsus named Saul” or “Saul of Tarsus”
1193	ACT	9	12	jk46	translate-symaction	ἐπιθέντα αὐτῷ χεῖρας	1	laying hands on him	This was a symbol of giving a spiritual blessing to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1194	ACT	9	12	nx5q		ἀναβλέψῃ	1	he might see again	“he might regain his ability to see”
1195	ACT	9	13	la9t		ἁγίοις σου	1	to your saints	Here saints refers to Christians. Alternate translation: “the people in Jerusalem who believe in you”
1196	ACT	9	14	ptd6	figs-explicit	ἔχει ἐξουσίαν…δῆσαι πάντας	1	he has authority … to bind all	It is implied that the extent of the power and authority granted Saul was limited to the Jewish people at this point in time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1197	ACT	9	14	t3fl	figs-metonymy	τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου	1	who call upon your name	Here your name refers to Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1198	ACT	9	15	jmt7	figs-metonymy	σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς ἐστίν μοι οὗτος	1	this one is a chosen instrument of mine	Here chosen instrument refers to something that is set apart for service. Alternate translation: “I have chosen him to serve me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1199	ACT	9	15	z5fj	figs-metonymy	τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	who will carry my name	This is an expression for identifying or speaking out for Jesus. Alternate translation: “in order that he might speak about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1200	ACT	9	16	kty3	figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου	1	for my name	This is an expression meaning “for telling people about me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1201	ACT	9	17	q61x	figs-you		0	General Information:	The word “you” here is singular and refers to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1202	ACT	9	17	j2pf			0	Connecting Statement:	Ananias goes to the house where Saul is staying. After Saul is healed, the story shifts from Ananias back to Saul.
1203	ACT	9	17	s8ms		ἀπῆλθεν δὲ Ἁνανίας καὶ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν	1	And Ananias departed, and entered into the house	It may be helpful to state that Ananias went to the house before he entered into it. Alternate translation: “So Ananias went, and after he found the house where Saul was, he entered it”
1204	ACT	9	17	my6m	translate-symaction	ἐπιθεὶς ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας	1	having laid his hands on him	Ananias laid his hands on Saul. This was a symbol of giving a blessing to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1205	ACT	9	17	a89q	figs-activepassive	ὅπως ἀναβλέψῃς καὶ πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	so that you might see again and be filled with the Holy Spirit	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “has sent me so that you might see again and that the Holy Spirit might fill you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1206	ACT	9	18	m1hx		ἀπέπεσαν…ὡς λεπίδες	1	something like scales fell	“something that appeared like fish scales fell”
1207	ACT	9	18	efs9	figs-activepassive	ἀναστὰς ἐβαπτίσθη	1	rising up, he was baptized	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “he got up and Ananias baptized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1208	ACT	9	20	rc49			0	General Information:	Here only the second “he” refers to Jesus, the Son of God. The first “he” and the other ones refer to Saul.
1209	ACT	9	20	w65r	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Son of God	This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1210	ACT	9	21	xid8	figs-hyperbole	πάντες οἱ ἀκούοντες	1	all who were hearing	The word allis a generalization. Alternate translation: “those who heard him” or “many who heard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1211	ACT	9	21	f4fd	figs-rquestion	οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πορθήσας ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο	1	Is not this the one who destroyed those in Jerusalem who call on this name?	This is a rhetorical and negative question that emphasizes that Saul was indeed the man who had persecuted the believers. Alternate translation: “This is the man who destroyed those in Jerusalem who called on this name Jesus!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1212	ACT	9	21	ctg3	figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο	1	this name	Here name refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1213	ACT	9	22	r1np		συνέχυννεν τοὺς Ἰουδαίους	1	was stirring up the Jews	They were distressed in the sense that they could not find a way to refute Saul’s arguments that Jesus was the Christ.
1214	ACT	9	23	g6gw			0	General Information:	The word “him” in this section refers to Saul.
1215	ACT	9	23	g74c	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	This refers to the leaders of the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1216	ACT	9	24	lv62	figs-activepassive	ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν	1	But their plan became known to Saul	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “But someone told their plan to Saul” or “But Saul learned about their plan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1217	ACT	9	24	cy9n		παρετηροῦντο…καὶ τὰς πύλας	1	indeed they were watching the gates	This city had a wall surrounding it. People could normally only enter and exit the city through the gates.
1218	ACT	9	25	lc8m		οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ	1	his disciples	people who believed Saul’s message about Jesus and were following his teaching
1219	ACT	9	25	u8g8		διὰ τοῦ τείχους, καθῆκαν αὐτὸν, χαλάσαντες ἐν σπυρίδι	1	let him down through the wall, lowering him in a basket	“used ropes to lower him in a large basket through an opening in the wall”
1220	ACT	9	26	j1el			0	General Information:	Here the words “he” and “him” refer to Saul all but one time. “And ‘he’ told them how” in verse 27 refers to Barnabas.
1221	ACT	9	26	e38m	figs-hyperbole	καὶ πάντες ἐφοβοῦντο αὐτόν	1	but they were all afraid of him	Here they were all is a generalization, but it is possible that it refers to every person. Alternate translation: “but they were afraid of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1222	ACT	9	27	abca		διηγήσατο αὐτοῖς	1	told them	“Barnabas told the apostles”
1223	ACT	9	27	abcb		εἶδεν	1	he had seen	“Saul had seen”
1224	ACT	9	27	abcc		ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ	1	he had spoken to him	“the Lord had spoken to Saul”
1225	ACT	9	27	n9f1	figs-metonymy	ἐπαρρησιάσατο ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	he had spoken boldly in the name of Jesus	This is a way of saying he preached or taught the gospel message of Jesus Christ without fear. Alternate translation: “had openly preached the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1226	ACT	9	28	m5rs		ἦν μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	he was with them	Here the word he refers to Paul. The word them probably refers to the apostles and other disciples in Jerusalem.
1227	ACT	9	28	fbb7	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου	1	in the name of the Lord	Possible meanings are (1) this simply refers to the Lord Jesus and tells who Paul spoke about. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” or (2) name is a metonym for authority. Alternate translation: “under the authority of the Lord Jesus” or “with the authority that the Lord Jesus gave him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1228	ACT	9	29	d7lm		συνεζήτει πρὸς τοὺς Ἑλληνιστάς	1	debated with the Hellenists	Saul tried to reason with the Jews who spoke Greek.
1229	ACT	9	30	uz9a		οἱ ἀδελφοὶ	1	the brothers	The words the brothers refers to the believers in Jerusalem.
1230	ACT	9	30	j4mt		κατήγαγον αὐτὸν εἰς Καισάρειαν	1	they brought him down to Caesarea	The phrase brought him down is used here because Caesarea is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.
1231	ACT	9	30	aqn6	figs-explicit	ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν εἰς Ταρσόν	1	sent him away to Tarsus	Caesarea was a seaport. They brothers probably sent Saul to Tarsus by ship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1232	ACT	9	31	vk8y			0	General Information:	Verse 31 is a statement that gives an update on the church’s growth.
1233	ACT	9	31	n7c5			0	Connecting Statement:	In verse 32, the story shifts from Saul to a new part of the story about Peter.
1234	ACT	9	31	s4bn		ἡ…ἐκκλησία καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας, καὶ Γαλιλαίας, καὶ Σαμαρείας	1	the church throughout all Judea and Galilee and Samaria	This is the first use of the singular church to refer to more than one local congregation. Here it refers to all the believers in all the groups throughout Israel.
1235	ACT	9	31	fh2g		εἶχεν εἰρήνην	1	had peace	“lived peacefully.” This means the persecution that started with the murder of Stephen was finished.
1236	ACT	9	31	elq7	figs-activepassive	οἰκοδομουμένη καὶ πορευομένη	1	being built up and going on	The agent was either God or the Holy Spirit. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God helped them grow and to go on” or “the Holy Spirit built them up and they continued on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1237	ACT	9	31	j8c9	figs-metaphor	πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	walking in the fear of the Lord	Traveling is here a metaphor for “living.” Alternate translation: “living in obedience to the Lord” or “continuing to honor the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1238	ACT	9	31	hl24		τῇ παρακλήσει τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	in the comfort of the Holy Spirit	“with the Holy Spirit strengthening and encouraging them”
1239	ACT	9	32	w68g	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο δὲ	1	Now it happened that	This phrase is used to mark a new part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1240	ACT	9	32	m9sg	figs-hyperbole	διὰ πάντων	1	throughout the whole region	This is an generalization for Peter’s visiting the believers in many places in the region of Judea, Galilee, and Samaria. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1241	ACT	9	32	ad7g		κατελθεῖν	1	to come down	The phrase come down is used here because Lydda is lower in elevation than the other places where he was traveling.
1242	ACT	9	32	g5c4		Λύδδα	1	in Lydda	Lydda is a city located about 18 kilometers southeast of Joppa. This city was called Lod in the Old Testament and in modern Israel.
1243	ACT	9	33	hzd7		εὗρεν…ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπόν τινα	1	he found there a certain man	Peter was not intentionally searching for a paralyzed person, but happened upon him. Alternate translation: “There Peter met a man”
1244	ACT	9	33	jnc4	writing-participants	ἄνθρωπόν τινα ὀνόματι Αἰνέαν	1	a certain man named Aeneas	This introduces Aeneas as a new character in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1245	ACT	9	33	uj5f	writing-background	κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος	1	lying in a bed … who was paralyzed	This is background information about Aeneas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1246	ACT	9	33	k7hw		παραλελυμένος	1	paralyzed	unable to walk, probably unable to move below the waist
1247	ACT	9	34	ff2a		στρῶσον σεαυτῷ	1	make your bed	“roll up your mat”
1248	ACT	9	35	z3fp	figs-hyperbole	πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα	1	all who were living in Lydda and in Sharon	This is a generalization referring to many of the people there. Alternate translation: “those who lived in Lydda and in Sharon” or “many people who lived in Lydda and Sharon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1249	ACT	9	35	qkv4		Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα	1	in Lydda and in Sharon	The city of Lydda was located in the Plain of Sharon.
1250	ACT	9	35	pf23		εἶδαν αὐτὸν	1	saw him	It may be helpful to state that they saw that the man was healed. Alternate translation: “saw the man whom Peter had healed”
1251	ACT	9	35	x9yw	figs-metaphor	οἵτινες ἐπέστρεψαν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον	1	and they turned to the Lord	Here turned to the Lord is a metaphor for starting to obey the Lord. Alternate translation: “and they repented of their sins and started obeying the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1252	ACT	9	36	gy8u	writing-background		0	General Information:	These verses give background information about the woman named Tabitha. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1253	ACT	9	36	du3s			0	Connecting Statement:	Luke continues the story with a new event about Peter.
1254	ACT	9	36	zgq5	writing-newevent	δέ…ἦν	1	Now there was	This introduces a new part in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1255	ACT	9	36	gwr4	translate-names	Ταβειθά, ἣ διερμηνευομένη λέγεται, Δορκάς	1	Tabitha, which is translated to say “Dorcas.”	Tabitha is her name in the Aramaic language, and Dorcas is her name in the Greek language. Both names mean “gazelle.” Alternate translation: “Tabitha, which was Dorcas in the Greek language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1256	ACT	9	36	q2rn		πλήρης ἔργων ἀγαθῶν	1	full of good works	“doing many good things”
1257	ACT	9	37	mg72	figs-explicit	ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις	1	And it happened that in those days	This refers to the time when Peter was in Joppa. This can be stated. Alternate translation: “And it came about while Peter was nearby” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1258	ACT	9	37	y8sx		λούσαντες…αὐτὴν	1	having washed her	This was washing to prepare for her burial.
1259	ACT	9	37	znj4		ἔθηκαν ἐν ὑπερῴῳ	1	they laid her in an upper room	This was a temporary display of the body during the funeral process.
1260	ACT	9	39	k1se		εἰς τὸ ὑπερῷον	1	to the upper room	“to the upstairs room where Dorcas’ body was lying”
1261	ACT	9	39	me79		πᾶσαι αἱ χῆραι	1	all the widows	It is possible that all the widows of the town were there since it was not a large town.
1262	ACT	9	39	piu7		χῆραι	1	widows	women whose husbands had died and therefore needed help
1263	ACT	9	39	y6q5		μετ’ αὐτῶν οὖσα	1	while being with them	“while she was still alive with the disciples”
1264	ACT	9	40	ek9c	writing-endofstory		0		The story of Tabitha ends in verse 42. Verse 43 tells us what happens to Peter after the story ends. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
1265	ACT	9	40	yp2u		ἐκβαλὼν…ἔξω πάντας	1	put out all of them	“told them all to leave the room.” Peter had everyone leave so he could be alone to pray for Tabitha.
1266	ACT	9	41	r7n6		δοὺς…αὐτῇ χεῖρα, ἀνέστησεν αὐτήν	1	having given his hand to her, he raised her up	Peter took hold of her hand and helped her stand up.
1267	ACT	9	41	b73s		τοὺς ἁγίους καὶ τὰς χήρας	1	the saints and the widows	The widows were possibly also believers but are mentioned specifically because Tabitha was so important to them.
1268	ACT	9	42	nda9	figs-activepassive	γνωστὸν δὲ ἐγένετο καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰόππης	1	And this became known throughout all Joppa	This refers to the miracle of Peter’s raising Tabitha from the dead. It can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “People throughout all Joppa heard about this matter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1269	ACT	9	42	fyz4		ἐπίστευσαν…ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον	1	believed on the Lord	“believed in the gospel of the Lord Jesus”
1270	ACT	9	43	k9ik	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο	1	Now it happened that	This introduces the beginning of the next event in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1271	ACT	9	43	qar2		Σίμωνι, βυρσεῖ	1	Simon, a tanner	“a man named Simon who made leather from animal skins”
1272	ACT	10	intro	ym7z			0		Acts 10 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Unclean The Jews believed that they could become unclean in God’s sight if they visited or ate food with a Gentile. This was because the Pharisees had made a law against it because they wanted to keep people from eating foods that the law of Moses said were unclean. The law of Moses did say that some foods were unclean, but it did not say that God’s people could not visit or eat with Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]]) Baptism and the Holy Spirit The Holy Spirit “fell on” those who were listening to Peter. This showed the Jewish believers that Gentiles could receive the word of God and receive the Holy Spirit just as the Jewish believers had. After that, the Gentiles were baptized.
1273	ACT	10	1	m1vx	writing-background		0	General Information:	These verses give background information about Cornelius. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1274	ACT	10	1	nfy5			0	Connecting Statement:	This is the beginning of the part of the story about Cornelius.
1275	ACT	10	1	wtb9	writing-participants	ἀνὴρ δέ τις	1	Now there was a certain man	This was a way of introducing a new person to this part of the historical account. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1276	ACT	10	1	x476		ὀνόματι Κορνήλιος, ἑκατοντάρχης ἐκ Σπείρης τῆς καλουμένης Ἰταλικῆς	1	named Cornelius, a centurion from the regiment that was called ‘Italian.’	“whose name was Cornelius. He was an officer in charge of 100 soldiers from the Italian section of the Roman army.
1277	ACT	10	1	abcd		Σπείρης τῆς καλουμένης Ἰταλικῆς	1	the regiment that was called ‘Italian.’	“the Italian Regiment”
1278	ACT	10	2	s6rh		εὐσεβὴς καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν	1	devout and fearing God	“believing in God and seeking to honor and worship God in his life”
1279	ACT	10	2	n8i3		φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν	1	fearing God	The word fearing here has the sense of deep respect and awe.
1280	ACT	10	2	abce		τῷ λαῷ	1	to the people	This here refers to Jewish people who were in need.
1281	ACT	10	2	w2kx	figs-hyperbole	δεόμενος τοῦ Θεοῦ διὰ παντός	1	praying to God through all	The phrase through all is a generalization. Alternate translation: “he prayed to God a lot” or “he prayed to God regularly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1282	ACT	10	3	up3j		ὥραν ἐνάτην	1	the ninth hour	“three o’clock in the afternoon.” This is the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews.
1283	ACT	10	3	g3lv		εἶδεν…φανερῶς	1	he clearly saw	“Cornelius clearly saw”
1284	ACT	10	4	abcf		ὁ δὲ, ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ	1	But he stared at him	Cornelius looked intently at the angel.
1285	ACT	10	4	abcg		εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ	1	And he said to him	“Then the angel said to Cornelius”
1286	ACT	10	4	p5ml	figs-explicit	αἱ προσευχαί σου, καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου, ἀνέβησαν εἰς μνημόσυνον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	Your prayers and your alms have gone up for a memorial offering before God	It is implied that his gifts and prayers had been accepted by God. Alternate translation: “God is pleased by your prayers and your gifts that have gone up to him as a memorial offering to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1287	ACT	10	6	lt9n		βυρσεῖ	1	a tanner	a person who makes leather from animal skins
1288	ACT	10	7	g6lq		ὡς δὲ ἀπῆλθεν ὁ ἄγγελος ὁ λαλῶν αὐτῷ	1	And when the angel who spoke to him had left	“When Cornelius’ vision of the angel had ended.”
1289	ACT	10	7	i3x7		στρατιώτην εὐσεβῆ τῶν προσκαρτερούντων αὐτῷ	1	a devout soldier of those who served him	“one of the soldiers who served him, who also worshiped God.” This soldier worshiped God. That was rare in the Roman army, so Cornelius’ other soldiers probably did not worship God.
1290	ACT	10	7	yg7g		εὐσεβῆ	1	devout	An adjective to describe a person who worshiped God and served him.
1291	ACT	10	8	pcg2		ἐξηγησάμενος ἅπαντα αὐτοῖς	1	having told them everything	Cornelius explained his vision to his two servants and to one of his soldiers.
1292	ACT	10	8	d2p3		ἀπέστειλεν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν Ἰόππην	1	he sent them to Joppa	“he sent two of his two servants and the one soldier to Joppa”
1293	ACT	10	9	ey9n			0	General Information:	Here the word “they” refers to Cornelius’ two servants and the soldier under Cornelius’ command (Acts 10:7).
1294	ACT	10	9	w3g4			0	Connecting Statement:	The story shifts away from Cornelius to tell us what God is doing with to Peter.
1295	ACT	10	9	tu7n		περὶ ὥραν ἕκτην	1	at about the sixth hour	“at around noon”
1296	ACT	10	9	r6l8		ἀνέβη…ἐπὶ τὸ δῶμα	1	went up to the housetop	The roofs of the houses were flat, and people often did many different activities on them.
1297	ACT	10	10	slq7		παρασκευαζόντων…αὐτῶν	1	while they were preparing	“before the people finished cooking the food”
1298	ACT	10	10	im7x	figs-activepassive	ἐγένετο ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἔκστασις	1	a vision came upon him	“God gave him a vision” or “he saw a vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1299	ACT	10	11	n4hi		θεωρεῖ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγμένον	1	he sees the sky having been opened	This was the beginning of Peter’s vision. It can be a new sentence.
1300	ACT	10	11	u9u4		ὡς ὀθόνην μεγάλην, τέσσαρσιν ἀρχαῖς	1	like a large sheet … by four corners	The container holding the animals had the appearance of a large square piece of cloth.
1301	ACT	10	11	jh1m		τέσσαρσιν ἀρχαῖς καθιέμενον	1	being let down by four corners	“suspended by its four corners”
1302	ACT	10	12	ua3j	figs-explicit	πάντα τὰ τετράποδα, καὶ ἑρπετὰ τῆς γῆς, καὶ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	all the four-footed animals and creeping things on the earth, and birds of the sky	From Peter’s response in the next verse, it can be implied that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of them. Alternate translation: “every kind of animal and reptile and bird that the Mosaic laws forbade Jews to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1303	ACT	10	13	a2z4	figs-synecdoche	ἐγένετο φωνὴ πρὸς αὐτόν	1	a voice came to him	The person speaking is not specified. The voice was probably God, although it could possibly have been an angel from God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1304	ACT	10	14	z7r5		μηδαμῶς	1	Not at all	“I will not do that”
1305	ACT	10	14	a2jj	figs-explicit	οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον	1	I have never eaten anything defiled and unclean	It is implied that some the animals in the container were unclean as defined by the law of Moses and were not to be eaten by believers who lived before Christ died. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1306	ACT	10	15	xs5s	figs-123person	ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν	1	What God has cleansed	If God is the speaker, he is referring to himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “What I, God, have cleansed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1307	ACT	10	16	rlr9		τοῦτο…ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς	1	this happened three times	It is possible that everything Peter saw happened did not happen three times, but that the phrase, “What God has cleansed, do not call it defiled,” was repeated three times. However, it may be best to simply say “This happened three times.”
1308	ACT	10	17	d4zi		διηπόρει ὁ Πέτρος	1	Peter was very confused … about	This means that Peter was having difficulty understanding what the vision meant.
1309	ACT	10	17	n6da		ἰδοὺ	1	behold	The word behold here alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows, in this case, the two men standing at the gate.
1310	ACT	10	17	e62m	figs-explicit	ἐπέστησαν ἐπὶ τὸν πυλῶνα	1	stood before the gate	“stood before the gate to the house.” It is implied that this house had a wall with a gate in it to enter the property. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1311	ACT	10	17	h72m		διερωτήσαντες τὴν οἰκίαν	1	having found by inquiry the house	This happened before they arrived at the house. This could be stated earlier in the verse, as the UST does.
1312	ACT	10	18	qe9d		φωνήσαντες	1	they called out	Cornelius’ men remained outside the gate while asking about Peter.
1313	ACT	10	19	e8ai		διενθυμουμένου περὶ τοῦ ὁράματος	1	while … was still thinking about the vision	“as … was still wondering about the meaning of the vision”
1314	ACT	10	19	d9q8		τὸ Πνεῦμα	1	the Spirit	“the Holy Spirit”
1315	ACT	10	19	iqx5		ἰδοὺ	1	Behold	“Pay attention, because what I am about to say is both true and important: three”
1316	ACT	10	19	va39	translate-textvariants	ἄνδρες τρεῖς ζητοῦσιν σε	1	three men are looking for you	Cornelius sent two of his servants and one soldier. Some ancient texts have a different number of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1317	ACT	10	20	ym1x		κατάβηθι	1	go down	“go down from the roof of the house”
1318	ACT	10	20	wx4n		πορεύου σὺν αὐτοῖς, μηδὲν διακρινόμενος	1	go with them. Do not hesitate	It would be natural for Peter not to want to go with them, because they were strangers and they were Gentiles.
1319	ACT	10	21	lj1f		ἐγώ εἰμι ὃν ζητεῖτε	1	I am he whom you are seeking	“I am the man you are looking for”
1320	ACT	10	22	i4zh			0	General Information:	The words “They” and “them” here refer to the two servants and the soldier from Cornelius (Acts 10:7).
1321	ACT	10	22	baa3	figs-activepassive	Κορνήλιος, ἑκατοντάρχης ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν, μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου, μεταπέμψασθαί σε εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι ῥήματα παρὰ σοῦ	1	Cornelius, a centurion, a man righteous and fearing God, and well-testifed to by the whole nation of the Jews, was instructed by a holy angel to summon you to his house and to hear a word from you	This can be divided into several sentences and stated in active form as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1322	ACT	10	22	wvl1		φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν	1	fearing God	The word fearing here has the sense of deep respect and awe.
1323	ACT	10	22	gv91	figs-hyperbole	ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	the whole nation of the Jews	This number of people is exaggerated with the word whole to emphasize how widely this was known among the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1324	ACT	10	23	jlc7		εἰσκαλεσάμενος οὖν αὐτοὺς ἐξένισεν	1	Therefore, having invited them in, he hosted them	The journey to Caesarea was too long for them to begin that afternoon.
1325	ACT	10	23	shs5		ἐξένισεν	1	he hosted them	“he invited them to be his guests”
1326	ACT	10	23	t7cz		τινες τῶν ἀδελφῶν τῶν ἀπὸ Ἰόππης	1	some of the brothers who were from Joppa	This refers to believers who lived in Joppa.
1327	ACT	10	24	c3s6		τῇ…ἐπαύριον	1	the following day	This was the next day after they left Joppa. The journey to Caesarea took longer than one day.
1328	ACT	10	24	g2up		ὁ δὲ Κορνήλιος ἦν προσδοκῶν αὐτοὺς	1	And Cornelius was waiting for them	“And Cornelius expected them”
1329	ACT	10	25	wxt8		ὡς…τοῦ εἰσελθεῖν τὸν Πέτρον	1	as Peter entered	“when Peter entered the house”
1330	ACT	10	25	b4pn	translate-symaction	πεσὼν ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας	1	and falling down at his feet	“and kneeling down and putting his face close to Peter’s feet.” He did this to honor Peter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1331	ACT	10	25	u2x5		πεσὼν	1	and falling down	He purposely lies down facing the ground to show that he is worshiping.
1332	ACT	10	26	s7n5		ἀνάστηθι, καὶ ἐγὼ αὐτὸς ἄνθρωπός εἰμι	1	Get up! I too am a man myself	This was a mild rebuke or correction to Cornelius not to worship Peter. Alternate translation: “Stop doing that! I am only a man, as you are”
1333	ACT	10	27	f9x6	figs-you		0	General Information:	The word “him” here refers to Cornelius. Here the words “You” and “you” are plural and include Cornelius as well as the Gentiles who were present. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
1334	ACT	10	27	bg7b			0	Connecting Statement:	Peter addresses the people who are gathered in Cornelius’ house.
1335	ACT	10	27	twp9	figs-explicit	συνεληλυθότας πολλούς	1	many people gathered together	“many Gentile people gathered together.” It is implied that these people Cornelius had invited were Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1336	ACT	10	28	g7j7		ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε	1	You yourselves know	Peter is addressing Cornelius and his invited guests.
1337	ACT	10	28	iyx6		ὡς ἀθέμιτόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ Ἰουδαίῳ	1	how unlawful it is for a Jewish man	“that it is forbidden for a Jewish man.” This refers to the Jewish religious law.
1338	ACT	10	28	k3we		ἀλλοφύλῳ	1	a foreigner	This refers to people who were not Jews and not specifically to where they lived.
1339	ACT	10	30	krz8	figs-you		0	General Information:	In verses 31 and 32 Cornelius quotes what the angel had said to him when he appeared to him at the ninth hour. The words “you” and “your” are all singular. The word “we” here does not include Peter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1340	ACT	10	30	n5fs			0	Connecting Statement:	Cornelius responds to Peter’s question.
1341	ACT	10	30	na4u		ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας	1	Four days ago	Cornelius is referring to the day before the third night before he is speaking to Peter. Biblical culture counts the current day, so the day before three nights ago is four days ago. Current Western culture does not count the current day, so many Western translations read, “three days ago.”
1342	ACT	10	30	mqv8	translate-textvariants	προσευχόμενος	1	praying	Some ancient authorities say “fasting and praying” instead of simply praying. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1343	ACT	10	30	yy6e		τὴν ἐνάτην	1	at the ninth hour	The normal afternoon time when the Jews pray to God.
1344	ACT	10	31	heh3	figs-activepassive	εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ	1	your prayer has been heard	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God has heard your prayer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1345	ACT	10	31	s6nz		ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	have been remembered before God	“brought you to God’s attention.” This does not imply that God had forgotten.
1346	ACT	10	32	ci31		μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα, ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος	1	summon Simon who is called Peter	“tell Simon who is also called Peter to come to you”
1347	ACT	10	33	p5ee		ἐξαυτῆς	1	immediately	“right away”
1348	ACT	10	33	ruf3		σύ τε καλῶς ἐποίησας παραγενόμενος	1	and you did well in coming	This expression is a polite way of thanking Peter for coming. Alternate translation: “and I certainly thank you for coming”
1349	ACT	10	33	ry21		ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	before God	This refers to the presence of God.
1350	ACT	10	33	xt4x	figs-activepassive	τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	that you have been instructed by the Lord	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that the Lord has told you to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1351	ACT	10	34	ku8u			0	Connecting Statement:	Peter begins speaking to everyone in the house of Cornelius.
1352	ACT	10	34	cyn8		ἀνοίξας δὲ Πέτρος τὸ στόμα εἶπεν	1	And Peter opened his mouth and said	“And Peter began to speak to them”
1353	ACT	10	34	ha31		ἐπ’ ἀληθείας	1	In truth	This means that what he is about to say is especially important to know.
1354	ACT	10	34	iii7		οὐκ ἔστιν προσωπολήμπτης ὁ Θεός	1	God is not one who shows partiality	“God does not favor certain people”
1355	ACT	10	35	j78e		ὁ φοβούμενος αὐτὸν καὶ ἐργαζόμενος δικαιοσύνην, δεκτὸς αὐτῷ ἐστιν	1	the one who fears him and works righteous deeds is acceptable to him	“he accepts anyone who worships him and does righteous deeds”
1356	ACT	10	35	b5cr		φοβούμενος	1	fears	The word fears here has the sense of deep respect and awe.
1357	ACT	10	36	bjk7			0	General Information:	The word “him” here refers to Jesus.
1358	ACT	10	36	sv4s			0	Connecting Statement:	Peter continues to talk to Cornelius and his guests.
1359	ACT	10	36	md1l		οὗτός ἐστιν πάντων Κύριος	1	he is Lord of all	Here all means “all people.”
1360	ACT	10	37	ch65	figs-hyperbole	καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας	1	throughout all Judea	The word all is a generalization. Alternate translation: “throughout Judea” or “in many places in Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1361	ACT	10	37	sq2i		μετὰ τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐκήρυξεν Ἰωάννης	1	after the baptism that John proclaimed	“after John preached to the people to repent and then baptized them”
1362	ACT	10	38	jtr3		Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ, ὡς ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ καὶ δυνάμει; ὃς διῆλθεν εὐεργετῶν καὶ ἰώμενος πάντας τοὺς καταδυναστευομένους ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου, ὅτι ὁ Θεὸς ἦν μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1	Jesus who is from Nazareth, how God anointed him with the Holy Spirit and with power, who went about doing good and healing all who were oppressed by the devil, for God was with him	This long sentence, which begins in verse 36, can be shortened into several sentences as in the UST.
1363	ACT	10	38	ku82	figs-metaphor	ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ καὶ δυνάμει	1	God anointed him with the Holy Spirit and with power	The Holy Spirit and God’s power are spoken of as if they are something that can be poured out onto a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1364	ACT	10	38	y5ya	figs-hyperbole	πάντας τοὺς καταδυναστευομένους ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου	1	all who were oppressed by the devil	The word all is a generalization. Alternate translation: “those who were oppressed by the devil” or “many people who were oppressed by the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1365	ACT	10	38	tj3u	figs-idiom	ὁ Θεὸς ἦν μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1	God was with him	The idiom was with him means “was helping him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1366	ACT	10	39	kal7	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	The words “We” and “we” here refer to Peter and the apostles and believers who were with Jesus when he was on earth. The words “he” and “him” here refer to Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1367	ACT	10	39	sx3a		ἔν…τῇ χώρᾳ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	in the country of the Jews	This refers mainly to Judea at that time.
1368	ACT	10	39	z4dt		κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου	1	by hanging him on a tree	This is another expression that refers to crucifixion. Alternate translation: “by nailing him to a wooden cross”
1369	ACT	10	40	cxj5	figs-idiom	τοῦτον ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν	1	but God raised up this one	Here raised up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “but God caused him to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1370	ACT	10	40	w8kv		τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ	1	on the third day	“on the third day after he died”
1371	ACT	10	40	iz8l		ἔδωκεν αὐτὸν ἐμφανῆ γενέσθαι	1	caused him to be seen	“permitted many people to see him after he was raised from the dead”
1372	ACT	10	41	q7d1		ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld.
1373	ACT	10	42	ik96	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “us” includes Peter and believers. It excludes his audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1374	ACT	10	42	zne5			0	Connecting Statement:	Peter finishes his speech to everyone in the house of Cornelius, which he began in Acts 10:34.
1375	ACT	10	42	c1ak	figs-activepassive	ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ὡρισμένος ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	that he is the one who has been chosen by God	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that God chose this Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1376	ACT	10	42	ws4t	figs-nominaladj	ζώντων καὶ νεκρῶν	1	of the living and the dead	This refers to people who are still living and people who have died. Alternate translation: “of the people who are alive and the people who are dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
1377	ACT	10	43	ub5d		τούτῳ πάντες οἱ προφῆται μαρτυροῦσιν	1	To this one, all the prophets bear witness that	“All the prophets bear witness to Jesus that”
1378	ACT	10	43	vq6l	figs-activepassive	ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν λαβεῖν διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ, πάντα τὸν πιστεύοντα εἰς αὐτὸν	1	everyone who believes in him shall receive forgiveness of sins through his name	This could be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God will forgive the sins of everyone who believes in Jesus because of what Jesus has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1379	ACT	10	43	y6d1	figs-metonymy	διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ	1	through his name	Here his name refers to the actions of Jesus. His name means God who saves. Alternate translation: “through what Jesus has done for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1380	ACT	10	44	cz7x		ἐπέπεσε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1	the Holy Spirit fell	Here the word fell means “happened suddenly.” Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit suddenly came”
1381	ACT	10	44	wf7u		πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας	1	all of those who were listening	Here all refers to all the Gentiles at the house who were listening to Peter.
1382	ACT	10	45	j6wt		ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	the gift of the Holy Spirit	This refers to the Holy Spirit himself who was given to them.
1383	ACT	10	45	g161	figs-activepassive	ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐκκέχυται	1	the gift of the Holy Spirit was poured out	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God poured out the Holy Spirit as a gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1384	ACT	10	45	mqs8	figs-metaphor	ἐκκέχυται	1	was poured out	The Holy Spirit is spoken of as if he were something that could be poured out upon people. It implies a generous amount. Alternate translation: “was generously given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1385	ACT	10	45	f33n		καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ ἔθνη	1	also on the Gentiles	Here also refers to the fact that the Holy Spirit had already been given to the Jewish believers.
1386	ACT	10	46	w58d			0	General Information:	The words “he” and “him” refer to Peter.
1387	ACT	10	46	mpg5			0	Connecting Statement:	This is the end of the part of the story about Cornelius.
1388	ACT	10	46	p6pa		λαλούντων γλώσσαις, καὶ μεγαλυνόντων τὸν Θεόν	1	speaking with tongues and praising God	These were known spoken languages that caused the Jews to acknowledge that the Gentiles were indeed praising God.
1389	ACT	10	47	u5d5	figs-rquestion	μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς?	1	No one is able to withhold water, is he, that these are not baptized, who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did?	Peter uses this question to convince the Jewish Christians that the Gentile believers should be baptized. Alternate translation: “No one should keep water from these people! We should baptize them because they have received the Holy Spirit just as we did!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1390	ACT	10	48	t2y9	figs-explicit	προσέταξεν…αὐτοὺς…βαπτισθῆναι	1	he commanded them to be baptized	It is implied that the Jewish Christians were the ones who would baptize them. Alternate translation: “Peter commanded the Gentile believers to allow the Jewish Christians to baptize them” or “Peter commanded the Jewish Christians to baptize them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1391	ACT	10	48	ax6x	figs-metonymy	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ βαπτισθῆναι	1	be baptized in the name of Jesus Christ	Here in the name of Jesus Christ expresses that the reason for their baptism was that they believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “be baptized as believers in Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1392	ACT	11	intro	hva5			0		Acts 11 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter “The Gentiles also had received the word of God” Almost all of the first believers were Jewish. Luke writes in this chapter that many Gentiles started to believe in Jesus. They believed that the message about Jesus was true and so began to “receive the word of God.” Some of the believers in Jerusalem did not believe that Gentiles could truly follow Jesus, so Peter went to them and told them what had happened to him and how he had seen the Gentiles receive the Word of God and receive the Holy Spirit.
1393	ACT	11	1	uw5m			0	General Information:	This is the beginning of a new event in the story.
1394	ACT	11	1	j7f7			0	Connecting Statement:	Peter arrives in Jerusalem and begins talking to the Jews there.
1395	ACT	11	1	ab75	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Now	This marks a new part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1396	ACT	11	1	f1md		οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ	2	the brothers	The phrase the brothers here refers to the believers in Judea.
1397	ACT	11	1	q8wl		οἱ ὄντες κατὰ τὴν Ἰουδαίαν	1	who were throughout Judea	“who were throughout the province of Judea”
1398	ACT	11	1	w3rx	figs-metonymy	ἐδέξαντο τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	had received the word of God	This expression refers to the fact that the Gentiles believed the gospel message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “had believed the message of God about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1399	ACT	11	2	kb4m		ἀνέβη…εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	came up to Jerusalem	Jerusalem was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of coming up to Jerusalem and going down from it.
1400	ACT	11	2	yar6	figs-metonymy	οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς	1	those from the circumcision	This is a reference to some of the Jews who believed that every believer must be circumcised. Alternate translation: “some Jewish believers in Jerusalem who wanted all followers of Christ to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1401	ACT	11	3	ah7v	figs-metonymy	ἄνδρας, ἀκροβυστίαν ἔχοντας	1	uncircumcised men	The phrase uncircumcised men refers to Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1402	ACT	11	3	t9e1		συνέφαγεν αὐτοῖς	1	ate with them	It was against Jewish tradition for Jews to eat with Gentiles.
1403	ACT	11	4	lrh6			0	Connecting Statement:	Peter responds to the Jews by telling them about his vision and about what had happened at Cornelius’ house.
1404	ACT	11	4	bfp5		ἀρξάμενος…Πέτρος ἐξετίθετο	1	Peter began to explain	Peter did not criticize the Jewish believers but reacted in a friendly explanatory manner.
1405	ACT	11	4	nuy6		καθεξῆς	1	in an orderly manner	“exactly what happened”
1406	ACT	11	5	j37p		ὡς ὀθόνην μεγάλην	1	like a large sheet	The container holding the animals had the appearance of a large square piece of cloth. See how you translated this in Acts 10:11.
1407	ACT	11	5	axu6		τέσσαρσιν ἀρχαῖς	1	by its four corners	“suspended by its four corners.” See how you translated this in Acts 10:11.
1408	ACT	11	6	lbh4	figs-explicit	τὰ τετράποδα τῆς γῆς, καὶ τὰ θηρία, καὶ τὰ ἑρπετὰ, καὶ τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ	1	the four-legged animals of the earth, and the wild beasts, and the creeping animals, and the birds of the sky	From Peter’s response, it can be implied that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of them. See how you translated a similar phrase in Acts 10:12. Alternate translation: “many kinds of animals and reptiles and birds that the Mosaic laws forbade Jews to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1409	ACT	11	6	ew64		θηρία	1	wild beasts	This probably refer to the animals people do not or can not tame or control.
1410	ACT	11	6	t36i		ἑρπετὰ	1	creeping animals	These are reptiles.
1411	ACT	11	7	i5ic	figs-synecdoche	ἤκουσα…φωνῆς	1	I heard … a voice	The person speaking is not specified. The voice was probably God, although it could possibly have been an angel from God. See how you translated a voice in Acts 10:13. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1412	ACT	11	8	m4mu		μηδαμῶς	1	By no means	“I will not do that.” See how you translated this in Acts 10:14.
1413	ACT	11	8	m5p5	figs-metonymy	κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου	1	the profane or unclean has never entered into my mouth	Apparently the animals in the sheet were animals which the Jewish law in the Old Testament forbade the Jews to eat. This can be said in a positive way. Alternate translation: “I have eaten only meat from holy and clean animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
1414	ACT	11	8	kj91		ἀκάθαρτον	1	unclean	In the Old Testament Jewish law, a person became ritually unclean in various ways, such as eating certain forbidden animals.
1415	ACT	11	9	n2gn	figs-metonymy	ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν, σὺ μὴ κοίνου	1	What God has cleansed, do not call unclean	This refers to the animals in the sheet. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1416	ACT	11	10	xrq6		τοῦτο…ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς	1	this happened three times	It is possible that everything Peter saw happened did not happen three times, but that the phrase, “What God has cleansed, do not call it defiled,” was repeated three times. However, it may be best to simply say “this happened three times.” See how you translated This happened three times in Acts 10:16.
1417	ACT	11	11	ias8	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here “we” refers to Peter and the believers in Joppa. It does not include his current audience in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1418	ACT	11	11	b2qv		ἰδοὺ	1	behold	This word alerts us to the new people in the story. Your language may have a way of doing this.
1419	ACT	11	11	k44j		ἐξαυτῆς	1	right away	“immediately” or “at that exact moment”
1420	ACT	11	11	qwn5	figs-activepassive	ἀπεσταλμένοι	1	having been sent	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “someone had sent them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1421	ACT	11	12	lf6m		μηδὲν διακρίναντα	1	not making any distinction	“not being concerned that they were Gentiles”
1422	ACT	11	12	cf8x		ἦλθον…σὺν ἐμοὶ	1	went with me	went with me to Caesarea”
1423	ACT	11	12	xrc6		οἱ ἓξ ἀδελφοὶ οὗτοι	1	these six brothers	“these six Jewish believers”
1424	ACT	11	12	w6ia		εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ ἀνδρός	1	into the house of the man	This refers to the house of Cornelius.
1425	ACT	11	13	few6		Σίμωνα, τὸν ἐπικαλούμενον Πέτρον	1	Simon, who is called Peter	“Simon, who is also called Peter.” See how you translated the same phrase in Acts 10:32.
1426	ACT	11	14	hpr2	figs-metonymy	πᾶς ὁ οἶκός σου	1	all your household	This refers to all the people in the household. Alternate translation: “everyone who lives in your house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1427	ACT	11	15	qy12	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “us” refers to Peter, the apostles, and any of the Jewish believers who had received the Holy Spirit at Pentecost. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1428	ACT	11	15	a8jw		ἐν…τῷ ἄρξασθαί με λαλεῖν, ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς	1	as I began to speak, the Holy Spirit came on them	This implies that Peter had not finished speaking but had intended to say more.
1429	ACT	11	15	ak2p	figs-ellipsis	ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ἐν ἀρχῇ	1	the Holy Spirit came on them, just as also on us in the beginning	Peter leaves out some things to keep the story short. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit came on the Gentile believers, just as he also came on the Jewish believers at Pentecost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1430	ACT	11	15	th4m		ἐν ἀρχῇ	1	in the beginning	Peter is referring to the day of Pentecost.
1431	ACT	11	16	v116	figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς…βαπτισθήσεσθε ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ	1	you will be baptized in the Holy Spirit	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God will baptize you in the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1432	ACT	11	17	pe42	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	The word “them” refers to Cornelius and his Gentile guests and household. Peter does not call them Gentiles in his account to the Jewish believers at Jerusalem. The word “they” refers to the Jewish believers to whom Peter spoke. The word “us” includes all of the Jewish believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1433	ACT	11	17	e576			0	Connecting Statement:	Peter finishes his speech (which he began in Acts 11:4) to the Jews about his vision and about what had happened at the house of Cornelius.
1434	ACT	11	17	u3nu	figs-rquestion	εἰ οὖν τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς, ὡς καὶ ἡμῖν πιστεύσασιν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν, ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν?	1	If, therefore, God gave to them the same gift as also to us when we believed on the Lord Jesus Christ, who was I, able to oppose God?	Peter uses this question to emphasize that he was only obeying God. Alternate translation: “Since God gave to them the same gift as he also gave to us when we believed on the Lord Jesus Christ, I decided that I could not oppose God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1435	ACT	11	17	y7ag		τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν	1	the same gift	Peter refers to the gift of the Holy Spirit.
1436	ACT	11	18	nr7g		ἡσύχασαν	1	they became quiet	“they did not argue with Peter”
1437	ACT	11	18	z3fy	figs-abstractnouns	καὶ τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν μετάνοιαν εἰς ζωὴν ἔδωκεν	1	God has given repentance unto life to the Gentiles also	“God has given repentance that leads to life to the Gentiles also.” Here life refers to eternal life. The abstract nouns repentance and life can be translated as the verbs “repent” and “live.” Alternate translation: “God has allowed the Gentiles also to repent and live eternally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1438	ACT	11	19	zck4			0	Connecting Statement:	Luke tells about what happened to the believers who fled after the stoning of Stephen.
1439	ACT	11	19	bwb8	writing-newevent	οὖν	1	Then	This introduces the new part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1440	ACT	11	19	m3i7		οἱ…διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ τῆς θλίψεως τῆς γενομένης ἐπὶ Στεφάνῳ, διῆλθον	1	those who had been scattered from the persecution that happened over Stephen spread	The Jews began persecuting Jesus’ followers because Stephen had said and done things that the Jews did not like. Because of this persecution, many of Jesus’ followers left Jerusalem and went to many different places.
1441	ACT	11	19	whm6	figs-activepassive	οἱ…διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ τῆς θλίψεως τῆς γενομένης ἐπὶ Στεφάνῳ	1	those who had been scattered from the persecution that happened over Stephen	This can be translated in active form. Alternate translation: “the ones whom the Jews had been persecuting after they killed Stephen, who had left Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1442	ACT	11	19	vx4b		τῆς θλίψεως τῆς γενομένης ἐπὶ Στεφάνῳ	1	the persecution that arose over Stephen	the persecution that happened because of what Stephen had said and done
1443	ACT	11	19	w5jn		διῆλθον	1	spread	“went in many different directions”
1444	ACT	11	19	c8ha		μόνον Ἰουδαίοις	1	only to Jews	The believers thought God’s message was for the Jewish people, and not for the Gentiles.
1445	ACT	11	20	mww9	figs-explicit	ἐλάλουν καὶ πρὸς τοὺς Ἑλληνιστάς	1	and spoke also to Greeks	These Greek-speaking people were Gentiles, not Jews. Alternate translation: “and also spoke to Gentiles who spoke Greek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1446	ACT	11	21	aj5g	figs-metonymy	ἦν χεὶρ Κυρίου μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	The hand of the Lord was with them	God’s hand signifies his powerful help. Alternate translation: “God was powerfully enabling those believers to preach effectively” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1447	ACT	11	21	n9pq	figs-metaphor	ἐπέστρεψεν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον	1	turned to the Lord	Here turned to the Lord is a metaphor for starting to obey the Lord. Alternate translation: “and they repented of their sins and began to obey the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1448	ACT	11	22	mrg9			0	General Information:	In these verses, the word “he” refers to Barnabas. The word “they” refers to the believers of the church at Jerusalem. The words “them” and “their” refer to the new believers (Acts 11:20).
1449	ACT	11	22	i7vs	figs-metonymy	τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	the ears of the church	Here ears refers to the believers’ hearing about the event. Alternate translation: “the believers in the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1450	ACT	11	23	b7w7		ἰδὼν τὴν χάριν τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	saw the grace that is of God	“saw how God acted kindly toward the believers”
1451	ACT	11	23	m1q9		παρεκάλει πάντας	1	exhorted them all	“kept on encouraging them”
1452	ACT	11	23	qlu4		προσμένειν τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	to remain with the Lord	“to remain faithful to the Lord” or “to continue to trust in the Lord”
1453	ACT	11	23	bz6w	figs-metonymy	τῇ προθέσει τῆς καρδίας	1	with purpose of heart	Here the heart refers to a person’s will and desire. Alternate translation: “with all their will” or “with complete commitment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1454	ACT	11	24	he5z		πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου	1	full of the Holy Spirit	The Holy Spirit controlled Barnabas as he obeyed the Holy Spirit.
1455	ACT	11	24	e57t	figs-metonymy	προσετέθη ὄχλος ἱκανὸς τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	a considerable crowd was added to the Lord	Here added means they came to believe the same thing as the others. Alternate translation: “many more people also believed in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1456	ACT	11	25	yhl6			0	General Information:	Here the word “he” refers to Barnabas and “him” refers to Saul.
1457	ACT	11	25	dm92		ἐξῆλθεν…εἰς Ταρσὸν	1	he went out to Tarsus	“he went out to the city of Tarsus”
1458	ACT	11	26	hu2g		καὶ εὑρὼν	1	and when he found him	It probably took some time and effort for Barnabas to locate Saul.
1459	ACT	11	26	wf5l	writing-newevent	ἐγένετο	1	It happened that	This begins a new event in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1460	ACT	11	26	w4dz		αὐτοῖς…συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	they were gathered together with the church	“Barnabas and Saul were gathered together with the church”
1461	ACT	11	26	x8gx	figs-activepassive	χρηματίσαι τε πρώτως ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ τοὺς μαθητὰς, Χριστιανούς	1	And the disciples were called Christians first in Antioch	This implies that other people called the believers by this name. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “The people of Antioch were the first to call the disciples Christians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1462	ACT	11	26	r6sl		πρώτως ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ	1	first in Antioch	“for the first time in Antioch”
1463	ACT	11	27	pz7y	writing-background		0	General Information:	Here Luke tells background information about a prophecy in Antioch. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1464	ACT	11	27	h6zw		δὲ	1	Now	This word is used here to mark a break in the main story-line.
1465	ACT	11	27	d8bb		κατῆλθον ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων…εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν	1	came down from Jerusalem to Antioch	Jerusalem was higher in elevation than Antioch, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of going up to Jerusalem or going down from it.
1466	ACT	11	28	wyk8		ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος	1	named Agabus	“whose name was Agabus”
1467	ACT	11	28	q3tl		ἐσήμανεν διὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	and indicated by the Spirit that	“and the Holy Spirit enabled him to prophesy that”
1468	ACT	11	28	l3iz		λιμὸν μεγάλην μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι	1	a great famine was about to occur	“a great shortage of food would happen”
1469	ACT	11	28	pd2t	figs-hyperbole	ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν οἰκουμένην	1	over the whole world	This was a generalization referring to the part of the world that they were interested in. Alternate translation: “all over the inhabited world” or “throughout the Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1470	ACT	11	28	jmc5	figs-explicit	ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου	1	in the days of Claudius	Luke’s audience would know that Claudius was the emperor of Rome at that time. Alternate translation: “when Claudius was the Roman emperor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1471	ACT	11	29	lhp8			0	General Information:	The words “They” and “they” refer to the believers in the church in Antioch (Acts 11:27).
1472	ACT	11	29	de92		δὲ	1	So	This word means marks an event that happened because of something else that happened first. In this case, they sent money because of Agabus’ prophesy or the famine.
1473	ACT	11	29	rk9z		καθὼς εὐπορεῖτό τις	1	just as anyone prospered	The richer people sent more; the poorer people sent less.
1474	ACT	11	29	up7a		τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν ἐν τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ ἀδελφοῖς	1	to the brothers living in Judea	“to the believers in Judea”
1475	ACT	11	30	l8i8	figs-idiom	διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου	1	by the hand of Barnabas and Saul	Here hand is a synecdoche for the action of the whole person. Alternate translation: “by having Barnabas and Saul take to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1476	ACT	12	intro	f66j			0		Acts 12 General Notes Structure and formatting Chapter 12 tells what happened to King Herod while Barnabas was bringing Saul back from Tarsus and they were delivering money from Antioch Jerusalem (11:25-30). He killed many of the leaders of the church, and he put Peter in prison. After God helped Peter escape the prison, Herod killed the prison guards, and then God killed Herod. In the last verse of the chapter, Luke tells how Barnabas and Saul return to Antioch. Important figures of speech in this chapter Personification The “word of God” is spoken of as if it were a living thing that could grow and become many. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wordofgod]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1477	ACT	12	1	u4w7	writing-background		0	General Information:	This is background information about Herod’s killing James. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1478	ACT	12	1	ua9p			0	Connecting Statement:	This begins the new persecution, first of James’ death and then of Peter’s imprisonment and then release.
1479	ACT	12	1	ti1y	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Now	This begins a new part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1480	ACT	12	1	f2gr		κατ’ ἐκεῖνον…τὸν καιρὸν	1	about that time	This refers to the time of the famine.
1481	ACT	12	1	zy6y	figs-idiom	ἐπέβαλεν…τὰς χεῖρας	1	laid hands on	This means Herod had the believers arrested. See how you translated this in Acts 5:18. Alternate translation: “sent soldiers to arrest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1482	ACT	12	1	u1gv	figs-explicit	τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	some of those from the church	Only James and Peter are specified, which implies that these were leaders of the church in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1483	ACT	12	1	s7lc		κακῶσαί	1	to harm them	“in order to cause the believers to suffer”
1484	ACT	12	2	aw4t		ἀνεῖλεν δὲ Ἰάκωβον, τὸν ἀδελφὸν Ἰωάννου, μαχαίρῃ	1	And he killed James, the brother of John, with the sword	This tells the manner in which James was killed.
1485	ACT	12	2	r1zv	figs-metonymy	ἀνεῖλεν…Ἰάκωβον	1	he killed James	Possible meanings are (1) Herod himself killed James or (2) Herod ordered someone to kill James. Alternate translation: “Herod gave the order and they killed James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1486	ACT	12	3	pms7			0	General Information:	Here the word “he” refers to Herod (Acts 12:1).
1487	ACT	12	3	v4ag		ἰδὼν δὲ ὅτι ἀρεστόν ἐστιν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	And when he saw that this is pleasing to the Jews	“And when Herod realized that putting James to death pleased the Jewish leaders”
1488	ACT	12	3	cu7s		ὅτι…ἐστιν	1	that this is	“that Herod did this” or “that this happened”
1489	ACT	12	3	wpm1		ἀρεστόν ἐστιν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	this is pleasing to the Jews	“made the Jewish leaders happy”
1490	ACT	12	3	ly66		ἡμέραι τῶν Ἀζύμων	1	the days of unleavened bread	This refers to a time of Jewish religious feast time during the Passover season. Alternate translation: “the festival when the Jewish people ate bread without yeast”
1491	ACT	12	4	pps1		τέσσαρσιν τετραδίοις στρατιωτῶν	1	to four squads of soldiers	“to four groups of soldiers.” Each squad had four soldiers that guarded Peter, one group at a time. The groups divided the 24-hour day into four shifts. Each time two soldiers would have been at his side and the other two soldiers by the entrance.
1492	ACT	12	4	i23a		βουλόμενος…ἀναγαγεῖν αὐτὸν τῷ λαῷ	1	he was intending to bring him out to the people	“Herod planned to judge Peter in the presence of the people” or “Herod planned to judge Peter before the Jewish people”
1493	ACT	12	5	v2yz	figs-activepassive	ὁ μὲν οὖν Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ	1	So Peter was kept in the prison	This implies that the soldiers continually guarded Peter in prison. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “So the soldiers guarded Peter in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1494	ACT	12	5	f8qc	figs-activepassive	προσευχὴ…ἦν ἐκτενῶς γινομένη ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	prayer was being made earnestly to God for him by the church	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the group of believers in Jerusalem earnestly prayed to God for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1495	ACT	12	5	g189		ἐκτενῶς	1	earnestly	continuously and with dedication
1496	ACT	12	6	km83	figs-explicit	ἤμελλεν προαγαγεῖν αὐτὸν ὁ Ἡρῴδης τῇ νυκτὶ ἐκείνῃ	1	Herod was going to bring him out for trial, that night	That Herod planned to execute him can be clarified. Alternate translation: “the same night before Herod was going to bring Peter out from prison to put him on trial and then to execute him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1497	ACT	12	6	g2bh		δεδεμένος ἁλύσεσιν δυσίν	1	bound with two chains	“tied with two chains” or “fastened with two chains.” Each chain would have been attached to one of the two guards who stayed beside Peter.
1498	ACT	12	6	aqv1		ἐτήρουν τὴν φυλακήν	1	were keeping watch over the prison	“were guarding the prison doors”
1499	ACT	12	7	kk4i			0	General Information:	The words “him” and “his” refer to Peter.
1500	ACT	12	7	i7g3		ἰδοὺ	1	behold	This word alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows.
1501	ACT	12	7	lu25		ἐπέστη	1	appeared by him	“appeared next to him” or “suddenly stood beside him”
1502	ACT	12	7	z2i1		ἐν τῷ οἰκήματι	1	in the prison cell	“in the prison room”
1503	ACT	12	7	dc5b		πατάξας…τοῦ Πέτρου	1	he struck Peter	“the angel tapped Peter” or “the angel poked Peter.” Peter was evidently sleeping deeply enough that this was required to wake him.
1504	ACT	12	7	dqn9		ἐξέπεσαν αὐτοῦ αἱ ἁλύσεις ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν	1	his chains fell away from his hands	The angel caused the chains to fall from Peter without touching them.
1505	ACT	12	8	hxt9		ἐποίησεν…οὕτως	1	he did thus	“Peter did what the angel told him to do” or “Peter obeyed”
1506	ACT	12	8	abch		λέγει αὐτῷ	1	he said to him	“the angel said to Peter”
1507	ACT	12	9	gx77			0	General Information:	Here the word “He” refers to Peter. The words “they” and “They” refer to Peter and the angel.
1508	ACT	12	9	abci		ἠκολούθει	1	he followed him	“Peter followed the angel”
1509	ACT	12	9	sh8k		οὐκ ᾔδει	1	he did not know	“he did not understand”
1510	ACT	12	9	p9ty	figs-activepassive	ἀληθές ἐστιν τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου	1	what is done by the angel is real	This could be changed to active form. Alternate translation: “the actions of the angel were real” or “what the angel did truly happened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1511	ACT	12	10	r7gy	figs-explicit	διελθόντες δὲ πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν	1	But when they had passed by the first guard and the second	It is implied that the soldiers were not able to see Peter and the angel as they walked by. Alternate translation: “The first and second guards did not see them as they passed by, and then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1512	ACT	12	10	c18q		διελθόντες	1	when they had passed by	“when they had walked by”
1513	ACT	12	10	e36s	figs-ellipsis	καὶ δευτέραν	1	and the second	The word guard is understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “and the second guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1514	ACT	12	10	y86k		ἦλθαν ἐπὶ τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν	1	they came to the iron gate	“Peter and the angel arrived at the iron gate”
1515	ACT	12	10	if3c		τὴν φέρουσαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν	1	that led into the city	“that opened to the city” or “that went from the prison to the city”
1516	ACT	12	10	i3st	figs-rpronouns	ἥτις αὐτομάτη ἠνοίγη αὐτοῖς	1	it opened for them by itself	Here by itself means neither Peter nor the angel opened it. Alternate translation: “the gate swung open for them” or “the gate opened itself for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
1517	ACT	12	10	j268		προῆλθον ῥύμην μίαν	1	they went down a street	“they walked along a street”
1518	ACT	12	10	fl89		εὐθέως ἀπέστη ὁ ἄγγελος ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ	1	right away the angel went away from him	“the angel left Peter suddenly” or “suddenly the angel disappeared”
1519	ACT	12	11	wlb6	figs-idiom	καὶ ὁ Πέτρος ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος	1	And when Peter had come to himself	This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “And when Peter became fully awake and alert” or “And when Peter became aware that what had happened was real” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1520	ACT	12	11	ue4k	figs-metonymy	ἐξείλατό με ἐκ χειρὸς Ἡρῴδου	1	delivered me from the hand of Herod	Here the hand of Herod refers to “Herod’s power” or “Herod’s plans.” Alternate translation: “brought me from the harm Herod had planned for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1521	ACT	12	11	hw63		ἐξείλατό με	1	delivered me	“rescued me”
1522	ACT	12	11	p739	figs-synecdoche	πάσης τῆς προσδοκίας τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	from all the expectations of the Jewish people	Here “the people of the Jews” probably referred mainly to the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “from all that the Jewish leaders thought would happen to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1523	ACT	12	12	tfh3		συνιδών	1	having realized this	He became aware that God had rescued him.
1524	ACT	12	12	ux4v	figs-activepassive	Ἰωάννου, τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Μάρκου	1	of John, who was called Mark	John was also called Mark. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “John, whom people also called Mark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1525	ACT	12	13	x5fg			0	General Information:	Here the words “she” and “her” all refer to the servant girl Rhoda. Here the words they” and “They” refer to the people who were inside praying (Acts 12:12).
1526	ACT	12	13	pfn7		κρούσαντος…αὐτοῦ	1	when he knocked	“when Peter knocked.” Tapping on the door was a normal Jewish custom to let others know you wish to visit them. You may need to change this to fit your culture.
1527	ACT	12	13	c634		τὴν θύραν τοῦ πυλῶνος	1	at the door of the gate	“at the outer door” or “at the door of the entrance from the street to the courtyard”
1528	ACT	12	13	khq1		προσῆλθε…ὑπακοῦσαι	1	came to answer	“came to the gate to ask who was knocking”
1529	ACT	12	14	y2ff		ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς	1	from joy	“because she was so joyful” or “being overly excited”
1530	ACT	12	14	m3m7		οὐκ ἤνοιξεν τὸν πυλῶνα	1	she did not open the gate	“she did not open the door” or “she forgot to open the door”
1531	ACT	12	14	ky3p		εἰσδραμοῦσα	1	running inside	You may prefer to say “went running into the room in the house”
1532	ACT	12	14	yq3r		ἀπήγγειλεν	1	she reported	“she told them” or “she said”
1533	ACT	12	14	a19k		ἑστάναι…πρὸ τοῦ πυλῶνος	1	stands at the gate	“is standing outside the door.” Peter was still standing outside.
1534	ACT	12	15	ybz7		μαίνῃ	1	You are insane	The people not only did not believe her, but rebuked her by saying she was crazy. Alternate translation: “You are crazy”
1535	ACT	12	15	xnm2		ἡ…διϊσχυρίζετο οὕτως ἔχειν	1	she insisted that it was thus	“she insisted that what she said was true”
1536	ACT	12	15	en8b		οἱ…ἔλεγον	2	they said	“they answered”
1537	ACT	12	15	qa8m		ὁ ἄγγελός ἐστιν αὐτοῦ	1	It is his angel	“What you have seen is Peter’s angel.” Some Jews believed in guardian angels and may have thought that Peter’s angel had come to them.
1538	ACT	12	16	wwg1			0	General Information:	Here the words “they” and “them” refer to the people in the house. The words “He” and “he” refer to Peter.
1539	ACT	12	16	bi6l		ὁ δὲ Πέτρος ἐπέμενεν κρούων	1	But Peter continued knocking	The word “continued” means that Peter kept knocking the entire time those inside were talking.
1540	ACT	12	17	jx1a		ἀπαγγείλατε…ταῦτα	1	Report these things	“Tell these things”
1541	ACT	12	17	jf16		τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	the brothers	“the other believers”
1542	ACT	12	18	blx5			0	General Information:	The word “him” here refers to Peter. The word “he” refers to Herod.
1543	ACT	12	18	ail9		δὲ	1	Now	This word is used to mark a break in the story-line. Time has passed; it is now the next day.
1544	ACT	12	18	iqv4		γενομένης…ἡμέρας	1	when it became day	“in the morning”
1545	ACT	12	18	zl7i	figs-litotes	ἦν τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο	1	there was no small disturbance among the soldiers over what therefore had happened to Peter	This phrase is used to emphasize what really happened. This could be said in a positive way. Alternate translation: “there was a great disturbance among the soldiers over what had happened to Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1546	ACT	12	18	ilz4	figs-abstractnouns	ἦν τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο	1	there was no small disturbance among the soldiers over what had happened to Peter	The abstract noun disturbance can be expressed with the words “disturbed” or “upset.” Alternate translation: “the soldiers were very disturbed about what had happened to Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1547	ACT	12	19	pz6v		Ἡρῴδης δὲ ἐπιζητήσας αὐτὸν	1	And Herod, having searched for him	Possible meanings are that (1) “And when Herod heard Peter was missing, he went himself to search the prison” or (2) “And when Herod heard Peter was missing, he sent other soldiers to search the prison.”
1548	ACT	12	19	c69i		ἀνακρίνας τοὺς φύλακας, ἐκέλευσεν ἀπαχθῆναι	1	questioned the guards and ordered them to be put to death	It was the normal punishment for the Roman government to kill the guards if their prisoner escaped.
1549	ACT	12	19	br16		καὶ κατελθὼν	1	And having gone down	The phrase having gone down is used here because Caesarea is lower in elevation than Judea.
1550	ACT	12	20	n2lw			0	Connecting Statement:	Luke continues with another event in Herod’s life.
1551	ACT	12	20	aip7	writing-newevent	δὲ	1	Now	This word is used here to mark the next event in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
1552	ACT	12	20	gxs4	figs-hyperbole	ὁμοθυμαδὸν…παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν	1	they went to him together	Here the word they is a generalization. It is unlikely that all the people of Tyre and Sidon went to Herod. Alternate translation: “men representing the people of Tyre and Sidon went together to talk with Herod” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1553	ACT	12	20	t6mi		πείσαντες Βλάστον	1	having persuaded Blastus	“these men persuaded Blastus”
1554	ACT	12	20	qsg4	translate-names	Βλάστον	1	Blastus	Blastus was an assistant to or an officer of King Herod. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1555	ACT	12	20	l5r1		ᾐτοῦντο εἰρήνην	1	they asked for peace	“these men requested peace”
1556	ACT	12	20	j253	figs-explicit	τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν τὴν χώραν ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλικῆς	1	their food for their country was from the king’s country	They probably purchased this food. Alternate translation: “the people of Tyre and Sidon bought all their food from the people that Herod ruled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1557	ACT	12	20	dy51	figs-explicit	τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν	1	their food	It is implied that Herod restricted this supply of food because he was angry with the people of Tyre and Sidon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1558	ACT	12	21	e3w9		τακτῇ…ἡμέρᾳ	1	on a set day	This was probably the day on which Herod agreed to meet with the representatives. Alternate translation: “on the day when Herod agreed to meet them”
1559	ACT	12	21	kv7g		ἐσθῆτα βασιλικὴν	1	in royal clothing	expensive clothing that would demonstrate he was the king
1560	ACT	12	21	g6ir		καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος	1	sitting on the throne	This was where Herod formally addressed people who came to see him.
1561	ACT	12	22	ze1s			0	Connecting Statement:	This is the end of the part of the story about Herod.
1562	ACT	12	23	b4bc		παραχρῆμα…ἄγγελος	1	immediately an angel	“right away an angel” or “while the people were still praising Herod, an angel”
1563	ACT	12	23	b5s9		ἐπάταξεν αὐτὸν	1	struck him	“afflicted Herod” or “caused Herod to become very ill”
1564	ACT	12	23	iw57		οὐκ ἔδωκεν τὴν δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ	1	he did not give the glory to God	Herod let those people worship him instead of telling them to worship God.
1565	ACT	12	23	d419	figs-activepassive	γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν	1	becoming worm-eaten, he died	Here worm refers to worms inside the body, probably intestinal worms. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “worms ate Herod’s insides and he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1566	ACT	12	24	j2un	writing-endofstory		0		Verse 24 continues the history from verse 23. Verse 25 continues the history from 11:30. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
1567	ACT	12	24	m1sw	figs-metaphor	ὁ…λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο	1	the word of God increased and was multiplied	The word of God is spoken of as if it was a living plant that was able to grow and reproduce. Alternate translation: “the message of God spread to more places and more people believed in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1568	ACT	12	24	wn8m		ὁ…λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the word of God	“the message God sent about Jesus”
1569	ACT	12	25	t7d8		Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	And Barnabas and Saul returned to Jerusalem	Although some ancient copies read “Barnabas and Saul returned from Jerusalem,” the reading of “to Jerusalem” is probably correct. We know they went back to Antioch from Jerusalem, Therefore, this verse may indicate that they went somewhere else in Judea, and then returned to Jerusalem before they went back to Antioch.
1570	ACT	12	25	pv6a	figs-explicit	πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν	1	having completed their service	This refers back to when they brought money from the believers at Antioch in Acts 11:29-30. Alternate translation: “when they had delivered the money to the church leaders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1571	ACT	13	intro	rlh6			0		Acts 13 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the three quotes from Psalms in 13:33-35. Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 13:41. The chapter is where the second half of the Book of Acts begins. Luke writes more about Paul than about Peter, and it describes how it is the Gentiles and not the Jews to whom the believers tell the message about Jesus. Special concepts in this chapter A light for the Gentiles The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. The Jews considered all Gentiles as walking in darkness, but Paul and Barnabas spoke of telling the Gentiles about Jesus as if they were going to bring them physical light. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
1572	ACT	13	1	ce7s	writing-background		0	General Information:	Verse 1 gives background information about the people in the church at Antioch. Here the first word “they” probably refers to these five leaders but may also include the other believers. The next words “they” and “their” probably refer to the other three leaders not including Barnabas and Saul but could include other believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1573	ACT	13	1	qa2i			0	Connecting Statement:	Luke begins to tell about the mission trips on which the church at Antioch send Barnabas and Saul.
1574	ACT	13	1	rej8		δὲ ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ κατὰ τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν	1	Now there were in Antioch, in the church that was there	“At that time in the church at Antioch”
1575	ACT	13	1	srw6	translate-names	Συμεὼν…Νίγερ…Λούκιος…Μαναήν	1	Simeon … Niger … Lucius … Manaen	These are men’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1576	ACT	13	1	u48c		Ἡρῴδου τοῦ τετράρχου σύντροφος	1	one brought up with Herod the tetrarch	Manaen was probably Herod’s playmate or close friend growing up. Some scholars suggest he was Herod’s foster brother.
1577	ACT	13	2	ifb9		ἀφορίσατε	1	Set apart	“Appoint to serve”
1578	ACT	13	2	j6ym		προσκέκλημαι αὐτούς	1	I have called them	The verb here means that God chose them to do this work.
1579	ACT	13	3	ku45	translate-symaction	ἐπιθέντες τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς	1	laid their hands on them	“laid their hands on these men whom God had set apart for his service.” This act showed that the leaders agreed that the Holy Spirit had called Barnabas and Saul to do this work. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1580	ACT	13	3	p1us		ἀπέλυσαν	1	they sent them off	“they sent those men off” or “they sent those men off to do the work the Holy Spirit told them to do”
1581	ACT	13	4	br2m			0	General Information:	Here the words “they,” “They,” and “their” refer to Barnabas and Silas.
1582	ACT	13	4	mt3h		οὖν	1	So	This word marks an event that happened because of a previous event. In this case, the previous event is Barnabas and Saul being set apart by the Holy Spirit.
1583	ACT	13	4	abcj		αὐτοὶ…ἐκπεμφθέντες	1	they, having been sent out	“Barnabas and Saul were sent out”
1584	ACT	13	4	iyh8		κατῆλθον	1	went down	The phrase went down is used here because Seleucia is lower in elevation than Antioch.
1585	ACT	13	4	d1q5		Σελεύκιαν	1	Seleucia	a city by the sea
1586	ACT	13	5	at85		Σαλαμῖνι	1	Salamis	The city of Salamis was on Cyprus Island.
1587	ACT	13	5	ct8b	figs-synecdoche	κατήγγελλον τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	they were proclaiming the word of God	Here word of God is a synecdoche for “message of God.” Alternate translation: “they proclaimed the message of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1588	ACT	13	5	p5t3		συναγωγαῖς τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	synagogues of the Jews	Possible meanings are that (1) “there were multiple Jewish synagogues in the city of Salamis where Barnabas and Saul preached” or (2) “Barnabas and Saul started at the synagogue at Salamis and continued to preach in all the synagogues they found while they traveled around the Island of Cyprus.”
1589	ACT	13	5	sxw6		εἶχον δὲ καὶ Ἰωάννην, ὑπηρέτην	1	And they also had John as an assistant	“And John Mark went with them and was helping them”
1590	ACT	13	5	ukx2		ὑπηρέτην	1	as an assistant	“as a helper”
1591	ACT	13	6	h9he			0	General Information:	Here the word “they” refers to Paul, Silas, and John Mark. The words “This man” refer to “Sergius Paulus.” The first word “he” refers to Sergius Paulus, the proconsul; the second word “he” refers to Elymas (also called Bar-Jesus), the magician.
1592	ACT	13	6	ja1i		ὅλην τὴν νῆσον	1	the whole island	They crossed from one side of the island to the other and shared the gospel message in each town they passed through.
1593	ACT	13	6	cl2z		Πάφου	1	Paphos	a major city on Cyprus island where the proconsul lived
1594	ACT	13	6	zf3b		εὗρον	1	they found	Here found means they came upon him without looking for him. Alternate translation: “they met” or “they came upon”
1595	ACT	13	6	xe7h		ἄνδρα, τινὰ μάγον	1	a certain man, a magician	“a particular person who practices witchcraft” or “a person who practices supernatural magic arts”
1596	ACT	13	6	ak38	translate-names	ᾧ ὄνομα Βαριησοῦς	1	whose name was Bar Jesus	Bar Jesus means “Son of Jesus.” There is no relation between this man and Jesus Christ. Jesus was a common name at that time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1597	ACT	13	7	bee2		ἦν σὺν	1	was with	“was often with” or “was often in the company of”
1598	ACT	13	7	s1su		ἀνθυπάτῳ	1	proconsul	This was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: “governor”
1599	ACT	13	7	h5xx	writing-background	ἀνδρὶ συνετῷ	1	an intelligent man	This is background information about Sergius Paulus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1600	ACT	13	7	abck		οὗτος, προσκαλεσάμενος	1	He summoned	“The proconsul summoned”
1601	ACT	13	8	lp2u	translate-names	Ἐλύμας ὁ μάγος	1	Elymas “the magician”	This was Bar-Jesus, who was also called “the magician.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1602	ACT	13	8	qw4j		οὕτως γὰρ μεθερμηνεύεται τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	for that is how his name is translated	“for that was what he was called in Greek”
1603	ACT	13	8	n23s		ἀνθίστατο…αὐτοῖς…ζητῶν διαστρέψαι τὸν ἀνθύπατον	1	opposed them; he sought to turn the proconsul away	“resisted them by trying to turn the proconsul away” or “attempted to stop them by trying to turn the proconsul away”
1604	ACT	13	8	w2xt	figs-metaphor	ζητῶν διαστρέψαι τὸν ἀνθύπατον ἀπὸ τῆς πίστεως	1	he sought to turn the proconsul away from the faith	Here to turn … away from is a metaphor for convincing someone to not do something. Alternate translation: “he attempted to persuade the governor not to believe the gospel message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1605	ACT	13	9	gws2			0	General Information:	The word “him” refers to the magician Elymas, who is also called Bar Jesus (Acts 13:6-8).
1606	ACT	13	9	nau1			0	Connecting Statement:	While on the island of Paphos, Paul begins to talk to Elymas.
1607	ACT	13	9	ey6d	figs-activepassive	Σαῦλος…ὁ καὶ Παῦλος	1	Saul, who is also Paul	Saul was his Jewish name, and Paul was his Roman name. Since he was speaking to a Roman official, he used his Roman name. Alternate translation: “Saul, who now called himself Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1608	ACT	13	9	xjy9		ἀτενίσας εἰς αὐτὸν	1	stared at him intensely	“looked at him intensely”
1609	ACT	13	10	r8x2		ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας	1	O one full of all deceit and all wickedness	“O you are always intent in causing others to believe what is not true using falsehood and always doing what is wrong”
1610	ACT	13	10	d2pk	figs-metonymy	υἱὲ διαβόλου	1	son of the devil	Paul is saying the man is acting like the devil. Alternate translation: “you are like the devil” or “you act like the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1611	ACT	13	10	pyu7		ῥᾳδιουργίας	1	wickedness	In this context it means to be lazy and not diligent in following God’s law.
1612	ACT	13	10	hlq9		ἐχθρὲ πάσης δικαιοσύνης	1	enemy of all righteousness	Paul is grouping Elymas with the devil. Just as the devil is an enemy of God and is against righteousness, so also was Elymas.
1613	ACT	13	10	bc9p	figs-rquestion	οὐ παύσῃ διαστρέφων τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας?	1	will you not stop perverting the straight paths of the Lord?	Paul uses this question to rebuke Elymas for opposing God. Alternate translation: “you are always saying that the truth about the Lord God is false!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1614	ACT	13	10	p8sa	figs-idiom	τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας	1	the straight paths of the Lord	Here straight paths refer to the ways that are true. Alternate translation: “the true ways of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1615	ACT	13	11	k51g			0	General Information:	The words “you” and “him” refer to Elymas the magician. The word “he” refers to the Sergius Paulus, proconsul (governor of Paphos).
1616	ACT	13	11	pey7			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul finishes speaking to Elymas.
1617	ACT	13	11	xul9	figs-metonymy	χεὶρ Κυρίου ἐπὶ σέ	1	the hand of the Lord upon you	Here hand represents the power of God and “upon you” implies punishment. Alternate translation: “the Lord will punish you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1618	ACT	13	11	rse8	figs-activepassive	ἔσῃ τυφλὸς	1	you will be blind	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God will make you blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1619	ACT	13	11	w3gh		μὴ βλέπων τὸν ἥλιον	1	not seeing the sun	Elymas will be so completely blind that he not even be able to see the sun. Alternate translation: “you will not even see the sun”
1620	ACT	13	11	b5b8		ἄχρι καιροῦ	1	for a time	“for a period of time” or “until the time appointed by God”
1621	ACT	13	11	t7j1		ἔπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἀχλὺς καὶ σκότος	1	a mist and darkness fell on Elymas	“the eyes of Elymas became blurry and then dark” or “Elymas started seeing unclearly and then he could not see anything”
1622	ACT	13	11	a7es		περιάγων	1	he is going around	“Elymas wandered around” or “Elymas started feeling around and”
1623	ACT	13	12	x9fl		ἀνθύπατος	1	proconsul	This was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: “governor”
1624	ACT	13	12	pyh7		ἐπίστευσεν	1	believed	“believed in Jesus”
1625	ACT	13	12	twa8	figs-activepassive	ἐκπλησσόμενος ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου	1	being astonished at the teaching of the Lord	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the teaching about the Lord amazing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1626	ACT	13	13	i65t	writing-background		0	General Information:	Verses 13 and 14 give background information about this part of the story. “Paul and his friends” were Barnabas and John Mark (also called John). From this point on, Saul is called Paul in Acts. Paul’s name is listed first which indicates that he had become the leader of the group. It is important to keep this order in the translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1627	ACT	13	13	rk3k			0	Connecting Statement:	This is a new part of the story about Paul in Antioch in Pisidia.
1628	ACT	13	13	r9hi		δὲ	1	Now	This marks the beginning of a new part of the story.
1629	ACT	13	13	abcl		οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον	1	those around Paul	This refers to Paul and his companions.
1630	ACT	13	13	k4s9		ἀναχθέντες…ἀπὸ τῆς Πάφου	1	having set sail from Paphos	“having traveled by sailboat from Paphos”
1631	ACT	13	13	h1cb		ἦλθον εἰς Πέργην τῆς Παμφυλίας	1	came to Perga in Pamphylia	“arrived in Perga which is in Pamphylia”
1632	ACT	13	13	g6l5		Ἰωάννης δὲ ἀποχωρήσας ἀπ’ αὐτῶν	1	But John, withdrawing from them	“But John Mark, leaving Paul and Barnabas”
1633	ACT	13	14	vrp1		Ἀντιόχειαν τὴν Πισιδίαν	1	Antioch of Pisidia	“the city of Antioch in the district of Pisidia”
1634	ACT	13	15	dnb4	figs-synecdoche	μετὰ δὲ τὴν ἀνάγνωσιν τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν	1	And after the reading of the law and of the prophets	The law and prophets refer to parts of the Jewish scriptures which were read. Alternate translation: “And after someone read from the books of the law and the writings of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1635	ACT	13	15	z7bh		ἀπέστειλαν…πρὸς αὐτοὺς λέγοντες	1	sent to them, saying	“told someone to say to them” or “asked someone to tell them”
1636	ACT	13	15	td4h		ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	The term brothers is here used by the people in the synagogue to refer to Paul and Barnabas as fellow Jews.
1637	ACT	13	15	jru8		εἴ τίς ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν λόγος παρακλήσεως πρὸς τὸν λαόν	1	if there is among you any word of exhortation for the people	“if you want to say anything to encourage our people”
1638	ACT	13	15	kj1h		λέγετε	1	speak it	“please speak it” or “please tell it to us”
1639	ACT	13	16	tbc4	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	The first word “he” refers to Paul. The second word “he” refers to God. Here the word “our” refers to Paul and his fellow Jews. The words “they” and “them” refer to the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1640	ACT	13	16	p93q			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul begins his speech to those in the synagogue in Pisidian Antioch. He begins by talking about things that happened in Israel’s history.
1641	ACT	13	16	i8pz	translate-symaction	κατασείσας τῇ χειρὶ	1	motioned with his hand	This could refer to moving his hands as a signal that he was ready to speak. Alternate translation: “moving his hands to show that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1642	ACT	13	16	rh93		οἱ φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν	1	ones who fear God	This refers to Gentiles who had converted to Judaism. “you who are not Israelites but who worship God”
1643	ACT	13	16	ah55		τὸν Θεόν, ἀκούσατε	1	God, listen	“God, listen to me” or “God, listen to what I am about to say”
1644	ACT	13	17	se2b		ὁ Θεὸς τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου Ἰσραὴλ	1	The God of this people Israel	“The God whom the people of Israel worship”
1645	ACT	13	17	l9cn		τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν	1	our fathers	“our ancestors”
1646	ACT	13	17	aaj5		τὸν λαὸν ὕψωσεν	1	exalted the people	“caused our people to become very numerous”
1647	ACT	13	17	vw4z	figs-metonymy	μετὰ βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ	1	with an uplifted arm	This refers to God’s mighty power. Alternate translation: “with great power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1648	ACT	13	17	b74t		ἐξ αὐτῆς	1	from it	“out from the land of Egypt”
1649	ACT	13	18	zv9e		ἐτροποφόρησεν αὐτοὺς	1	he put up with them	This means “he tolerated them.” Some versions have a different word that means “he took care of them.” Alternate translation: “God endured their disobedience” or “God took care of them”
1650	ACT	13	19	nvp7	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “he” refers to God. The words “their land” refer to the land the seven nations had previously occupied. The word “them” refers to the people of Israel. The word “our” refers to Paul and his audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1651	ACT	13	19	h5qg		ἔθνη	1	nations	Here the word nations refers to different people groups and not to geographical boundaries.
1652	ACT	13	20	abcm		ἔδωκεν	1	he gave them	“God gave them”
1653	ACT	13	20	qmc8		ἕως Σαμουὴλ προφήτου	1	until Samuel the prophet	“until the time of the prophet Samuel”
1654	ACT	13	21	akg6			0	General Information:	The quotation here is from the history of Samuel and from a Psalm of Ethan in the Old Testament.
1655	ACT	13	21	yxi8		ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα	1	for 40 years	“to be their king for 40 years”
1656	ACT	13	22	z4x3		μεταστήσας αὐτὸν	1	having removed him	This expression means God caused Saul to stop being king. Alternate translation: “rejected Saul from being king”
1657	ACT	13	22	bsp6		ἤγειρεν τὸν Δαυεὶδ αὐτοῖς εἰς βασιλέα	1	he raised up David for them as their king	“God chose David to be their king”
1658	ACT	13	22	iyd6		βασιλέα	1	their king	“the king of Israel” or “the king over the Israelites”
1659	ACT	13	22	sw2r		ᾧ καὶ εἶπεν μαρτυρήσας	1	to whom having testified, he also said	“about whom God testified by saying”
1660	ACT	13	22	dbu5		εὗρον	1	I have found	“I have observed that”
1661	ACT	13	22	mp53	figs-idiom	ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου	1	a man according to my heart	This expression means he “a man who wants what I want.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1662	ACT	13	23	lby6			0	General Information:	The quotation here is from the Gospels.
1663	ACT	13	23	xj5a		τούτου…ἀπὸ τοῦ σπέρματος	1	From the descendants of this one	“From David’s descendants.” This is placed at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that the savior had to be one of David’s descendants (Acts 13:22).
1664	ACT	13	23	kc76	figs-metonymy	ἤγαγεν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ	1	brought to Israel	This refers to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “gave to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1665	ACT	13	23	mk5g		κατ’ ἐπαγγελίαν	1	according to promise	“just as God promised he would do”
1666	ACT	13	24	abcn		πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ	1	before the face of his coming	“before the coming of Jesus”
1667	ACT	13	24	x892	figs-abstractnouns	βάπτισμα μετανοίας	1	a baptism of repentance	You can translate the word repentance as the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “a baptism to repent” or “a baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent for their sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1668	ACT	13	25	vww3	figs-rquestion	τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι?	1	Who do you think I am?	John asked this question to compel the people to think about who he was. Alternate translation: “Think about who I am.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1669	ACT	13	25	rp32	figs-explicit	οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ	1	I am not him	John was referring to the Messiah, whom they were expecting to come. Alternate translation: “I am not the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1670	ACT	13	25	nnl5		ἀλλ’ ἰδοὺ	1	But behold	This emphasizes the importance of what he will say next.
1671	ACT	13	25	r1pl	figs-explicit	ἔρχεται μετ’ ἐμὲ	1	one is coming after me	This also refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “the Messiah will soon come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1672	ACT	13	25	gys2		οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι	1	of whom the sandals of his feet I am not worthy to untie	“and I am not worthy even to untie his shoes.” The Messiah is so much greater than John that he did not even feel worthy do the lowest job for him.
1673	ACT	13	26	jdp6	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	The word “they” and “their” refers to the Jews who lived in Jerusalem. Here the word “us” includes Paul and his entire audience in the synagogue. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1674	ACT	13	26	kci9		ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν	1	brothers, sons of the family of Abraham, and those among you who fear God	Paul addresses his audience of Jews and Gentile converts to Judaism to remind them of their special status as worshiping the true God.
1675	ACT	13	26	u6zn	figs-activepassive	ὁ λόγος τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης ἐξαπεστάλη	1	the word about this salvation has been sent	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God has sent the message about this salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1676	ACT	13	26	v6r3	figs-abstractnouns	τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης	1	about this salvation	The word salvation can be translated with the verb “save.” Alternate translation: “that God will save people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1677	ACT	13	27	psk5		τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες	1	did not recognize this one	“did not realize that this man Jesus was the one whom God had sent to save them”
1678	ACT	13	27	ri1f	figs-metonymy	τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν	1	the voices of the prophets	Here the word voices represents the message of the prophets. Alternate translation: “the writings of the prophets” or “the message of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1679	ACT	13	27	m4tz	figs-activepassive	τὰς…ἀναγινωσκομένας	2	that are read	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “which someone reads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1680	ACT	13	27	rle6		τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν…ἐπλήρωσαν	1	they fulfilled the voices of the prophets	“they actually did just what the prophets said that they would do”
1681	ACT	13	28	v3hw			0	General Information:	Here the word “they” refers to the Jewish people and their religious leaders in Jerusalem. The word him” here refers to Jesus.
1682	ACT	13	28	y9j6		μηδεμίαν αἰτίαν θανάτου εὑρόντες	1	they found no reason for death	“they did not find any reason why anyone should kill Jesus”
1683	ACT	13	28	d4xm		ᾐτήσαντο Πειλᾶτον	1	they asked Pilate	The word asked here is a strong word meaning to demand, beg or plead for.
1684	ACT	13	29	sq1j		ὡς δὲ ἐτέλεσαν πάντα τὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ γεγραμμένα	1	And when they had completed all that had been written about him	“And when they did to Jesus all the things that the prophets said would happen to him”
1685	ACT	13	29	m5f1	figs-explicit	καθελόντες ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου	1	taking him down from the tree	It may be helpful to explicitly say Jesus died before this happened. Alternate translation: “they killed Jesus and then took him down from the cross after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1686	ACT	13	29	vwt4	figs-explicit	ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου	1	from the tree	“from the cross.” This was another way people at that time referred to the cross. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1687	ACT	13	30	h5jw		ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν	1	But God raised him	But indicates a strong contrast between what the people did and what God did.
1688	ACT	13	30	mqx8		ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	raised him from the dead	“raised him from among those who were dead.” To be with the dead means that Jesus was dead.
1689	ACT	13	30	zsx4	figs-idiom	ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν	1	raised him	Here, raised is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “caused him to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1690	ACT	13	30	d14p		ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To raise someone from among them speaks of making that person alive again.
1691	ACT	13	31	ig7w	figs-activepassive	ὃς ὤφθη ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	He was seen for many days by those who had come up with him from Galilee to Jerusalem	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “The disciples who traveled with Jesus from Galilee to Jerusalem saw him for many days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1692	ACT	13	31	g4vl		ἡμέρας πλείους	1	many days	We know from other writings that this period was 40 days. Translate many days with a term that would be appropriate for that length of time.
1693	ACT	13	31	vqj4		νῦν εἰσιν μάρτυρες αὐτοῦ πρὸς τὸν λαόν	1	are now his witnesses to the people	“are now testifying to the people about Jesus” or “are now telling the people about Jesus”
1694	ACT	13	32	ipb9			0	General Information:	The second quotation here is from the prophet Isaiah.
1695	ACT	13	32	y273		καὶ	1	And	This word marks an event that happened because of previous event. In this case, the previous event is God’s raising Jesus from the dead.
1696	ACT	13	32	hr2g		τοὺς πατέρας	1	our fathers	“our ancestors.” Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. These were the physical ancestors of the Jews, and the spiritual ancestors of the converts.
1697	ACT	13	33	b1uh	translate-versebridge	ταύτην ὁ Θεὸς ἐκπεπλήρωκεν τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν	1	God has fulfilled this for our children	You may need to rearrange the parts of this sentence, which begins in verse 32. “God has fulfilled for us, their children, these promises that he made to our ancestors, by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
1698	ACT	13	33	dy6w		τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν	1	for our children	Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. Some ancient copies read, “for us, their children” but the best copies read, “for our children.”
1699	ACT	13	33	d95n	figs-idiom	ἀναστήσας Ἰησοῦν	1	by raising up Jesus	Here raising up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “by making Jesus alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1700	ACT	13	33	y3tz		ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ ψαλμῷ γέγραπται τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	As it is also written in the second Psalm	“This is what was also written in the second Psalm”
1701	ACT	13	33	h9ir		τῷ ψαλμῷ…τῷ δευτέρῳ	1	the second Psalm	“Psalm 2”
1702	ACT	13	33	tla1	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	Υἱός…γεγέννηκά σε	1	Son … I have fathered you	These are important titles that describe the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1703	ACT	13	34	iy5q		ὅτι δὲ ἀνέστησεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν, μηκέτι μέλλοντα ὑποστρέφειν εἰς διαφθοράν, οὕτως εἴρηκεν	1	And that he raised him up from the dead, never to be about to return to decay, he has spoken in this way	“God spoke these words about his making Jesus alive again so that he would never die again”
1704	ACT	13	34	h3nj		ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
1705	ACT	13	34	q3kq		τὰ ὅσια…τὰ πιστά	1	the holy and sure blessings	“the holy and certain blessings”
1706	ACT	13	35	r1ev	figs-explicit	διότι καὶ ἐν ἑτέρῳ λέγει	1	On account of this he also says in another place	Paul’s audience would have understood that this Psalm refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “In another Psalm of David, he also says about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1707	ACT	13	35	gl8s		καὶ…λέγει	1	he also says	“David also says.” David is the author of Psalm 16 from which this quotation is taken.
1708	ACT	13	35	hvt8	figs-metonymy	οὐ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν	1	You will not allow your Holy One to see decay	The phrase see decay is a metonym for “decay.” Alternate translation: “You will not allow the body of your Holy One to rot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1709	ACT	13	35	ry97		οὐ δώσεις	1	You will not allow	David is speaking to God here.
1710	ACT	13	36	u8vh		ἰδίᾳ γενεᾷ	1	in his own generation	“during his lifetime”
1711	ACT	13	36	m5wx		ὑπηρετήσας τῇ τοῦ Θεοῦ βουλῇ	1	having served the counsel of God	“having done what God wanted him to do” or “after he had done what pleased God”
1712	ACT	13	36	rpb4	figs-euphemism	ἐκοιμήθη	1	fell asleep	This was a polite way to refer to death. Alternate translation: “he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
1713	ACT	13	36	nwy9		προσετέθη πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας αὐτοῦ	1	was laid with his fathers	“was buried with his ancestors who had died”
1714	ACT	13	36	la5s	figs-metonymy	εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	saw decay	The phrase saw decay is a metonym for “his body decayed.” Alternate translation: “his body rotted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1715	ACT	13	37	bmw3		ὃν δὲ	1	But he whom	“But Jesus whom”
1716	ACT	13	37	n9pl	figs-idiom	ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν	1	God raised up	Here raised up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “God caused to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1717	ACT	13	37	j52x	figs-metonymy	οὐκ εἶδεν διαφθοράν	1	did not see decay	The phrase did not see decay is a way to say “his body did not decay.” Alternate translation: “did not rot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1718	ACT	13	38	ki8q			0	General Information:	Here the word “him” refers to Jesus.
1719	ACT	13	38	yg35		γνωστὸν…ἔστω ὑμῖν	1	let it be known to you	“know this” or “this is important for you to know”
1720	ACT	13	38	qy18		ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Paul uses this term because they are his fellow-Jews and followers of Judaism. They are not Christian believers at this point. Alternate translation: “my fellow Israelites and other friends”
1721	ACT	13	38	t3i5	figs-activepassive	ὅτι διὰ τούτου, ὑμῖν ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν καταγγέλλεται, καὶ	1	that because of this, forgiveness of sins is being proclaimed to you, and freedom	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that we proclaim to you that your sins can be forgiven through Jesus, and you can be free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1722	ACT	13	38	w7y1	figs-abstractnouns	ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν	1	forgiveness of sins	The abstract noun “forgiveness” can be translated with the verb “to forgive.” Alternate translation: “that God can forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1723	ACT	13	39	g5h9	figs-activepassive	ἐν τούτῳ πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων δικαιοῦται	1	In this one every one who believes is justified	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Jesus justifies everyone who believes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1724	ACT	13	39	j6rr		ἐν τούτῳ πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων	1	In this one every one who believes	“By him every person who believes” or “Every one who believes in him”
1725	ACT	13	40	kk1j			0	General Information:	In his message to the people in the synagogue, Paul quotes the prophet Habakkuk. Here the word “I” refers to God.
1726	ACT	13	40	zx6p			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul finishes his speech in the synagogue in Pisidian Antioch, which he began in Acts 13:16.
1727	ACT	13	40	y2kg	figs-explicit	βλέπετε	1	be careful that	It is implied that the thing they should be careful about is Paul’s message. Alternate translation: “give close attention to the things I have said so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1728	ACT	13	40	tt1x		τὸ εἰρημένον ἐν τοῖς προφήταις	1	the thing spoken about in the prophets	“what the prophets spoke about”
1729	ACT	13	41	tqk5		ἴδετε, οἱ καταφρονηταί	1	Look, you despisers	“Look, you who feel contempt” or “Look, you who ridicule”
1730	ACT	13	41	ky3s		θαυμάσατε	1	be astonished	“be amazed” or “be shocked”
1731	ACT	13	41	ilh2		καὶ ἀφανίσθητε	1	and perish	“and die”
1732	ACT	13	41	dvn1		ἔργον ἐργάζομαι	1	am doing a work	“am doing something”
1733	ACT	13	41	nm2q		ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν	1	in your days	“during your lifetime”
1734	ACT	13	41	w6tq		ἔργον ὃ	1	A work that	“I am doing something which”
1735	ACT	13	41	p4c2		ἐάν τις ἐκδιηγῆται ὑμῖν	1	even if someone would announce it to you	“even if someone would tell you about it”
1736	ACT	13	42	ax8v		ἐξιόντων δὲ, αὐτῶν	1	And as they were leaving	“When Paul and Barnabas were leaving”
1737	ACT	13	42	f3sw		παρεκάλουν	1	they begged them	“the people begged them”
1738	ACT	13	42	y4p9	figs-metonymy	τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα	1	these same words	Here words refers to the message that Paul had spoken. Alternate translation: “this same message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1739	ACT	13	43	a58z		λυθείσης δὲ τῆς συναγωγῆς	1	And when the synagogue meeting had ended	Possible meanings are (1) this restates “As Paul and Barnabas left” in verse 42 or (2) Paul and Barnabas left the meeting before it ended and this occurs later.
1740	ACT	13	43	sws7		προσηλύτων	1	proselytes	These were non-Jewish people who converted to Judaism.
1741	ACT	13	43	q2aj		οἵτινες προσλαλοῦντες αὐτοῖς, ἔπειθον αὐτοὺς	1	who speaking to them, urged them	“and Paul and Barnabas spoke to those people and urged them”
1742	ACT	13	43	fv15	figs-explicit	προσμένειν τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	to continue in the grace of God	It is implied that they believed Paul’s message that Jesus was the Messiah. Alternate translation: “to continue to trust that God kindly forgives people’s sins because of what Jesus did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1743	ACT	13	44	m129			0	General Information:	Here the word “him” refers to Paul.
1744	ACT	13	44	vq3y	figs-metonymy	σχεδὸν πᾶσα ἡ πόλις συνήχθη	1	almost the whole city was gathered together	The city represents the people in the city. This phrase is used to show the great response to the Lord’s word. Alternate translation: “almost all the people of the city were gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1745	ACT	13	44	yga7	figs-explicit	ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	to hear the word of the Lord	It is implied that Paul and Barnabas were the ones who spoke the word of the Lord. Alternate translation: “to hear Paul and Barnabas speak about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1746	ACT	13	45	j4zq	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	Here Jews represents Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1747	ACT	13	45	qrh2	figs-metaphor	ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου	1	they were filled with jealousy	Here jealousy is spoken of as if it were something that could fill up a person. Alternate translation: “they became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1748	ACT	13	45	nc5l		ἀντέλεγον	1	spoke against	“contradicted” or “opposed”
1749	ACT	13	45	m1an	figs-activepassive	τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λαλουμένοις	1	the things that were said by Paul	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1750	ACT	13	46	zvt5	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	The first two instances of the word “you” are plural and refer to the Jews to whom Paul is speaking. Here the words “we” and “us” refers to Paul and Barnabas but not the crowd that was present. Paul’s quotation is from the prophet Isaiah in the Old Testament. In the original passage, the word “I” refers to God and the word “you” is singular and refers to the Messiah. Here, Paul and Barnabas seem to be saying that the quotation also refers to their ministry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1751	ACT	13	46	as6q	figs-explicit	ἦν ἀναγκαῖον	1	It was necessary for	This implies that God had commanded this be done. Alternate translation: “God commanded that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1752	ACT	13	46	jn55	figs-activepassive	ὑμῖν…ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	necessary for the word of God first to be spoken to you	This can be stated in active form. “Word of God” here is a synecdoche for “message from God.” Alternate translation: “necessary that we speak the message from God to you first” or “the message of God had to be spoken to you first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1753	ACT	13	46	lly5	figs-metaphor	ἐπειδὴ ἀπωθεῖσθε αὐτὸν	1	Since you reject it	Their rejection of the word of God is spoken of as if it were something they pushed away. Alternate translation: “Since you reject the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1754	ACT	13	46	ms36		οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτοὺς τῆς αἰωνίου ζωῆς	1	judge yourselves unworthy of eternal life	“seem to think you are not worthy of eternal life” or “act as though you are not worthy of eternal life”
1755	ACT	13	46	rf9k	figs-explicit	στρεφόμεθα εἰς τὰ ἔθνη	1	we will turn to the Gentiles	“we will go to the Gentiles.” Paul and Barnadas were implying that they would preach to the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we will leave you and start preaching to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1756	ACT	13	47	v8au	figs-metaphor	εἰς φῶς	1	as a light	Here the truth about Jesus that Paul was preaching is spoken of as if it were a light that allowed people to see. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1757	ACT	13	47	t5sp	figs-abstractnouns	εἶναί…εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς	1	should be for salvation as far as the end of the earth	The abstract word salvation can be translated with the verb “to save.” The phrase end refers to everywhere. Alternate translation: “should tell people everywhere in the world that I want to save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1758	ACT	13	48	e9ag	figs-metonymy	ἐδόξαζον τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	glorified the word of the Lord	Here word refers to the message about Jesus that they had believed. Alternate translation: “praised God for the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1759	ACT	13	48	jct2	figs-activepassive	ὅσοι ἦσαν τεταγμένοι εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον	1	as many as were appointed to eternal life	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “as many as God appointed to eternal life” or “all the people whom God had chosen to receive eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1760	ACT	13	49	qh9z	figs-metonymy	διεφέρετο…ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου δι’ ὅλης τῆς χώρας	1	the word of the Lord was being spread throughout the whole region	Here word refers to the message about Jesus. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “those who believed spread the word of the Lord through the whole region” or “those who believed went everywhere in the region and told others about the message of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1761	ACT	13	50	eqi5			0	General Information:	Here the word “they” refers to Paul and Barnabas.
1762	ACT	13	50	t4bv			0	Connecting Statement:	This ends Paul and Barnabas’ time in Antioch of Pisidia and they go to Iconium.
1763	ACT	13	50	u8rm	figs-synecdoche	οἱ…Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	This probably refers to the leaders of the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1764	ACT	13	50	cf21		παρώτρυναν	1	stirred up	“convinced” or “urged on”
1765	ACT	13	50	wmm5		τοὺς πρώτους	1	the leading men	“the most important men”
1766	ACT	13	50	n7qe		ἐπήγειραν διωγμὸν ἐπὶ τὸν Παῦλον καὶ Βαρναβᾶν	1	a persecution arose against Paul and Barnabas	“They convinced the important men and women to persecute Paul and Barnabas”
1767	ACT	13	50	cq9h		ἐξέβαλον αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν	1	threw them out from their boundaries	“they removed Paul and Barnabas from their city”
1768	ACT	13	51	abco		οἱ δὲ, ἐκτιναξάμενοι	1	But when they had shaken off	“But after Paul and Silas shook off”
1769	ACT	13	51	xi1z	writing-symlanguage	οἱ…ἐκτιναξάμενοι τὸν κονιορτὸν τῶν ποδῶν ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς	1	when they had shaken off the dust from their feet against them	This was a symbolic act to indicate to the unbelieving people that God had rejected them and would punish them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
1770	ACT	13	52	dp5k		οἵ…μαθηταὶ	1	the disciples	This probably refers to the new believers in the Antioch of Pisidia that Paul and Silas just left.
1771	ACT	14	intro	rsg2			0		Acts 14 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter “The message of his grace” The message of Jesus is the message that God will show grace to those who believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]]) Zeus and Hermes The Gentiles in the Roman Empire worshiped many different false gods who do not really exist. Paul and Barnabas told them to believe in the “living God.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]]) Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “We must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings.” Jesus told his followers before he died that everyone who followed him would suffer persecution. Paul is saying the same thing using different words.
1772	ACT	14	1	vh8u			0	General Information:	The story of Paul and Barnabas in Iconium continues.
1773	ACT	14	1	hk1z		ἐγένετο δὲ, ἐν Ἰκονίῳ	1	And it happened that Iconium	This begins a new event.
1774	ACT	14	1	f4sq	figs-explicit	λαλῆσαι οὕτως	1	spoke in such a way	“spoke so powerfully.” It may be helpful to state that they spoke the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “spoke the message about Jesus powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1775	ACT	14	2	wc4x		οἱ…ἀπειθήσαντες Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews who were disobedient	This refers to a portion of the Jews who did not believe the message about Jesus.
1776	ACT	14	2	n2pp	figs-metaphor	ἐπήγειραν…τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	stirred up the souls of the Gentiles	Causing the Gentiles to become angry is spoken of as if calm waters were disturbed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1777	ACT	14	2	k8mv	figs-synecdoche	τὰς ψυχὰς	1	the souls	Here the word souls refers to the people. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1778	ACT	14	2	fu13		τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	the brothers	Here brothers refers to Paul and Barnabas and the new believers.
1779	ACT	14	3	lp4v			0	General Information:	Here the word “He” refers to the Lord.
1780	ACT	14	3	a3gp		μὲν οὖν…διέτριψαν	1	So they stayed there	“Nevertheless they stayed there.” Paul and Barnabas stayed in Iconium to help the many people who had believed in Acts 14:1. So could be omitted if it adds confusion to the text.
1781	ACT	14	3	f2xh		τῷ μαρτυροῦντι τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ	1	who is testifying to the word of his grace	“who demonstrated that the message about his grace was true”
1782	ACT	14	3	wcn5		τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ	1	to the word of his grace	“about the message of the Lord’s grace”
1783	ACT	14	3	c2cv	figs-activepassive	διδόντι σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα γίνεσθαι διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν	1	by granting signs and wonders to be done by their hands	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “by enabling Paul and Barnabas to perform signs and wonders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1784	ACT	14	3	p9iq	figs-synecdoche	διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν	1	by their hands	Here hands refers to the will and effort of these two men as guided by the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “by the ministry of Paul and Barnabas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1785	ACT	14	4	btu3	figs-metonymy	ἐσχίσθη…τὸ πλῆθος τῆς πόλεως	1	the population of the city was divided	Here population of the city refers to the people in the city. Alternate translation: “most of the people of the city were divided” or “most of the people of the city did not agree with each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1786	ACT	14	4	smz5		ἦσαν σὺν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	were with the Jews	“supported the Jews” or “agreed with the Jews.” The first group mentioned did not agree with the message about grace.
1787	ACT	14	4	q1xc	figs-ellipsis	σὺν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις	1	with the apostles	The second group mentioned agreed with the message about grace. It may be helpful to restate the verb. Alternate translation: “sided with the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1788	ACT	14	4	mw9h		τοῖς ἀποστόλοις	1	the apostles	Luke refers to Paul and Barnabas. Here apostles might be used in the general sense of “ones sent out.”
1789	ACT	14	5	s5h7			0	General Information:	Here the word “they” refers to Paul and Barnabas.
1790	ACT	14	5	q6g2		ὑβρίσαι καὶ λιθοβολῆσαι αὐτούς	1	to mistreat and stone them	“to beat Paul and Barnabas and to kill them by throwing stones at them”
1791	ACT	14	6	tpl1	translate-names	τῆς Λυκαονίας	1	of Lycaonia	A district in Asia Minor (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1792	ACT	14	6	m5gv	translate-names	Λύστραν	1	Lystra	A city in Asia Minor south of Iconium and north of Derbe (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1793	ACT	14	6	tl4q	translate-names	Δέρβην	1	Derbe	A city in Asia Minor south of Iconium and Lystra (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1794	ACT	14	7	z5nd		κἀκεῖ εὐαγγελιζόμενοι ἦσαν	1	and where they continued to proclaim the gospel	“and where Paul and Barnabas continued to proclaim the good news”
1795	ACT	14	8	ep46			0	General Information:	The first word “he” refers to the crippled man; the second word “he” refers to Paul. The word “him” refers to the crippled man.
1796	ACT	14	8	l5pu			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul and Barnabas are now in Lystra.
1797	ACT	14	8	wb5k	writing-participants	τις ἀνὴρ…ἐκάθητο	1	a certain man sat	This introduces a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
1798	ACT	14	8	kz7d		ἀδύνατος…τοῖς ποσὶν	1	powerless in his feet	“unable to move his legs” or “unable to walk on his feet”
1799	ACT	14	8	tca1		χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	lame from the womb of his mother	“having been born as a cripple”
1800	ACT	14	8	hw4l		χωλὸς	1	crippled	unable to walk
1801	ACT	14	9	di49		ὃς ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ	1	He looked intently at him	“Paul looked straight at the man”
1802	ACT	14	9	xak4	figs-abstractnouns	ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι	1	he has faith to be saved	The abstract noun faith can be translated with the verb to be saved. Alternate translation: “he believed that Jesus could heal him” or “he believed that Jesus could make him well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1803	ACT	14	10	v1kz		ἥλατο	1	he jumped up	“he dleaped in the air.” This implies that his legs were completely healed.
1804	ACT	14	11	axe6		ὃ ἐποίησεν Παῦλος	1	what Paul had done	This refers to Paul’s healing the crippled man.
1805	ACT	14	11	lvs9		ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν	1	they raised their voice	Here raised their voice means to speak loudly. Alternate translation: “they spoke loudly” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom)
1806	ACT	14	11	d1gz	figs-explicit	οἱ θεοὶ…κατέβησαν πρὸς ἡμᾶς	1	The gods … have come down to us	A large number of people believed Paul and Barnabas were their pagan gods who had come down from heaven. Alternate translation: “The gods … have come down from heaven to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1807	ACT	14	11	x3bi		Λυκαονιστὶ	1	in the Lycaonian language	“in their own Lycaonian language.” The people of Lystra spoke Lycaonian and also Greek.
1808	ACT	14	11	rm85		ὁμοιωθέντες ἀνθρώποις	1	being made like men	These people believed that the gods needed to change their appearance in order to look like men.
1809	ACT	14	12	t7uu	translate-names	Δία	1	Zeus	Zeus was the king over all the other pagan gods. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1810	ACT	14	12	hh25	translate-names	Ἑρμῆν	1	Hermes	Hermes was the pagan god who brought messages to people from Zeus and the other gods. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1811	ACT	14	13	iz6r	figs-explicit	ὅ τε ἱερεὺς τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως…ἐνέγκας	1	And the priest of the temple of Zeus, which was in front of the city, brought	It may be helpful to include additional information about the priest. Alternate translation: “And there was a temple just outside the city where the people worshiped Zeus. When the priest who served in the temple heard what Paul and Barnabas had done, he brought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1812	ACT	14	13	v2a9		ταύρους καὶ στέμματα	1	oxen and wreaths	The oxen were to be sacrificed. The wreaths were either to crown Paul and Barnabas, or put on the oxen for sacrifice.
1813	ACT	14	13	iha1		ἐπὶ τοὺς πυλῶνας	1	to the gates	The gates of the cities were often used as a meeting place for the people of the city.
1814	ACT	14	13	ud37		ἤθελεν θύειν	1	wanting to sacrifice	“wanting to offer sacrifice to Paul and Barnabas as the gods Zeus and Hermes”
1815	ACT	14	14	kt1f		οἱ ἀπόστολοι Βαρναβᾶς καὶ Παῦλος	1	the apostles, Barnabas and Paul	Luke is here probably using apostle in the general sense of “one sent out.”
1816	ACT	14	14	kx43		διαρρήξαντες τὰ ἱμάτια ἑαυτῶν	1	they tore their clothing	This was a symbolic action to show that they were deeply distressed and upset that the crowd wanted to sacrifice to them.
1817	ACT	14	15	w4fd	figs-rquestion	ἄνδρες, τί ταῦτα ποιεῖτε?	1	Men, why are you doing these things?	Barnabas and Paul are rebuking the people for trying to sacrifice to them. Alternate translation: “Men, you must not do these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
1818	ACT	14	15	f8vc		ταῦτα ποιεῖτε	1	are you doing these things	“are you worshiping us”
1819	ACT	14	15	u9pq		καὶ ἡμεῖς ὁμοιοπαθεῖς ἐσμεν ὑμῖν ἄνθρωποι	1	We also are men with the same feelings as you	By this statement, Barnabas and Paul are saying that they are not gods. Alternate translation: “We are just human beings like you. We are not gods!”
1820	ACT	14	15	n9e4		ὁμοιοπαθεῖς…ὑμῖν	1	with the same feelings as you	“like you in every way”
1821	ACT	14	15	n98g	figs-metaphor	ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν ματαίων ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ Θεὸν ζῶντα	1	turn from these useless things to a living God	Here turn from … to is a metaphor meaning to stop doing one thing and start doing something else. Alternate translation: “stop worshiping these false gods that cannot help you, and instead begin to worship the living God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1822	ACT	14	15	qr5b		Θεὸν ζῶντα	1	a living God	“a God who truly exists” or “a God who lives”
1823	ACT	14	16	s2rn		ἐν ταῖς παρῳχημέναις γενεαῖς	1	In the generations gone by	“In previous times” or “Until now”
1824	ACT	14	16	vpt5	figs-metaphor	πορεύεσθαι ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν	1	to go their own ways	Going in a way, or going along a path, is a metaphor for living one’s life. Alternate translation: “to live their lives the way they wanted to” or “to do whatever they wanted to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1825	ACT	14	17	fw2s			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul and Barnabas continue speaking to the crowd outside the city of Lystra (Acts 14:8).
1826	ACT	14	17	kig8	figs-litotes	οὐκ ἀμάρτυρον αὑτὸν ἀφῆκεν	1	he did not leave himself without witness	This could also be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “God has certainly left a witness” or “God has indeed testified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1827	ACT	14	17	ps9z	figs-metonymy	ἐμπιπλῶν τροφῆς καὶ εὐφροσύνης τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν	1	filling your hearts with food and gladness	Here your hearts refers to the people. Alternate translation: “giving you enough to eat and things about which to be happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1828	ACT	14	18	ut73		μόλις κατέπαυσαν τοὺς ὄχλους τοῦ μὴ θύειν αὐτοῖς	1	they barely restrained the crowds from sacrificing to them	Paul and Barnabas stopped the multitude from sacrificing to them, but it was difficult to do so.
1829	ACT	14	18	la43		μόλις κατέπαυσαν	1	they barely restrained	“had difficulty preventing”
1830	ACT	14	19	bz7k			0	General Information:	Here the words “he” and “him” refer to Paul.
1831	ACT	14	19	wmc2	figs-explicit	πείσαντες τοὺς ὄχλους	1	persuaded the crowds	It my be helpful to explicitly state what they persuaded the crowd to do. Alternate translation: “persuaded the people not to believe Paul and Barnabas, and to turn against them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1832	ACT	14	19	xbv3		τοὺς ὄχλους	1	the crowds	This may not be the same group as the “multitude” in the previous verse. Some time had passed, and this might be a different group that gathered together.
1833	ACT	14	19	t8mg		νομίζοντες αὐτὸν τεθνηκέναι	1	thinking him to be dead	“because they thought that he was already dead”
1834	ACT	14	20	pan3		τῶν μαθητῶν	1	the disciples	These were new believers in the city of Lystra.
1835	ACT	14	20	aqx3		εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν πόλιν	1	he entered into the city	“Paul re-entered Lystra with the believers”
1836	ACT	14	20	e2y9		ἐξῆλθεν σὺν τῷ Βαρναβᾷ εἰς Δέρβην	1	he went with Barnabas to Derbe	“Paul and Barnabas went to the city of Derbe”
1837	ACT	14	21	wv7e	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the words “they” and “They” refer to Paul. Here the word “We” includes Paul, Barnabas, and the believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1838	ACT	14	21	ykt4		τὴν πόλιν ἐκείνην	1	in that city	“in Derbe” (Acts 14:20)
1839	ACT	14	22	ek9l	figs-synecdoche	ἐπιστηρίζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν μαθητῶν	1	They were strengthening the souls of the disciples	Here souls refers to the disciples. This emphasizes their inner thoughts and beliefs. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to believe the message about Jesus” or “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to grow strong in their relationship with Jesus (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1840	ACT	14	22	zkd2		παρακαλοῦντες ἐμμένειν τῇ πίστει	1	and encouraging them to continue in the faith	“and encouraging the believers to keep trusting in Jesus”
1841	ACT	14	22	d9ic	writing-quotations	καὶ ὅτι διὰ πολλῶν θλίψεων, δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	and saying, “It is necessary for us to enter into the kingdom of God through many afflictions.”	Some version translate this as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “and saying that we must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
1842	ACT	14	22	wu1c	figs-exclusive	δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν	1	It is necessary for us to enter	Paul includes his hearers, so the word us is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1843	ACT	14	23	pk5l			0	General Information:	Except for the third use of the word “they” which refers to the people that Paul and Barnabas had led to the Lord, all the words “they” here refer to Paul and Barnabas.
1844	ACT	14	23	mqp9		χειροτονήσαντες δὲ αὐτοῖς κατ’ ἐκκλησίαν πρεσβυτέρους	1	And when they had appointed for them elders in every church	“And when Paul and Barnabas had appointed leaders in each new group of believers”
1845	ACT	14	23	nd87		παρέθεντο αὐτοὺς	1	they entrusted them	Possible meanings are (1) “Paul and Barnabas entrusted the elders they had appointed” or (2) “Paul and Barnabas entrusted the leaders and other believers”
1846	ACT	14	23	ls62		εἰς ὃν πεπιστεύκεισαν	1	in whom they had believed	Who they refers to depends on your choice for the meaning of “them” in the previous note (either elders or leaders and other believers).
1847	ACT	14	25	t513	figs-metonymy	καὶ λαλήσαντες ἐν Πέργῃ τὸν λόγον	1	And when they had spoken the word in Perga	Here word is a metonym for “message of God.” Alternate translation: “And when they had spoken the message about Jesus in Perga” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1848	ACT	14	25	h8sh		κατέβησαν εἰς Ἀττάλιαν	1	they went down to Attalia	The phrase went down is used here because Attalia is lower in elevation than Perga.
1849	ACT	14	26	f2cg		ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	where they had been commended to the grace of God	This can be stated in the active form. Alternate translation: “where believers and leaders in Antioch had commended Paul and Barnabas to the grace of God” or “where the people of Antioch prayed that God would care for and protect Paul and Barnabas”
1850	ACT	14	27	vcd3			0	General Information:	Here the words “they,” “them,” and “They” refer to Paul and Barnabas. The word “he” refers to God.
1851	ACT	14	27	i9dv		συναγαγόντες τὴν ἐκκλησίαν	1	gathered together the church	“called the local believers to meet together”
1852	ACT	14	27	b4id	figs-metaphor	ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως	1	he had opened a door of faith for the Gentiles	God’s enabling the Gentiles to believe is spoken of as if he had opened a door that had prevented them from entering into faith. Alternate translation: “God had made it possible for the Gentiles to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1853	ACT	14	28	abcq	figs-litotes	χρόνον οὐκ ὀλίγον	1	for not a little time	This phrase is a litotes. The words not and a little together mean “a lot.” Alternate translation: “for a long time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1854	ACT	15	intro	h917			0		Acts 15 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 15:16-17. The meeting that Luke describes in this chapter is commonly called the “Jerusalem Council.” This was a time when many church leaders got together to decide if believers needed to obey the whole law of Moses. Special concepts in this chapter Brothers In this chapter Luke begins to use the word “brothers” to refer to fellow Christians instead of fellow Jews. Obeying the law of Moses Some believers wanted the Gentiles to be circumcised because God had told Abraham and Moses that everyone who wanted to belong to him had to be circumcised and that this was a law that would always exist. But Paul and Barnabas had seen God give uncircumcised Gentiles the gift of the Holy Spirit, so they did not want the Gentiles to be circumcised. Both groups went to Jerusalem to have the church leaders decide what they should do. “Abstain from things sacrificed to idols, blood, things strangled, and from sexual immorality” It is possible that the church leaders decided on these laws so that Jews and Gentiles could not only live together but eat the same foods together.
1855	ACT	15	1	qck6			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul and Barnabas are still in Antioch when there is a dispute about the Gentiles and circumcision.
1856	ACT	15	1	su66	figs-explicit	τινες	1	certain ones	“some men.” You can make explicit that these men were Jews who believed in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1857	ACT	15	1	p3k9		κατελθόντες ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας	1	coming down from Judea	The phrase coming down is used here because Judea is higher in elevation than Antioch.
1858	ACT	15	1	zi1n	figs-explicit	ἐδίδασκον τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	taught the brothers	Here brothers stands for believers in Christ. It is implied that they were in Antioch. Alternate translation: “taught the believers at Antioch” or “were teaching the believers at Antioch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1859	ACT	15	1	pm8h	figs-activepassive	ἐὰν μὴ περιτμηθῆτε τῷ ἔθει τῷ Μωϋσέως, οὐ δύνασθε σωθῆναι	1	Unless you are circumcised in the custom of Moses, you are not able to be saved	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Unless someone circumcises you in the custom of Moses, God cannot save you” or “God will not save you from your sins unless you receive circumcision according to the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1860	ACT	15	2	abcr	figs-litotes	στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης	1	not a little dispute and debate	This phrase is a litotes. The words not and a little together mean “a lot.” Alternate translation: “a sharp dispute and debate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1861	ACT	15	2	f9nd	figs-abstractnouns	στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης	1	not a little dispute and debate	The abstract nouns dispute and debate can be stated as verbs and where the men came from can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “strongly confronted and debated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1862	ACT	15	2	ek6a		ἀναβαίνειν…εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	to go up … in Jerusalem	Jerusalem was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of going up to Jerusalem.
1863	ACT	15	2	z983		τοῦ ζητήματος τούτου	1	this question	“this issue”
1864	ACT	15	3	h2mw			0	General Information:	Here the words “They,” “they,” and “them” refer to Paul, Barnabas, and certain others (Acts 15:2).
1865	ACT	15	3	av5y	figs-activepassive	οἱ μὲν οὖν προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	Therefore, the ones who had been sent by the church	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Therefore the community of believers sent them from Antioch to Jerusalem, and they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1866	ACT	15	3	aia5	figs-metonymy	προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας	1	who had been sent by the church	Here church refers to the people that were a part of the church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1867	ACT	15	3	i5kd		διήρχοντο τήν τε Φοινίκην καὶ Σαμάρειαν, ἐκδιηγούμενοι	1	passed through both Phoenicia and Samaria announcing	The words passed through and announcing indicate they spent some time in different places sharing in detail what God was doing.
1868	ACT	15	3	rk37	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκδιηγούμενοι τὴν ἐπιστροφὴν τῶν ἐθνῶν	1	announcing the conversion of the Gentiles	The abstract noun conversion means the Gentiles were rejecting their false gods and believing in God. Alternate translation: “announced to the community of believers in those places that Gentiles were believing in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1869	ACT	15	3	nje7	figs-metaphor	ἐποίουν χαρὰν μεγάλην πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	they brought great joy to all the brothers	Their message causing the brothers to be joyful is spoken of as if joy were an object that they brought to the brothers. Alternate translation: “what they said caused their fellow believers to rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1870	ACT	15	3	bbd4		πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς	1	to all the brothers	Here brothers refers to fellow believers.
1871	ACT	15	4	ej1r	figs-activepassive	παρεδέχθησαν ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων	1	they were welcomed by the church, and the apostles, and the elders	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles, the elders, and the rest of the community of believers welcomed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1872	ACT	15	4	a2x1		μετ’ αὐτῶν	1	with them	“through them”
1873	ACT	15	5	efe5			0	General Information:	Here the word “them” refers to non-Jewish believers who were not circumcised and did not keep the Old Testament laws of God.
1874	ACT	15	5	f2b5			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul and Barnabas are now in Jerusalem to meet with the apostles and elders there.
1875	ACT	15	5	k6k7		δέ τινες	1	But certain ones	Here Luke contrasts those who believe that salvation is only in Jesus to others who believe salvation is by Jesus yet also believe that circumcision is required for salvation.
1876	ACT	15	5	b9nt		τηρεῖν τὸν νόμον Μωϋσέως	1	to keep the law of Moses	“to obey the law of Moses”
1877	ACT	15	6	ugu6		ἰδεῖν περὶ τοῦ λόγου τούτου	1	to see about this matter	The church leaders decided to discuss whether or not Gentiles needed to be circumcised and obey the law of Moses in order for God to save them from their sins.
1878	ACT	15	7	wct8	figs-you		0	General Information:	The first word “them” refers to apostles and elders (Acts 15:6) and the other words “them” and “their” refer to the believing Gentiles. Here the word “you” is plural and refers to the apostles and elders present. The word “he” refers to God. Here “us” is plural and refers to Peter, the apostles and elders, and all Jewish believers in general. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1879	ACT	15	7	hxu9			0	Connecting Statement:	Peter begins to speak to the apostles and elders who met to discuss whether Gentiles had to receive circumcision and keep the law (Acts 15:5-6).
1880	ACT	15	7	a6q9		ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Peter is addressing all of the believers who were present.
1881	ACT	15	7	s3wb	figs-synecdoche	διὰ τοῦ στόματός μου	1	by my mouth	Here mouth refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “from me” or “by me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1882	ACT	15	7	yer1		ἀκοῦσαι τὰ ἔθνη	1	the Gentiles to hear	“that the Gentiles would hear”
1883	ACT	15	7	b5s8	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ εὐαγγελίου	1	the word of the gospel	Here word stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1884	ACT	15	8	m1xc	figs-metonymy	καρδιογνώστης	1	who knows the heart	Here heart refers to the “minds” or “inner beings.” Alternate translation: “who knows the people’s minds” or “who knows what people think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1885	ACT	15	8	p6d2		ἐμαρτύρησεν αὐτοῖς	1	testified to them	“witnesses to the Gentiles”
1886	ACT	15	8	i1gc		δοὺς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον	1	giving them the Holy Spirit	“causing the Holy Spirit to come upon them”
1887	ACT	15	8	abcs	figs-ellipsis	καθὼς καὶ ἡμῖν	1	just as also to us	Here Luke expects his readers to understand the words “he gave” that he leaves out. Alternate translation: “just as he also gave to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1888	ACT	15	9	zs2g		οὐδὲν διέκρινεν	1	he did not distinguish	God did not treat Jewish believers different from Gentile believers.
1889	ACT	15	9	ase1	figs-metaphor	τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν	1	having made their hearts clean by faith	God’s forgiving the Gentile believers’ sins is spoken as though he literally cleaned their hearts. Here heart stands for the person’s inner being. Alternate translation: “forgiving their sins because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1890	ACT	15	10	ha45	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Peter includes his audience by his use of “our” and “we.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1891	ACT	15	10	wjq7			0	Connecting Statement:	Peter finishes speaking to the apostles and elders.
1892	ACT	15	10	rfr4		νῦν	1	Now	This does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
1893	ACT	15	10	zaz6	figs-rquestion	τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν, ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι?	1	why are you testing God, to put a yoke upon the neck of the disciples which neither our fathers nor we were able to bear?	Peter uses a question with a word picture to tell the Jewish believers they should not require the non-Jewish believers to perform circumcision to be saved. Alternate translation: “do not test God by putting a burden on the non-Jewish believers which we Jews were not able to bear!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1894	ACT	15	10	bfd5		οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν	1	our fathers	This refers to their Jewish ancestors.
1895	ACT	15	11	q28c	figs-activepassive	ἀλλὰ διὰ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ, πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι καθ’ ὃν τρόπον κἀκεῖνοι	1	But we believe to be saved through the grace of the Lord Jesus, and they according to that same manner	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “But we believe the Lord Jesus shall save us by his grace, just as he saved the non-Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1896	ACT	15	12	um1p			0	General Information:	Here the word “them” refers to Paul and Barnabas.
1897	ACT	15	12	d1uc		πᾶν τὸ πλῆθος	1	all the crowd	“everyone” or “the whole group” (Acts 15:6)
1898	ACT	15	12	uks6		ἐποίησεν ὁ Θεὸς	1	God had worked	“God had done” or “God had caused”
1899	ACT	15	13	vb25			0	General Information:	Here the word “they” refers to Paul and Barnabas (Acts 15:12).
1900	ACT	15	13	l7mp			0	Connecting Statement:	James begins to speak to the apostles and elders (Acts 15:6).
1901	ACT	15	13	pl6m		ἀδελφοί, ἀκούσατέ	1	brothers, listen	“fellow believers, listen.” James was probably speaking only to men.
1902	ACT	15	14	abct		ἐπεσκέψατο, λαβεῖν ἐξ ἐθνῶν	1	concerned himself to take from the Gentiles	“graciously helped the Gentiles by taking out of them”
1903	ACT	15	14	s9dn		λαβεῖν ἐξ ἐθνῶν λαὸν	1	to take from them a people	“so that he might choose from among them a people”
1904	ACT	15	14	pnr9	figs-metonymy	τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ	1	for his name	“for God’s name.” Here name refers to God. Alternate translation: “for himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1905	ACT	15	15	h9um			0	General Information:	Here “I” refers to God who spoke through the words of his prophet.
1906	ACT	15	15	ibb2			0	Connecting Statement:	James quotes the prophet Amos from the Old Testament.
1907	ACT	15	15	am6y	figs-metonymy	τούτῳ συμφωνοῦσιν οἱ λόγοι τῶν προφητῶν	1	this agrees with the words of the prophets	Here words stands for a message. Alternate translation: “what the prophets said agrees” or “the prophets agree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1908	ACT	15	15	nbi1		τούτῳ συμφωνοῦσιν	1	this agrees with	“this confirms”
1909	ACT	15	15	j4f5	figs-activepassive	καθὼς γέγραπται	1	just as it is written	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “just as they wrote” or “just as the prophet Amos wrote long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1910	ACT	15	16	f5wf	figs-metaphor	ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν	1	I will build again the tent of David, which has fallen down; and I will rebuild its ruins and will restore it	This speaks of God’s again choosing one of David’s descendants to rule over his people as though he were setting up a tent again after it fell down. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1911	ACT	15	16	ist8	figs-metonymy	τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ	1	the tent of David	Here tent stands for David’s family. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1912	ACT	15	17	sm79	figs-metaphor	ἐκζητήσωσιν οἱ κατάλοιποι τῶν ἀνθρώπων τὸν Κύριον	1	the remnant of men may seek the Lord	This speaks about people wanting to obey God and learn more about him as if they were literally looking for him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1913	ACT	15	17	hkw1	figs-gendernotations	κατάλοιποι τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1	remnant of men	Here men includes males and females. Alternate translation: “remnant of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
1914	ACT	15	17	pe4l	figs-123person	ἐκζητήσωσιν…τὸν Κύριον	1	may seek the Lord	God is speaking about himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “may seek me, the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
1915	ACT	15	17	tu21	figs-activepassive	καὶ πάντα τὰ ἔθνη, ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς	1	including all the Gentiles upon whom my name has been called upon them	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “including all the Gentiles who belong to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1916	ACT	15	17	c8gm	figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομά μου	1	my name	Here my name stands for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1917	ACT	15	18	tr27	figs-activepassive	γνωστὰ	1	known	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that people have known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1918	ACT	15	19	g3zx	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here “we” includes James, the apostles, and the elders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1919	ACT	15	19	f6za			0	Connecting Statement:	James finishes speaking to the apostles and elders. (See: Acts 15:2 and Acts 15:13)
1920	ACT	15	19	pyb9	figs-explicit	μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν ἐθνῶν, ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν	1	not to trouble those from the Gentiles who are turning to God	You can make explicit in what way James does not want to trouble the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we should not require the Gentiles who are believing in God to become circumcised and to obey the laws of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1921	ACT	15	19	vr6u	figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν	1	who are turning to God	A person who starts obeying God is spoken of as if the person is physically turning towards God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1922	ACT	15	20	wx8f		ἀπέχεσθαι τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων, καὶ τῆς πορνείας, καὶ τοῦ πνικτοῦ, καὶ τοῦ αἵματος	1	to keep away from the pollution of idols, and sexual immorality, and things that are strangled, and blood	Sexual immorality, strangling animals, and consuming blood were often part of ceremonies to worship idols and false gods.
1923	ACT	15	20	n6f2	figs-explicit	ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων	1	pollution of idols	This possibly refers to eating the meat of an animal that someone has sacrificed to an idol or to anything to do with idol worship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1924	ACT	15	20	j2rl	figs-explicit	τοῦ πνικτοῦ, καὶ τοῦ αἵματος	1	things that are strangled, and blood	God did not allow Jews to eat meat that still had the blood in it. Also, even earlier in Moses’ writings in Genesis, God had forbidden the drinking of blood. Therefore, they could not eat an animal that someone strangled because the blood was not properly drained from the body of the animal. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1925	ACT	15	21	si1h	figs-explicit	Μωϋσῆς γὰρ ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς κατὰ πᾶν Σάββατον ἀναγινωσκόμενος.	1	For Moses has in every city, from ancient generations, those proclaiming him, being read in the synagogues every Sabbath	James is implying that Gentiles know how important these rules are because Jews preach them in every city where there is a synagogue. It also implies the Gentiles can go to the teachers from the synagogues to learn more about these rules. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1926	ACT	15	21	zd7t	figs-metonymy	Μωϋσῆς	1	Moses	Here Moses represents the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1927	ACT	15	21	wp1s	figs-activepassive	Μωϋσῆς…ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει	1	Moses has in every city, from ancient generations, those proclaiming him	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “there are Jews in every city, from ancient generations, who are proclaiming the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1928	ACT	15	21	xg5n	figs-hyperbole	κατὰ πόλιν	1	in every city	The word every here is a generalization. Alternate translation: “in many cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1929	ACT	15	22	rhn3			0	General Information:	Here the word “them” refers to Judas and Silas. The word “They” refers to the apostles, elders, and other believers of the church in Jerusalem.
1930	ACT	15	22	hp6j	figs-explicit	ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	the whole church	Here church refers to the people who are a part of the church in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the church in Jerusalem” or “the whole community of believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1931	ACT	15	22	c711	translate-names	Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν	1	Judas called Barsabbas	This is the name of a man. Barsabbas is a second name that people called him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1932	ACT	15	23	e4g2		οἱ ἀπόστολοι καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι, ἀδελφοὶ, τοῖς κατὰ τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν, καὶ Συρίαν, καὶ Κιλικίαν, ἀδελφοῖς τοῖς ἐξ ἐθνῶν, χαίρειν	1	The apostles and the elders, brothers, to those throughout Antioch and Syria and Cilicia, who are brothers from among the Gentiles. Greetings	This is the introduction of the letter. Your language may have a way of introducing the author of the letter and to whom it is written. Alternate translation: “This letter is from your brothers, the apostles and elders. We are writing to you Gentile believers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings to you” or “To our Gentile brothers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings from the apostles and elders, your brothers”
1933	ACT	15	23	kp51		ἀδελφοὶ…ἀδελφοῖς	1	brothers … brothers	Here both instances of the word brothers refer to fellow believers. By using these words, the apostles and elders assure the Gentile believers that they accept them as fellow believers.
1934	ACT	15	23	php8	translate-names	Κιλικίαν	1	Cilicia	This is the name of a province on the coast in Asia Minor north of the Island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1935	ACT	15	24	g8m9	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here all instances of “we,” “our,” and “us” refer to the believers in the church in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and Acts 15:22)
1936	ACT	15	24	p1tl		ὅτι τινὲς	1	that certain ones	“that some men”
1937	ACT	15	24	kh16		οἷς οὐ διεστειλάμεθα	1	who were not ordered by us	“even though we gave no orders for them to go”
1938	ACT	15	24	bxq8	figs-synecdoche	ἐτάραξαν ὑμᾶς λόγοις ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν	1	to disturb you with teachings that are upsetting your souls	Here souls refers to the people. Alternate translation: “to teach things that have troubled you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
1939	ACT	15	25	c3dl		ἐκλεξαμένοις ἄνδρας	1	chosen men	The men they sent were Judas called Barsabbas and Silas (Acts 15:22).
1940	ACT	15	26	t7vw	figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	for the name of our Lord Jesus Christ	Here name refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “because they believe in our Lord Jesus Christ” or “because they serve our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1941	ACT	15	27	j1jb	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the words “We” and “us” refer to the leaders and believers in the church in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and Acts 15:22)
1942	ACT	15	27	v2ee			0	Connecting Statement:	This concludes the letter from the Jerusalem church to the Gentile believers in Antioch.
1943	ACT	15	27	xw8l	figs-explicit	αὐτοὺς διὰ λόγου ἀπαγγέλλοντας τὰ αὐτά	1	they are reporting to you the same thing in words	This phrase emphasizes that Judas and Silas will say the same things that the apostles and elders had written. Alternate translation: “they themselves will tell you the same things about which we have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1944	ACT	15	28	l9z6	figs-metaphor	μηδὲν πλέον ἐπιτίθεσθαι ὑμῖν βάρος, πλὴν τούτων τῶν ἐπάναγκες	1	to be laid upon you no greater burden than these necessary things	This speaks about laws that people need to obey as if they were objects that people carry on their shoulders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1945	ACT	15	29	nt7s		εἰδωλοθύτων	1	things sacrificed to idols	This means they are not allowed to eat the meat of an animal that someone sacrifices to an idol.
1946	ACT	15	29	vcc6	figs-explicit	αἵματος	1	blood	This refers to drinking blood or eating meat from which the blood has not been drained. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1947	ACT	15	29	rt55		πνικτῶν	1	things strangled	A strangled animal was killed but its blood was not drained.
1948	ACT	15	29	buy9		ἔρρωσθε	1	Farewell	This announces the end of the letter. Alternate translation: “Goodbye”
1949	ACT	15	30	khi8			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas leave for Antioch.
1950	ACT	15	30	c3uk		οἱ μὲν οὖν ἀπολυθέντες, κατῆλθον εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν	1	So when they were dismissed, they came down to Antioch	The word they refers to Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas. Alternate translation: “So when the four men were dismissed, they came down to Antioch”
1951	ACT	15	30	usz6	figs-activepassive	οἱ…ἀπολυθέντες	1	when they were dismissed	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “when the apostles and elders dismissed the four men” or “when the believers in Jerusalem sent them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1952	ACT	15	30	t55a		κατῆλθον εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν	1	they came down to Antioch	The phrase came down is used here because Antioch is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.
1953	ACT	15	31	k1mr		ἐχάρησαν	1	they rejoiced	“the believers in Antioch rejoiced”
1954	ACT	15	31	e4gf	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπὶ τῇ παρακλήσει	1	because of the encouragement	The abstract noun encouragement can be expressed with the verb “encourage.” Alternate translation: “because what the apostles and elders wrote encouraged them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1955	ACT	15	32	r65l		καὶ αὐτοὶ προφῆται ὄντες	1	also being prophets themselves	Prophets were teachers authorized by God to speak for him. Alternate translation: “because they were also prophets” or “who were also prophets”
1956	ACT	15	32	e2en		τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	the brothers	“the fellow believers”
1957	ACT	15	32	j99g	figs-metaphor	ἐπεστήριξαν	1	strengthened them	Helping someone to depend even more on Jesus is spoken of as if they were making them physically stronger. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1958	ACT	15	33	y2ls			0	Connecting Statement:	Judas and Silas return to Jerusalem while Paul and Barnabas remain in Antioch.
1959	ACT	15	33	v7pj	figs-metaphor	ποιήσαντες δὲ χρόνον	1	And after they had spent time there	This speaks about time as if it were a commodity that a person could spend. The word “they” refers to Judas and Silas. Alternate translation: “And after they stayed there for a while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1960	ACT	15	33	v6im	figs-activepassive	ἀπελύθησαν μετ’ εἰρήνης ἀπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	they were sent away with peace from the brothers	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the brothers sent Judas and Silas back in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1961	ACT	15	33	wzw4		τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	the brothers	This refers to the believers in Antioch.
1962	ACT	15	33	xv3h		πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστείλαντας αὐτούς	1	to those who had sent them	“to the believers in Jerusalem who sent Judas and Silas” (Acts 15:22)
1963	ACT	15	35	e7s4	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	the word of the Lord	Here word stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1964	ACT	15	36	k6c6			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul and Barnabas go on separate journeys.
1965	ACT	15	36	i1n5		ἐπιστρέψαντες δὴ	1	Returning, then	“On our way back to Antioch” or “As we are going back”
1966	ACT	15	36	ib2j		ἐπισκεψώμεθα τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	let us visit the brothers	“let us care for the brothers” or “we should offer to help the believers”
1967	ACT	15	36	ua1f	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	the word of the Lord	Here word stands for the message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1968	ACT	15	36	y9i9		πῶς ἔχουσιν	1	how they are	“to learn how they are doing.” They want to learn about the current condition of the brothers and how they are holding on to God’s truth.
1969	ACT	15	38	a5nn	figs-litotes	Παῦλος…ἠξίου…μὴ συνπαραλαμβάνειν τοῦτον	1	Paul thought it wise not to take along him	The words wise not are used to say the opposite of wise. Alternate translation: “Paul thought that taking Mark along would be foolish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
1970	ACT	15	38	ht3k		Παμφυλίας	1	Pamphylia	This was a province in Asia Minor. See how you translated this in Acts 2:10.
1971	ACT	15	38	ln7w		μὴ συνελθόντα αὐτοῖς εἰς τὸ ἔργον	1	did not go with them in the work	“did not continue to work with them” or “did not continue to serve with them”
1972	ACT	15	39	bb8w			0	General Information:	Here the word “they” refers to Barnabas and Paul.
1973	ACT	15	39	u97a	figs-abstractnouns	ἐγένετο δὲ παροξυσμὸς, ὥστε ἀποχωρισθῆναι αὐτοὺς ἀπ’ ἀλλήλων	1	And there arose a sharp disagreement, so as to separate them from each other	The abstract noun disagreement can be stated as the verb “disagree.” Alternate translation: “And they so strongly disagreed with each other that they separated from each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1974	ACT	15	40	l2uq	figs-activepassive	παραδοθεὶς τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Κυρίου ὑπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	after he had been entrusted by the brothers to the grace of the Lord	To entrust to someone means to place the care and responsibility for someone or something to another person. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “after the believers in Antioch entrusted Paul to the grace of the Lord” or “after the believers in Antioch prayed for the Lord to take care of Paul and show kindness to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1975	ACT	15	41	e3ym	figs-explicit	διήρχετο	1	he went through	The previous sentence implies that Silas was with Paul. Alternate translation: “they went through” or “Paul and Silas went all around in” or “Paul took Silas and went throughout” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1976	ACT	15	41	t81z		τὴν Συρίαν καὶ τὴν Κιλικίαν	1	Syria and Cilicia	These are provinces or areas in Asia Minor, near the island of Cyprus.
1977	ACT	15	41	tbv3	figs-metaphor	ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας	1	strengthening the churches	Encouraging the believers in the churches is spoken of as though Paul and Silas were making the believers physically stronger. The word churches refers to the groups of believers in Syria and Cilicia. Alternate translation: “encouraging the believers in the churches” or “helping the community of believers to depend even more in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1978	ACT	16	intro	e7z2			0		Acts 16 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Timothy’s circumcision Paul circumcised Timothy because they were telling the message of Jesus to Jews and Gentiles. Paul wanted the Jews to know that he respected the law of Moses even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Christians did not need to be circumcised. The woman who had a spirit of divination Most people want very much to know the future, but the law of Moses said that speaking with the spirits of dead people to learn about the future is a sin. This woman seems to have been able to tell the future very well. She was a slave, and her masters made much money from her work. Paul wanted her to stop sinning, so he told the spirit to leave her. Luke does not say that she began to follow Jesus or tell us anything more about her.
1979	ACT	16	1	l2b1			0	General Information:	The first, third, and fourth instances of the word “him” refer to Timothy. The second “him” refers to Paul.
1980	ACT	16	1	f49m	writing-background		0		This continues the missionary journeys of Paul with Silas. Timothy is introduced into the story and joins Paul and Silas. Verses 1 and 2 give background information about Timothy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
1981	ACT	16	1	km5q	figs-go	κατήντησεν…καὶ	1	Paul also came down	Here came can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1982	ACT	16	1	d4ka		Δέρβην	1	Derbe	This is the name of a city in Asia Minor. See how you translated it in Acts 14:6.
1983	ACT	16	1	u3vr		ἰδοὺ	1	behold	The word behold alerts us to a new person in the narrative. Your language may have a way of doing this.
1984	ACT	16	1	wxl8	figs-ellipsis	γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς	1	a believing Jewish woman	The words “in Christ” are understood. Alternate translation: “a Jewish woman who believed in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
1985	ACT	16	2	t1lu	figs-activepassive	ὃς ἐμαρτυρεῖτο ὑπὸ τῶν…ἀδελφῶν	1	He was well spoken of by the brothers	This can be stated in active from. Alternate translation: “The brothers spoke well of him” or “Timothy had a good reputation among the brothers” or “The brothers said good things about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1986	ACT	16	2	rez2		ὑπὸ τῶν…ἀδελφῶν	1	by the brothers	Here brothers refers to believers. Alternate translation: “by the believers”
1987	ACT	16	3	p6z8		περιέτεμεν αὐτὸν	1	he circumcised him	It is possible that Paul himself circumcised Timothy, but it is more likely that he had someone else circumcise Timothy.
1988	ACT	16	3	za93		διὰ τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς τόποις ἐκείνοις	1	because of the Jews who were in those places	“because of the Jews living in the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling”
1989	ACT	16	3	hk2l	figs-explicit	ᾔδεισαν γὰρ ἅπαντες, ὅτι Ἕλλην ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ὑπῆρχεν	1	for they all knew that his father was a Greek	Since Greek men did not have their sons circumcised, the Jews would have known Timothy was not circumcised, and they would have rejected Paul and Timothy before hearing their message about Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1990	ACT	16	4	n46i			0	General Information:	The word “they” here refers to Paul, Silas (Acts 15:40), and Timothy (Acts 16:3).
1991	ACT	16	4	bu6r		αὐτοῖς φυλάσσειν	1	for them to keep	“for the church members to obey” or “for the believers to obey”
1992	ACT	16	4	gpi3	figs-activepassive	τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων καὶ πρεσβυτέρων τῶν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις	1	that had been decided by the apostles and elders who were in Jerusalem	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that the apostles and elders in Jerusalem had written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1993	ACT	16	5	q8v9	figs-activepassive	αἱ…ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει, καὶ ἐπερίσσευον τῷ ἀριθμῷ καθ’ ἡμέραν	1	the churches were being strengthened in the faith and were increasing in number each day	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the believers became stronger in their faith, and there were more and more people becoming believers every day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1994	ACT	16	5	lv4f	figs-metaphor	αἱ…ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει	1	the churches were being strengthened in the faith	This speaks of helping someone to believe more confidently as if it were making them physically stronger. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1995	ACT	16	6	g97e		τὴν Φρυγίαν	1	Phrygia	This is a region in Asia. See how you translated this name in Acts 2:10.
1996	ACT	16	6	ue3k	figs-activepassive	κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος	1	having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “for the Holy Spirit had forbidden them” or “because the Holy Spirit did not permit them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1997	ACT	16	6	h4u4	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον	1	the word	Here word stands for “message.” Alternate translation: “the message about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1998	ACT	16	7	x1b1	figs-go	ἐλθόντες	1	when they had come	Here had come can be translated as “had gone” or “had arrived.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
1999	ACT	16	7	b1xq	translate-names	Μυσίαν…Βιθυνίαν	1	Mysia … Bithynia	These are two more regions in Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2000	ACT	16	7	b539		τὸ Πνεῦμα Ἰησοῦ	1	the Spirit of Jesus	“the Holy Spirit”
2001	ACT	16	8	s6l1		κατέβησαν εἰς Τρῳάδα	1	they came down to the city of Troas	The phrase came down is used here because Troas is lower in elevation than Mysia.
2002	ACT	16	8	xq6n	figs-go	κατέβησαν	1	they came down	Here came can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2003	ACT	16	9	t6v2		ὅραμα…τῷ Παύλῳ ὤφθη	1	a vision appeared to Paul	“Paul saw a vision from God” or “Paul had a vision from God”
2004	ACT	16	9	hq8e		παρακαλῶν αὐτὸν	1	calling him	“begging him” or “inviting him”
2005	ACT	16	9	cm2u		διαβὰς εἰς Μακεδονίαν	1	Coming over into Macedonia	The phrase Coming over is used because Macedonia is across the sea from Troas.
2006	ACT	16	10	fg5h		ἐζητήσαμεν ἐξελθεῖν εἰς Μακεδονίαν, συμβιβάζοντες ὅτι προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς εὐαγγελίσασθαι αὐτούς	1	we sought to go out to Macedonia, reasoning together that God had called us to proclaim the gospel to them	Here the words we and us refer to Paul and his companions including Luke, the author of Acts.
2007	ACT	16	11	m2p5			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul and his companions are now in Philippi on their missionary trip. Verse 13 begins the story of Lydia. This short story happens during Paul’s travels.
2008	ACT	16	11	q2pr	translate-names	Σαμοθρᾴκην…Νέαν Πόλιν	1	Samothrace … Neapolis	These are coastal cities near Phillipi in Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2009	ACT	16	12	tl9f	figs-explicit	κολωνία	1	a colony	This is a city outside of Italy where many people who came from Rome lived. The people there had the same rights and freedoms as people who lived in cities in Italy. They could govern themselves and they did not have to pay taxes. Alternate translation: “a Roman colony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2010	ACT	16	14	x8bp			0	Connecting Statement:	This ends the story of Lydia.
2011	ACT	16	14	n952	writing-participants	τις γυνὴ ὀνόματι Λυδία	1	a certain woman named Lydia	Here a certain woman introduces a new person in the story. Alternate translation: “there was a woman named Lydia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2012	ACT	16	14	qj86	figs-ellipsis	πορφυρόπωλις	1	a seller of purple	Here “cloth” is understood. Alternate translation: “a merchant who sold purple cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2013	ACT	16	14	c6n8	translate-names	Θυατείρων	1	of Thyatira	This is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2014	ACT	16	14	cyk3		σεβομένη τὸν Θεόν	1	worshiping God	When Luke says Lydia was worshiping God, he is saying that she was a Gentile who gave praise to God and followed him, but did not obey all of the Jewish laws.
2015	ACT	16	14	rd4r	figs-metaphor	ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν, προσέχειν	1	of whom the Lord opened the heart to pay attention to	For the Lord to cause someone to pay attention and believe a message is spoken of as if he were opening a person’s heart. Alternate translation: “and the Lord caused her to listen well and to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2016	ACT	16	14	s9ju	figs-metonymy	διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν	1	opened the heart	Here heart stands for a person’s mind. Also, the author speaks about the heart or “mind” as if it were a box that a person could open so it is ready for someone to fill it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2017	ACT	16	14	a74y	figs-activepassive	τοῖς λαλουμένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου	1	what was being said by Paul	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “what Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2018	ACT	16	15	g7e9	figs-activepassive	ὡς δὲ ἐβαπτίσθη καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς	1	And when she was baptized, and her household	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “And when they baptized Lydia and members of her household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2019	ACT	16	15	s799	figs-metonymy	ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς	1	her household	This refers to all the people who live in her house. Alternate translation: “the members of her household” or “her family and household servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2020	ACT	16	16	vyn4	writing-background		0	General Information:	Background information is given here to explain that this young fortune teller brought much financial gain to her masters by guessing people’s futures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2021	ACT	16	16	anc1			0	Connecting Statement:	This begins the first event in another short story during Paul’s travels; it is about a young fortune teller.
2022	ACT	16	16	ufy4		ἐγένετο δὲ	1	And it happened that	This phrase marks the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
2023	ACT	16	16	y1gc	writing-participants	παιδίσκην τινὰ	1	a certain young female slave	The phrase a certain introduces a new person to the story. Alternate translation: “there was a young female slave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2024	ACT	16	16	ymt9		πνεῦμα Πύθωνα	1	a spirit of divination	An evil spirit spoke to her often about the immediate future of people.
2025	ACT	16	17	tni9	figs-metaphor	ὁδὸν σωτηρίας	1	the way of salvation	How a person can be saved is spoken of here as if it were a way or path that a person walks on. Alternate translation: “how God can save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2026	ACT	16	18	lj79	figs-activepassive	διαπονηθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος, καὶ ἐπιστρέψας	1	But Paul, being greatly annoyed and turning	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “But she greatly annoyed Paul so he turned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2027	ACT	16	18	qi1k	figs-metonymy	ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	in the name of Jesus Christ	Here name stands for speaking with the authority or as the representative of Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2028	ACT	16	18	u4z8		ἐξῆλθεν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ	1	it came out that same hour	“the spirit came out immediately”
2029	ACT	16	19	m1y7		οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς	1	her masters	“the owners of the slave girl”
2030	ACT	16	19	r1a1	figs-explicit	ἰδόντες…οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς, ὅτι ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς ἐργασίας αὐτῶν	1	when her masters saw that their hope of profit was gone	It can be stated clearly why they no longer hoped to make money. Alternate translation: “when her masters saw that she could no longer earn money for them by telling fortunes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2031	ACT	16	19	bws7		εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν	1	into the marketplace	“into the public square.” This is a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services takes place.
2032	ACT	16	19	hf82		ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας	1	before the authorities	“into the presence of the authorities” or “so that the authorities could judge them”
2033	ACT	16	20	d2rg		προσαγαγόντες αὐτοὺς τοῖς στρατηγοῖς	1	when they had brought them to the magistrates	“when they had brought them to the judges”
2034	ACT	16	20	wa94		τοῖς στρατηγοῖς	1	to the magistrates	These were rulers or judges.
2035	ACT	16	20	dkz2	figs-exclusive	οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκταράσσουσιν ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν	1	These men are stirring up our city	Here the word our refers to the people of the city and includes the magistrates who ruled it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2036	ACT	16	21	gna6		παραδέχεσθαι οὐδὲ ποιεῖν	1	to accept nor to practice	“to believe nor to obey” or “to accept nor to do”
2037	ACT	16	22	r1gr			0	General Information:	Here the words “their” and “them” refer to Paul and Silas. The word “they” here refers to soldiers.
2038	ACT	16	22	at6i	figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευον ῥαβδίζειν	1	commanding them to be beaten with rods	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “commanding the soldiers to beat them with rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2039	ACT	16	23	dsr3		πολλάς…ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πληγὰς	1	when they had laid many blows upon them	“when they had hit them many times with rods”
2040	ACT	16	23	y4mc		παραγγείλαντες τῷ δεσμοφύλακι ἀσφαλῶς τηρεῖν αὐτούς	1	having commanded the jailer to guard them securely	“having told the jailer to make sure they did not escape”
2041	ACT	16	23	zkp7		δεσμοφύλακι	1	jailer	a person responsible for all the people held in the jail or prison
2042	ACT	16	24	a79x		ὃς παραγγελίαν τοιαύτην λαβὼν	1	who, having received such a command	“who, when he heard this command”
2043	ACT	16	24	rl8c		τοὺς πόδας ἠσφαλίσατο αὐτῶν εἰς τὸ ξύλον	1	fastened their feet in the stocks	“securely locked their feet in the stocks”
2044	ACT	16	24	jug6		ξύλον	1	stocks	a piece of wood with holes for preventing a person’s feet from moving
2045	ACT	16	25	rwu3			0	General Information:	The word “them” refers to Paul and Silas.
2046	ACT	16	25	hme2			0	Connecting Statement:	This continues Paul and Silas’ time in Philippi in prison and tells what happens to their jailer.
2047	ACT	16	26	q7z1	figs-activepassive	σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας, ὥστε σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου	1	a great earthquake happened, so that the foundations of the prison were shaken	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “a severe earthquake shook the foundations of the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2048	ACT	16	26	m4ye	figs-synecdoche	τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου	1	the foundations of the prison	When the foundations shook, this caused the entire prison to shake. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2049	ACT	16	26	s6mu	figs-activepassive	ἠνεῴχθησαν…αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι	1	all the doors were opened	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “all the doors opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2050	ACT	16	26	p393	figs-activepassive	πάντων τὰ δεσμὰ ἀνέθη	1	the chains of everyone were unfastened	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone’s chains came loose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2051	ACT	16	27	ljy6	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “we” refers to Paul, Silas, and all of the other prisoners but excludes the jailer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2052	ACT	16	27	hr9q	figs-activepassive	ἔξυπνος…γενόμενος ὁ δεσμοφύλαξ	1	the jailer became awake	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the jailer woke up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2053	ACT	16	27	cwt5		ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν	1	he was about to kill himself	“he was ready to kill himself.” The jailer preferred to commit suicide rather than suffer the consequences of letting the prisoners escape.
2054	ACT	16	29	pe66	figs-explicit	αἰτήσας…φῶτα	1	having called for lights	The reason why the jailer needed light can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “after he called for someone to bring light so he could see who was still in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2055	ACT	16	29	h5ai	figs-metonymy	φῶτα	1	lights	The word lights stands for something that makes light. Alternate translation: “torches” or “lamps” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2056	ACT	16	29	r6is		εἰσεπήδησεν	1	he rushed in	“he quickly entered the jail”
2057	ACT	16	29	bb6t	translate-symaction	προσέπεσεν τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ Σιλᾷ	1	fell down before Paul and Silas	The jailer humbled himself by bowing down at the feet of Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2058	ACT	16	30	a3h6		προαγαγὼν αὐτοὺς ἔξω	1	having brought them out	“after he had led them outside the jail”
2059	ACT	16	30	u132	figs-activepassive	τί με δεῖ ποιεῖν, ἵνα σωθῶ	1	what must I do in order to be saved	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “what must I do in order for God to save me from my sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2060	ACT	16	31	br4k	figs-activepassive	σωθήσῃ	1	you will be saved	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God will save you” or “God will save you from your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2061	ACT	16	31	w8ed	figs-metonymy	ὁ οἶκός σου	1	your household	This refers to all the people who live in the house. Alternate translation: “all the members of your household” or “your family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2062	ACT	16	32	kb35			0	General Information:	Here the first use of the word “they” as well as the words “their” and “them” refer to Paul and Silas. Compare Acts 16:25. The last use of the word “they” refers to the people in the jailers’ household. The words “him,” “his,” and “he” refer to the jailer.
2063	ACT	16	32	pq5w	figs-metonymy	ἐλάλησαν αὐτῷ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	they spoke the word of the Lord to him	Here word stands for a message. Alternate translation: “they told him the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2064	ACT	16	33	r3la	figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίσθη, αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ αὐτοῦ πάντες παραχρῆμα	1	he was baptized immediately—he and all those who were his	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas immediately baptized the jailer and all the members of his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2065	ACT	16	35	x3x8			0	General Information:	This is the last event in the story of Paul and Silas in Philippi (Acts 16:12).
2066	ACT	16	35	lb4z		δὲ	1	Now	This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells the last event in the story that started in Acts 16:16.
2067	ACT	16	35	vev9		ἀπόλυσον τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἐκείνους	1	Release those men	“Allow those men to leave”
2068	ACT	16	36	k3i6		ἐξελθόντες	1	having come out	“having come out of the jail”
2069	ACT	16	37	v4yk	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	All of the times the word “they” is used and the first time “them” is used, the words refer to the magistrates. The word “themselves” refers to the magistrates. The second time the word “them” is used, it refers to Paul and Silas. The word “us” refers only to Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2070	ACT	16	37	b4jm	figs-explicit	ἔφη πρὸς αὐτούς	1	said to them	Probably Paul is speaking to the jailer, but he intends for the jailer to tell the magistrates what he says. Alternate translation: “said to the jailer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2071	ACT	16	37	b7cc	figs-metonymy	δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ	1	They have beaten us in public	Here “They” refers to the magistrates who commanded their soldiers to beat them. Alternate translation: “The magistrates ordered their soldiers to beat us in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2072	ACT	16	37	wc37		ἀκατακρίτους ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας, ἔβαλαν εἰς φυλακήν	1	without trial—men being Romans—they threw us into prison	“without a trial to prove us guilty, even though we are Roman citizens, and they had their soldiers put us in jail”
2073	ACT	16	37	qq1u	figs-rquestion	λάθρᾳ ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν? οὔ γάρ	1	they cast us out secretly? No indeed!	Paul uses a question to emphasize that he will not allow the magistrates to send them out the city in secret after they had mistreated Paul and Silas. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not let them send us out of the city in secret!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2074	ACT	16	37	jr2j	figs-rpronouns	ἀλλὰ ἐλθόντες αὐτοὶ	1	Instead, coming themselves	Here themselves is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2075	ACT	16	38	ym2u	figs-explicit	ἐφοβήθησαν…ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν	1	they were terrified when they heard that they are Romans	To be a Roman meant to be a legal citizens of the Empire. Citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. The city leaders were afraid that more important Roman authorities might learn how the city leaders had mistreated Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2076	ACT	16	40	q59h			0	General Information:	Here the word “they” refers to Paul and Silas. The word “them” refers to the believers in Philippi.
2077	ACT	16	40	y14i	writing-endofstory		0		This is the end of Paul and Silas’ time in Philippi. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2078	ACT	16	40	t1pf	figs-go	εἰσῆλθον πρὸς τὴν Λυδίαν	1	they came to the house of Lydia	Here came can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2079	ACT	16	40	ylk9		τὴν Λυδίαν	1	the house of Lydia	“the home of Lydia”
2080	ACT	16	40	ntc9	figs-gendernotations	ἰδόντες…τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	when they had seen the brothers	Here the brothers refers to believers whether male or female. Alternate translation: “when they had visited with the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2081	ACT	17	intro	gj4c			0		Acts 17 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Misunderstandings about the Messiah The Jews expected the Christ or Messiah to be a powerful king because the Old Testament says so many times. But it also says many times that the Messiah would suffer, and that was what Paul was telling the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]]) The religion of Athens Paul said that the Athenians were “religious,” but they did not worship the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples and begun to worship the gods of the people they had conquered. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]]) In this chapter Luke describes for the first time how Paul told the message of Christ to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament.
2082	ACT	17	1	q9x4			0	General Information:	Here the word “they” refers to Paul and Silas. Compare Acts 16:40. The word “them” refers to the Jews at the synagogue in Thessalonica.
2083	ACT	17	1	r3qb			0	Connecting Statement:	This continues the story of Paul, Silas, and Timothy’s missionary trip. They arrive in Thessalonica, apparently without Luke, since he says “they” and not “we.”
2084	ACT	17	1	e4w5		δὲ	1	Now	This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke, the author, starts to tell a new part of the story.
2085	ACT	17	1	b7np		διοδεύσαντες	1	having passed through	“when they had traveled through”
2086	ACT	17	1	kll1	translate-names	τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπολλωνίαν	1	Amphipolis and Apollonia	These are coastal cities in Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2087	ACT	17	1	yj66	figs-go	ἦλθον εἰς Θεσσαλονίκην	1	they came to Thessalonica	Here came can be translated as “went” or “arrived.” Alternate translation: “they went to Thessalonica” or “they arrived at Thessalonica” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2088	ACT	17	2	vbf2		κατὰ…τὸ εἰωθὸς	1	according to his custom	“as his habit was” or “as his common practice was.” Paul usually went to the synagogue on the Sabbath when Jews would be present.
2089	ACT	17	2	bt5e		ἐπὶ Σάββατα τρία	1	for three Sabbaths	“on each Sabbath day for three weeks”
2090	ACT	17	2	wp3k	figs-explicit	διελέξατο αὐτοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν Γραφῶν	1	reasoned with them from the scriptures	Paul explained what the scriptures means in order to prove to the Jews that Jesus is the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2091	ACT	17	2	qf4t		διελέξατο αὐτοῖς	1	reasoned with them	“debated with them” or “discussed with them”
2092	ACT	17	3	e85n			0	General Information:	Here the word “He” refers to Paul (Acts 17:2).
2093	ACT	17	3	ir9q	figs-metaphor	διανοίγων	1	He is fully opening	Possible meanings are (1) to explain the scriptures in a way that people can understand is spoken of as if Paul were opening something so people can see what is inside of it, or (2) Paul was literally opening a book or scroll and reading from it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2094	ACT	17	3	he78		ἔδει	1	it was necessary for	“it was part of God’s plan for”
2095	ACT	17	3	ipb2		ἀναστῆναι	1	to rise	“to come back to life”
2096	ACT	17	3	b9qi		ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
2097	ACT	17	4	es2u	figs-activepassive	τινες ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐπείσθησαν	1	some from them were persuaded	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews believed” or “some of the Jews understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2098	ACT	17	4	nyp2		προσεκληρώθησαν τῷ Παύλῳ	1	joined Paul	“became associated with Paul”
2099	ACT	17	4	t21z		σεβομένων Ἑλλήνων	1	of worshiping Greeks	This refers to Greeks who worship God but have not converted to Judaism through circumcision.
2100	ACT	17	4	ye8v	figs-litotes	γυναικῶν…τῶν πρώτων οὐκ ὀλίγαι	1	not a few of the leading women	This is an understatement to emphasize that many leading women joined them. Alternate translation: “many leading women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2101	ACT	17	5	nuh6			0	General Information:	Here the word “they” refers to the unbelieving Jews and wicked men from the marketplace.
2102	ACT	17	5	uj43	figs-metaphor	ζηλώσαντες	1	having become jealous	The feeling of jealousy is spoken of as if jealousy were actually moving the person. Alternate translation: “feeling very jealous” or “feeling very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2103	ACT	17	5	vev6	figs-explicit	ζηλώσαντες	1	having become jealous	It can be stated explicitly that these Jews were jealous because some of the Jews and Greeks believed Paul’s message. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2104	ACT	17	5	btw6		προσλαβόμενοι τῶν ἀγοραίων ἄνδρας τινὰς πονηροὺς	1	having taken certain wicked men of the marketplace	Here having taken does not mean the Jews took these people by force. It means the Jews persuaded these wicked men to help them.
2105	ACT	17	5	lc6g		ἄνδρας τινὰς πονηροὺς	1	certain wicked men	“some evil men.” The word men here refers specifically to males.
2106	ACT	17	5	ie1f		τῶν ἀγοραίων	1	of the marketplace	“from the public square.” This is a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place.
2107	ACT	17	5	t3bc	figs-metonymy	ἐθορύβουν τὴν πόλιν	1	they set the city in an uproar	Here the city stands for the people in the city. Alternate translation: “they caused the people of the city to be in an uproar” or “they caused the people of the city to riot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2108	ACT	17	5	s3uv		ἐπιστάντες τῇ οἰκίᾳ	1	having assaulted the house	“having violently attacking the house.” This probably means the people were throwing rocks at the house and trying to break down the door of the house.
2109	ACT	17	5	ks2l	translate-names	Ἰάσονος	1	of Jason	Jason is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2110	ACT	17	5	abcu		αὐτοὺς προαγαγεῖν	1	to lead them	“to bring Paul and Silas”
2111	ACT	17	5	pp7k		εἰς τὸν δῆμον	1	to the people	Possible meanings for the people are (1) a governmental or legal group of citizens gathered to make a decision or (2) an unruly mob.
2112	ACT	17	6	i79p		τινας ἀδελφοὺς	1	certain brothers	Here brothers refers to believers. Alternate translation: “some other believers”
2113	ACT	17	6	e44z		ἐπὶ τοὺς πολιτάρχας	1	before the city officials	“in the presence of the city officials”
2114	ACT	17	6	g7xj		οἱ…οὗτοι	1	Those who … they	The Jewish leaders were referring to Paul and Silas.
2115	ACT	17	6	c2av	figs-hyperbole	τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες	1	have turned the inhabited world upside down	This phrase is another way of saying Paul and Silas where causing trouble everywhere they went. The Jewish leaders were exaggerating the influence Paul and Silas were having with their teaching. Alternate translation: “have caused trouble everywhere in the world” or “have caused trouble everywhere they have gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2116	ACT	17	7	hlc9		ὑποδέδεκται Ἰάσων; καὶ οὗτοι πάντες	1	Jason and all these men have welcomed	This phrase signals that Jason and his companions were in agreement with the apostles’ troubling message.
2117	ACT	17	8	th2f		ἐτάραξαν	1	were disturbed	“were worried”
2118	ACT	17	9	ya44		λαβόντες τὸ ἱκανὸν παρὰ τοῦ Ἰάσονος καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν	1	after they had received a bond from Jason and the rest of them	Jason and the others had to pay the money to the city officials as a promise of good behavior; that money might be returned if all went well or it might be used to repair the damages brought on by bad behavior.
2119	ACT	17	9	bj48		τῶν λοιπῶν	1	the rest of them	The words the rest of them refers to other believers that the Jews brought before the officials.
2120	ACT	17	9	aru6		ἀπέλυσαν αὐτούς	1	they released them	“the officials let Jason and the other believers go”
2121	ACT	17	10	na8h			0	General Information:	Paul and Silas travel on to the town of Berea.
2122	ACT	17	10	qy5c	figs-gendernotations	οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ	1	the brothers	The word brothers here refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2123	ACT	17	11	k2st	writing-background	δὲ	1	Now	The word Now is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells background information about the people in Berea and how they were willing to listen to Paul and examine what he said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2124	ACT	17	11	gu6s		οὗτοι…ἦσαν εὐγενέστεροι	1	these were more open-minded than	These open-minded people were willing to think more objectively about new ideas than other people. Alternate translation: “the Bereans were more willing to listen”
2125	ACT	17	11	hle3	figs-metonymy	ἐδέξαντο τὸν λόγον	1	received the word	Here word refers to a teaching. Alternate translation: “listened to the teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2126	ACT	17	11	uh8a		μετὰ πάσης προθυμίας	1	with all readiness	These Bereans were prepared to examine earnestly Paul’s teachings about the scripture.
2127	ACT	17	11	lzm3		καθ’ ἡμέραν ἀνακρίνοντες τὰς Γραφὰς	1	examining the scriptures each day	“carefully reading and evaluating the scriptures every day”
2128	ACT	17	11	g8an		ἔχοι ταῦτα οὕτως	1	these things were so	“the things Paul said were true”
2129	ACT	17	12	abcv	figs-litotes	ἀνδρῶν οὐκ ὀλίγοι	1	not a few men	This is an understatement to emphasize that many men believed the message. Alternate translation: “many men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2130	ACT	17	13	vn8h	translate-names		0	General Information:	Athens is down the coast from Barea which is in Macedonia. Athens was one of the most important cities in Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2131	ACT	17	13	asb4	figs-metaphor	ἦλθον κἀκεῖ, σαλεύοντες	1	they came and there stirred up	This speaks about their agitating people as though it were a person stirring a liquid and causing the things at the bottom of the liquid to rise to the surface. Alternate translation: “they came there and agitated” or “they went there and disturbed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2132	ACT	17	13	wjq3		ταράσσοντες τοὺς ὄχλους	1	troubled the crowds	“worried the crowds” or “caused the people to become upset”
2133	ACT	17	14	ael8	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοὶ	1	brothers	The word brothers here refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2134	ACT	17	14	zw1c		πορεύεσθαι ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν	1	to go as far as to the sea	“to go all the way to the coast.” From here Paul would probably sail to another city.
2135	ACT	17	15	tjh5		καθιστάνοντες τὸν Παῦλον	1	were leading Paul down	“who were accompanying Paul” or “who were going down with Paul”
2136	ACT	17	15	gs1p	figs-quotations	λαβόντες ἐντολὴν πρὸς τὸν Σιλᾶν καὶ τὸν Τιμόθεον	1	after receiving a command to Silas and Timothy	“after telling them to command Silas and Timothy so.” This can also be stated as a direct quotation as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2137	ACT	17	16	wk63			0	General Information:	This is another part of the story of Paul and Silas’ travels. Paul is now in Athens where he is waiting for Silas and Timothy to join him.
2138	ACT	17	16	y9cr		δὲ	1	Now	This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story.
2139	ACT	17	16	we78	figs-synecdoche	παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ, θεωροῦντος κατείδωλον οὖσαν τὴν πόλιν	1	his spirit was being provoked within him, seeing the city being full of idols	Here his spirit stands for Paul himself. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “he became upset because he saw that there were idols everywhere in the city” or “seeing the idols everywhere in the city upset him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2140	ACT	17	17	q8px		διελέγετο	1	he reasoned	“he debated” or “he discussed.” This means that there is interaction from the listeners rather than only his preaching. They are talking with him as well.
2141	ACT	17	17	jkj8		τοῖς σεβομένοις	1	those who were worshiping	This refers to Gentiles (non-Jews) who give praise to God and follow him but do not obey all of the Jewish laws.
2142	ACT	17	17	ec14		ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ	1	in the marketplace	“in the public square.” This is a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place.
2143	ACT	17	18	ru6a			0	General Information:	Here the words “him,” “He, “and “he” refer to Paul.
2144	ACT	17	18	l7le	translate-names	τῶν Ἐπικουρίων καὶ Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων	1	of the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers	These people believed all things were formed by chance and that the gods were too busy being happy to be bothered with governing the universe. They rejected the resurrection and wanted only simple pleasures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2145	ACT	17	18	f976	translate-names	Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων	1	Stoic philosophers	These people believed freedom comes from resigning oneself to fate. They rejected a personal loving God and the resurrection. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2146	ACT	17	18	dnj8		τινες ἔλεγον	1	some said	“some of the Stoic philosophers said”
2147	ACT	17	18	g4bv	figs-metaphor	τί ἂν θέλοι ὁ σπερμολόγος οὗτος λέγειν?	1	What is this babbler wanting to say?	The word “babbler” was used to refer to birds picking up seeds as food. It refers negatively to a person who only knows a little bit of information. The philosophers said Paul had bits of information which were not worth listening to. Alternate translation: “What is this uneducated person trying to say?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2148	ACT	17	18	k2ps		οἱ δέ, ξένων	1	But others said	“But other philosophers said”
2149	ACT	17	18	l41t		δοκεῖ καταγγελεὺς εἶναι	1	He seems to be a proclaimer	“He seems to be teaching a philosophy”
2150	ACT	17	18	sx9t		ξένων δαιμονίων	1	of foreign gods	That is, gods that Greeks and Romans do not worship or know about.
2151	ACT	17	19	fs5g	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	The words “him,” “He” and “you” refer to Paul (Acts 17:18). Here the words “They” and “we” refer to the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2152	ACT	17	19	mv8c		ἐπιλαβόμενοί τε αὐτοῦ, ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον ἤγαγον	1	And taking hold of him, they brought him to the Areopagus	This does not mean they arrested Paul. The philosophers invited Paul to speak formally to their leaders.
2153	ACT	17	19	b56g	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον	1	to the Areopagus	The Areopagus was the place where the leaders met. Alternate translation: “to the leaders that met on the Areopagus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2154	ACT	17	19	ze7e		τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον…λέγοντες	1	the Areopagus, saying	Here the leaders on the Areopagus are speaking. This can stated as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “the Areopagus. The leaders said to Paul”
2155	ACT	17	19	unc8	translate-names	Ἄρειον Πάγον	1	Areopagus	This is a prominent rock outcropping or hill in Athens upon which the supreme court of Athens may have met. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2156	ACT	17	20	lay8	figs-metaphor	ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν	1	For you are bringing some strange things to our ears	Paul’s teachings about Jesus and the resurrection are spoken of as an object that a person can bring to another person. Here ears refers to what they hear. Alternate translation: “For you are teaching some things that we have never heard before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2157	ACT	17	21	dn1t	figs-hyperbole	Ἀθηναῖοι δὲ πάντες καὶ οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες ξένοι	1	And all the Athenians and the foreigners living there	The word all is a generalization referring to many. Alternate translation: “And many of the Athenians and the strangers living there” or “And many of the Athenians and the strangers living there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2158	ACT	17	21	d8yb	translate-names	Ἀθηναῖοι	1	the Athenians	Athenians are people from Athens, a city near the coast below Macedonia (present day Greece). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2159	ACT	17	21	sk5b	figs-metaphor	εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν, ἢ λέγειν τι ἢ ἀκούειν	1	spent their time in nothing other than either to tell something or to listen to	Here time is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could spend. Alternate translation: “used their time doing nothing but either telling or listening to” or “were always doing nothing but telling or listening to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2160	ACT	17	21	ij4e	figs-hyperbole	εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν	1	spent their time in nothing other than	The phrase spent their time in nothing is an exaggeration. Alternate translation: “did not do much but” or “spent much of their time only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2161	ACT	17	21	wr1r		λέγειν τι ἢ ἀκούειν τι καινότερον	1	to tell something or to listen to something new	“discussing new philosophical ideas” or “talking about what was new to them”
2162	ACT	17	22	zq3y			0	General Information:	Paul begins his speech to the philosophers on the Areopagus.
2163	ACT	17	22	ja1k		κατὰ πάντα…δεισιδαιμονεστέρους	1	very religious in every way	Paul is referring to the Athenians’ public display of honoring the gods through prayers, building altars, and offering sacrifices.
2164	ACT	17	23	gn1j		διερχόμενος γὰρ	1	For passing through	“Because as I was walked through” or “As I was walking along”
2165	ACT	17	23	cem7		ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ	1	To an Unknown God	Possible meanings are (1) “to a certain unknown god” or (2) “to a god not known.” This was a specific writing or inscription on that altar.
2166	ACT	17	24	m1jm		τὸν κόσμον	1	the world	In the most general sense, the world refers to the heavens and the earth and everything in them.
2167	ACT	17	24	rqk9		οὗτος…ὑπάρχων Κύριος	1	he who is Lord	“because the one who is Lord.” Here he is referring to the unknown god mentioned in Acts 17:23 that Paul is explaining is the Lord God.
2168	ACT	17	24	f2mz	figs-merism	οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς	1	of heaven and earth	The words heaven and earth are used together to mean all beings and things in heaven and earth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
2169	ACT	17	24	ju4h	figs-synecdoche	χειροποιήτοις	1	built with hands	Here hands stands for people. Alternate translation: “built by the hands of people” or “that people built” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2170	ACT	17	25	e3dg	figs-activepassive	οὐδὲ ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων θεραπεύεται	1	Neither is he served by hands of men	Here served has the sense of a doctor treating a patient to make the patient well again. Alternate translation: “Neither do men take care of him with their hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2171	ACT	17	25	yq68	figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων	1	by hands of men	Here hands stands for the whole person. Alternate translation: “by humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2172	ACT	17	25	sj89	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς διδοὺς	1	himself giving	“because he himself gives.” The word himself is added for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2173	ACT	17	26	r3lt	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the words “he” and “him” refer to the one true God, the creator. The words “their” and “them” refer to every nation of people living on the surface of the earth. In using the word “us,” Paul includes himself, his audience, and every nation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2174	ACT	17	26	p1e4		ἑνὸς	1	one man	This means Adam, the first person God created.
2175	ACT	17	26	js4p		ὁρίσας προστεταγμένους καιροὺς καὶ τὰς ὁροθεσίας τῆς κατοικίας αὐτῶν	1	having determined their appointed seasons and the boundaries of their habitation	This can be stated as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “And he determined when and where they would live”
2176	ACT	17	27	jae5	figs-metaphor	ζητεῖν τὸν Θεὸν, εἰ ἄρα γε ψηλαφήσειαν αὐτὸν καὶ εὕροιεν	1	to seek God and perhaps they might feel around for him and find him	Here to seek God represents desiring to know him, and feel around for him and find him represents praying and having a relationship with him. Alternate translation: “so that they should want to know God and perhaps pray to him and become one of his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2177	ACT	17	27	p8hk	figs-litotes	καί γε οὐ μακρὰν ἀπὸ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου ἡμῶν ὑπάρχοντα	1	Yet he is not far from each one of us	This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “Yet he is very near to everyone of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2178	ACT	17	28	tkd3	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the words “him” and “his” refer to God (Acts 17:24). When Paul says “we” here, he includes himself as well as his hearers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2179	ACT	17	28	cbd9		ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ	1	For in him	“Because of him”
2180	ACT	17	29	k9ws	figs-metaphor	γένος…ὑπάρχοντες τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	are God’s offspring	Because God created everyone, all people are spoken of as if they were God’s literal children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2181	ACT	17	29	czi9	figs-metonymy	τὸ θεῖον	1	the divine being	Here divine being refers to God’s nature or attributes. Alternate translation: “the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2182	ACT	17	29	q4q2	figs-activepassive	χαράγματι τέχνης καὶ ἐνθυμήσεως ἀνθρώπου	1	images of the skill and imagination of man	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “which a man then uses his skill to make it into something that he has designed” or “images that people make by using their art and imagination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2183	ACT	17	30	y2u8			0	General Information:	Here the word “he” refers to God.
2184	ACT	17	30	zj28			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul finishes his speech to the philosophers in the Areopagus, which he began in Acts 17:22.
2185	ACT	17	30	suh6		οὖν	1	Therefore	“Because what I have just said is true”
2186	ACT	17	30	iva4		τοὺς…χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας ὑπεριδὼν ὁ Θεὸς	1	God, having overlooked the times of ignorance	“God, having decided not to punish people during the times of ignorance”
2187	ACT	17	30	h8uy		χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας	1	times of ignorance	This refers to the time before God fully revealed himself through Jesus Christ and before people truly knew how to obey God.
2188	ACT	17	30	qim5	figs-gendernotations	τοῖς ἀνθρώποις πάντας	1	all men	This means all people whether male or female. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2189	ACT	17	31	htp7		ἐν ᾗ μέλλει κρίνειν τὴν οἰκουμένην ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ, ἐν ἀνδρὶ ᾧ ὥρισεν	1	in which he is about to judge the world in righteousness by the man whom he has appointed	“when the man he has chosen will judge the world in righteousness”
2190	ACT	17	31	jt3a	figs-metonymy	μέλλει κρίνειν τὴν οἰκουμένην	1	he is about to judge the world	Here world refers to the people. Alternate translation: “he will judge all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2191	ACT	17	31	i9aw		ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ	1	in righteousness	“justly” or “fairly”
2192	ACT	17	31	l61p		πίστιν παρασχὼν	1	He has provided signs	“God has demonstrated his choice of this man”
2193	ACT	17	31	ulr4		ἐκ νεκρῶν	1	from the dead	From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
2194	ACT	17	32	tc8t	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “We” refers to the men of Athens but not to Paul, so this is exclusive. Though some of them probably did want to hear Paul again, they may only have been being polite. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2195	ACT	17	32	c4sm	writing-endofstory		0		This is the end of the part of the story about Paul in Athens. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2196	ACT	17	32	nb26		δὲ	1	Now	This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke shifts from Paul’s teachings to the reaction of the people of Athens.
2197	ACT	17	32	jlm5		ἀκούσαντες	1	when they heard of	These are the people who were present at the Areopagus listening to Paul.
2198	ACT	17	32	sn6j		οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον	1	some mocked him	“some ridiculed Paul” or “some laughed at Paul.” These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life.
2199	ACT	17	34	psh8	translate-names	Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης	1	Dionysius the Areopagite	Dionysius is a man’s name. Areopagite implies that Dionysius was one of the judges at the council of Areopagus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2200	ACT	17	34	hsz3	translate-names	Δάμαρις	1	Damaris	This is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2201	ACT	18	intro	rky6			0		Acts 18 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter The baptism of John Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but this baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
2202	ACT	18	1	jat1	writing-background		0	General Information:	Aquila and Priscilla are introduced to the story and verses 2 and 3 give background information about them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2203	ACT	18	1	qa9b			0	Connecting Statement:	This is another part of the story of Paul’s travels as he goes to Corinth.
2204	ACT	18	1	fky7		μετὰ ταῦτα	1	After these things	“After these events took place in Athens”
2205	ACT	18	1	abcw		χωρισθεὶς	1	having departed	“when Paul had departed”
2206	ACT	18	1	h2si		τῶν Ἀθηνῶν	1	Athens	Athens was one of the most important cities in Greece. See how you translated this in Acts 17:15.
2207	ACT	18	2	d9zx		καὶ εὑρών	1	And when he found	Possible meanings are that (1) Paul happened to find by chance or (2) Paul intentionally found.
2208	ACT	18	2	hm16	writing-participants	τινα Ἰουδαῖον ὀνόματι Ἀκύλαν	1	a certain Jew named Aquila	Here the phrase a certain indicates this is introducing new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2209	ACT	18	2	y97p	translate-names	Ποντικὸν τῷ γένει	1	a native of Pontus	Pontus was a province on the southern coast of the Black Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2210	ACT	18	2	q4va		προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα	1	who had recently come	This probably happened sometime in the past year.
2211	ACT	18	2	n631	translate-names	τῆς Ἰταλίας	1	Italy	This is the name of land. Rome is the capital city of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2212	ACT	18	2	n95f		τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον	1	Claudius had ordered	Claudius was the current Roman emperor. See how you translated this in Acts 11:28.
2213	ACT	18	3	q259		τὸ ὁμότεχνον εἶναι	1	he was of the same trade	“he did the same kind of work that they did”
2214	ACT	18	4	r56h			0	General Information:	Silas and Timothy rejoin Paul.
2215	ACT	18	4	h3az		διελέγετο δὲ	1	And he reasoned	“And Paul debated” or “And Paul discussed.” He gave reasons. This means that rather than just preaching, Paul talked and interacted with the people.
2216	ACT	18	4	r2gp		ἔπειθέν τε Ἰουδαίους καὶ Ἕλληνας	1	persuading both Jews and Greeks	Possible meanings are (1) “he caused both Jews and Greeks to believe” or (2) “he kept trying to persuade the Jews and the Greeks.”
2217	ACT	18	6	ncx8	translate-symaction	ἐκτιναξάμενος τὰ ἱμάτια	1	shaking out his garment	This is a symbolic action to indicate that Paul will no longer try to teach the Jews there about Jesus. He is leaving them to God’s judgment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2218	ACT	18	6	z12a	figs-metonymy	τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν	1	Your blood be upon your head	Here blood stands for the guilt of their actions. Here head refers to the whole person. Paul tells the Jews they are solely responsible for the judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone bear the responsibility for your punishment for sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2219	ACT	18	7	cd3u			0	General Information:	Here the word “he” refers to Paul. The first word “his” refers to Titius Justus. The second word “his” refers to Crispus.
2220	ACT	18	7	vs6y	translate-names	Τιτίου Ἰούστου	1	Titius Justus	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2221	ACT	18	7	v8xg		σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν	1	who worships God	A worshiper of God is a Gentile who gives praise to God and follows him but does not necessarily obey all of the Jewish laws.
2222	ACT	18	8	lj2t	translate-names	Κρίσπος	1	Crispus	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2223	ACT	18	8	kkk9		ἀρχισυνάγωγος	1	leader of the synagogue	a layperson who sponsored and administered the synagogue, not necessarily the teacher
2224	ACT	18	8	uaq5	figs-metonymy	ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ	1	all those in his house	Here house refers to the people who lived together. Alternate translation: “the people who lived with him in his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2225	ACT	18	8	t3np	figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίζοντο	1	were being baptized	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “were receiving baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2226	ACT	18	9	ws7p	figs-parallelism	μὴ φοβοῦ, ἀλλὰ λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς	1	Do not be afraid, but continue speaking and do not be silent	The Lord is giving one command in two different ways to emphasize that Paul should certainly continue preaching. Alternate translation: “You must not be afraid and, instead, continue to speak and not become silent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
2227	ACT	18	9	zg8a	figs-doublet	λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς	1	continue speaking and do not be silent	The Lord gives the same command in two different ways to strongly command Paul to speak. Alternate translation: “you must certainly continue to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2228	ACT	18	9	a529	figs-explicit	μὴ σιωπήσῃς	1	do not be silent	It can be stated explicitly what the Lord wants Paul to speak. Alternate translation: “do not stop speaking about the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2229	ACT	18	10	a8lq		λαός ἐστί μοι πολὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ	1	I have many people in this city	“there are many people in this city who have put their faith in me” or “many people in this city will put their faith in me”
2230	ACT	18	11	mqx2	writing-endofstory	ἐκάθισεν δὲ ἐνιαυτὸν καὶ μῆνας ἓξ, διδάσκων ἐν αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	And so he stayed there for a year and six months, teaching the word of God among them	This is a concluding statement for this part of the story. Here word of God is a synecdoche for the entire scriptures. Alternate translation: “And so Paul lived there for a year and six months, teaching the scriptures among them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2231	ACT	18	12	f41k	translate-names		0	General Information:	Achaia was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. Corinth was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2232	ACT	18	12	b5bf			0	Connecting Statement:	The unbelieving Jews bring Paul to the judgment seat before Gallio.
2233	ACT	18	12	se8m	translate-names	Γαλλίωνος	1	Gallio	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2234	ACT	18	12	j762	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	This stands for the Jewish leaders that did not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2235	ACT	18	12	lp79		κατεπέστησαν ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	rose up together against	“came together against” or “joined together to attack”
2236	ACT	18	12	u36c	figs-metonymy	ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὸ βῆμα	1	brought him before the judgment seat	The Jews took Paul by force to bring Paul before the court. Here judgment seat refers to the place where Gallio sat when he made legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “took him so that the governor could judge him at the judgment seat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2237	ACT	18	14	d13b		ὁ Γαλλίων	1	Gallio	Gallio was the Roman governor of the Province.
2238	ACT	18	15	y6mt		νόμου τοῦ καθ’ ὑμᾶς	1	your law	Here law refers to the law of Moses and as well as the Jewish customs of Paul’s time.
2239	ACT	18	15	khr5		κριτὴς ἐγὼ τούτων οὐ βούλομαι εἶναι	1	I do not want to be a judge of these matters	“I refuse to make a judgment about these matters”
2240	ACT	18	16	yf81			0	General Information:	Here the word “they” probably refers to the Gentiles at the court. They reacted against the Jews who had brought Paul before the judgment seat (Acts 18:12).
2241	ACT	18	16	d6nh	figs-metonymy	ἀπήλασεν αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ βήματος	1	he sent them away from the judgment seat	“Gallio dismissed them from the judgment seat.” Here judgment seat refers to the place where Gallio sits to make legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “Gallio made them leave his presence in the court” or “Gallio made them leave the court” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2242	ACT	18	17	cyk6	figs-hyperbole	ἐπιλαβόμενοι…πάντες	1	they all, having seized	This may be an exaggeration to emphasize the strong feelings the people had. Alternate translation: “many people seized” or “many of them grabbed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2243	ACT	18	17	mj77		ἐπιλαβόμενοι δὲ πάντες Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον, ἔτυπτον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος	1	But they all, having seized Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue, were beating him in front of the judgment seat	Possible meanings are (1) the Gentiles beat Sosthenes in the court in front of the judgment seat because he was the Jewish leader or (2) it is possible that Sosthenes was a believer in Christ, so the Jews beat him in front of the court.
2244	ACT	18	17	x9w5	translate-names	Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον	1	Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue	Sosthenes was the Jewish ruler of the synagogue at Corinth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2245	ACT	18	17	z9fv		ἔτυπτον	1	were beating him	“repeatedly hit him” or “repeatedly punched him.”
2246	ACT	18	18	x25w	translate-names		0	General Information:	Here the word “he” refers to Paul. Cenchreae was a seaport that was part of the greater Corinth city area. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2247	ACT	18	18	ura9			0	Connecting Statement:	This continues Paul’s missionary journey as Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila leave Corinth. This seems to indicate that Silas and Timothy remain since it says “he” here and not “we.” The word “they” refers to Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila.
2248	ACT	18	18	et8c	figs-gendernotations	τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ἀποταξάμενος	1	left the brothers	The word brothers refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “left the fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2249	ACT	18	18	v5kl		ἐξέπλει εἰς τὴν Συρίαν, καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ Πρίσκιλλα καὶ Ἀκύλας	1	and sailed to Syria, and Priscilla and Aquila were with him	Paul got on a ship that sailed for Syria. Priscilla and Aquila went with him.
2250	ACT	18	18	kq6f	translate-symaction	κειράμενος…τὴν κεφαλήν, εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν	1	He had cut the hair of his head … because he had a vow	This is a symbolic action that indicates the completion of a vow. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “he had someone cut off the hair on his head … because he had completed a vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2251	ACT	18	19	abcx		κἀκείνους κατέλιπεν	1	he left them	“Paul left Priscilla and Aquilla”
2252	ACT	18	19	st93		διελέξατο	1	reasoned with	“discussed with” or “debated with”
2253	ACT	18	20	u44s			0	General Information:	Here the words “they” and “them” refer to the Jews in Ephesus.
2254	ACT	18	21	iz1u		ἀποταξάμενος	1	having left them	“when he had departed from them”
2255	ACT	18	22	pr6u			0	General Information:	Phrygia is a province in Asia which is now modern day Turkey. See how you translated this in Acts 2:10.
2256	ACT	18	22	p364			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues his missionary journey.
2257	ACT	18	22	gyy4		κατελθὼν εἰς Καισάρειαν	1	having landed at Caesarea	“when he had arrived at Caesarea.” The word landed is used to show that he arrived by ship.
2258	ACT	18	22	r26z		ἀναβὰς	1	having gone up	He traveled to the city of Jerusalem. The phrase gone up is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Caesarea.
2259	ACT	18	22	q9j6	figs-metonymy	ἀσπασάμενος τὴν ἐκκλησίαν	1	greeted the church	Here church refers to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “greeted the members of the church of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2260	ACT	18	22	n3rh		κατέβη	1	he went down	The phrase went down is used here because Antioch is lower in elevation than Jerusalem.
2261	ACT	18	23	pww5		ἐξῆλθεν	1	he departed	“Paul went away” or “Paul left”
2262	ACT	18	23	h65j	figs-metaphor	καὶ ποιήσας χρόνον τινὰ	1	And having spent some time there	This speaks about time as if it were a commodity that a person could spend. Alternate translation: And after staying there for a while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2263	ACT	18	24	a7p9	writing-background		0	General Information:	Apollos is introduced to the story. Verses 24 and 25 give background information about him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2264	ACT	18	24	muc2			0	Connecting Statement:	Luke tells what happens in Ephesus with Priscilla and Aquila.
2265	ACT	18	24	xqy7		δέ	1	Now	This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line.
2266	ACT	18	24	n2b4	writing-participants	Ἰουδαῖος…τις Ἀπολλῶς ὀνόματι	1	a certain Jew named Apollos	The phrase a certain indicates that Luke is introducing a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2267	ACT	18	24	di14	translate-names	Ἀλεξανδρεὺς τῷ γένει	1	an Alexandrian by birth	“a man who was born in the city of Alexandria.” This was a city in Egypt on the north coast of Africa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2268	ACT	18	24	t4zi		ἀνὴρ λόγιος	1	an eloquent man	“a good speaker”
2269	ACT	18	24	bh25		δυνατὸς ὢν ἐν ταῖς Γραφαῖς	1	He was mighty in the scriptures	“he knew the scriptures thoroughly.” He understood the Old Testament writings well.
2270	ACT	18	25	z7a8	figs-activepassive	οὗτος ἦν κατηχημένος τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Κυρίου	1	He had been instructed in the way of the Lord	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Other believers had taught Apollos how the Lord Jesus wanted people to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2271	ACT	18	25	ift8	figs-synecdoche	καὶ ζέων τῷ πνεύματι	1	and being fervent in spirit	Here spirit refers to the entire person of Apollos. Alternate translation: “and being very enthusiastic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2272	ACT	18	25	lr1h		τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου	1	the baptism of John	“The baptism that John performed.” This is comparing John’s baptism which was with water to Jesus’ baptism which is with the Holy Spirit.
2273	ACT	18	26	ga6v	figs-metaphor	τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the way of God	How God wants people to live is spoken of as if it were a road that a person travels. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2274	ACT	18	26	k1lb		ἀκριβέστερον	1	more accurately	“more correctly” or “more fully”
2275	ACT	18	27	c2sq			0	General Information:	Here the he words “he” and “him” refer to Apollos (Acts 18:24).
2276	ACT	18	27	ll36		διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν	1	to pass over into Achaia	“to go to the region of Achaia.” The phrase pass over is used here because Apollos had to cross the Aegean Sea to get to Achaia from Ephesus.
2277	ACT	18	27	pql7		τὴν Ἀχαΐαν	1	Achaia	Achaia was a Roman Province in the southern section of Greece. See how you translated this in Acts 18:12.
2278	ACT	18	27	v2i6	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοὶ	1	brothers	The word brothers here refers to men and women believers. You can make explicit that these are believers in Ephesus. Alternate translation: “fellow believers in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2279	ACT	18	27	q5f2		ἔγραψαν τοῖς μαθηταῖς	1	and wrote to the disciples	“and wrote a letter to the Christians in Achaia”
2280	ACT	18	27	f99p		τοῖς πεπιστευκόσιν διὰ τῆς χάριτος	1	those who had believed by grace	“those who had believed in salvation by grace” or “those who by God’s grace believed in Jesus”
2281	ACT	18	28	l2zt		εὐτόνως…τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις διακατηλέγχετο δημοσίᾳ	1	he was powerfully refuting the Jews publicly	“in public debate Apollos powerfully proved that the Jews were wrong”
2282	ACT	19	intro	g38y			0		Acts 19 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Baptism John baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins. Jesus’ followers baptized people who wanted to follow Jesus. Temple of Diana The temple of Diana was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Diana while they were there. The people who sold statues of Diana were afraid that if people did not believe Diana was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues.
2283	ACT	19	1	rhv1			0	General Information:	The “upper country” was an area of Asia which today is part of modern-day Turkey to the north of Ephesus. Paul must have traveled by land around the top of the Aegean sea in order to come to Ephesus (also in Turkey today) which is directly east of Corinth by sea.
2284	ACT	19	1	wu6p			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul travels to Ephesus.
2285	ACT	19	1	lp23		ἐγένετο δὲ	1	And it happened that	This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
2286	ACT	19	1	ati9		διελθόντα	1	passed through	“traveled through”
2287	ACT	19	2	wqi4		εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἐλάβετε	1	Did you receive the Holy Spirit	This means to have the Holy Spirit come upon them.
2288	ACT	19	2	nvn4		οὐδ’ εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἔστιν ἠκούσαμεν	1	we did not even heard if there is a Holy Spirit	“we have never heard about the Holy Spirit”
2289	ACT	19	3	hml1			0	General Information:	Here the words “They,” “you,” and “they” refer to certain disciples in the city of Ephesus (Acts 19:1). The word “him” refers to John.
2290	ACT	19	3	mrm6	figs-activepassive	εἰς τί οὖν ἐβαπτίσθητε	1	Into what then were you baptized?	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “What kind of baptism did you receive?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2291	ACT	19	3	jzp7	figs-ellipsis	εἰς τὸ Ἰωάννου βάπτισμα	1	Into the baptism of John	You can translate this as a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “We received the kind of baptism about which John taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2292	ACT	19	4	r46y	figs-abstractnouns	βάπτισμα μετανοίας	1	a baptism of repentance	You can translate the abstract noun repentance as the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “the baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2293	ACT	19	4	pv7t		τὸν ἐρχόμενον	1	the one who is coming	Here the one refers to Jesus.
2294	ACT	19	4	q5fh		τὸν ἐρχόμενον μετ’ αὐτὸν	1	the one who is coming after him	This means to come after John the Baptist in time and not following after him physically.
2295	ACT	19	5	zx2b			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues staying in Ephesus.
2296	ACT	19	5	k9st		ἐβαπτίσθησαν	1	they were baptized	Here they refers to the disciples in Ephesus who were talking with Paul (Acts 19:1),
2297	ACT	19	5	ueh1	figs-activepassive	ἐβαπτίσθησαν	1	they were baptized	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “they received baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2298	ACT	19	5	g2dm	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	in the name of the Lord Jesus	Here name refers to Jesus’ power and authority. Alternate translation: “as believers in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2299	ACT	19	6	gk8l		ἐπιθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ Παύλου χεῖρας	1	when Paul had laid his hands on them	He probably placed his hands on their shoulders or heads. Alternate translation: “when Paul had placed his hands on their heads as he prayed”
2300	ACT	19	6	j4n8		ἐλάλουν τε γλώσσαις καὶ ἐπροφήτευον	1	and they began to speak in tongues and prophesy	Unlike in Acts 2:3-4, there are no details of who understood their messages.
2301	ACT	19	7	e7kj	writing-background	ἦσαν δὲ οἱ πάντες ἄνδρες ὡσεὶ δώδεκα	1	And they were about 12 men in all	This tells how many men were baptized. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2302	ACT	19	7	u71i	translate-numbers	ἄνδρες…δώδεκα	1	12 men	“12 men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2303	ACT	19	8	qv8z		εἰσελθὼν…εἰς τὴν συναγωγὴν, ἐπαρρησιάζετο ἐπὶ μῆνας τρεῖς	1	having gone into the synagogue, he was speaking boldly for three months	“Paul regularly attended the synagogue meetings for three months and spoke there boldly”
2304	ACT	19	8	yky2		διαλεγόμενος καὶ πείθων	1	reasoning and persuading them	“convincing people with convincing arguments and with clear teaching”
2305	ACT	19	8	v8et	figs-metonymy	περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	about the kingdom of God	Here kingdom stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “about God’s rule as king” or “about how God would show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2306	ACT	19	9	mq1g	figs-metaphor	τινες ἐσκληρύνοντο καὶ ἠπείθουν	1	some were hardened and being disobedient	To stubbornly refuse to believe is spoken of as though the people were becoming hardened and unable to move. Alternate translation: “some Jews were stubborn and did not believe” or “some Jews stubbornly refused to accept and obey the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2307	ACT	19	9	n6ir	figs-metaphor	κακολογοῦντες τὴν ὁδὸν ἐνώπιον τοῦ πλήθους	1	speaking evil of the Way before the crowd	What Christ wants people to believe is spoken of as though it were a road that a person travels. The phrase the Way seems to have been a title for Christianity at the time. Alternate translation: “speaking evil about Christianity to the crowd” or “speaking to the crowd evil things about those who follow Christ and who obey his teaching about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and Acts 9:2)
2308	ACT	19	9	ts8d		κακολογοῦντες	1	speaking evil	“speaking bad things about”
2309	ACT	19	9	xsm6		ἐν τῇ σχολῇ Τυράννου	1	in the lecture hall of Tyrannus	“in the large room where Tyrannus had taught people”
2310	ACT	19	9	den4	translate-names	Τυράννου	1	of Tyrannus	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2311	ACT	19	10	cw5g	figs-hyperbole	πάντας τοὺς κατοικοῦντας τὴν Ἀσίαν ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	all those who lived in Asia heard the word of the Lord	Here all is a generalization that means very many people throughout Asia heard the gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2312	ACT	19	10	kj12	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου	1	the word of the Lord	Here word stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2313	ACT	19	11	cb6w			0	General Information:	Here the words “them” and “they” refer to those who were sick.
2314	ACT	19	11	fa6h	figs-synecdoche	δυνάμεις τε οὐ τὰς τυχούσας, ὁ Θεὸς ἐποίει διὰ τῶν χειρῶν Παύλου	1	And God was doing not ordinary miracles by the hands of Paul	Here hands stands for Paul’s whole person. Alternate translation: “And God was causing Paul to do unusual miracles” or “And God was doing amazing miracles through Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2315	ACT	19	11	abcy		οὐ τὰς τυχούσας	1	not ordinary	“unusual”
2316	ACT	19	12	m3kl		καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας ἀποφέρεσθαι ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια, καὶ	1	even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body were taken to the sick and	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “when they took to sick people even handkerchiefs and aprons that had touched Paul”
2317	ACT	19	12	vc1v		καὶ…ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια	1	even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body	Possible meanings are (1) these were cloth items that Paul had touched or (2) these were cloth items that Paul had worn or used.
2318	ACT	19	12	aks4		σουδάρια	1	handkerchiefs	cloths worn around the head
2319	ACT	19	12	xs31		σιμικίνθια	1	aprons	clothing worn on the front of the body to protect the clothes of people
2320	ACT	19	12	kw9z	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας	1	the sick	This refers to sick people. Alternate translation: “sick people” or “those who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2321	ACT	19	12	nl3a		ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἀπ’ αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους	1	their illnesses departed from them	“those who were sick became healthy”
2322	ACT	19	13	he2x			0	General Information:	This is the beginning of another event that happened while Paul was in Ephesus. It is about Jewish exorcists.
2323	ACT	19	13	fgq4		ἐξορκιστῶν	1	exorcists	people who send evil spirits away from people or places
2324	ACT	19	13	s12u	figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	the name of the Lord Jesus	Here name refers to Jesus’ power and authority. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2325	ACT	19	13	d59p		τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὃν Παῦλος κηρύσσει	1	by the Jesus whom Paul proclaims	Jesus was a common name at the time, so these exorcists wanted people to know of whom they spoke.
2326	ACT	19	13	vqt1	figs-metonymy	τὸν Ἰησοῦν	1	by the Jesus	This stands for the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “by the authority of Jesus” or “by the power of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2327	ACT	19	14	cb8p	translate-names	Σκευᾶ	1	of Sceva	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2328	ACT	19	15	i4a2		τὸν Ἰησοῦν γινώσκω, καὶ τὸν Παῦλον ἐπίσταμαι	1	Jesus I know, and Paul I know	“I know Jesus and Paul” or “I know Jesus, and I know Paul”
2329	ACT	19	15	nsl1	figs-rquestion	ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ?	1	but who are you?	The spirit asked this question to emphasize that the exorcists had no authority over evil spirits. Alternate translation: “but I do not know you!” or “but you have no authority over me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2330	ACT	19	16	ty4x		ἐφαλόμενος ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ἐν ᾧ ἦν τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν	1	the man in whom was the evil spirit, after leaping on them	This means that the evil spirit caused the man whom it was controlling to leap on the exorcists.
2331	ACT	19	16	lu7u		αὐτοὺς	1	them	This refers to the exorcists who send evil spirits from people or places. See how you translated this in Acts 19:13.
2332	ACT	19	16	b8cb		γυμνοὺς…ἐκφυγεῖν	1	they fled … naked	The exorcists fled with their clothes ripped off them.
2333	ACT	19	17	j85h	figs-activepassive	ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	the name of the Lord Jesus was magnified	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “they magnified the name of the Lord Jesus” or “they considered the name of the Lord Jesus to be great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2334	ACT	19	17	j2hh	figs-metonymy	τὸ ὄνομα	1	the name	This stands for the power and authority of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2335	ACT	19	18	tj8t	writing-endofstory		0		This ends the story about the Jewish exorcists. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
2336	ACT	19	19	z9rj		συνενέγκαντες τὰς βίβλους	1	having brought their books together	“having collected their books.” The word books refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were written.
2337	ACT	19	19	m6nf		ἐνώπιον πάντων	1	before everyone	“in front of everyone”
2338	ACT	19	19	upz3		τὰς τιμὰς αὐτῶν	1	the value of them	“the value of the books” or “the value of the scrolls”
2339	ACT	19	19	u9pi	translate-numbers	μυριάδας πέντε	1	50000	“fifty thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2340	ACT	19	19	bcv2	translate-bmoney	ἀργυρίου	1	pieces of silver	Each of the pieces of silver was the approximate daily wage for a common laborer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
2341	ACT	19	20	es71	figs-synecdoche	οὕτως κατὰ κράτος τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν	1	So the word of the Lord was spreading and prevailing according to power	“So because of these powerful deeds, more and more people heard the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2342	ACT	19	21	k1j1			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul talks about going Jerusalem but does not leave Ephesus yet.
2343	ACT	19	21	de4f		δὲ	1	Now	This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story.
2344	ACT	19	21	q18b		ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα…ὁ Παῦλος	1	this was completed, Paul	“Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus, he”
2345	ACT	19	21	fgq5		ἔθετο…ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι	1	he determined in the Spirit	Possible meanings are (1) Paul decided with the help of the Holy Spirit or (2) Paul decided within his own spirit, which means he made up his mind.
2346	ACT	19	21	brb7		Ἀχαΐαν	1	Achaia	Achaia was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. It was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. See how you translated this in Acts 18:12.
2347	ACT	19	21	rdz4		δεῖ με καὶ Ῥώμην ἰδεῖν	1	it is necessary for me also to see Rome	“I must also travel to Rome”
2348	ACT	19	22	cy6f	translate-names	Ἔραστον	1	Erastus	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2349	ACT	19	22	k35j	figs-explicit	αὐτὸς ἐπέσχεν χρόνον εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν	1	he himself stayed in Asia for a time	It is made explicit in the next few verses that Paul remains in Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2350	ACT	19	22	uy9x	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς ἐπέσχεν	1	he himself stayed	Here himself is added for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2351	ACT	19	23	y5ae	writing-background		0	General Information:	Demetrius is introduced to the story. Verse 24 introduces background information about Demetrius. Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess Artemis, sometimes translated as “Diana.” She was a false goddess of fertility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2352	ACT	19	23	l7gz			0	Connecting Statement:	Luke tells about a riot that broke out while Paul was in Ephesus.
2353	ACT	19	23	kn49		ἐγένετο…τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος περὶ τῆς ὁδοῦ	1	there was no small disturbance concerning the Way	This is a summary opening statement.
2354	ACT	19	23	nb3p	figs-litotes	ἐγένετο…τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος	1	there was no small disturbance	“the people became very upset” See how you translated this in Acts 12:18 (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2355	ACT	19	23	rwf2		τῆς ὁδοῦ	1	the Way	This was a term used to refer to Christianity. See how you translated this title in Acts 9:1.
2356	ACT	19	24	cg16	writing-participants	Δημήτριος…τις ὀνόματι ἀργυροκόπος	1	a certain silversmith named Demetrius	The use of the words a certain introduces a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2357	ACT	19	24	nwt7		ἀργυροκόπος	1	a silversmith	a craftsman who works with silver metal to make statues and jewelry
2358	ACT	19	24	v8cb	translate-names	Δημήτριος…ὀνόματι	1	named Demetrius	This is the name of a man. Demetrius was a silversmith in Ephesus who was against Paul and the local church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2359	ACT	19	24	p58m	figs-litotes	παρείχετο…οὐκ ὀλίγην ἐργασίαν	1	brought in not a little business	This is a way of saying that he brought in much business. Alternate translation: “made a lot of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2360	ACT	19	25	kuz6		τοὺς περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάτας	1	the workmen of that occupation	An occupation is a profession or job. Alternate translation: “others who did that kind of work”
2361	ACT	19	26	w5z6			0	Connecting Statement:	Demetrius continues to speak to the craftsmen.
2362	ACT	19	26	rm6w		θεωρεῖτε καὶ ἀκούετε ὅτι	1	you see and hear that	“you have come to know and understand that”
2363	ACT	19	26	rx32	figs-metaphor	μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον	1	and turned away a considerable crowd	Paul’s stopping people from worshiping idols is spoken of as though Paul were literally turning the people in a different direction. Alternate translation: “and caused many people to stop worshiping the local gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2364	ACT	19	26	z7e7	figs-ellipsis	λέγων ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοὶ, οἱ διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι	1	He is saying that the things that are being made with hands are not gods	Here the word hands can refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “He is saying that the idols that people make are not real gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2365	ACT	19	27	r1w2	figs-activepassive	τοῦτο κινδυνεύει ἡμῖν, τὸ μέρος εἰς ἀπελεγμὸν ἐλθεῖν	1	is this trade in peril for us to come to disrepute	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “might the people no longer want to buy idols that we make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2366	ACT	19	27	j3bb	figs-activepassive	τὸ τῆς μεγάλης θεᾶς Ἀρτέμιδος ἱερὸν, εἰς οὐθὲν λογισθῆναι	1	the temple of the great goddess Artemis may be considered as nothing	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the people may think there is no benefit in going to the temple to worship the great goddess Artemis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2367	ACT	19	27	bqt4		μέλλειν τε καὶ καθαιρεῖσθαι τῆς μεγαλειότητος αὐτῆς	1	And indeed, her majesty is about to be destroyed	Artemis’s greatness only comes from what people think of her.
2368	ACT	19	27	hz7l	figs-hyperbole	ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται	1	whom all Asia and the world worships	This was an exaggeration to show how popular the goddess Artemis was. Here the words Asia and the world refer to the people in Asia and the known world. Alternate translation: “whom many people in Asia and in other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2369	ACT	19	28	t4lm			0	General Information:	Here “they” refers to the craftsmen who made the idols (Acts 19:24-25).
2370	ACT	19	28	uc5c	figs-metaphor	γενόμενοι πλήρεις θυμοῦ	1	having become filled with anger	This speaks of the craftsmen as though they were containers. Here anger is spoken of as if it were the contents that fill a container. Alternate translation: “they became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2371	ACT	19	28	lcx8		ἔκραζον	1	they cried out	“they shouted aloud” or “they shouted loudly”
2372	ACT	19	29	t7xs	figs-metonymy	ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως	1	the whole city was filled with confusion	Here city refers to the people. The city is spoken of as if it were a container. And, confusion is spoken of as if it were the contents that filled the container. Alternate translation: “people all over the city became upset and started shouting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2373	ACT	19	29	nt7y		ὥρμησάν τε ὁμοθυμαδὸν	1	and they rushed together	This was a mob or near riot situation.
2374	ACT	19	29	ej3q		εἰς τὸ θέατρον	1	into the theater	The Ephesus theater was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. It was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people.
2375	ACT	19	29	hjc8		συνεκδήμους Παύλου	1	Paul’s … travel companions	The men who had been with Paul.
2376	ACT	19	29	d6r9	translate-names	Γάϊον…Ἀρίσταρχον	1	Gaius … Aristarchus	These are names of men. Gaius and Aristarchus came from Macedonia but were working with Paul in Ephesus at this time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2377	ACT	19	30	ii1u			0	General Information:	Ephesus was part of the Roman empire and in the province of Asia.
2378	ACT	19	31	z7ww		τὸ θέατρον	1	the theater	The Ephesus theater was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. It was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. See how you translated theater in Acts 19:29.
2379	ACT	19	33	jr85	translate-names	Ἀλέξανδρον	1	Alexander	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2380	ACT	19	33	j1mi	figs-explicit	κατασείσας τὴν χεῖρα	1	motioned with his hand	You can make explicit that Alexander was showing the crowd that he wanted them to be quiet. Alternate translation: “gestured to the crowd to be quiet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2381	ACT	19	33	tlq7		ἀπολογεῖσθαι	1	to give a defense	It is not clear whom or what Alexander wanted to defend. If your language requires this information, it might be best to use a general phrase like “to explain what was going on.”
2382	ACT	19	34	u1hp	figs-metaphor	φωνὴ ἐγένετο μία ἐκ πάντων	1	there was one voice from all of them	The shouting together of the people at the same time is spoken of as though they were speaking with one voice. Alternate translation: “they were shouting in unison” or “they were shouting together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2383	ACT	19	35	fm3m	figs-you		0	General Information:	The words “You” and “you” refer to all the men present who were from Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
2384	ACT	19	35	pu96			0	Connecting Statement:	The clerk of Ephesus speaks to quiet the crowd.
2385	ACT	19	35	sy9m		ὁ γραμματεὺς	1	the town clerk	This refers to the town “writer” or “secretary.”
2386	ACT	19	35	sd3s	figs-rquestion	τίς γάρ ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος καὶ τοῦ διοπετοῦς?	1	what man indeed is there who does not know that the city of Ephesus is temple keeper of the great Artemis and of that which is fallen down from heaven?	The clerk asked this question to assure the crowd they were right and to comfort them. Alternate translation: “for every man knows that the Ephesians guard the temple of the great Artemis and of her image that fell down from heaven.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2387	ACT	19	35	k8dy	figs-litotes	ὃς οὐ γινώσκει	1	who does not know	The town clerk uses not to emphasize that all of the people knew this. Alternate translation: “everyone knows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2388	ACT	19	35	hiw3		νεωκόρον	1	temple keeper	The Ephesian people maintained and guarded the temple of Artemis.
2389	ACT	19	35	afd1		τοῦ διοπετοῦς	1	of that which is fallen down from heaven	Within the temple of Artemis was an image of the goddess. It had been fashioned from a meteorite which fell from the sky. People thought that his rock had come directly from Zeus, the ruler of the Greek gods (idols).
2390	ACT	19	36	r8cf		ἀναντιρρήτων οὖν ὄντων τούτων	1	So these things are undeniable	“So since you know these things are true”
2391	ACT	19	36	xj2n		μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν	1	to do nothing rash	“do not do anything before you have had time to think about it”
2392	ACT	19	36	s67q		προπετὲς	1	rash	without careful thought
2393	ACT	19	37	s8a9		τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους	1	these men	The words these men refer to Gaius and Aristarchus, Paul’s traveling companions (Acts 19:29).
2394	ACT	19	38	wgv5			0	Connecting Statement:	The town clerk finishes speaking to the crowd.
2395	ACT	19	38	qd4s		οὖν	1	Therefore	“Because what I have just said is true.” The town clerk had said in Acts 19:37 that Gaius and Aristarchus were not robbers or blasphemers.
2396	ACT	19	38	zkx5	figs-abstractnouns	ἔχουσιν πρός τινα λόγον	1	have a word against anyone	Here having a word against someone means they want to accuse them of something. Alternate translation: “want to accuse someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2397	ACT	19	38	szf7	translate-unknown	ἀνθύπατοί	1	proconsuls	the Roman governor’s representatives who made legal decisions in court (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2398	ACT	19	38	g8tp		ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις	1	Let them accuse one another	This does not mean Demetrius and those with him will accuse each other. It means this is a place where people in general can speak their accusation. Alternate translation: “There people can accuse one another”
2399	ACT	19	39	hxh3		εἰ δέ τι περὶ ἑτέρων ἐπιζητεῖτε	1	But if you seek anything about other matters	“But if you have other matters to discuss”
2400	ACT	19	39	wga5	figs-activepassive	ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται	1	it will be settled in the regular assembly	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “let us settle it in the regular assembly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2401	ACT	19	39	et5j		τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	the regular assembly	This refers to a public gathering of citizens over which the county clerk presided.
2402	ACT	19	40	sds7	figs-activepassive	κινδυνεύομεν ἐνκαλεῖσθαι στάσεως περὶ τῆς σήμερον	1	we are in danger of being accused of rioting concerning this day	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “we are in danger of the Roman authorities accusing us of starting this riot today” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2403	ACT	20	intro	u91c			0		Acts 20 General Notes Structure and formatting In this chapter Luke describes Paul’s last visits to believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Asia before he went to Jerusalem. Special concepts in this chapter Race Paul spoke of living for Jesus as if he were running in a race. By this he meant that he needed to keep working hard even when things were difficult and he wanted to quit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]]) “Compelled by the Spirit” Paul thought that the Holy Spirit wanted him to go to Jerusalem even if Paul did not want to go there. The same Holy Spirit told other people that when Paul arrived in Jerusalem, people would try to harm him.
2404	ACT	20	1	cwq7			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul leaves Ephesus and continues his travels.
2405	ACT	20	1	y5cq		μετὰ δὲ τὸ παύσασθαι τὸν θόρυβον	1	After the uproar had ended	“After the riot” or “Following the riot”
2406	ACT	20	1	hr32		ἀσπασάμενος	1	and said farewell	“and he said goodbye”
2407	ACT	20	2	edb8		παρακαλέσας αὐτοὺς λόγῳ πολλῷ	1	had exhorted them with many words	“had greatly encouraged the believers by saying many things” or “had said many things to challenge the believers”
2408	ACT	20	3	yxj3	figs-metaphor	ποιήσας τε μῆνας τρεῖς	1	And after he had spent three months there	“And after he had stayed there three months.” This speaks about time as if it were something a person could spend. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2409	ACT	20	3	cit9	figs-activepassive	γενομένης ἐπιβουλῆς αὐτῷ ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	a plot was formed against him by the Jews	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the Jews formed a plot against him” or “the Jews formed a secret plan to harm him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2410	ACT	20	3	ah5w	figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	by the Jews	This means only some of the Jews. Alternate translation: “by some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2411	ACT	20	3	m7na		μέλλοντι ἀνάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν Συρίαν	1	as he was about to sail for Syria	“as he was ready to sail to Syria”
2412	ACT	20	4	y35x	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “him” refers to Paul (Acts 20:1). All instances of “us” and “we” in the verses that follow refer to the writer and Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2413	ACT	20	4	c9et		συνείπετο δὲ αὐτῷ	1	And accompanying him	“And traveling with him”
2414	ACT	20	4	dw6j	translate-names	Σώπατρος…Πύρρου…Σεκοῦνδος,…Τυχικὸς…Τρόφιμος	1	were Sopater of Pyrrhus … Secundus … Tychicus … Trophimus	These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2415	ACT	20	4	w4n1	translate-names	Βεροιαῖος…Δερβαῖος	1	from Berea … from Derbe	These are names of places. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2416	ACT	20	4	w8j6		Ἀρίσταρχος…Γάϊος	1	Aristarchus … Gaius	These are names of men. See how you translated these names in Acts 19:29.
2417	ACT	20	5	itz1	translate-names	Τρῳάδι	1	Troas	This is the name of a place. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2418	ACT	20	5	kv8t		οὗτοι…προσελθόντες	1	they had gone before us	“these men had traveled ahead of us”
2419	ACT	20	6	l5dr		τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων	1	the days of unleavened bread	This refers to a time of Jewish religious feast time during the Passover season. See how you translated this in Acts 12:3.
2420	ACT	20	7	dnt4	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “we” refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and Acts 20:4-6)
2421	ACT	20	7	mbr8			0	Connecting Statement:	Luke tells about Paul’s preaching in Troas and about what happened to Eutychus.
2422	ACT	20	7	zff8	figs-synecdoche	κλάσαι ἄρτον	1	to break bread	Bread was part of their meals. Possible meanings are (1) this refers simply to eating a meal together. Alternate translation: “eat a meal” or (2) this refers to the meal they would eat together in order to remember Christ’s death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “to eat the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2423	ACT	20	7	j888		παρέτεινέν τε τὸν λόγον	1	and so he continued his message	“and so he continued to speak”
2424	ACT	20	8	ak8z		ὑπερῴῳ	1	upper room	This may have been the third floor of the house.
2425	ACT	20	9	hw7b			0	General Information:	Here the word “himself” refers to Paul. The first word “he” refers to Paul; the second word “he” refers to the young man, Eutychus. The word “him” refers to Eutychus.
2426	ACT	20	9	v5q7		ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος	1	on the window	This was an opening in the wall with a ledge that was wide enough for a person to sit on it.
2427	ACT	20	9	ju64	translate-names	Εὔτυχος	1	Eutychus	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2428	ACT	20	9	tsp4	figs-metaphor	καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ	1	was falling into a deep sleep	This speaks about sleep as if it were a deep hole into which a person could fall. Alternate translation: “was sleeping soundly” or “was becoming more and more tired until finally he was sleeping soundly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2429	ACT	20	9	abcz		κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου	1	having been overcome by sleep	The young man was fell asleep, not Paul.
2430	ACT	20	9	jp89	figs-activepassive	καὶ ἤρθη νεκρός	1	and was picked up dead	When they went down to check his condition, they saw he was dead. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “and when they went to pick him up, they found that he was dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2431	ACT	20	9	kh3h		τριστέγου	1	third story	This means two floors above the ground floor. If your culture does not count the ground floor, you may state this as the “second story.”
2432	ACT	20	11	av7m			0	General Information:	Here the word “he” refers to Paul.
2433	ACT	20	11	lih8			0	Connecting Statement:	This is the end of the part of the story about Paul’s preaching at Troas and about Eutychus.
2434	ACT	20	11	w5w8	figs-synecdoche	κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον	1	had broken bread	Bread was a common food during meals. Here broken bread probably means they shared a meal with more kinds of food than just bread. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2435	ACT	20	11	t88c		οὕτως ἐξῆλθεν	1	In this way, he left	“This is what happened as he was going away”
2436	ACT	20	12	jkj5		τὸν παῖδα	1	the boy	This refers to Eutychus (Acts 20:9). Possible meanings are (1) he was a young man over 14 years old or (2) he was a boy between 9 and 14 years old or (3) the word “boy” implies that he was a servant or a slave.
2437	ACT	20	12	abx0	figs-litotes	οὐ μετρίως	1	not moderately	This is a way of saying that they were greatly comforted. Alternate translation: “greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2438	ACT	20	13	dja7	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	The words “he,” “himself,” and “him” refer to Paul. Here the word “we” refers to the writer and those traveling with him, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2439	ACT	20	13	awt9			0	Connecting Statement:	The writer Luke, Paul, and his other companions continue their travels; however, Paul goes separately for part of the trip.
2440	ACT	20	13	w4ew	figs-rpronouns	ἡμεῖς…προελθόντες	1	we, having gone ahead	The word we here refers to Luke and his traveling companions, and not to Paul. Paul did travel on the ship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2441	ACT	20	13	q4yz	translate-names	τὴν Ἆσσον	1	Assos	Assos is a town located directly below present day Behram in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2442	ACT	20	13	nq2q	figs-rpronouns	ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν	1	ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν	Here himself is used to emphasize that this is what Paul wanted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2443	ACT	20	13	p8y7		πεζεύειν	1	to go on foot	“to walk”
2444	ACT	20	14	ju8f	translate-names	Μιτυλήνην	1	Mitylene	Mitylene is a town located in present day Mitilini in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2445	ACT	20	15	ll2h	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “we” refers to Paul, the writer, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2446	ACT	20	15	ulk6	translate-names	Χίου	1	Chios	Chios is an island off the coast of modern day Turkey in the Aegean Sea. Alternate translation: “the island of Chios” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2447	ACT	20	15	jyr7		παρεβάλομεν εἰς Σάμον	1	we landed at Samos	“we arrived at the island of Samos”
2448	ACT	20	15	b6c6	translate-names	Σάμον	1	Samos	Samos is an island south of Chios in the Aegean Sea off the coast of modern day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2449	ACT	20	15	s7g2	translate-names	Μίλητον	1	Miletus	Miletus was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2450	ACT	20	16	p272	translate-names	κεκρίκει γὰρ ὁ Παῦλος παραπλεῦσαι τὴν Ἔφεσον	1	For Paul had decided to sail past Ephesus	Paul sailed south past the port city of Ephesus, further south in order to land at Miletus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2451	ACT	20	16	p61e	figs-metaphor	ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι	1	so that he would not spend time	This speaks about time as if it were a commodity that a person could spend or use up. Alternate translation: “so that he would not have to remain for a time” or “so that he would not have a delay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2452	ACT	20	17	nw52	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “he” refers to Paul. The word “our” refers to Paul and the elders to whom he is speaking. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2453	ACT	20	17	v9al			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul calls the elders of the church of Ephesus and begins to speak to them.
2454	ACT	20	17	l9aj	translate-names	τῆς Μιλήτου	1	Miletus	Miletus was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. See how you translated this in Acts 20:15. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2455	ACT	20	18	b6li	figs-rpronouns	ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε	1	You yourselves know	Here yourselves is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2456	ACT	20	18	vw6n	figs-synecdoche	ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν	1	I set foot in Asia	Here foot stands for the entire person. Alternate translation: “I entered Asia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2457	ACT	20	19	wh5m	figs-metonymy	δακρύων	1	tears	Here “tears” stands for feeling sad and crying. Alternate translation: “sadness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2458	ACT	20	19	e6k7		πειρασμῶν, τῶν συμβάντων μοι	1	trials that happened to me	Here trials is an abstract noun. The meaning can be expressed as a verb. Alternate Translation: “while I was tested” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns)
2459	ACT	20	19	y5iw	figs-synecdoche	τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	of the Jews	This does not mean every Jew. This lets us know who plotted. Alternate translation: “of some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2460	ACT	20	20	nu7h		ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν	1	how I kept back nothing that was useful which I did not declare to you	“how I declared to you everything that was beneficial to you”
2461	ACT	20	20	kut9		κατ’ οἴκους	1	according to houses	Paul taught people in various private homes. Alternate translation: “in each house” or “in everyone's home”
2462	ACT	20	21	w7mv	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν	1	about repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus	The abstract nouns repentance and faith can be stated as verbs. Alternate translation: “that they need to repent before God and believe in our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2463	ACT	20	22	ty3b			0	General Information:	Here the word “I” refers to Paul.
2464	ACT	20	22	vam4	figs-activepassive	δεδεμένος…τῷ Πνεύματι	1	having been bound by the Spirit	They can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “because the Spirit compels me to go there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2465	ACT	20	22	a9j1		τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ συναντήσοντά μοι, μὴ εἰδώς	1	not knowing what will happen to me in it	“and I do not know what will happen to me there” or “not knowing what will happen to me in Jerusalem”
2466	ACT	20	23	q3ie	figs-metonymy	δεσμὰ καὶ θλίψεις με μένουσιν	1	chains and sufferings await me	Here chains refers to Paul’s being arrested and put in prison. Alternate translation: “people will put me in prison and cause me to suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2467	ACT	20	24	w8d2	figs-metaphor	ὡς τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	so as to finish my race and the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus	This speaks about Paul’s race and ministry as if they are objects that Jesus gives and Paul receives. Here race and ministry mean basically the same thing. Paul repeats this for emphasis. Alternate translation: “so that I may complete the work that the Lord Jesus has commanded me to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2468	ACT	20	24	m5gc	figs-metaphor	τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου	1	to finish my race	Paul speaks about completing the work that Jesus has commanded him to do as if he were running a race. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2469	ACT	20	24	hg3l		διαμαρτύρασθαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	to solemnly testify to the gospel of the grace of God	“to tell people what I have personally learned about the good news of God’s grace.” This is the ministry that Paul received from Jesus.
2470	ACT	20	25	f1sb			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues to talk to the Ephesian elders (Acts 20:17).
2471	ACT	20	25	kj9c		καὶ νῦν ἰδοὺ, ἐγὼ οἶδα	1	And now, behold, I know	“And now, pay careful attention, because I know”
2472	ACT	20	25	z4ng		ἐγὼ οἶδα ὅτι…ὑμεῖς πάντες	1	I know that you all	“I know that all of you”
2473	ACT	20	25	aur9	figs-metonymy	ἐν οἷς διῆλθον κηρύσσων τὴν βασιλείαν	1	among whom I went about proclaiming the kingdom	Here kingdom stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “to whom I preached the message about God’s reign as king” or “to whom I preached about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2474	ACT	20	25	cq45	figs-synecdoche	οὐκέτι ὄψεσθε τὸ πρόσωπόν μου	1	will see my face no more	The word face here represents Paul’s physical body. Alternate translation: “will not see me anymore on this earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2475	ACT	20	26	e546	figs-metonymy	καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων	1	I am innocent from the blood of all	Here blood stands for a person’s death, which, in this case, is not physical death but spiritual death when God declares a person guilty of sin. Paul had told them God’s truth. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for anyone whom God judges guilty of sin because they did not trust in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2476	ACT	20	26	v5el	figs-gendernotations	πάντων	1	of all	Here this means any person whether male or female. Alternate translation: “of any person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2477	ACT	20	27	qa9y	figs-litotes	οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι…ὑμῖν	1	For I did not hold back from declaring to you	“For I did not keep silent and not tell you.” This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “For I certainly declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2478	ACT	20	28	u52d	figs-metaphor	τῷ ποιμνίῳ, ἐν ᾧ ὑμᾶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔθετο ἐπισκόπους, ποιμαίνειν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the flock among which the Holy Spirit has made you overseers to shepherd the church of God	Believers are likened to a flock of sheep here. Church leaders are entrusted by God with the care of the community of believers just as a shepherd would care for his flock of sheep and protect them from wolves. Alternate translation: “the group of believers the Holy spirit has entrusted to you. Be sure to take care of the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2479	ACT	20	28	cx69	figs-metaphor	τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου	1	the church of God, which he purchased with his own blood	The shedding of the blood of Christ here is likened to a payment to God for our sins. Alternate translation: “the people Christ saved from their sins by shedding his blood on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2480	ACT	20	28	hjh6	figs-metonymy	τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου	1	his own blood	Here blood stands for Christ’s death. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2481	ACT	20	29	ka6u	figs-metaphor	εἰσελεύσονται…λύκοι βαρεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς, μὴ φειδόμενοι τοῦ ποιμνίου	1	vicious wolves will come in among you, not sparing the flock	This is a picture of people who teach false doctrine and who harm the community of believers as though they were wolves that eat the sheep of the flock. Alternate translation: “many enemies will come among you and try to harm the community of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2482	ACT	20	30	ftf4	figs-metaphor	τοῦ ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς μαθητὰς ὀπίσω ἑαυτῶν	1	to draw away the disciples after them	A false teacher convincing believers to start believing his false teaching is spoken of as if he were leading sheep away from the flock to follow him. Alternate translation: “in order to convince people who are disciples of Christ to become his disciples instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2483	ACT	20	31	q2nl		γρηγορεῖτε, μνημονεύοντες	1	be alert, remembering	“be on guard and remember” or “be on guard as you remember”
2484	ACT	20	31	ll64	figs-metaphor	γρηγορεῖτε	1	be alert	“be awake” or “watch out.” Christian leaders being alert about anyone that may harm the community of believers is spoken of as if they were guards in an army watching out for the enemy army. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2485	ACT	20	31	pvt6		μνημονεύοντες ὅτι	1	Remembering that	“continuing to remember that” or “not forgetting that”
2486	ACT	20	31	rt1h	figs-hyperbole	τριετίαν νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν, οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην…νουθετῶν	1	for three years I did not stop admonishing … night and day	Paul did not teach them continuously for three years, but over the space of three years. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2487	ACT	20	31	hs1m		οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην…νουθετῶν	1	I did not stop admonishing	“I did not stop warning”
2488	ACT	20	31	rvh6	figs-metonymy	μετὰ δακρύων	1	with tears	Here tears refers to Paul’s crying because of the strong emotion of concern he felt while he was warning the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2489	ACT	20	32	ylm3	figs-metonymy	παρατίθεμαι ὑμᾶς τῷ Θεῷ, καὶ τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ	1	I am entrusting you to God and to the word of his grace	Here word stands for a message. Alternate translation: “I ask God to take care of you and that he will help you to keep believing the message I spoke to you about his grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2490	ACT	20	32	vnb2		παρατίθεμαι	1	I am entrusting	to give someone else the responsibility of taking care of someone or something
2491	ACT	20	32	s7rf	figs-metaphor	τῷ δυναμένῳ οἰκοδομῆσαι	1	which is able to build you up	A person’s faith becoming stronger is spoken of as if the person were a wall and someone were building him higher and stronger. Alternate translation: “which is able to make you become stronger and stronger in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2492	ACT	20	32	zvz8	figs-personification	δοῦναι τὴν κληρονομίαν	1	to give you the inheritance	This speaks about the word of his grace as if it were God himself that would give the inheritance to believers. Alternate translation: “God will give you the inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2493	ACT	20	32	x5jy	figs-metaphor	τὴν κληρονομίαν	1	the inheritance	The blessings that God gives believers is spoken of as if they were money or property that a child inherits from his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2494	ACT	20	33	y6ii			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul finishes speaking to the elders of the church of Ephesus; he began to speak them in Acts 20:18.
2495	ACT	20	33	yw8a		ἀργυρίου…οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα	1	I coveted no one’s silver	“I did not desire anyone’s silver” or “I did not want for myself anyone’s silver”
2496	ACT	20	33	ipq5		ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς	1	no one’s silver, gold, or clothing	Here clothing is considered a treasure; the more you had, the richer you were.
2497	ACT	20	34	f5a3	figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ γινώσκετε	1	You yourselves know	The word yourselves is used here to add emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2498	ACT	20	34	ja5v	figs-synecdoche	ταῖς χρείαις μου, καὶ τοῖς…ὑπηρέτησαν αἱ χεῖρες αὗται	1	these hands ministered to my needs and to those who	The word hands here represents the entire person. Alternate translation: “I worked to earn money and pay for my own expenses and for those who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2499	ACT	20	35	wn8j		κοπιῶντας δεῖ ἀντιλαμβάνεσθαι τῶν ἀσθενούντων	1	it is necessary to work hard to help those who are weak	“you should work so as to have money to help people who are in need”
2500	ACT	20	35	p3n8	figs-nominaladj	τῶν ἀσθενούντων	1	those who are weak	You can state this nominal adjective as an adjective. Alternate translation: “weak people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2501	ACT	20	35	dpu1		ἀσθενούντων	1	weak	“sick”
2502	ACT	20	35	ps2i	figs-metonymy	τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	the words of the Lord Jesus	Here words refers to what Jesus has said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2503	ACT	20	35	e396		μακάριόν ἐστιν μᾶλλον, διδόναι ἢ λαμβάνειν	1	It is more blessed to give than to receive	This means a person receives the favor of God and experiences more joy when he gives to other people rather than always receiving from other people.
2504	ACT	20	36	q6bs			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul ends his time with the elders of the church of Ephesus by praying with them.
2505	ACT	20	36	u3uc	translate-symaction	θεὶς τὰ γόνατα αὐτοῦ…προσηύξατο	1	having bowed his knees, he prayed	It was a common custom to kneel down while praying. It was a sign of humility before God. Alternate translation: “he knelt down and prayed to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2506	ACT	20	37	pb4r		ἐπιπεσόντες ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τοῦ Παύλου	1	having fallen upon Paul’s neck	“having embraced Paul” or “putting their arms around him”
2507	ACT	20	37	sze4		κατεφίλουν αὐτόν	1	they were kissing him	Kissing someone on the cheek is an expression of brotherly or friendly love in the Middle East.
2508	ACT	20	38	bs3s	figs-synecdoche	οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν	1	they were never going to see his face again	The word face here represents Paul’s physical body. Alternate translation: “they would not see him anymore on this earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2509	ACT	21	intro	gh1j			0		Acts 21 General Notes Structure and formatting Acts 21:1-19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews. The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does. Special concepts in this chapter “They are all determined to keep the law” The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that. Nazarite vow The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads (Acts 21:23). Gentiles in the temple The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]]) Roman citizenship The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens.
2510	ACT	21	1	s3h3	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “we” refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2511	ACT	21	1	i6f8			0	Connecting Statement:	The writer Luke, Paul, and his companions continue their travels.
2512	ACT	21	1	zz5h		εὐθυδρομήσαντες ἤλθομεν εἰς τὴν Κῶ	1	having run a straight course, we came to Cos	“we went straight to the city of Cos” or “we went directly to the city of Cos”
2513	ACT	21	1	e5y6	translate-names	Κῶ	1	Cos	Cos is a Greek island off the coast of modern day Turkey in the South Aegean Sea region. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2514	ACT	21	1	p6ss	translate-names	Ῥόδον	1	Rhodes	Rhodes is a Greek island off the coast of modern day Turkey in the South Aegean Sea region south of Cos and northeast of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2515	ACT	21	1	x7kg	translate-names	Πάταρα	1	Patara	Patara is a city on the southwest coast of modern day Turkey south of the Aegean Sea in the Mediterranean Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2516	ACT	21	2	nz9k	figs-metonymy	καὶ εὑρόντες πλοῖον διαπερῶν εἰς Φοινίκην	1	And when we found a ship crossing over to Phoenicia	Here a ship crossing over stands for the crew that would sail the ship. Alternate translation: “And when we found a ship with a crew sailing over to Phoenicia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2517	ACT	21	2	vbd3		πλοῖον διαπερῶν	1	a ship crossing over	Here crossing does not mean it was presently crossing but that it would be crossing to Phoenicia soon. Alternate translation: “a ship that would be going across the water” or “a ship that would be going”
2518	ACT	21	3	er3r	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “we” refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2519	ACT	21	3	vkr2		καταλιπόντες αὐτὴν εὐώνυμον	1	leaving it behind on the left	“passed the island on our left” The left is the “port” side of a boat.
2520	ACT	21	3	hwx8	figs-metonymy	ἐκεῖσε…τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον	1	the ship was to unload its cargo there	Here ship stands for the crew that was sailing the ship. Alternate translation: “the crew would unload the cargo from the ship there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2521	ACT	21	4	y35m		οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον διὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος	1	Through the Spirit they kept saying to Paul	“These believers told Paul what the Holy Spirit had revealed to them, for him”
2522	ACT	21	5	fe1u			0	General Information:	Here the word “They” refers to the believers from Tyre.
2523	ACT	21	5	a5wj		ὅτε…ἐγένετο ἡμᾶς ἐξαρτίσαι τὰς ἡμέρας	1	when our days to supply happened	“when we had finished taking supplies onto the ship”
2524	ACT	21	5	q8xl	translate-symaction	θέντες τὰ γόνατα ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν προσευξάμενοι	1	having knelt down on the shore and having prayed	It was a common custom to kneel down while praying. This was a sign of humility before God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2525	ACT	21	6	ja1x		ἀπησπασάμεθα ἀλλήλους	1	we said farewell to each other	“we said goodbye to one another”
2526	ACT	21	7	hy6e	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “we” refers to Luke, Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2527	ACT	21	7	kt6u			0	Connecting Statement:	This begins Paul’s time in Caesarea.
2528	ACT	21	7	z4nt	translate-names	Πτολεμαΐδα	1	Ptolemais	Ptolemais was a city south of Tyre, Lebanon. Ptolemais is modern day Acre, Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2529	ACT	21	7	ff1s		τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς	1	the brothers	“the fellow believers”
2530	ACT	21	8	ay52		ἐκ τῶν ἑπτὰ	1	from the seven	The seven refers to the men chosen to distribute food and aid to the widows in Acts 6:5.
2531	ACT	21	8	vi48		εὐαγγελιστοῦ	1	evangelist	a person who tells people the good news about Jesus
2532	ACT	21	9	rcf4		τούτῳ	1	this man	“Philip” from verse 8
2533	ACT	21	9	cv8b	writing-background	δὲ	1	Now	This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells background information about Philip and his daughters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2534	ACT	21	9	r1i1		θυγατέρες τέσσαρες παρθένοι, προφητεύουσαι	1	four virgin daughters who prophesy	“four virgin daughters who regularly receive and pass along messages from God”
2535	ACT	21	10	fe6s	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the words “we” and “us” refers to Luke, Paul, and those with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2536	ACT	21	10	hx8k			0	Connecting Statement:	This tells about a prophecy made about Paul in Caesarea by the prophet Agabus.
2537	ACT	21	10	n3i8	writing-participants	τις…προφήτης ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος	1	a certain prophet named Agabus	This introduces a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
2538	ACT	21	10	f9cb	translate-names	Ἅγαβος	1	Agabus	Agabus was a man from Judea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2539	ACT	21	11	i8t2		ἄρας τὴν ζώνην τοῦ Παύλου	1	taken Paul’s belt	“removed Paul’s belt from Paul’s waist”
2540	ACT	21	11	nq2y	figs-quotesinquotes	τάδε λέγει τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, τὸν ἄνδρα οὗ ἐστιν ἡ ζώνη αὕτη, οὕτως δήσουσιν ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι, καὶ παραδώσουσιν εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν.	1	Thus says the Holy Spirit, ‘So the Jews in Jerusalem will bind the man who owns this belt, and they will hand him over into the hands of the Gentiles	This is a quotation within a quotation. The inner quotation can be stated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “‘The Holy Spirit says that this will be how the Jews in Jerusalem will bind the man who owns this belt, and they will hand him over into the hands of the Gentiles.’ (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2541	ACT	21	11	i8u7	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	This does not mean all the Jews, but that these were the people who would do that. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” or “some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2542	ACT	21	11	zvw8		παραδώσουσιν	1	they will hand him over	“they will deliver him”
2543	ACT	21	11	s92d	figs-metonymy	εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν	1	into the hands of the Gentiles	The word hands here represents control. Alternate translation: “into the legal custody of the Gentiles” or “to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2544	ACT	21	11	b59g	figs-synecdoche	ἐθνῶν	1	of the Gentiles	This stands for the authorities among the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “of the Gentile authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2545	ACT	21	12	fvh4	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “we” refers to Luke and the other believers but does not include the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2546	ACT	21	13	uwt2	figs-rquestion	τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν?	1	What are you doing, weeping and breaking my heart?	Paul asks this question to show the believers they should stop trying to persuade him. Alternate translation: “Stop what you are doing. Your weeping is breaking my heart!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2547	ACT	21	13	bj76	figs-metaphor	συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν	1	breaking my heart	To make someone sad or to discourage someone is spoken of as if it were a heart being broken. Here heart stands for a person’s emotions. Alternate translation: “discouraging me” or “making me very sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2548	ACT	21	13	p5e5	figs-activepassive	οὐ μόνον δεθῆναι	1	not only to be bound	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “not only for them to tie me up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2549	ACT	21	13	q35x	figs-metonymy	ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ	1	for the name of the Lord Jesus	Here name refers to the person of Jesus. Alternate translation: “for the sake of the Lord Jesus” or “because I believe in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2550	ACT	21	14	hwc5	figs-activepassive	μὴ πειθομένου…αὐτοῦ	1	he would not be persuaded	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Paul would not allow us to persuade him” or “we were unable to persuade Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2551	ACT	21	14	zl98	figs-ellipsis	μὴ πειθομένου	1	would not be persuaded	You may need to make explicit what they could not persuade Paul not to do. Alternate translation: “would not be persuaded not to go up to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2552	ACT	21	14	as1i	figs-activepassive	τοῦ Κυρίου τὸ θέλημα γινέσθω	1	Let the will of the Lord happen	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “May everything happen as the Lord has planned it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2553	ACT	21	15	p5fm	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “we” refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, and not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2554	ACT	21	15	p5fl	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	The word “we” refers to some of the disciples from Caesarea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2555	ACT	21	15	kd5l			0	Connecting Statement:	This ends Paul’s time in Caesarea.
2556	ACT	21	16	k9kr		παρ’ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν Μνάσωνί, τινι Κυπρίῳ ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ	1	to Mnason, a certain early disciple from Cyprus, with whom we would stay	The disciples from Caesarea knew Mnason and led Paul and Silas to his house where they would spend the night.
2557	ACT	21	16	zd9i	translate-names	Μνάσωνί…Κυπρίῳ	1	Mnason … from Cyprus	Mnason is a man from the island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2558	ACT	21	16	c7r2		ἀρχαίῳ μαθητῇ	1	an early disciple	This means Mnason was one of the first to believe in Jesus.
2559	ACT	21	17	zpa7			0	General Information:	Here the words “he” and “his” refers to Paul. The word “them” refers to the elders.
2560	ACT	21	17	wz34			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul and his companions arrive in Jerusalem.
2561	ACT	21	17	d3gj	figs-gendernotations	ἀπεδέξαντο ἡμᾶς οἱ ἀδελφοί	1	the brothers welcomed us	Here brothers refers to the believers in Jerusalem whether male or female. Alternate translation: “the fellow believers welcomed us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2562	ACT	21	19	bx9e		ἐξηγεῖτο καθ’ ἓν ἕκαστον	1	he reported according to each thing	“he gave a detailed account of everything”
2563	ACT	21	20	zks9			0	Connecting Statement:	The elders in Jerusalem begin their response to Paul.
2564	ACT	21	20	a1hk		οἱ…ἀκούσαντες…ἐδόξαζον…εἶπόν τε αὐτῷ	1	when they heard it … they glorified … and said to him	Here each instance of the word they refers to James and the elders. The word him refers to Paul.
2565	ACT	21	20	xki4		ἀδελφέ	1	brother	Here brother means “fellow believer.”
2566	ACT	21	20	c5pu		ὑπάρχουσιν	1	they are	The word they refers to Jewish believers who wanted all believing Jews to keep the Jewish laws and customs.
2567	ACT	21	21	pyg8	figs-explicit	κατηχήθησαν δὲ περὶ σοῦ, ὅτι ἀποστασίαν διδάσκεις ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως τοὺς κατὰ τὰ ἔθνη πάντας Ἰουδαίους, λέγων μὴ περιτέμνειν αὐτοὺς τὰ τέκνα, μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν	1	And they have been told about you, that you teach apostasy from Moses to all the Jews who are among the Gentiles, telling them not to circumcise their children, nor to walk in the customs	Apparently here there are some Jews that are distorting what Paul is teaching. He does not discourage the Jews from obeying the law of Moses. His message is that circumcision and the other customs are not necessary for Jesus to save them. You can make explicit that the leaders of the Jewish believers in Jerusalem knew that Paul was teaching God’s true message. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2568	ACT	21	21	e5s4	figs-activepassive	κατηχήθησαν	1	they have been told	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “people have told the Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2569	ACT	21	21	sdl3	figs-metonymy	ἀποστασίαν…ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως	1	apostasy from Moses	Here Moses stands for the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “rebellion against the Law of Moses” or “to stop obeying the laws that Moses gave us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2570	ACT	21	21	knt4	figs-metaphor	μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν	1	not to walk in the customs	To obey the customs is spoken of as if the customs were a path that people could walk along. Alternate translation: “and not to obey the customs” or “and not to practice the customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2571	ACT	21	21	u56t		τοῖς ἔθεσιν	1	in the customs	“do the things that Jews normally do”
2572	ACT	21	22	b28b	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “we” refers to James and the elders (Acts 21:18). The word “They” refers to the Jewish believers in Jerusalem who wanted to teach Jewish believers that they could still follow the laws of Moses (Acts 21:20-21). The words “them,” “their,” and the first “they” refer to the four men who made a vow. The second words “they” and “They” refer to the Jewish believers in Jerusalem who wanted to teach Jewish believers that they could still follow the laws of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2573	ACT	21	23	b22r		ἡμῖν ἄνδρες τέσσαρες, εὐχὴν ἔχοντες ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν	1	four men with us having a vow from themselves	“four men who have made a promise to God.” This was the kind of vow where a person would not drink alcohol or cut his hair until the end of a set period of time.
2574	ACT	21	24	km4w	figs-explicit	τούτους παραλαβὼν, ἁγνίσθητι σὺν αὐτοῖς	1	Having taken these men, be purified with them	They had to make themselves ritually pure so they could worship in the temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2575	ACT	21	24	c3ap	figs-explicit	δαπάνησον ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς	1	pay the expenses for them	“pay for what they will need.” The expenses would go toward buying a male and female lamb, a ram, and grain and drink offerings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2576	ACT	21	24	abq6	translate-symaction	ξυρήσονται τὴν κεφαλήν	1	they will shave their heads	This was a sign that the person had completed what they promised God they would do. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2577	ACT	21	24	nu9v	figs-activepassive	ὧν κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ	1	what they have been told about you	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that people are saying about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2578	ACT	21	24	sv6i	figs-metaphor	στοιχεῖς καὶ αὐτὸς, φυλάσσων τὸν νόμον	1	you yourself walk in and obey the law	This speaks of obeying the law as if the law were a path and people can walk along it. Alternate translation: “live a life that conforms to the law of Moses and other Jewish customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2579	ACT	21	25	c4kl	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “we” refers to James and the elders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2580	ACT	21	25	cqm9			0	Connecting Statement:	James and the elders in Jerusalem finish their request to Paul (Acts 21:18).
2581	ACT	21	25	a35u	figs-explicit	φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς, τό τε εἰδωλόθυτον, καὶ αἷμα, καὶ πνικτὸν	1	to keep themselves from things sacrificed to idols, and from blood, and from what is strangled	All of these are rules about what they can eat. They are forbidden to eat meat of animals sacrificed to an idol, meat with blood still in it, and meat from a strangled animal because it would still have blood in the meat. See how you translated similar phrases in Acts 15:20. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2582	ACT	21	25	bpb5	figs-activepassive	φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς, τό τε εἰδωλόθυτον	1	to keep themselves from things sacrificed to idols	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “to stay away from the meat of an animal that someone sacrificed to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2583	ACT	21	25	wjd2	figs-explicit	πνικτὸν	1	from what is strangled	This can be stated in active form. You can also state explicitly the assumed information about strangled animals. Alternate translation: “from animals that a person has strangled” or “from animals that a person killed for food but did not drain its blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2584	ACT	21	26	cr14		παραλαβὼν τοὺς ἄνδρας	1	having taken the men	These are the four men who made a vow.
2585	ACT	21	26	s8z9		σὺν αὐτοῖς ἁγνισθεὶς	1	having been purified with them	Before entering the temple area the Jews were required to be ceremonially or ritually clean. This cleansing had to do with Jews having contact with Gentiles.
2586	ACT	21	26	xu9r	figs-synecdoche	εἰσῄει εἰς τὸ ἱερόν	1	went into the temple	They did not go into the temple itself where only the high priest was allowed to enter. They entered the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “went into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2587	ACT	21	26	pvy3		τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ ἁγνισμοῦ	1	of the days of purification	This is a separate purification process from the purification process which they were required to fulfill in order to enter the temple area.
2588	ACT	21	26	gc23	figs-activepassive	ἕως οὗ προσηνέχθη…ἡ προσφορά	1	until the offering which was offered	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “until they presented the animals for an offering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2589	ACT	21	27	l3bg			0	General Information:	Verse 29 gives background information about the Jews from Asia.
2590	ACT	21	27	p4gi			0	Connecting Statement:	This begins the story of Paul’s arrest.
2591	ACT	21	27	j9zm		αἱ ἑπτὰ ἡμέραι	1	the seven days	These are the seven days for purification.
2592	ACT	21	27	k4l1	figs-synecdoche	ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	in the temple	Paul was not in the temple itself. He was in the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2593	ACT	21	27	u942	figs-metaphor	συνέχεον πάντα τὸν ὄχλον	1	stirred up the whole crowd	Inciting people to become very angry at Paul is spoken of as if they stirred up the crowd’s emotions. Alternate translation: “caused a large number of people to be very angry at Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2594	ACT	21	27	mks6	figs-idiom	ἐπέβαλον ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας	1	laid their hands on him	Here laid their hands on means to “seize” or to “grab.” See how you translated laid hands on in Acts 5:18. Alternate translation: “seized Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2595	ACT	21	28	sfg3		τοῦ λαοῦ, καὶ τοῦ νόμου, καὶ τοῦ τόπου τούτου	1	the people, and the law, and this place	“the people of Israel, and the law of Moses, and the temple”
2596	ACT	21	28	jc9q	figs-explicit	ἔτι τε καὶ Ἕλληνας εἰσήγαγεν εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	And besides, he has both brought Greeks into the temple	Only Jewish males were allowed in certain areas of the courtyard of the Jerusalem temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2597	ACT	21	29	t2z7	writing-background	ἦσαν γὰρ προεωρακότες Τρόφιμον τὸν Ἐφέσιον ἐν τῇ πόλει σὺν αὐτῷ, ὃν ἐνόμιζον ὅτι εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν εἰσήγαγεν ὁ Παῦλος	1	For they had previously seen Trophimus the Ephesian with him in the city, whom they thought that Paul brought into the temple	This is background information. Luke is explaining why the Jews from Asia thought Paul brought a Greek into the temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2598	ACT	21	29	h1uu		Τρόφιμον	1	Trophimus	This was a Greek man that they accused Paul of having brought into the inner temple area that was only for Jews. See how you translated his name in Acts 20:4.
2599	ACT	21	30	upl8	figs-hyperbole	ἐκινήθη τε ἡ πόλις ὅλη	1	And the whole city was stirred up	The word whole here is an exaggeration for emphasis. The word city represents the people in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “And many people in the city became angry at Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2600	ACT	21	30	x2sx		ἐπιλαβόμενοι τοῦ Παύλου	1	having laid hold of Paul	“having seized Paul” or “after they grabbed Paul”
2601	ACT	21	30	xd6r	figs-explicit	εὐθέως ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι	1	the doors were immediately shut	They shut the doors so that there would not be rioting in the temple area. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews immediately shut the temple doors” or “the temple guards immediately shut the doors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2602	ACT	21	31	d6vt	figs-metonymy	ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης	1	a report came up to the commander of the guard	Here report refers to the messenger who went to speak the report. Alternate translation: “someone gave news to the commander of the guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2603	ACT	21	31	hu5r		ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ	1	a report came up to the commander	The phrase came up to is used because the commander was in a fortress connected to the temple that was higher in elevation than the temple courtyard.
2604	ACT	21	31	p85a		τῷ χιλιάρχῳ	1	to the commander	a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers
2605	ACT	21	31	u65r	figs-hyperbole	ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	all Jerusalem was stirred up	The word Jerusalem here represents the people of Jerusalem. The word all is an exaggeration to show a large crowd was upset. Alternate translation: “a lot of people in Jerusalem were in an uproar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2606	ACT	21	32	j81t			0	General Information:	The first word “he” and the word “He” refer to the chief captain of the guard mentioned in Acts 21:31.
2607	ACT	21	32	dgz5		κατέδραμεν	1	ran down	From the fortress, there are stairs going down into the court.
2608	ACT	21	32	e4rj		τὸν χιλίαρχον	1	the commander	a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers
2609	ACT	21	33	w28u		ἐπελάβετο αὐτοῦ	1	laid hold of him	“took hold of Paul” or “arrested Paul”
2610	ACT	21	33	zi4l	figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσε δεθῆναι	1	commanded him to be bound	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “commanded his soldiers to bind him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2611	ACT	21	33	xd9w		ἁλύσεσι δυσί	1	with two chains	This means they bound Paul to two Roman soldiers, one on each side of him.
2612	ACT	21	33	y6zw	figs-quotations	ἐπυνθάνετο τίς εἴη καὶ τί ἐστιν πεποιηκώς	1	he asked who he is and what it is that he had done.	This can be stated as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “He asked, ‘Who is this man? What has he done?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2613	ACT	21	33	fi22		ἐπυνθάνετο τίς εἴη	1	he asked who he is	The commander is speaking to the crowd, not to Paul.
2614	ACT	21	34	k35e		αὐτοῦ	1	he	This refers to the commander.
2615	ACT	21	34	qcc6	figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσεν ἄγεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	commanded that he be brought	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to bring Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2616	ACT	21	34	w2qj		εἰς τὴν παρεμβολήν	1	into the fortress	This fortress was connected to the outer temple court.
2617	ACT	21	35	h9n7	figs-activepassive	ὅτε δὲ ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀναβαθμούς, συνέβη βαστάζεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	But when he came to the steps, he had to be carried	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “But when Paul came to the steps of the fortress, the soldiers had to carry him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2618	ACT	21	36	kax6	figs-euphemism	αἶρε αὐτόν	1	Away with him	The crowd is using somewhat milder and less exact language to ask for Paul’s death. Alternate translation: “Put him to death” or “Kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
2619	ACT	21	37	j9xk	figs-activepassive	μέλλων τε εἰσάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν παρεμβολὴν, ὁ Παῦλος	1	And as Paul was about to be brought into the fortress	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “As the soldiers were ready to bring Paul inside the fortress” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2620	ACT	21	37	qp63		τὴν παρεμβολὴν	1	the fortress	This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.
2621	ACT	21	37	inl1		τῷ χιλιάρχῳ	1	to the commander	a Roman military officer of about 600 soldiers
2622	ACT	21	37	p5cd	figs-rquestion	Ἑλληνιστὶ γινώσκεις?	1	Do you know Greek?	The commander uses this questions to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. Alternate translation: “So you speak Greek.” or “I didn’t know you spoke Greek.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2623	ACT	21	38	xx2w	figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος, ὁ πρὸ τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, ἀναστατώσας καὶ ἐξαγαγὼν εἰς τὴν ἔρημον τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας τῶν σικαρίων?	1	Are you not then the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness?	The commander uses this question and the question “Do you speak Greek?” (verse 37) to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. Possible meanings are (1) as in ULT, the commander believes that even though Paul speaks Greek, Paul is the Egyptian. “Even though you speak Greek, I still think you are the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness.” (2) Because Paul speaks Greek, the commander thinks that perhaps Paul is not the Egyptian. “So you speak Greek. Perhaps I was wrong to think you were that Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness.” It is best to retain the questions if the reader can infer one of the two meanings from them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2624	ACT	21	38	nxs6	figs-explicit	οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος	1	Are you not then the Egyptian	Shortly before Paul’s visit, an unnamed man from Egypt had launched a revolt against Rome in Jerusalem. Later he escaped into the wilderness and the commander wonders if Paul might be the same man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2625	ACT	21	38	tqh6	translate-numbers	τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας	1	the 4,000 men	“the four thousand terrorists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2626	ACT	21	38	p2ym		τῶν σικαρίων	1	of the ‘Assassins’	This refers to a group of Jewish rebels who killed Romans and anyone who supported Romans.
2627	ACT	21	39	t6ax			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul begins to defend what he did.
2628	ACT	21	39	ys84		δέομαι…σου	1	I ask you	“I beg you” or “I plead with you”
2629	ACT	21	39	a139		ἐπίτρεψόν μοι	1	allow me	“please allow me” or please permit me”
2630	ACT	21	40	qp2q	figs-abstractnouns	ἐπιτρέψαντος…αὐτοῦ	1	when he had given him permission	The word permission can be stated as a verb. Alternate translation: “when the commander permitted him to speak” or “after the commander allowed him to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2631	ACT	21	40	a4y2		ὁ Παῦλος ἑστὼς ἐπὶ τῶν ἀναβαθμῶν	1	Paul, standing on the steps	The word steps here refers to the steps on the stairway to the fortress.
2632	ACT	21	40	rk1y	figs-explicit	κατέσεισε τῇ χειρὶ τῷ λαῷ	1	motioned with his hand to the people	It can be stated explicitly why Paul motioned with the hand. Alternate translation: “motioned with his hand for the people to be quiet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2633	ACT	21	40	xj6i		πολλῆς δὲ σιγῆς γενομένης	1	And when there was a deep silence	“And when the people were completely silent”
2634	ACT	22	intro	gq5g			0		Acts 22 General Notes Structure and formatting This is the second account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: Acts 9 and Acts 26) Special concepts in this chapter “In the Hebrew language” Most Jews at this time spoke Aramaic and Greek. Most of the people who spoke Hebrew were educated Jewish scholars. This is why the people paid attention when Paul started speaking in Hebrew. “The Way” No one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God. Roman citizenship The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.
2635	ACT	22	1	kq95	writing-background		0	General Information:	Verse 2 gives background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2636	ACT	22	1	a8ir			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul speaks to the Jewish crowd in Jerusalem.
2637	ACT	22	1	xe46		ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες	1	brothers, and fathers	This is a polite way of addressing men who are Paul’s age as well as the older men in the audience.
2638	ACT	22	1	pe8t		ἀκούσατέ μου τῆς πρὸς ὑμᾶς νυνὶ	1	listen to my defense to you now	“I will now explain to you what I have done” or “please listen as I tell you my story”
2639	ACT	22	2	b4sk		τῇ Ἑβραΐδι διαλέκτῳ	1	in the Hebrew language	The Hebrew language was the language of the Jews.
2640	ACT	22	3	g311	figs-activepassive	ἀνατεθραμμένος δὲ ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ, παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ	1	but educated in this city at the feet of Gamaliel	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “but I was a student of rabbi Gamaliel here in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2641	ACT	22	3	d4dx	figs-metonymy	παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ	1	at the feet of Gamaliel	Here feet stands for the place where a student would sit while learning from a teacher. Alternate translation: “by Gamaliel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2642	ACT	22	3	b1dq		Γαμαλιήλ	1	of Gamaliel	Gamaliel was one of the most prominent teachers of the Jewish law. See how you translated this name in Acts 5:34.
2643	ACT	22	3	iz4g	figs-activepassive	πεπαιδευμένος κατὰ ἀκρίβειαν τοῦ πατρῴου νόμου	1	instructed according to the strict ways of the law of our fathers	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “he instructed me how to carefully obey every law of our forefathers” or “the instruction I received followed the exact details of the law of our forefathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2644	ACT	22	3	lqk7		τοῦ πατρῴου νόμου	1	of the law of our fathers	“of the law of our ancestors.” This refers to the law that God gave to the people of Israel through Moses.
2645	ACT	22	3	a8d6		ζηλωτὴς ὑπάρχων τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	being zealous for God	“I am completely dedicated to obeying God” or “I am passionate about my service to God”
2646	ACT	22	3	dbl4		καθὼς πάντες ὑμεῖς ἐστε σήμερον	1	just as all of you are today	“in the same way all of you are today.” Paul compares himself with the crowd.
2647	ACT	22	4	jy3z	figs-metonymy	ὃς ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν ἐδίωξα	1	I persecuted this Way	Here this Way represents the people who belonged to the group called “the Way.” Alternate translation: “I persecuted the people who belonged to this Way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2648	ACT	22	4	bk4c		ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν	1	this Way	This was a term used to refer to Christianity. See how you translated the Way in Acts 9:2.
2649	ACT	22	4	dr8c	figs-abstractnouns	ἄχρι θανάτου	1	as far as death	The word death can be translated with the verb “kill” or “die.” Alternate translation: “and I looked for ways to kill them” or “to the point of killing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2650	ACT	22	4	zd2r		δεσμεύων καὶ παραδιδοὺς εἰς φυλακὰς, ἄνδρας τε καὶ γυναῖκας	1	binding and delivering to prison both men and women	“tying up both men and women and taking them to prison”
2651	ACT	22	5	v2km		μαρτυρεῖ	1	testifies	“can testify” or “can tell you”
2652	ACT	22	5	i45u		παρ’ ὧν καὶ ἐπιστολὰς δεξάμενος	1	from whom also having received letters	“who also gave me letters”
2653	ACT	22	5	in72		πρὸς τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς, εἰς Δαμασκὸν	1	for the brothers in Damascus	Here brothers refers to “fellow Jews.”
2654	ACT	22	5	y82b		ἄξων…τοὺς ἐκεῖσε ὄντας, δεδεμένους εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ	1	to bring back in bonds to Jerusalem those who were there	“to bind with chains those of the Way and bring them back to Jerusalem”
2655	ACT	22	5	ht9f	figs-activepassive	ἵνα τιμωρηθῶσιν	1	in order that they might be punished	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “in order that they may receive punishment” or “in order that the Jewish authorities could punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2656	ACT	22	6	pe9s			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul describes his encounter with Jesus.
2657	ACT	22	6	w4l7		ἐγένετο δέ μοι	1	It happened to me that	This phrase is used here to mark where the action starts. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
2658	ACT	22	7	d6nd	figs-synecdoche	ἤκουσα φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι	1	heard a voice saying to me	Here voice stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “I heard someone say to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2659	ACT	22	9	h95h	figs-synecdoche	τὴν…φωνὴν οὐκ ἤκουσαν τοῦ λαλοῦντός μοι	1	they did not understand the voice of the one who was speaking to me	Here voice stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “they did not understand what the one who spoke to me was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2660	ACT	22	10	a91a	figs-activepassive	κἀκεῖ σοι λαληθήσεται	1	and there you will be told	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “there someone will tell you” or “there you will find out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2661	ACT	22	11	n1kb		οὐκ ἐνέβλεπον ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτὸς ἐκείνου	1	I could not see because of the glory of that light	“I was left blind because of that light’s brightness”
2662	ACT	22	11	n2n1	figs-synecdoche	χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι, ἦλθον εἰς Δαμασκόν	1	being led by the hands of those who were with me, I came into Damascus	Here hands stands for those leading Paul. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “those with me guided me into Damascus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2663	ACT	22	12	a17q			0	General Information:	The words “He” and “him” refer to Ananias.
2664	ACT	22	12	h5bh	translate-names	Ἁνανίας	1	Ananias	Though this is not the same Ananias who died earlier in Acts Acts 5:3, you may translate it the same way though as you did in Acts 5:1. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2665	ACT	22	12	z1g3		ἀνὴρ εὐλαβὴς κατὰ τὸν νόμον	1	a devout man according to the law	Ananias was very serious about following God’s law.
2666	ACT	22	12	e7uw	figs-activepassive	μαρτυρούμενος ὑπὸ πάντων τῶν κατοικούντων Ἰουδαίων	1	being testified to by all the Jews who lived there	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “having a good reputation among all the Jews who lived there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2667	ACT	22	13	un4g		Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ	1	Saul, brother	Here brother is a polite way to address someone. Alternate translation: “Saul, my friend”
2668	ACT	22	13	x3kc	figs-idiom	ἀνάβλεψον	1	look up	This phrase is an idiom that means “receive your sight.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2669	ACT	22	13	se47	figs-idiom	αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ	1	that very hour	This was a customary way of saying something happened immediately. Alternate translation: “at that instant” or “instantly” or “immediately” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2670	ACT	22	13	94s0	figs-idiom	κἀγὼ…ἀνέβλεψα εἰς αὐτόν	1	And … I looked up to him	This phrase is an idiom that means he received his sight. Alternate translation: “And … I was able to see him” or “And … I saw him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2671	ACT	22	14	v2i7			0	General Information:	The word “he” refers to Ananias (Acts 22:12).
2672	ACT	22	14	k3ck			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul finishes telling what had happened to him in Damascus. He quotes what Ananias said to him. This is still part of his speech to the crowd in Jerusalem.
2673	ACT	22	14	k417		τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ	1	his will	“what God is planning and will cause to happen”
2674	ACT	22	14	dg8q	figs-synecdoche	ἀκοῦσαι φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ	1	to hear the voice from his own mouth	Both voice and mouth refer to the one speaking. Alternate translation: “to hear him speak directly to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2675	ACT	22	15	i5q8	figs-gendernotations	πρὸς πάντας ἀνθρώπους	1	to all men	Here men means all people whether male or female. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2676	ACT	22	16	bhg9		νῦν	1	Now	Here now does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
2677	ACT	22	16	mmx9	figs-rquestion	τί μέλλεις?	1	why are you waiting?	This question was asked to exhort Paul to be baptized. Alternate translation: “do not wait!” or “do not delay!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2678	ACT	22	16	lt2i	figs-activepassive	βάπτισαι	1	be baptized	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “let me baptize you” or “receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2679	ACT	22	16	zr5p	figs-metaphor	ἀπόλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου	1	wash away your sins	As washing one’s body removes dirt, calling on the name of Jesus for forgiveness cleanses one’s inner being from sin. Alternate translation: “ask forgiveness for your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2680	ACT	22	16	g5dq		ἐπικαλεσάμενος τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ	1	having called on his name	Here name refers to the Lord. Alternate translation: “having called on the Lord” or “trusting in the Lord”
2681	ACT	22	17	znq6			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul begins to tell the crowd about his vision of Jesus.
2682	ACT	22	17	its2		ἐγένετο δέ μοι	1	And it happened to me that	This phrase is used here to mark where the action starts. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
2683	ACT	22	17	yr9l		γενέσθαι με ἐν ἐκστάσει	1	I fell into a trance	“I had a vision” or “God gave me a vision”
2684	ACT	22	18	jy2c		ἰδεῖν αὐτὸν λέγοντά μοι	1	I saw him saying to me	“I saw Jesus as he said to me”
2685	ACT	22	18	qul6		οὐ παραδέξονταί σου μαρτυρίαν περὶ ἐμοῦ	1	they will not accept your testimony about me	“those who live in Jerusalem will not believe what you tell them about me”
2686	ACT	22	19	q5cl			0	General Information:	Here the word “they” refers to the non-believing Jews in Jerusalem.
2687	ACT	22	19	p7gz			0	Connecting Statement:	This ends what Paul was able to say to the crowd of Jewish people by the fortress.
2688	ACT	22	19	im4n	figs-rpronouns	αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται	1	they themselves know	The word themselves is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
2689	ACT	22	19	da1e		κατὰ τὰς συναγωγὰς	1	according to the synagogues	“in each of the synagogues” or “in every synagogue.” Paul went to synagogues to find Jews who believed in Jesus.
2690	ACT	22	20	y7t1	figs-metonymy	ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου	1	the blood of Stephen your witness was spilled	Here blood stands for Stephen’s life. To spill blood means to kill. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “they killed Stephen who testified about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2691	ACT	22	22	fj9x			0	General Information:	Here the words “him” and the first two words “he” refer to Paul. The word “He” and the last “he” refer to the chief captain.
2692	ACT	22	22	ta8z		αἶρε ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς τὸν τοιοῦτον	1	Remove such a one from the earth	The phrase from the earth adds emphasis to “Remove such a one.” Alternate translation: “Kill him”
2693	ACT	22	23	ylr7		κραυγαζόντων τε αὐτῶν	1	And as they were shouting	The phrase as they were is used to mark two events that are happening at the same time.
2694	ACT	22	23	b6a7	translate-symaction	ῥιπτούντων τὰ ἱμάτια, καὶ κονιορτὸν βαλλόντων εἰς τὸν ἀέρα	1	throwing off their outer garments, and throwing dust into the air	These actions show that the Jews there are outraged because they feel Paul has spoken against God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2695	ACT	22	24	x7zv		χιλίαρχος	1	commander	a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers
2696	ACT	22	24	h6gp	figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσεν…εἰσάγεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	commanded him to be brought	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2697	ACT	22	24	sth6		τὴν παρεμβολήν	1	the fortress	This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.
2698	ACT	22	24	pz47	figs-activepassive	εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν	1	commanding him to be examined by flogging	The commander wanted to torture Paul by whipping him to ensure that he was telling the truth. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “ordering his soldiers to whip Paul to force him to tell the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2699	ACT	22	25	ar63			0	General Information:	Here the word “they” refers to the soldiers.
2700	ACT	22	25	st4k		τοῖς ἱμᾶσιν	1	for the whip	The whip was made from strips of leather or animal hide.
2701	ACT	22	25	yjw3	figs-rquestion	εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν?	1	Is it lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman and uncondemned?	Paul uses this question to make the centurion check the validity of having his soldiers whip Paul. Alternate translation: “It is not lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman and who was not given his legal right to a trial!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2702	ACT	22	26	pca7	figs-rquestion	τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν?	1	What are you about to do?	This question is used to urge the commander to reconsider his plan to whip Paul. Alternate translation: “You should not do this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2703	ACT	22	27	pe31			0	General Information:	Here the word “him” refers to Paul.
2704	ACT	22	27	e69y	figs-go	προσελθὼν…ὁ χιλίαρχος	1	having come, the commander	Here come can be translated as “gone.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2705	ACT	22	28	dr2w		ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην	1	I bought this citizenship with a large amount of money	“I paid a lot of money to the Roman authorities to become a citizen of Rome.” The captain may be making this statement because he knows how hard it is to become a Roman citizen, and he suspects Paul is not telling truth.
2706	ACT	22	28	r79c	figs-abstractnouns	ἐγὼ…τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην	1	I bought this citizenship	“I paid for citizenship.” The word citizenship is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “I became a citizen by paying for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2707	ACT	22	28	rly1		ἐγὼ δὲ καὶ γεγέννημαι	1	I, however, was indeed born as one	If a father is a Roman citizen, then his children become Roman citizens automatically when they are born. Paul's father was a Roman. Alternate translation: “But I am a citizen by birth!”
2708	ACT	22	29	ii8p		οἱ μέλλοντες…ἀνετάζειν	1	those who were about to examine	“the men who planned to examine” or “the men who were preparing to question”
2709	ACT	22	30	g33i			0	General Information:	Here the word “he” refers to the chief captain.
2710	ACT	22	30	kx58		ἔλυσεν αὐτόν	1	he released him	“the commander ordered his soldiers to untie Paul’s bonds”
2711	ACT	22	30	c5ia		καταγαγὼν τὸν Παῦλον	1	having brought down Paul	From the fortress, there is a stairway going down to the temple courts.
2712	ACT	23	intro	gbw5			0		Acts 23 General Notes Structure and formatting Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 23:5. Special concepts in this chapter Resurrection of the dead The Pharisees believed that after people died, they would become alive again and God would either reward them or punish them. The Sadducees believed that once people died, they stayed dead and would never become alive again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]]) “Called a curse” Some Jews promised God that they would not eat or drink until they killed Paul, and they asked God to punish them if they did not do what they had promised to do. Roman citizenship The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen. Important figures of speech in this chapter Whitewash This is a common metaphor in Scripture for appearing to be good or clean or righteous when one is evil or unclean or unrighteous. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2713	ACT	23	1	z2sq			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul stands before the chief priests and the council members (Acts 22:30).
2714	ACT	23	1	jru4		ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Here this means “fellow Jews.”
2715	ACT	23	1	nn2q		ἐγὼ πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ πεπολίτευμαι τῷ Θεῷ ἄχρι ταύτης τῆς ἡμέρας	1	I have lived as a citizen before God in all good conscience until this day	“I know that even to this day I have done what God has wanted me to do as a Jewish man”
2716	ACT	23	2	yz4n	translate-names	Ἁνανίας	1	Ananias	This is the name of a man. Though this is the same name, this not the same Ananias as in Acts 5:1 nor the same Ananias as in Acts 9:10. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2717	ACT	23	3	igq4	figs-metaphor	τοῖχε κεκονιαμένε	1	you whitewashed wall	This refers to a wall that was painted white to make it look clean. Paul told Ananias that just as a wall can be painted to look clean, so Ananias appeared to look morally clean, but he was really full of evil intent. Alternate translation: “you wall painted white” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2718	ACT	23	3	un7g	figs-rquestion	σὺ κάθῃ κρίνων με κατὰ τὸν νόμον, καὶ παρανομῶν κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι?	1	do you sit judging me by the law, yet command me to be struck, against the law?	Paul uses a question to point out Ananias’ hypocrisy. Alternate translation: “you sit there to judge me by the law, yet you command me to be struck against the law.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2719	ACT	23	3	m6nb	figs-activepassive	κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι	1	command me to be struck	This can be stated in active form. You can use the same word for strike as you did in the phrase “God will strike you.” Alternate translation: “command people to strike me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2720	ACT	23	4	lkh8	figs-rquestion	τὸν ἀρχιερέα τοῦ Θεοῦ λοιδορεῖς?	1	Are you insulting the high priest of God?	The men use this question to scold Paul for what he has said in Acts 23:3. Alternate translation: “You should not insult God’s high priest!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2721	ACT	23	5	e8lg	figs-explicit	γέγραπται γὰρ	1	For it is written	Paul is about to quote what Moses wrote in the law. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “For Moses wrote in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2722	ACT	23	6	pbe1		ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Here brothers means “fellow Jews”
2723	ACT	23	6	as3f		υἱὸς Φαρισαίων	1	a son of Pharisees	Here son means he is the literal son of a Pharisee and also the descendant of Pharisees. Alternate translation: “and my father and forefathers were Pharisees”
2724	ACT	23	6	ys5k	figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ κρίνομαι	1	I am being judged	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you are judging me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2725	ACT	23	6	iz18	figs-abstractnouns	περὶ ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	concerning the hope and resurrection of the dead	The word resurrection can be stated as “come back to life.” The word dead can be stated as “those who have died.” Alternate translation: “I have confidence that those who have died will come back to life again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2726	ACT	23	7	abs3		ἐσχίσθη τὸ πλῆθος	1	the crowd was divided	“the people in the crowd strongly disagreed with one another”
2727	ACT	23	8	gl1s	writing-background	Σαδδουκαῖοι μὲν γὰρ…Φαρισαῖοι δὲ	1	For the Sadducees … but the Pharisees	This is background information about the Sadducees and Pharisees. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
2728	ACT	23	9	eaf1		ἐγένετο δὲ κραυγὴ μεγάλη	1	So a large uproar occurred	“So they began shouting loudly at one another.” The word so marks an event that happened because of something else that happened previously. In this case, the previous event is Paul’s stating his belief in the resurrection.
2729	ACT	23	9	ayr8	figs-hypo	εἰ…πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος	1	what if a spirit has spoken to him, or an angel?	The Pharisees are rebuking the Sadducees by affirming that spirits and angels do exist and can speak to people. Alternate translation: “perhaps a spirit or an angel has spoken to him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
2730	ACT	23	10	dr1d	figs-abstractnouns	πολλῆς δὲ γινομένης στάσεως	1	And when a great argument happened	The phrase a great argument can be re-stated as “to argue violently.” Alternate translation: “And when they began to argue violently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2731	ACT	23	10	s65i		χιλίαρχος	1	commander	a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers
2732	ACT	23	10	f568	figs-activepassive	διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν	1	that Paul would be torn to pieces by them	This can be stated in active form. The phrase be torn to pieces might be an exaggeration of how the people might harm Paul. Alternate translation: “that they might tear Paul to pieces” or “that they would cause Paul great physical harm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2733	ACT	23	10	man3		ἁρπάσαι αὐτὸν	1	to seize him by force	“to use physical force to take him away”
2734	ACT	23	10	ap3c		εἰς τὴν παρεμβολήν	1	into the fortress	This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.
2735	ACT	23	11	i9w5		τῇ…ἐπιούσῃ νυκτὶ	1	the following night	This means the night after the day Paul went before the council. Alternate translation: “that night”
2736	ACT	23	11	r4q4	figs-ellipsis	εἰς Ῥώμην μαρτυρῆσαι	1	to testify in Rome	The words “about me” are understood. Alternate translation: “to bear witness about me in Rome” or “to testify about me in Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2737	ACT	23	12	fm3y			0	Connecting Statement:	While Paul was in the prison at the fortress, the disbelieving religious Jews vow to kill him.
2738	ACT	23	12	klb4		ποιήσαντες συστροφὴν	1	having formed a conspiracy	“having organized a group with a shared purpose” here, to kill Paul.
2739	ACT	23	12	g3sj	figs-explicit	ἀνεθεμάτισαν ἑαυτοὺς	1	cursed themselves	It can be made explicit what would cause them to be cursed. Alternate translation: “asked God to curse them if they did not do what they promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2740	ACT	23	13	f1u2	translate-numbers	τεσσεράκοντα οἱ	1	40 who	“forty men who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2741	ACT	23	13	u5s5		οἱ ταύτην τὴν συνωμοσίαν ποιησάμενοι	1	who had formed this conspiracy	“who had made this plan” or “who planned to kill Paul”
2742	ACT	23	14	zb6w	figs-you		0	General Information:	Here the word “They” refers to the forty Jews in Acts 23:13. Here “you” is plural and refers to the chief priests and elders. Both “us” and “we” refer to the forty Jews who planned to kill Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2743	ACT	23	14	ur73	figs-metaphor	ἀναθέματι ἀνεθεματίσαμεν ἑαυτοὺς, μηδενὸς γεύσασθαι ἕως οὗ ἀποκτείνωμεν τὸν Παῦλον	1	We have cursed ourselves with a curse, to eat nothing until we have killed Paul	To make a vow and to ask God to curse them if they do not fulfill their vow is spoken of as if the curse were an object that they carry on their shoulders. Alternate translation: “We have sworn to eat nothing until we have killed Paul. We asked God to curse us if we do not do what we promised to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2744	ACT	23	15	w418		νῦν οὖν	1	Now, therefore	“Because what we have just said is true” or “Because we have put ourselves under this curse”
2745	ACT	23	15	q9e6		νῦν	1	Now	This does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
2746	ACT	23	15	q9mb		καταγάγῃ αὐτὸν εἰς ὑμᾶς	1	he will bring him down to you	“the commander will bring Paul from the fortress to meet with you”
2747	ACT	23	15	m133		ὡς μέλλοντας διαγινώσκειν ἀκριβέστερον τὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ	1	as if you are going to examine more seriously the things concerning him	“as though you want to learn more about what Paul has done”
2748	ACT	23	16	d7cy			0	General Information:	Here the word “he” refers to Paul’s nephew. The word “him” refers to the chief captain.
2749	ACT	23	16	w6fe		ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀδελφῆς Παύλου	1	the son of the sister of Paul	“the son of Paul’s sister” or “Paul’s nephew”
2750	ACT	23	16	pj5h		ἀκούσας…τὴν ἐνέδραν	1	having heard of the ambush	“hearing that they were ready to ambush Paul” or “finding out that they were waiting to kill Paul”
2751	ACT	23	16	a5hx		τὴν παρεμβολὴν	1	the fortress	This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in Acts 21:34.
2752	ACT	23	18	abd0		ὁ μὲν οὖν παραλαβὼν αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν	1	So having taken him, he brought him	“So taking the young man, the centurion brought him”
2753	ACT	23	18	lzf3		ὁ δέσμιος, Παῦλος, προσκαλεσάμενός με	1	The prisoner, Paul, having summoned me	“The prisoner named Paul after he asked me to come talk with him”
2754	ACT	23	18	ju2b		τοῦτον τὸν νεανίαν	1	this young man	Since the chief captain calls him a young man, this suggests Paul’s nephew may have been 12 to 15 years old.
2755	ACT	23	19	yp12		ἐπιλαβόμενος…τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ ὁ χιλίαρχος	1	the commander, having taken hold of his hand	Since the commander took the young man by the hand and calls him a young man (verse 18), this suggests Paul’s nephew may have been 12 to 15 years old.
2756	ACT	23	20	uv6r	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι συνέθεντο	1	The Jews have agreed	This does not mean all Jews, but all of the group that was there. Alternate translation: “Some of the Jews have agreed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2757	ACT	23	20	wp5d		Παῦλον καταγάγῃς	1	you might bring Paul down	“you would bring Paul down from the fortress”
2758	ACT	23	20	fev5		ὡς μέλλων τι ἀκριβέστερον πυνθάνεσθαι περὶ αὐτοῦ.	1	as if they were going to inquire something more concerning him	“pretending they want to learn more about what Paul has done”
2759	ACT	23	21	vdr5	translate-numbers	ἄνδρες…τεσσεράκοντα	1	40 … men	“forty … men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2760	ACT	23	21	i2k9		ἐνεδρεύουσιν…αὐτὸν	1	lie in wait for him	“are ready to ambush Paul” or “are waiting to kill Paul”
2761	ACT	23	21	r695		οἵτινες ἀνεθεμάτισαν ἑαυτοὺς μήτε φαγεῖν μήτε πιεῖν, ἕως οὗ ἀνέλωσιν αὐτόν	1	who have cursed themselves neither to eat nor to drink until they have killed him	“who have sworn to eat or drink nothing until they have killed Paul. And they asked God to curse them if they do not do what they promised to do”
2762	ACT	23	22	av3g			0	General Information:	Here the word “he” refers the chief captain.
2763	ACT	23	22	av3h			0	General Information:	Felix, who resided at Caesarea, was the roman governor of the area.
2764	ACT	23	23	wk7k		προσκαλεσάμενός	1	having summoned	“having called to himself”
2765	ACT	23	23	b7z3	translate-numbers	ἱππεῖς ἑβδομήκοντα	1	70 horsemen	“seventy horsemen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2766	ACT	23	23	mgi9	translate-numbers	δεξιολάβους διακοσίους	1	200 spearmen	“two hundred soldiers that are armed with spears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2767	ACT	23	23	kg8s		τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός	1	third hour of the night	This was about 9:00 p.m. at night.
2768	ACT	23	25	vg8x			0	General Information:	The chief captain writes a letter to Governor Felix about the arrest of Paul.
2769	ACT	23	25	vg8y	translate-names		0	General Information:	Claudius Lysias is the name of the chief captain. Governor Felix was the Roman governor over the whole region. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2770	ACT	23	26	zf93	figs-123person	Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι, χαίρειν	1	Claudius Lysias to the most excellent Governor Felix, greetings	This is a formal introduction to the letter. The commander begins by referring to himself. You can translate it in the first person. The words “am writing” are understood. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, am writing to you, the most excellent Governor Felix. Greetings to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2771	ACT	23	26	u2ih		τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι	1	to the most excellent Governor Felix	“to Governor Felix who deserves greatest honors”
2772	ACT	23	27	zr7l	figs-synecdoche	τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον συνλημφθέντα ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	This man, having been seized the Jews	Here the Jews means “some of the Jews.” This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Some of the Jews seized this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2773	ACT	23	27	ha13	figs-activepassive	μέλλοντα ἀναιρεῖσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτῶν	1	about to be killed by them	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “they were ready to kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2774	ACT	23	27	v78t		ἐπιστὰς σὺν τῷ στρατεύματι, ἐξειλάμην	1	having come with detachment of soldiers, I rescued	“I with my soldiers arrived at the place where Paul and these Jews were and I rescued him”
2775	ACT	23	28	lb1a			0	General Information:	Here the word “I” refers to Claudius Lysias, the chief captain.
2776	ACT	23	28	lb1b			0	General Information:	The word “they” refers to the group of Jews who accused Paul.
2777	ACT	23	28	lb1c	figs-you		0	General Information:	The word “you” is singular and refers to Governor Felix. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
2778	ACT	23	28	pmq7			0	Connecting Statement:	The chief captain ends his letter to Governor Felix.
2779	ACT	23	29	zt4f	figs-activepassive	ὃν εὗρον ἐνκαλούμενον περὶ ζητημάτων τοῦ νόμου αὐτῶν	1	I learned that he was being accused concerning questions of their own law	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I learned that they were accusing him about things in their own law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2780	ACT	23	29	wsh2	figs-abstractnouns	μηδὲν δὲ ἄξιον θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἔχοντα ἔγκλημα	1	but there was no accusation worthy of death or imprisonment	The abstract nouns accusation, death, and imprisonment can be stated as verbs. Alternate translation: “but nobody accused him of anything that should cause Roman authorities to kill him or to send him to prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2781	ACT	23	30	i2ji	figs-activepassive	μηνυθείσης δέ μοι ἐπιβουλῆς εἰς τὸν ἄνδρα ἔσεσθαι	1	And when a plot was to be against the man was revealed to me	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “And when I later learned that there was a plot to kill this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2782	ACT	23	31	ifs1	translate-names		0	General Information:	Here the first word “him” refers to Paul; the second use of the word “him” refers to Governor Felix. Antipatris was a city built by Herod in honor of his father, Antipater. It stood at a site located today in central Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2783	ACT	23	31	s9rf			0	Connecting Statement:	This ends Paul’s time under arrest in Jerusalem and begins his time of arrest in Caesarea with Governor Felix.
2784	ACT	23	31	ny4k		οἱ…οὖν στρατιῶται κατὰ τὸ διατεταγμένον αὐτοῖς	1	So the soldiers, according to what had been commanded to them	The word so marks an event that happened because of something else that happened previously. In this case, the previous event is the commander's ordering the soldiers to escort Paul.
2785	ACT	23	31	ptv4		ἀναλαβόντες τὸν Παῦλον, ἤγαγον διὰ νυκτὸς	1	having taken Paul, brought him by night	Here brought can be translated as “took.” Alternate translation: “they got Paul and took him at night”
2786	ACT	23	32	abd1		ὑπέστρεψαν	1	having allowed … they returned	Here they refers to the foot soldiers who left the horsemen and returned to their fortress.
2787	ACT	23	33	abx1		οἵτινες εἰσελθόντες	1	When they had entered	Here they refers to the horsemen who took Paul all the way to Caesarea.
2788	ACT	23	34	u44w			0	General Information:	Here the first and second words “he” refer to Governor Felix, the third word “he” and the word “him” refer to Paul, and the last word “he” refers to Governor Felix. The words “you” and your” refer to Paul.
2789	ACT	23	34	abd2		ἀναγνοὺς…ἐπερωτήσας…πυθόμενος	1	when he had read the letter … had asked … had learned	All of these actions are things the governor did.
2790	ACT	23	34	dtx1	figs-quotations	ἐπερωτήσας ἐκ ποίας ἐπαρχείας ἐστὶν	1	had asked what province he was from	This can be stated as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “he asked Paul, ‘What province are you from?’ When” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2791	ACT	23	35	dwv2	figs-quotations	ἔφη	1	he said	This sentence, which begins with the words “When he learned” in verse 43, can be stated as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Paul said, ‘I am from Cilicia.’ Then the governor said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2792	ACT	23	35	uji1		διακούσομαί σου	1	I will hear you fully	“I will listen to all you have to say”
2793	ACT	23	35	mga2		κελεύσας…φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν	1	having commanded him to be kept	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “having commanded soldiers to keep him” or “and commanded soldiers to restrain him”
2794	ACT	24	intro	j74u			0		Acts 24 General Notes Structure and formatting Paul told the governor that he had not done what the Jews were accusing him of doing and that the governor should not punish him for what he did do. Special concepts in this chapter Respect Both the Jewish leaders (Acts 24:2-4) and Paul (Acts 24:10) began their speeches with words that show respect to the governor. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter Governmental leaders The words “governor,” “commander,” and “centurion” may be difficult to translate into some languages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2795	ACT	24	1	qw1r	figs-you		0	General Information:	Here the word “you” refers to Felix, the governor. Here “we” refers to the citizens under Felix. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2796	ACT	24	1	bc8k			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul is on trial in Caesarea. Tertullus presents Governor Felix with the charges against Paul.
2797	ACT	24	1	e8rp		μετὰ δὲ πέντε ἡμέρας	1	And after five days	“And five days after the Roman soldiers took Paul to Caesarea”
2798	ACT	24	1	n9gu	translate-names	Ἁνανίας	1	Ananias	This is the name of a man. This is not the same Ananias as in Acts 5:1 nor the same Ananias as in Acts 9:10. See how you translated this in Acts 23:1. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2799	ACT	24	1	f3vx		ῥήτορος	1	an orator	“a lawyer.” Tertullus was an expert in Roman law who was there to accuse Paul in court.
2800	ACT	24	1	xm6c	translate-names	Τερτύλλου	1	Tertullus	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2801	ACT	24	1	q7wj		κατέβη	1	went there	“went to Caesarea where Paul was”
2802	ACT	24	1	nq9x		τῷ ἡγεμόνι	1	to the governor	“in the presence of the governor who was judge in the court”
2803	ACT	24	1	zm5e		ἐνεφάνισαν…κατὰ τοῦ Παύλου	1	appeared … against Paul	“came there … to argue before the governor the case that Paul had broken the law.”
2804	ACT	24	2	e6zg	figs-exclusive	πολλῆς εἰρήνης τυγχάνοντες	1	We have obtained great peace	Here we refers to the citizens under Felix. Alternate translation: “we, the people that you govern, have obtained great peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2805	ACT	24	2	sv8c		καὶ διορθωμάτων γινομένων τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ διὰ τῆς σῆς προνοίας	1	and good reforms have happened to our nation through your foresight	“and your planning has greatly improved our nation”
2806	ACT	24	3	r5jl	figs-abstractnouns	μετὰ πάσης εὐχαριστίας	1	with all thankfulness	The word thankfulness is an abstract noun. It can be stated as an adjective or verb. Alternate translation: “so we are very thankful and we welcome everything that you do” or “so we thank you very much and welcome everything that you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2807	ACT	24	3	q3fj		κράτιστε Φῆλιξ	1	most excellent Felix	“Governor Felix who deserves greatest honor.” Felix was the Roman governor over the whole region. See how you translated a similar phrase in Acts 23:25.
2808	ACT	24	4	tyq8	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	The word “we” refers to Ananias, certain elders, and Tertullus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2809	ACT	24	4	jww2		ἵνα δὲ μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον σε ἐνκόπτω	1	However, in order that we may not bother you any longer	Possible meanings are (1) “so that I will not take up too much of your time” or (2) “so that I will not tire you”
2810	ACT	24	4	xfm5		ἀκοῦσαί…ἡμῶν συντόμως, τῇ σῇ ἐπιεικείᾳ	1	to briefly listen to us in your kindness	“kindly listen to my short speech”
2811	ACT	24	5	i1qs		εὑρόντες…τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον λοιμὸν	1	we have found this man to be a troublemaker	“we have learned that Paul is always causing trouble”
2812	ACT	24	5	k1v1	figs-hyperbole	πᾶσι τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις τοῖς κατὰ τὴν οἰκουμένην	1	among all the Jews who are throughout the world	The word all here is probably an exaggeration used to strengthen their accusation against Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2813	ACT	24	5	zg4a	figs-explicit	πρωτοστάτην…τῆς τῶν Ναζωραίων αἱρέσεως	1	he is a leader of the sect of the Nazarenes	The phrase “the sect of the Nazarenes” is another name for the Christians. Alternate translation: “he leads the entire group whom people call the followers of the Nazarene” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2814	ACT	24	5	n6zb		αἱρέσεως	1	of sect	This is a smaller group of people within a larger group. Tertullus considers the Christians to be a small group within Judaism.
2815	ACT	24	7	ujn8	figs-you		0	General Information:	Here the word “you” is singular and refers to Governor Felix. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
2816	ACT	24	7	xkr4			0	Connecting Statement:	Tertullus finishes presenting the charges against Paul before Governor Felix.
2817	ACT	24	8	e26a		ἐπιγνῶναι ὧν ἡμεῖς κατηγοροῦμεν αὐτοῦ	1	to learn of what we are accusing him	“to learn that we are bringing very serious charges against him” or “to learn whether or not he is guilty of the things of which we are accusing him”
2818	ACT	24	9	rq5f	figs-synecdoche	οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	This refers to the Jewish leaders who were there at Paul’s trial. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2819	ACT	24	10	my1c			0	General Information:	Here the word “they” refers to the Jews who were accusing Paul.
2820	ACT	24	10	ict8			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul responds to Governor Felix about the charges brought against him.
2821	ACT	24	10	s92a		νεύσαντος…τοῦ ἡγεμόνος	1	and the governor motioned	“and the governor gestured”
2822	ACT	24	10	uu7a	figs-metonymy	κριτὴν τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ	1	a judge to this nation	Here this nation refers to the people of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “a judge for the people of the Jewish nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2823	ACT	24	10	sr5t		ἀπολογοῦμαι	1	I … make my defense	“I … explain my situation”
2824	ACT	24	11	dr4u	translate-numbers	ἡμέραι δώδεκα, ἀφ’ ἧς	1	12 days from when	“twelve days since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
2825	ACT	24	12	wbf6		ἢ ἐπίστασιν ποιοῦντα ὄχλου	1	nor causing a rebellion of the crowd	“and I did not provoke the crowd to rebel against Rome”
2826	ACT	24	14	c5xa		ὁμολογῶ…τοῦτό σοι	1	I confess this to you	“I acknowledge this to you”
2827	ACT	24	14	k79p		ὅτι κατὰ τὴν Ὁδὸν	1	that according to the Way	The phrase the Way was a title used for Christianity during Paul’s time.
2828	ACT	24	14	rqu3		λέγουσιν αἵρεσιν	1	they call a sect	This is a smaller group of people within a larger group. Tertullus considers the Christians to be a small group within Judaism. See how you translated sect in Acts 24:5.
2829	ACT	24	14	cg73		οὕτως λατρεύω τῷ πατρῴῳ Θεῷ	1	in that way I serve the God of our fathers	Paul uses the phrase “in that way” to mean that he, as a believer in Jesus, serves God just as their Jewish ancestors did. He is not leading a sect or teaching something new that is opposed to their ancient religion.
2830	ACT	24	15	nv5a		καὶ αὐτοὶ	1	also these men	“the same as these men.” Here these men refers to the Jews who are accusing Paul in court.
2831	ACT	24	15	qza8	figs-abstractnouns	ἀνάστασιν μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι, δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων	1	that there is going to be a resurrection of both the righteous and of the unrighteous	The abstract noun resurrection can be stated with the verb “resurrect.” Alternate translation: “that God will resurrect all who have died, both the righteous and the unrighteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2832	ACT	24	15	x1yd	figs-nominaladj	δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων	1	of both the righteous and the unrighteous	These nominal adjectives refer to righteous people and unrighteous people. AT “both of righteous people and unrighteous people” or “both of those who have done what is right and those who have done what is evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2833	ACT	24	16	sfw4		αὐτὸς ἀσκῶ…διὰ παντός	1	I myself always strive	“I myself always work hard” or “I always do my best”
2834	ACT	24	16	kcg8	figs-metonymy	ἀπρόσκοπον συνείδησιν ἔχειν πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν	1	to have a blameless conscience before God	Here conscience refers to a person’s inner morality that chooses between right and wrong. Alternate translation: “to be blameless before God” or “to always do what is right before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2835	ACT	24	16	va3b		πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν	1	before God	“in the presence of God”
2836	ACT	24	17	p92m		δὲ	1	Now	This word marks a shift in Paul’s argument. Here he explains the situation in Jerusalem when some of the Jews arrested him.
2837	ACT	24	17	py9v		δι’ ἐτῶν…πλειόνων	1	after many years	“after many years away from Jerusalem”
2838	ACT	24	17	ryk6	figs-go	ἐλεημοσύνας ποιήσων εἰς τὸ ἔθνος μου, παρεγενόμην καὶ προσφοράς	1	I came to bring alms to my nation, and offerings	Here I came can be translated as “I went.” Alternate translation: “I went to help my people by bringing them money as a gift to the poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
2839	ACT	24	18	pk2m		ἡγνισμένον ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ	1	having been cleansed in the temple	“in the temple after I had finished a ceremony to purify myself”
2840	ACT	24	18	x6iy	figs-explicit	οὐ μετὰ ὄχλου, οὐδὲ μετὰ θορύβου	1	not with a crowd nor with an uproar	This can be stated as a separate new sentence. Alternate translation: “I had not gathered a crowd nor was I trying to start a riot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2841	ACT	24	19	ntg3		εἴ τι ἔχοιεν	1	if they have anything	“if they have anything to say”
2842	ACT	24	20	npt5			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul finishes responding to Governor Felix about the charges brought against him.
2843	ACT	24	20	ag5d		αὐτοὶ	1	these	This refers to the members of the council who were present in Jerusalem at Paul’s trial.
2844	ACT	24	20	hnt9		εἰπάτωσαν, τί εὗρον ἀδίκημα	1	let … say what wrong they found	“let … prove what I did wrong”
2845	ACT	24	21	ds1s	figs-abstractnouns	περὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν	1	concerning the resurrection of the dead	The abstract noun resurrection can be stated as “God brings back to life.” Alternate translation: “because I believe that God will bring back to life those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2846	ACT	24	21	d2lm	figs-activepassive	ἐγὼ κρίνομαι σήμερον ἐφ’ ὑμῶν	1	I am being judged before you today	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you are judging me today” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2847	ACT	24	22	w1tn	translate-names		0	General Information:	Felix is the Roman governor of the area who resides at Caesarea. See how you translated this name in Acts 23:24. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2848	ACT	24	22	a87f		τῆς Ὁδοῦ	1	the Way	This is a title for Christianity. See how you translated this in Acts 9:2.
2849	ACT	24	22	k1f7		Λυσίας	1	Lysias	This is the name of the commander. See how you translated this name in Acts 23:26.
2850	ACT	24	22	z5f9		καταβῇ	1	may come down	“may come down from Jerusalem.” Jerusalem was higher than Caesarea so it was normal for them to speak of coming down from Jerusalem.
2851	ACT	24	22	ldi8		διαγνώσομαι τὰ καθ’ ὑμᾶς	1	I will decide the things concerning you	“I will make a decision concerning these accusations against you” or “I will judge whether you are guilty”
2852	ACT	24	23	sxy2		ἔχειν…ἄνεσιν	1	to have rest	“to grant Paul some freedom not otherwise granted to prisoners”
2853	ACT	24	24	wus4		μετὰ δὲ ἡμέρας τινὰς	1	But after some days	“But after several days”
2854	ACT	24	24	qy9y	translate-names	Δρουσίλλῃ, τῇ ἰδίᾳ γυναικὶ	1	Drusilla his own wife	Drusilla is a woman’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2855	ACT	24	24	xmq5	figs-explicit	οὔσῃ Ἰουδαίᾳ	1	who was a Jewess	This means a female Jew. Alternate translation: “who was a Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2856	ACT	24	25	b8v1		ἔμφοβος γενόμενος, ὁ Φῆλιξ	1	Felix, having became frightened	Felix may have felt conviction of his sins.
2857	ACT	24	25	p8yi		τὸ νῦν ἔχον	1	Go away for now	“Leave me for a while”
2858	ACT	24	26	h4v7		χρήματα δοθήσεται αὐτῷ ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου	1	money will be given to him by Paul	Felix was hoping Paul would offer him a bribe to set him free.
2859	ACT	24	26	n45p		διὸ καὶ πυκνότερον αὐτὸν μεταπεμπόμενος, ὡμίλει αὐτῷ	1	and therefore often summoning him, he was speaking to him	“and so Felix often sent for Paul and spoke with Paul”
2860	ACT	24	27	ur2y	translate-names	ἔλαβεν διάδοχον ὁ Φῆλιξ Πόρκιον Φῆστον	1	Felix received a successor—Porcius Festus	Porcius Festus was the new roman governor who succeeded Felix. Alternate translation: “Porcius Festus replaced Felix as the governor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2861	ACT	24	27	p59c	figs-synecdoche	θέλων…χάριτα καταθέσθαι τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις	1	wanted to gain favor with the Jews	Here the Jews refers to the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “wanting the Jewish leaders to like him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2862	ACT	24	27	gln6		ὁ Φῆλιξ…κατέλιπε τὸν Παῦλον δεδεμένον	2	Felix left Paul imprisoned	“Felix kept Paul in prison”
2863	ACT	25	intro	b6uk			0		Acts 25 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Favor This word is used in two different ways in this chapter. When the Jewish leaders asked Festus for a favor, they were asking him to do something special for them on that day. They wanted him to do for them something that he would not usually do. When Festus “wanted to gain the favor of the Jews,” he wanted them to like him and be willing to obey him in the months and years to come. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/favor]]) Roman citizenship The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. Roman officials could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way they would treat a non-citizen.
2864	ACT	25	1	c84u			0	General Information:	Festus becomes the governor of Caesarea. See how you translated this name in Acts 24:27.
2865	ACT	25	1	tj76			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues to be a prisoner in Caesarea.
2866	ACT	25	1	w8h3		οὖν	1	then	This word marks the beginning of a new event in the story.
2867	ACT	25	1	i7t9		Φῆστος…ἐπιβὰς τῇ ἐπαρχείᾳ	1	Festus … having arrived in the province	Possible meanings are (1) Festus arrived in the area to begin his rule or (2) Festus simply arrived in the area.
2868	ACT	25	1	zz4l		ἀνέβη εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀπὸ Καισαρείας	1	went from Caesarea up to Jerusalem	The phrase went up is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Caesarea.
2869	ACT	25	2	qnc8	figs-metaphor	ἐνεφάνισάν…αὐτῷ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρῶτοι τῶν Ἰουδαίων κατὰ τοῦ Παύλου	1	the chief priest and the most prominent of the Jews made clear to him the things against Paul	This speaks about accusations as if they were an object that a person could bring to someone else. Alternate translation: “the chief priest and the important Jews accused Paul to Festus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2870	ACT	25	2	uj5p		παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν	1	they begged him	Here the word him refers to Festus.
2871	ACT	25	3	w8um		χάριν κατ’ αὐτοῦ	1	a favor against him	Here the word him refers to Paul.
2872	ACT	25	3	qz46		ὅπως μεταπέμψηται αὐτὸν εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ	1	that he might summon him to Jerusalem	This means that Festus would order his soldiers to bring Paul to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “that he might order his soldiers to bring Paul to Jerusalem”
2873	ACT	25	3	pg8x		ἀνελεῖν αὐτὸν κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν	1	to kill him along the way	They were going to ambush Paul on the way to Jerusalem.
2874	ACT	25	4	p3tt	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “us” refers to Festus and the Romans traveling with him, but not to his audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2875	ACT	25	4	v5f9	figs-quotations	Φῆστος ἀπεκρίθη, τηρεῖσθαι τὸν Παῦλον εἰς Καισάρειαν, ἑαυτὸν δὲ μέλλειν ἐν τάχει ἐκπορεύεσθαι	1	Festus answered that Paul was being held at Caesarea, and that he himself was about to go there in haste.	This can be stated as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Festus said, ‘Paul is being held prisoner in Caesarea, and I myself will soon return there.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
2876	ACT	25	5	a54h		οἱ οὖν ἐν ὑμῖν, φησίν, δυνατοὶ συνκαταβάντες	1	He said, “Therefore, the leaders among you, having come down together	“He said, ‘Therefore, your leaders should go to Caesarea with us and”
2877	ACT	25	5	iz98		εἴ τί ἐστιν ἐν τῷ ἀνδρὶ ἄτοπον	1	If there is something wrong with the man	“If Paul has done anything wrong”
2878	ACT	25	5	nei6		κατηγορείτωσαν αὐτοῦ	1	you should accuse him	“you should accuse him of violating laws” or “you should bring charges against him”
2879	ACT	25	6	fi27			0	General Information:	Here the first three times the word “he” is used as well as the word “him,” the words refer to Festus. The fourth word “he” refers to Paul. The word “they” refers to the Jews who came from Jerusalem.
2880	ACT	25	6	s69c		καταβὰς εἰς Καισάρειαν	1	he went down to Caesarea	Jerusalem is higher geographically than Caesarea. It was common to speak of coming down from Jerusalem.
2881	ACT	25	6	qv24	figs-metonymy	καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος	1	having sat in the judgment seat	Here judgment seat refers to Festus’ ruling as judge over Paul’s trial. Alternate translation: “having sat upon the seat where he acted as judge” or “having sat down as judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2882	ACT	25	6	j7c5	figs-activepassive	τὸν Παῦλον ἀχθῆναι	1	Paul to be brought to him	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “his soldiers bring Paul to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2883	ACT	25	7	v4v8		παραγενομένου δὲ αὐτοῦ	1	And when he had come	“And when he came and stood before Festus”
2884	ACT	25	7	e7g2	figs-metaphor	πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα καταφέροντες	1	bringing many and serious charges	Charging a person with a crime is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could bring to court. Alternate translation: “they spoke against Paul many serious things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2885	ACT	25	8	hc3w	figs-synecdoche	εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν	1	against the temple	Paul says he did not break any rules about who could enter the Jerusalem temple. Alternate translation: “against the entry rules of the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2886	ACT	25	9	m49r			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul asks to be taken before Caesar for judgment.
2887	ACT	25	9	b49x	figs-synecdoche	θέλων τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις χάριν καταθέσθαι	1	wanting to do a favor for the Jews	Here the Jews means the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “wanting to please the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2888	ACT	25	9	qe8h		εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀναβὰς	1	to go up to Jerusalem	Jerusalem was higher geographically than Caesarea. It was common to speak of going up to Jerusalem.
2889	ACT	25	9	wi2d	figs-activepassive	ἐκεῖ περὶ τούτων κριθῆναι ἐπ’ ἐμοῦ	1	and to be judged there before me about these things	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “where I will judge you with regard to these charges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2890	ACT	25	10	u1ef	figs-metonymy	ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι, οὗ με δεῖ κρίνεσθαι	1	I stand before the judgment seat of Caesar, where it is necessary for me to be judged	The judgment seat refers to Caesar’s authority to judge Paul. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I am already being judged by Roman authority, which is the only place where I should be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2891	ACT	25	11	el9d	figs-hypo	εἰ μὲν οὖν ἀδικῶ καὶ ἄξιον θανάτου πέπραχά τι, οὐ παραιτοῦμαι τὸ ἀποθανεῖν; εἰ δὲ οὐδέν ἐστιν ὧν οὗτοι κατηγοροῦσίν μου, οὐδείς με δύναται αὐτοῖς χαρίσασθαι	1	Therefore, if I have done wrong and have done anything worthy of death, I do not refuse to die. But if there is nothing of which they can accuse me, no one is able to hand me over to them	Paul is stating a hypothetical situation. If he were guilty, he would accept the punishment, but he knows that he is not guilty. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
2892	ACT	25	11	ta55		ἄξιον θανάτου πέπραχά τι	1	have done anything worthy of death	“have done some wrong that deserves the death penalty”
2893	ACT	25	11	hxr1		εἰ δὲ οὐδέν ἐστιν ὧν οὗτοι κατηγοροῦσίν μου	1	But if there is nothing of which they can accuse me	“But if the charges against me are not true”
2894	ACT	25	11	hr23		οὐδείς με δύναται αὐτοῖς χαρίσασθαι	1	no one is able to hand me over to them	Possible meanings are (1) Festus does not have the legal authority to hand Paul over to these false accusers or (2) Paul was saying that if he has done nothing wrong, the governor should not give into the request of the Jews.
2895	ACT	25	11	b1bf		Καίσαρα ἐπικαλοῦμαι	1	I appeal to Caesar	“I ask that I go before Caesar so he himself can judge me”
2896	ACT	25	12	t96z		μετὰ τοῦ συμβουλίου	1	with the council	This is not the Sanhedrin that is referred to as council throughout Acts. This is a political council in the Roman government. Alternate translation: “with his own government advisors”
2897	ACT	25	13	izu8	writing-participants		0	General Information:	King Agrippa and Bernice are new people in the story. Though he ruled over only a few territories, King Agrippa is the current reigning king in Palestine. Bernice is Agrippa’s sister.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2898	ACT	25	13	ge5h			0	Connecting Statement:	Festus explains Paul’s case to King Agrippa.
2899	ACT	25	13	c3gc		δὲ	1	Now	This word marks the beginning of a new event in the story.
2900	ACT	25	13	ukd3		ἀσπασάμενοι τὸν Φῆστον	1	paid their respects to Festus	“to make a formal visit to greet Festus”
2901	ACT	25	14	x8jf	figs-activepassive	ἀνήρ τὶς ἐστιν καταλελειμμένος ὑπὸ Φήλικος δέσμιος	1	There is a certain man who has been left behind by Felix, a prisoner	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “When Felix left office, he left a man in prison here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2902	ACT	25	14	z7yw		Φήλικος	1	Felix	Felix was the Roman governor of the area who resided in Caesarea. See how you translated this name in Acts 23:24.
2903	ACT	25	15	b6hx	figs-metaphor	περὶ οὗ…ἐνεφάνισαν	1	brought charges concerning him	To charge someone in court is spoken of as if it were an object that a person brings to court. Alternate translation: “spoke to me against this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2904	ACT	25	15	hyp5	figs-abstractnouns	αἰτούμενοι κατ’ αὐτοῦ καταδίκην	1	requesting a judgment against him	The abstract noun “judgment” can be expressed as a verb. Alternate translation: “asking me to judge him” or “requesting that I judge him to be guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2905	ACT	25	16	e4tk	figs-metaphor	χαρίζεσθαί τινα ἄνθρωπον	1	to hand over any man	Here hand over represents sending someone to people who will punish or kill him. Alternate translation: “to let someone punish anyone” or “to condemn anyone to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2906	ACT	25	16	xjb4	figs-idiom	πρὶν ἢ ὁ κατηγορούμενος, κατὰ πρόσωπον ἔχοι τοὺς κατηγόρους	1	before the one who is accused may have his accusers face to face	Here have his accusers face to face is an idiom that means to meet in person with the people who accuse him. Alternate translation: “before the person whom others have accused of a crime had met directly with those who accused him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2907	ACT	25	17	z6g2		οὖν	1	Therefore	“Because what I have just said is true.” Fetus had just said that an accused man should be able to face his accusers and make his defense.
2908	ACT	25	17	rm5z		συνελθόντων…ἐνθάδε	1	when they had come together here	“when the Jewish leaders had come to meet with me here”
2909	ACT	25	17	efe2	figs-metonymy	καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος	1	having sat in the judgment seat	Here judgment seat refers to Festus ruling over Paul’s trial as judge. Alternate translation: “having sat upon the seat to act as judge” or “having sat down as judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2910	ACT	25	17	hm6g	figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσα ἀχθῆναι τὸν ἄνδρα	1	I commanded the man to be brought in	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I ordered the soldiers to bring Paul before me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2911	ACT	25	19	d1qm		τῆς ἰδίας δεισιδαιμονίας	1	their own religion	Here religion means the belief system people have toward life and the supernatural.
2912	ACT	25	20	y9bv	figs-activepassive	κἀκεῖ κρίνεσθαι περὶ τούτων	1	and there to be judged concerning these things	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “for me to judge him there concerning these charges” or “for a judge to decide if these charges against him are true or not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2913	ACT	25	21	yli3			0	Connecting Statement:	Festus finishes explaining Paul’s case to King Agrippa.
2914	ACT	25	21	ie7x	figs-activepassive	τοῦ δὲ Παύλου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τηρηθῆναι αὐτὸν εἰς τὴν τοῦ Σεβαστοῦ διάγνωσιν	1	But when Paul appealed for him to be kept for the decision of the emperor	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “But when Paul insisted that he stay under Roman guard until the time when the emperor could decide his case” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2915	ACT	25	21	ceq2	figs-activepassive	ἐκέλευσα τηρεῖσθαι αὐτὸν	1	I commanded him to be kept	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I ordered the soldiers to keep him in custody” or “I told the soldiers to guard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2916	ACT	25	22	t322	writing-quotations	αὔριον, φησίν, ἀκούσῃ αὐτοῦ	1	“Tomorrow,” he says, “you will hear him.”	The phrase he says can be moved to the beginning of the sentence. Alternate translation: “Festus says, ‘I will arrange for you to listen to Paul tomorrow.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
2917	ACT	25	23	y1yj			0	General Information:	Though he ruled over only a few territories, Agrippa was the current reigning king in Palestine. Bernice was his sister. See how you translated these names in Acts 25:13.
2918	ACT	25	23	qlm5			0	Connecting Statement:	Festus again gives information about Paul’s case to King Agrippa.
2919	ACT	25	23	yw76		μετὰ πολλῆς φαντασίας	1	with much ceremony	“with a great ceremony to honor them”
2920	ACT	25	23	ldb7		τὸ ἀκροατήριον	1	the hall	This was a large room where people gathered for ceremonies, trials, and other events.
2921	ACT	25	23	at4t	figs-activepassive	ἤχθη ὁ Παῦλος	1	Paul was brought in	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the soldiers brought Paul to appear before them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2922	ACT	25	24	n8qj	figs-hyperbole	ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	all the multitude of the Jews	The word all is an exaggeration used to emphasize that a great number of Jews wanted Paul to die. Alternate translation: “a great number of the Jews” or “many of the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2923	ACT	25	24	yv2q	figs-litotes	μὴ δεῖν αὐτὸν ζῆν μηκέτι	1	he ought not to live any longer	This statement is made in the negative to emphasize the positive equivalent. Alternate translation: “he should die immediately” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2924	ACT	25	25	fe2n	figs-you		0	General Information:	Here the first “you” is plural; the second “you” is singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
2925	ACT	25	25	f6hy		αὐτοῦ δὲ τούτου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τὸν Σεβαστὸν	1	but he himself having appealed to the emperor	“but because he said that he wanted the emperor to judge him”
2926	ACT	25	25	g856		τὸν Σεβαστὸν	1	to the emperor	The emperor was the ruler of the Roman empire. He ruled over many countries and provinces.
2927	ACT	25	26	jcq2		προήγαγον αὐτὸν ἐφ’ ὑμῶν, καὶ μάλιστα ἐπὶ σοῦ, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα	1	I have him before you, and especially before you, King Agrippa	“I have brought Paul to all of you, but especially to you, King Agrippa.”
2928	ACT	25	26	rhy2		ὅπως…σχῶ τι γράψω	1	so that … I might have something to write	“so that … I will have something else to write” or “so that … I will know what I should write”
2929	ACT	25	27	txs6	figs-doublenegatives	ἄλογον…μοι δοκεῖ πέμποντα δέσμιον, μὴ καὶ…σημᾶναι	1	it seems unreasonable for me to send a prisoner and to not state	The negative words unreasonable and to not can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “it seems reasonable to me that if I send a prisoner then I should also state” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2930	ACT	25	27	xm65		τὰς κατ’ αὐτοῦ αἰτίας	1	the charges against him	Possible meanings are (1) the accusations that the Jewish leaders have brought against him or (2) the charges under Roman law that apply to Paul’s case.
2931	ACT	26	intro	e2q6			0		Acts 26 General Notes Structure and formatting This is the third account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: Acts 9 and Acts 22) Paul told the King Agrippa why he had done what he had done and that the governor should not punish him for that. Special concepts in this chapter Light and darkness The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
2932	ACT	26	1	b34d			0	Connecting Statement:	Festus has brought Paul before King Agrippa. In verse 2, Paul gives his defense to King Agrippa.
2933	ACT	26	1	gz9f		Ἀγρίππας	1	Agrippa	Agrippa was the current reigning king in Palestine, though he ruled over only a few territories. See how you translated this name in Acts 25:13.
2934	ACT	26	1	wme6		ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα	1	having stretched out his hand	“holding out his hand” or “gesturing with his hand”
2935	ACT	26	1	vni8	figs-abstractnouns	ἀπελογεῖτο	1	made his defense	The abstract noun defense can be stated as a verb. Alternate translation: “began to defend himself against those who were accusing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2936	ACT	26	2	ha47		ἥγημαι ἐμαυτὸν μακάριον	1	I consider myself blessed	Paul said he was blessed because he considered his appearance before Agrippa to be an opportunity to speak about the gospel.
2937	ACT	26	2	xhz1		ἀπολογεῖσθαι	1	to make my defense	“to defend myself” or “to explain why I am innocent of these charges”
2938	ACT	26	2	mdq2	figs-activepassive	περὶ πάντων ὧν ἐνκαλοῦμαι ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων	1	Concerning all the things of which I am accused by the Jews	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “About the crimes that the Jews are saying that I committed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2939	ACT	26	2	cbr3	figs-synecdoche	Ἰουδαίων	1	the Jews	This does not mean all the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2940	ACT	26	3	kns2	figs-explicit	ζητημάτων	1	their controversies	You can make explicit what kinds of controversies Paul is speaking about. Alternate translation: “questions about religious matters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2941	ACT	26	4	t8bg	figs-hyperbole	πάντες οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι	1	all the Jews	This is a generalization. Possible meanings are (1) this refers to Jews in general who knew about Paul. Alternate translation: “the Jews” or (2) this refers to Pharisees who knew Paul. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2942	ACT	26	4	x96h		ἐν τῷ ἔθνει μου	1	among my nation	Possible meanings are (1) among his own people, not necessarily in the geographical land of Israel or (2) in the land of Israel.
2943	ACT	26	5	y9a1		τὴν ἀκριβεστάτην αἵρεσιν τῆς ἡμετέρας θρησκείας	1	the strictest sect of our religion	“a group within Judaism who live by very strict rules”
2944	ACT	26	6	xkp9	figs-you		0	General Information:	Here “you” is plural and refers to the people who were listening to Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
2945	ACT	26	6	s9kr		νῦν	1	Now	This word marks a shift from Paul discussing his past to talking about himself in the present.
2946	ACT	26	6	i9y5	figs-activepassive	ἕστηκα κρινόμενος	1	I stand here being judged	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I am here, where they are putting me on trial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2947	ACT	26	6	r42g	figs-metaphor	ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	because of my hope of the promise that was made to our fathers by God	This speaks about a promise as if it were something a person could look for and see. Alternate translation: “because I am waiting expectantly for God to do what he promised our forefathers he would do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2948	ACT	26	7	hnf1	figs-metonymy	εἰς ἣν τὸ δωδεκάφυλον ἡμῶν…ἐλπίζει καταντῆσαι	1	to which our 12 tribes hope to attain	The phrase our 12 tribes stands for the people in those tribes. Alternate translation: “which is also what our fellow Jews in the 12 tribes are waiting for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2949	ACT	26	7	apf2	figs-metaphor	εἰς ἣν…ἐλπίζει καταντῆσαι	1	to which … hope to attain	This speaks about a promise as if it were a destination that can be reached. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2950	ACT	26	7	kzg4	figs-merism	νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν λατρεῦον	1	serving night and day	The extremes night and day mean they “worshiped God continually.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
2951	ACT	26	7	c4lm	figs-synecdoche	ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων	1	by the Jews	This does not mean all the Jews. Alternate translation: “by the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2952	ACT	26	8	de83	figs-rquestion	τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρ’ ὑμῖν, εἰ ὁ Θεὸς νεκροὺς ἐγείρει?	1	Why is it judged unbelievable among you that God raises the dead?	Paul uses a question to challenge the Jews present. They believe God can raise the dead but do not think God brought Jesus back to life. This can be expressed as a statement. Alternate translation: “None of you think it is unbelievable that God raises the dead.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2953	ACT	26	8	ukk6		νεκροὺς ἐγείρει	1	raises the dead	Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “makes dead people come alive again”
2954	ACT	26	9	hm33		μὲν οὖν	1	Then	Paul uses this word to mark another shift in his defense. He is now beginning to describe how he formerly persecuted Jesus’ people.
2955	ACT	26	9	r4df	figs-metonymy	πρὸς τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ…ἐναντία	1	opposed to the name of Jesus	The word name here stands for the teaching about the person. Alternate translation: “to stop people from teaching about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2956	ACT	26	10	nys7	figs-activepassive	ἀναιρουμένων…αὐτῶν, κατήνεγκα ψῆφον	1	when they were being put to death, I cast my vote against them	The phrase were being put to death can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I voted in agreement with the other Jewish leaders to condemn the believers to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2957	ACT	26	11	rri6		πολλάκις τιμωρῶν αὐτοὺς	1	often punishing them	Possible meanings are (1) Paul punished some believers many times or (2) Paul punished many different believers.
2958	ACT	26	12	p55i			0	Connecting Statement:	While talking to King Agrippa, Paul tells about when the Lord spoke with him.
2959	ACT	26	12	us8d		ἐν οἷς	1	While doing this	Paul uses this phrase to mark another shift in his defense. He is now telling about when he saw Jesus and became his disciple.
2960	ACT	26	12	h3ic		ἐν οἷς	1	While	This word is used to mark two events that are happening at the same time. In this case, Paul went to Damascus during the time when he persecuted Christians.
2961	ACT	26	12	ajp6		μετ’ ἐξουσίας καὶ ἐπιτροπῆς	1	with authority and a commission	Paul had written letters from the Jewish leaders, granting him authority to persecute the Jewish believers.
2962	ACT	26	14	sip5	figs-metonymy	ἤκουσα φωνὴν, λέγουσαν πρός με	1	I heard a voice speaking to me	Here voice stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “I heard someone speaking to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2963	ACT	26	14	du3t		Σαοὺλ, Σαούλ, τί με διώκεις?	1	Saul, Saul, why do you persecute me?	This is a rhetorical question. The speaker is alerting Saul to what Saul is doing to him, and implying that Saul should not do that. Alternate translation: “Saul, Saul, you are persecuting me.” or “Saul, Saul, stop persecuting me.” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
2964	ACT	26	14	zsi2	figs-metaphor	σκληρόν σοι πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν	1	It is hard for you to kick against a goad	For Paul to resist Jesus and to persecute believers is spoken of as if he were an ox kicking at the sharp stick that a person uses to prod (or goad) the animal. It means that Paul is only harming himself. Alternate translation: “You will only harm yourself like an ox kicking a goad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2965	ACT	26	15	h2ws			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul continues giving his defense to King Agrippa. In these verses he continues quoting his conversation with the Lord.
2966	ACT	26	18	fk1k	figs-metaphor	ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν	1	to open their eyes	Helping people to understand the truth is spoken of as if a person were literally helping someone to open his eyes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2967	ACT	26	18	gw8f	figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ σκότους εἰς φῶς	1	to turn from darkness to light	Helping someone to stop doing what is evil and to start trusting and obeying God is spoken of as if the person is literally leading someone out of a dark place into a place of light. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2968	ACT	26	18	q3h8	figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ…τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ Σατανᾶ ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν	1	to turn from … from the power of Satan to God	Helping someone to stop obeying Satan and to start obeying God is spoken of as if a person were literally turning a person and taking them from the place where Satan rules and leading him to the place where God rules. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2969	ACT	26	18	m65i	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ λαβεῖν αὐτοὺς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ	1	for them to receive forgiveness of sins and	The abstract noun forgiveness can be stated as the verb “forgive.” Alternate translation: “so that God may forgive their sins and give them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2970	ACT	26	18	m9ve	figs-metaphor	κλῆρον	1	an inheritance	The blessings that Jesus gives to those who believe in him are spoken of as if they were an inheritance that children receive from their father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2971	ACT	26	18	c5ij	figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ	1	those who have been sanctified by faith that is in me	Jesus choosing some people to belong to him is spoken of as if he set them apart from other people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2972	ACT	26	18	bgc5		πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ	1	by faith that is in me	“because they believe in me.” Here Paul finishes quoting the Lord.
2973	ACT	26	19	ljx2		ὅθεν	1	Therefore	“Because what I have just said is true.” Paul had just explained what the Lord had commanded him in his vision.
2974	ACT	26	19	zv2u	figs-doublenegatives	οὐκ ἐγενόμην ἀπειθὴς τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ	1	I did not disobedient to the heavenly vision	This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “I obeyed the heavenly vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2975	ACT	26	19	sn4h	figs-metonymy	τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ	1	to the heavenly vision	This refers to what the person in the vision told Paul. Alternate translation: “to what the person from heaven told me in the vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2976	ACT	26	20	fei4	figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν	1	to turn to God	To start trusting God is spoken of as if a person turns to start walking toward God. Alternate translation: “to trust in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2977	ACT	26	20	h1v2	figs-abstractnouns	ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας ἔργα πράσσοντας	1	doing deeds worthy of repentance	The abstract noun repentance can be stated as the verb “repented.” Alternate translation: “and start doing good deeds to show they truly have repented” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2978	ACT	26	21	tl6t	figs-synecdoche	Ἰουδαῖοι	1	the Jews	This does not mean all of the Jews. Alternate translation: “some Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2979	ACT	26	22	n5hn			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul finishes giving his defense to King Agrippa.
2980	ACT	26	22	t8f4		μικρῷ τε καὶ μεγάλῳ	1	to both small and great	Here small and great are used together to mean “all people.” Alternate translation: “to all people, whether common or great” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism)
2981	ACT	26	22	f6py		οὐδὲν ἐκτὸς…ὧν	1	nothing other than what	This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “the same thing that”
2982	ACT	26	22	i9ki		ὧν τε οἱ προφῆται	1	what both the prophets	Paul is referring to the collective writings of the Old Testament prophets.
2983	ACT	26	23	pe9h	figs-explicit	εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός	1	that the Christ is to suffer	You can make explicit that Christ must also die. Alternate translation: “that the Christ must suffer and die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2984	ACT	26	23	p9t8		ἐξ ἀναστάσεως	1	from the resurrection	to be brought back to life
2985	ACT	26	23	sc5f		νεκρῶν	1	of the dead	The phrase the dead refers to the spirits of people who have died. To rise from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
2986	ACT	26	23	z2ms	figs-metaphor	φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν	1	is going to proclaim light	“he would proclaim the message about the light.” To tell people about how God saves people is spoken of as if a person were speaking about the light. Alternate translation: “he would proclaim the message about how God saves people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2987	ACT	26	24	h5b9			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul and King Agrippa continue to talk together.
2988	ACT	26	24	dvn2		μαίνῃ	1	you are insane	“you are speaking nonsense” or “you are crazy”
2989	ACT	26	24	tk27		τὰ πολλά σε γράμματα εἰς μανίαν περιτρέπει	1	your great learning is turning you to insanity	“you have learned so much that it is now making you crazy”
2990	ACT	26	25	dur9	figs-doublenegatives	οὐ μαίνομαι…ἀλλὰ	1	I am not insane … but	This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “I am sane … and” or “I am able to think well … and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2991	ACT	26	25	a6pb		κράτιστε Φῆστε	1	most excellent Festus	“Festus, who deserves highest honors”
2992	ACT	26	26	ed7y	figs-123person	ὁ βασιλεύς, πρὸς ὃν…αὐτὸν	1	the king … to him … from him	Paul is still speaking to King Agrippa, but he is referring to him in the third person. Alternate translation: “you … to you … from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
2993	ACT	26	26	cs7b		παρρησιαζόμενος λαλῶ	1	I am speaking boldly	Paul was not afraid to speak to the king about Christ. Alternate translation: “I speak with confidence”
2994	ACT	26	26	svn9	figs-activepassive	πείθομαι	1	I am persuaded that	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I am sure that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2995	ACT	26	26	tta8	figs-activepassive	λανθάνειν…αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ	1	that none of this are hidden from him	This can be stated in active and positive form. Alternate translation: “that he is aware of this” or “that you are aware of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
2996	ACT	26	26	v1uu	figs-activepassive	οὐ…ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο	2	this was not done in a corner	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “this has not happened in a corner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2997	ACT	26	26	i5wg	figs-metaphor	ἐν γωνίᾳ	1	in a corner	This means doing something in secret as if a person went and did something in the corner of a room where no one can see him. Alternate translation: “in a dark place” or “in secret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2998	ACT	26	27	a4a2	figs-rquestion	πιστεύεις, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα, τοῖς προφήταις?	1	Do you believe the prophets, King Agrippa?	Paul asks this question to remind Agrippa that Agrippa already believes what the prophets said about Jesus. This can be expressed as a statement. Alternate translation: “You already believe what the Jewish prophets said, King Agrippa.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
2999	ACT	26	28	y8qq	figs-rquestion	ἐν ὀλίγῳ με πείθεις Χριστιανὸν ποιῆσαι	1	In a short time, are you persuading me to become a Christian?	Agrippa asks this question to show Paul that he cannot convince Agrippa so easily without more proof. This can be expressed as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you do not think you can convince me so easily to believe in Jesus!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
3000	ACT	26	29	k7kq	figs-metonymy	παρεκτὸς τῶν δεσμῶν τούτων	1	but without these chains	Here chains stands for being a prisoner. Alternate translation: “but, of course, I do no want you to be a prisoner like I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3001	ACT	26	30	k7jh			0	General Information:	Bernice was the sister of King Agrippa (Acts 25:13).
3002	ACT	26	30	gaq5			0	Connecting Statement:	This ends Paul’s time before King Agrippa.
3003	ACT	26	30	u8vl		ἀνέστη τε ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ ὁ ἡγεμὼν	1	And then the king got up, and the governor	“And then King Agrippa stood up, and Governor Festus”
3004	ACT	26	31	blz8	figs-abstractnouns	οὐδὲν θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἄξιον τι πράσσει ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος	1	This man is not doing anything worthy of death or of chains	The abstract noun death can be stated as the verb “die.” Here chains stands for being in prison. Alternate translation: “This man does not deserve to die or to be in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3005	ACT	26	32	n293	figs-activepassive	ἀπολελύσθαι ἐδύνατο ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος	1	This man was able to have been released	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “This man could have gone free” or “I could have freed this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3006	ACT	27	intro	r82x			0		Acts 27 General Notes Special concepts in this chapter Sailing People who lived near the sea traveled by boat powered by the wind. During some months of the year, the wind would blow in the wrong direction or so hard that sailing was impossible. Trust Paul trusted God to bring him safely to land. He told the sailers and soldiers to trust that God would also keep them alive. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]]) Paul breaks bread Luke uses almost the same words here to describe Paul taking bread, thanking God, breaking it, and eating it that he used to describe the last supper Jesus ate with his disciples. However, your translation should not make your reader think that Paul was leading a religious celebration here.
3007	ACT	27	1	efe4	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Adramyttium was a city possibly located on the west coast of modern-day Turkey. The word “we” includes the author of Acts, Paul, and the others traveling with Paul, but not the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3008	ACT	27	1	dyf5			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul, as a prisoner, begins his journey to Rome.
3009	ACT	27	1	b2yz	figs-activepassive	ὡς…ἐκρίθη	1	when it was decided	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “when the king and the governor decided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3010	ACT	27	1	yv84		εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν	1	to Italy	Italy is the name of the province Rome was in. See how you translated Italy in Acts 18:2.
3011	ACT	27	1	s6ny		παρεδίδουν τόν τε Παῦλον καί τινας ἑτέρους δεσμώτας, ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ, σπείρης Σεβαστῆς	1	they handed over both Paul and some other prisoners to a centurion named Julius of the Augustan regiment	“they put a centurion named Julius, of the Augustan regiment, in charge of Paul and some other prisoners”
3012	ACT	27	1	k52u		παρεδίδουν τόν τε Παῦλον καί τινας ἑτέρους δεσμώτας	1	they handed over both Paul and some other prisoners	Possible meanings are that (1) they refers to the governor and the king or (2) they refers to other Roman officials.
3013	ACT	27	1	un2s	translate-names	ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ	1	to a centurion named Julius	Julius is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3014	ACT	27	1	d22f	translate-names	σπείρης Σεβαστῆς	1	of the Augustan regiment	This was the name of the battalion or army from which the centurion came. Some versions translate this as “the Imperial regiment.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3015	ACT	27	2	dnr9	figs-metonymy	ἐπιβάντες…πλοίῳ…μέλλοντι πλεῖν	1	having boarded a ship … being about to sail	Here ship … being about to sail stands for the crew that will sail the ship. Alternate translation: “having boarded a ship … with a crew that was about to sail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3016	ACT	27	2	fqy2		πλοίῳ Ἀδραμυντηνῷ	1	a ship from Adramyttium	Possible meanings are (1) a ship that had come from Adramyttium or (2) a ship that was registered or licensed in Adramyttium.
3017	ACT	27	2	f8pf		μέλλοντι πλεῖν	1	being about to sail	“going to sail soon” or “departing soon”
3018	ACT	27	2	m3ps		ἀνήχθημεν	1	we set sail	“we began our journey on the sea”
3019	ACT	27	2	h3uy		Ἀριστάρχου	1	Aristarchus	Aristarchus came from Macedonia but had been working with Paul in Ephesus. See how you translated his name in Acts 19:29.
3020	ACT	27	3	r71e	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “we” refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3021	ACT	27	3	u6lt		φιλανθρώπως…ὁ Ἰούλιος τῷ Παύλῳ χρησάμενος	1	Julius having treated Paul kindly	“Julius having treated Paul with a friendly concern.” See how you translated Julius in Acts 27:1.
3022	ACT	27	3	rp73	figs-abstractnouns	πρὸς τοὺς φίλους πορευθέντι, ἐπιμελείας τυχεῖν	1	to go to his friends to receive their care	The abstract noun care can be stated as a verb. Alternate translation: “to go to his friends so they could care for him” or “to go to his friends so they could help him with whatever he needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3023	ACT	27	4	d4hg		ἀναχθέντες, ὑπεπλεύσαμεν	1	having put to sea, we sailed under	“we started sailing and went under”
3024	ACT	27	4	mjt8		ὑπεπλεύσαμεν τὴν Κύπρον	1	we sailed under Cyprus	Here under Cyprus means they sailed along the side of that island that blocks the strong wind, so the ship was not forced off its course.
3025	ACT	27	5	g1t7		Παμφυλίαν	1	Pamphylia	This was a province in Asia Minor. See how you translated this in Acts 2:10.
3026	ACT	27	5	y6m6	figs-explicit	κατήλθαμεν εἰς Μύρρα τῆς Λυκίας	1	we came to Myra of Lycia	You can make explicit that they got off the ship in Myra. Alternate translation: “we came to Myra, a city of Lycia, where we got off the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3027	ACT	27	5	ni2x	translate-names	εἰς Μύρρα	1	to Myra	Myra is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3028	ACT	27	5	uaf4	translate-names	τῆς Λυκίας	1	of Lycia	Lycia was a Roman province, located on the southwestern coast of modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3029	ACT	27	6	j4cf	figs-explicit	εὑρὼν…πλοῖον Ἀλεξανδρῖνον, πλέον εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν	1	having found a ship from Alexandria sailing to Italy	It is implied that a crew would sail the ship to Italy. Alternate translation: “having found a ship that a crew had sailed from Alexandria and was about to sail to Italy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3030	ACT	27	6	fdq2	translate-names	Ἀλεξανδρῖνον	1	from Alexandria	This is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3031	ACT	27	7	zzw1	figs-explicit	δὲ…βραδυπλοοῦντες καὶ μόλις, γενόμενοι	1	And sailing slowly … and having arrived with difficulty	You can make explicit that the reason they were sailing slowly and with difficulty was because the wind was blowing against them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3032	ACT	27	7	pye5	translate-names	κατὰ τὴν Κνίδον	1	near Cnidus	This is an ancient settlement located in modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3033	ACT	27	7	hhf1		μὴ προσεῶντος ἡμᾶς τοῦ ἀνέμου	1	the wind no longer allowing us to go that way	“with a strong wind blowing against us so we could no longer go that way”
3034	ACT	27	7	b746		ὑπεπλεύσαμεν τὴν Κρήτην	1	we sailed along Crete	“we sailed along the side of Crete where there was less wind”
3035	ACT	27	7	mq4n	translate-names	κατὰ Σαλμώνην	1	opposite Salmone	This is a coastal city in Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3036	ACT	27	8	p4ri	figs-explicit	μόλις…παραλεγόμενοι αὐτὴν	1	sailing along it with difficulty	You can make explicit that even though the winds were not as strong as before, they were still strong enough to make sailing difficult. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3037	ACT	27	8	a64y	translate-names	Καλοὺς Λιμένας	1	Fair Havens	This was a port near Lasea, located on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3038	ACT	27	8	n7re	translate-names	πόλις ἦν Λασαία	1	the city of Lasea	This is a coastal city in Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3039	ACT	27	9	ea4l		ἱκανοῦ…χρόνου διαγενομένου	1	much time having passed	Because of the direction the wind was blowing, the journey from Caesarea to Fair Havens had taken more time than planned.
3040	ACT	27	9	u6x5		ὄντος ἤδη ἐπισφαλοῦς τοῦ πλοὸς, διὰ τὸ καὶ τὴν νηστείαν ἤδη παρεληλυθέναι	1	the voyage already being dangerous because even the fast had already passed	This fast took place on the Day of Atonement, which was usually either in the last part of September or the first part of October according to Western calendars. After this time, there was a higher risk of seasonal storms.
3041	ACT	27	10	p29v		θεωρῶ ὅτι μετὰ ὕβρεως καὶ πολλῆς ζημίας…μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι τὸν πλοῦν	1	I see that the voyage is about to be with injury and much loss	“if we travel now, we will suffer much injury and loss”
3042	ACT	27	10	nx9c		ζημίας, οὐ μόνον τοῦ φορτίου καὶ τοῦ πλοίου, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ψυχῶν ἡμῶν	1	loss, not only of the cargo and the ship, but also of our lives	Here loss means destruction when referring to things and death when referring to people.
3043	ACT	27	10	q9xt		οὐ μόνον τοῦ φορτίου καὶ τοῦ πλοίου	1	not only of the cargo and the ship	Cargo is something that a person transports from one place to another by boat. Alternate translation: “not only the ship and the goods on the ship”
3044	ACT	27	11	b1kz	figs-activepassive	ὑπὸ Παύλου λεγομένοις	1	spoken by Paul	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that Paul said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3045	ACT	27	12	l2n4	figs-activepassive	ἀνευθέτου…τοῦ λιμένος ὑπάρχοντος πρὸς παραχειμασίαν	1	the harbor being unsuitable for wintering	You can make explicit why it was not easy to stay in the harbor. Alternate translation: “because the harbor did not sufficiently protect docked ships during winter storms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3046	ACT	27	12	jmi3		λιμένος	1	harbor	a place on the coast that is protected from wind and waves so that ships can safely stay there
3047	ACT	27	12	k2ti	translate-names	Φοίνικα	1	Phoenix	Phoenix is a city port on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3048	ACT	27	12	z1lf	figs-metaphor	παραχειμάσαι	1	to spend the winter there	This speaks about the season of winter as if it were a commodity that someone can spend. Alternate translation: “to stay there for the cold season” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3049	ACT	27	12	x6vl		βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον	1	looking toward the southwest and toward the northwest	This means the opening of the harbor was toward those directions. Alternate translation: “it opened to the northwest and southwest”
3050	ACT	27	12	gyd2		κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον	1	toward the southwest and toward the northwest	These directions are based on the rising and setting sun. Southwest is a little to the left of the setting sun. Northwest is a little to the right of the setting sun.
3051	ACT	27	13	xx67		ἄραντες	1	after they had weighed anchor	Here weighed anchor means to pull the anchor out of the water. An anchor is a heavy object attached to a rope that is secured to the boat. The anchor is tossed into the water and sinks to the bottom of the sea keeping the ship from drifting about.
3052	ACT	27	14	hv8h			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul and those traveling on the boat encounter a fierce storm.
3053	ACT	27	14	m2xe		μετ’ οὐ πολὺ	1	not long after	“after a little while”
3054	ACT	27	14	fs4z		ἄνεμος τυφωνικὸς	1	a violent wind	“a very strong, dangerous wind”
3055	ACT	27	14	g1ek	translate-transliterate	ὁ καλούμενος Εὐρακύλων	1	called the northeaster	The word for northeaster in the original language is “Euroclydon.” You can transliterate this word for your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
3056	ACT	27	14	tz2k		ἔβαλεν κατ’ αὐτῆς	1	rushed down from it	“came in from the island of Crete, and it blew strongly against our ship”
3057	ACT	27	15	fxp1		συναρπασθέντος δὲ τοῦ πλοίου, καὶ μὴ δυναμένου ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ	1	And having been seized and the ship not being able to face into the wind	“And when the wind blew so strongly against the front of the ship that we could not sail against it”
3058	ACT	27	15	w1hl	figs-activepassive	ἐπιδόντες ἐφερόμεθα	1	having given way, we were driven along	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “we stopped trying to sail forward, and we let the wind push us whichever way it blew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3059	ACT	27	16	c4cg		νησίον…τι ὑποδραμόντες	1	sailing under the lee of a certain island	“sailing where the wind was not so strong, on the side of the island”
3060	ACT	27	16	aq56	translate-names	νησίον…τι…καλούμενον Καῦδα	1	of a certain island called Cauda	This island was located on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3061	ACT	27	16	h9z2		τῆς σκάφης	1	of the lifeboat	This is a smaller boat that is sometimes pulled behind the ship, and sometimes it was brought onto the ship and tied down. The smaller boat was used for various reasons, including escaping from a sinking ship.
3062	ACT	27	17	v9ag		ἣν ἄραντες	1	Having hoisted it up	“When they had lifted up the lifeboat” or “After they had pulled the lifeboat aboard the ship”
3063	ACT	27	17	tx1f		βοηθείαις ἐχρῶντο, ὑποζωννύντες τὸ πλοῖον	1	they used ropes, binding the ship	They tied ropes around the bottom of the ship so that the ship would not come apart during the storm.
3064	ACT	27	17	dvv4	translate-names	τὴν Σύρτιν	1	Syrtis	Syrtis is located on the coast of Libya, northern Africa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3065	ACT	27	17	l8kl		χαλάσαντες τὸ σκεῦος	1	having lowered the sea anchor	They put an anchor in the water in order to slow down where the wind would blow them.
3066	ACT	27	17	v6dn		σκεῦος	1	sea anchor	An anchor is a heavy object attached to a rope that is secured to the boat. The anchor is tossed into the water and sinks to the bottom of the sea keeping the ship from drifting about. See how you translated this in Acts 27:13.
3067	ACT	27	17	g7rw	figs-activepassive	ἐφέροντο	1	they were driven along	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “they had to go in whatever direction the wind blew them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3068	ACT	27	18	fx4m	figs-activepassive	σφοδρῶς…χειμαζομένων ἡμῶν	1	with us being exceedingly battered by the storm	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “since the wind blew us roughly back and forth so that all of us were badly battered and bruised by the storm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3069	ACT	27	18	nd5h		ἐκβολὴν ἐποιοῦντο	1	they began the jettisoning of the cargo	Here they is the sailors. This is done to lighten the weight of the ship in an effort to prevent the ship from sinking.
3070	ACT	27	18	ny6k		ἐκβολὴν	1	the jettisoning of the cargo	Cargo is something that a person transports from one place to another by boat. See how you translated this in Acts 27:10. Alternate translation: “goods on the ship”
3071	ACT	27	19	vm2k		αὐτόχειρες τὴν σκευὴν τοῦ πλοίου ἔριψαν	1	they threw overboard the equipment of the ship with their own hands	Here equipment refers to the sailors’ equipment needed to sail the ship: tackle, hoists, beams of wood, block and tackle, ropes, lines, sails, and the like. This indicates how desperate the situation was.
3072	ACT	27	20	if7a		μήτε δὲ ἡλίου μήτε ἄστρων ἐπιφαινόντων ἐπὶ πλείονας ἡμέρας	1	But neither sun nor stars appearing for many days	They could not see the sun and stars because of the dark storm clouds. Sailors needed to see the sun and stars in order to know where they were and what direction they were headed.
3073	ACT	27	20	p2wd		χειμῶνός…οὐκ ὀλίγου ἐπικειμένου	1	no small storm assaulting us	“as the terrible storm blew us roughly back and forth”
3074	ACT	27	20	mnj5	figs-activepassive	λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς	1	all remaining hope for us to be saved was taken away	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone stopped believing we would survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3075	ACT	27	21	mmb2			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul speaks to the sailors on the ship.
3076	ACT	27	21	d1le	figs-explicit	πολλῆς τε ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης	1	And after being a long time without food	It is implied that neither the sailors, nor Luke, Paul, and those with them had eaten anything. Alternate translation: “And when we had gone a long time without food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3077	ACT	27	21	zns2		ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν	1	in the midst of them	“in the middle of the people on the ship”
3078	ACT	27	21	bc1x		κερδῆσαί τε τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην, καὶ τὴν ζημίαν	1	and to suffer this injury and loss	“and as a result to suffer this harm and loss”
3079	ACT	27	22	d95r	figs-explicit	ἀποβολὴ…ψυχῆς οὐδεμία ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν	1	there will be no loss of life among you	Paul is speaking to the sailors. It is implied that Paul also means that he and those with him will not die either. Alternate translation: “none of us will die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3080	ACT	27	22	djh4		πλὴν τοῦ πλοίου	1	but only of the ship	Here “loss” is implied. Alternate translation: “but the only thing that will be lost is the ship”
3081	ACT	27	24	z1j8	figs-metonymy	Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι	1	You must stand before Caesar	The phrase stand before Caesar refers to Paul’s going to court and letting Caesar judge him. Alternate translation: “You must stand before Caesar so he can judge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3082	ACT	27	24	s3wv		κεχάρισταί σοι…πάντας τοὺς πλέοντας μετὰ σοῦ	1	has graciously granted to you all those who are sailing with you	“has graciously decided to allow all those who are sailing with you to live”
3083	ACT	27	25	r9t8	figs-activepassive	καθ’ ὃν τρόπον λελάληταί μοι	1	according to the way it was told to me	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “just as the angel told me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3084	ACT	27	26	vmp6		εἰς νῆσον…τινα, δεῖ ἡμᾶς ἐκπεσεῖν	1	we must run aground upon some island	“the ship is going to be wrecked on some island”
3085	ACT	27	27	im34			0	Connecting Statement:	The fierce storm continues.
3086	ACT	27	27	rrm5	translate-ordinal	ὡς δὲ τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη νὺξ ἐγένετο	1	And when the fourteenth night came	The ordinal number fourteenth can be translated as “fourteen” or “14.” Alternate translation: “After 14 days since the storm started, that night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
3087	ACT	27	27	la7u	figs-activepassive	διαφερομένων ἡμῶν	1	as we were being driven this way and that	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “as the wind blew us back and forth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3088	ACT	27	27	afs6	translate-names	τῷ Ἀδρίᾳ	1	the Adriatic Sea	This is the sea between Italy and Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3089	ACT	27	28	ruj1		βολίσαντες	1	taking soundings	“measuring the depth of the sea water.” They measured the depth of water by dropping a line with a weight tied to the end of it into the water.
3090	ACT	27	28	tq53	translate-numbers	εὗρον ὀργυιὰς εἴκοσι	1	they found 20 fathoms	A fathom is a unit of measurement for measuring the depth of water. One fathom is about two meters. Alternate translation: “they found the water was 40 meters deep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
3091	ACT	27	28	ig3m	translate-numbers	εὗρον ὀργυιὰς δεκαπέντε	1	they found 15 fathoms	A “fathom” is a unit of measurement for measuring the depth of water. One fathom is about two meters. Alternate translation: “they found the water was about 30 meters deep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
3092	ACT	27	29	b1qc		ἀγκύρας	1	anchors	An anchor is a heavy object attached to a rope that is secured to the boat. The anchor is tossed into the water and sinks to the bottom of the sea, keeping the ship from drifting about. See how you translated this in Acts 27:13.
3093	ACT	27	29	q4am		ἐκ πρύμνης	1	from the stern	“from the back of the ship”
3094	ACT	27	30	br71	figs-you		0	General Information:	Here the word “you” is plural and refers to the centurion and the Roman soldiers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
3095	ACT	27	30	b4wv		τὴν σκάφην	1	the lifeboat	This is a smaller boat that is sometimes pulled behind the ship and sometime it was brought onto the ship and tied down. The smaller boat was used for various reasons, including escaping from a sinking ship. See how you translated this in Acts 27:16.
3096	ACT	27	30	rr89		ἐκ πρῴρης	1	from the bow	“from the front of the ship”
3097	ACT	27	31	ez5c	figs-doublenegatives	ἐὰν μὴ οὗτοι μείνωσιν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε	1	Unless these men stay in the ship, you are not able to be saved	The negative words unless and not able can be stated in positive form. The passive phrase be saved can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “These men must stay in the ship in order for you to survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3098	ACT	27	33	q3y8		ἄχρι δὲ οὗ ἡμέρα ἤμελλεν γίνεσθαι	1	And up until it was about to become daytime	“And until almost sunrise”
3099	ACT	27	33	j5yg	translate-ordinal	τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτην σήμερον ἡμέραν	1	Today is the fourteenth day	The ordinal number fourteenth can be stated as “fourteen.” Alternate translation: “For 14 days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
3100	ACT	27	34	j3qx	figs-idiom	οὐδενὸς…ὑμῶν θρὶξ ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς ἀπολεῖται	1	a hair from the head of none of you will perish	This was a customary way of saying no harm would come upon them. Alternate translation: “none of you will be injured in any way in this disaster” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3101	ACT	27	35	yh7y		κλάσας	1	having broken bread	“after he had torn the bread into pieces” or “tearing off a piece from the loaf of bread”
3102	ACT	27	36	zt9q	figs-activepassive	εὔθυμοι δὲ γενόμενοι πάντες, καὶ	1	And they were all encouraged and	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “And this encouraged all of them and they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3103	ACT	27	37	ynq3	translate-numbers	ἤμεθα δὲ αἱ πᾶσαι ψυχαὶ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, διακόσιαι ἑβδομήκοντα ἕξ	1	And in all, we were 276 souls in the ship	“And there was a total of two hundred and seventy-six people in the ship.” This is background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
3104	ACT	27	39	vdk2		κόλπον	1	a bay	a large area of water partly surrounded by land
3105	ACT	27	39	r1bx		τὴν γῆν οὐκ ἐπεγίνωσκον	1	they did not recognize the land	“they saw land but could not recognize it as any place they knew”
3106	ACT	27	40	k66v		τὰς ἀγκύρας περιελόντες, εἴων	1	having cut loose the anchors, they left them	“they cut the ropes and left the anchors behind”
3107	ACT	27	40	ntr9		τῶν πηδαλίων	1	of the rudders	large oars or pieces of wood at the back of the ship used for steering
3108	ACT	27	40	cn2w		τὸν ἀρτέμωνα	1	the foresail	“the sail at the front of the ship.” The sail was a large piece of cloth that catches the wind to move the ship.
3109	ACT	27	40	pa1k		κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν	1	they headed to the beach	“they steered the ship toward the beach”
3110	ACT	27	41	y22n		περιπεσόντες…εἰς τόπον διθάλασσον	1	having come to a place between two seas	A current is water flowing in one continuous direction. Sometimes where two seas meet, the current of one can flow across the current of the other. This may cause the sand under the water to pile up making the water more shallow, and dangerous for ships.
3111	ACT	27	41	cpu5		πρῷρα	1	bow of the ship	“front of the ship”
3112	ACT	27	41	v35z		ἡ…πρύμνα	2	the stern	“the back of the ship”
3113	ACT	27	42	qul7		τῶν…στρατιωτῶν, βουλὴ ἐγένετο	1	the plan of the soldiers was	“the soldiers were planning”
3114	ACT	27	43	s2sz		ἐκώλυσεν αὐτοὺς τοῦ βουλήματος	1	stopped their plan	“kept them from doing what they planned to do”
3115	ACT	27	43	br8u		ἀπορίψαντας	1	having jumped overboard	“having jumped off the ship into the water”
3116	ACT	27	44	hw7p		οὓς…ἐπὶ σανίσιν	1	some on planks	“some on wooden boards”
3117	ACT	28	intro	w8yn			0		Acts 28 General Notes Structure and formatting No one knows for sure why Luke ends his history without telling what happened to Paul after he had been in Rome for two years. Special concepts in this chapter “Letters” and “brothers” The Jewish leaders were surprised that Paul wanted to speak with them, because they had received no letters from the high priest in Jerusalem telling them that Paul was coming. When the Jewish leaders spoke of “brothers,” they were referring to fellow Jews, not to Christians. Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter “He was a god” The native people believed that Paul was a god, but they did not believe that he was the one true God. We do not know why Paul did not tell the native people that he was not a god.
3118	ACT	28	1	p1bd	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “we” refers to Paul, the writer, and those who traveled with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3119	ACT	28	1	twx8			0	Connecting Statement:	After the shipwreck, people on the island of Malta helped Paul and everyone on the ship. They stay there for 3 months.
3120	ACT	28	1	j1yf	figs-activepassive	καὶ διασωθέντες	1	And having been brought safely through	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “And when we had arrived safely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3121	ACT	28	1	tt1i	figs-exclusive	τότε ἐπέγνωμεν	1	we then learned	Paul and Luke learned the name of the island. Alternate translation: “we learned from the people” or “we found out from the residents” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3122	ACT	28	1	f8y4	translate-names	Μελίτη ἡ νῆσος καλεῖται	1	the island was called Malta	Malta is an island located south of the modern-day island of Sicily. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3123	ACT	28	2	e7w6		οἵ…βάρβαροι	1	the native people	“the local people”
3124	ACT	28	2	v8yh	figs-metaphor	παρεῖχαν οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν ἡμῖν	1	offered to us not ordinary kindness	Being kind to someone is spoken of as if it were an object that someone offers. Alternate translation: “were especially kind to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3125	ACT	28	2	r7jy	figs-litotes	οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν	1	not just ordinary kindness	This phrase is used to emphasize the opposite of what is said. Alternate translation: “a great deal of kindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
3126	ACT	28	2	z9cp		ἅψαντες…πυρὰν	1	having lit a fire	“when they put together twigs and branches and burned them”
3127	ACT	28	2	itw2		προσελάβοντο πάντας ἡμᾶς	1	they welcomed us all	Possible meanings are (1) “welcomed all of the people from the ship” or (2) “welcomed Paul and all his companions.”
3128	ACT	28	3	g4ad		ἔχιδνα ἀπὸ τῆς θέρμης ἐξελθοῦσα	1	a viper, having come out from the heat	“a poisonous snake, driven from the bundle of sticks by the heat of the fire”
3129	ACT	28	3	xmx4		καθῆψε τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ	1	fastened on to his hand	“bit Paul’s hand and did not let go”
3130	ACT	28	4	ye7h		πάντως φονεύς ἐστιν ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος	1	This man certainly is a murderer	“For sure, this man is a murderer” or “This man is truly a murderer”
3131	ACT	28	4	ma1b	figs-explicit	ἡ δίκη	1	justice	The word justice refers to the name of a god that they worshiped. Alternate translation: “the god called Justice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3132	ACT	28	5	q5i3		ἀποτινάξας τὸ θηρίον εἰς τὸ πῦρ	1	shaking off the snake into the fire	“after shaking his hand so that the snake fell from his hand into the fire”
3133	ACT	28	5	asr8		ἔπαθεν οὐδὲν κακόν	1	suffered no harm	“was not hurt at all”
3134	ACT	28	6	m11i		πίμπρασθαι	1	to become inflamed	Possible meanings are (1) his body would swell because of the snake venom or (2) he would become very hot with fever.
3135	ACT	28	6	i6i6	figs-doublenegatives	μηδὲν ἄτοπον εἰς αὐτὸν γινόμενον	1	nothing unusual happening to him	This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “everything about him was as it should be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
3136	ACT	28	6	u81u	figs-metaphor	μεταβαλόμενοι	1	having changed their minds	To think differently about a situation is spoken of as if a person is changing his mind. Alternate translation: “thinking again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3137	ACT	28	6	cfe9	figs-quotations	ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν	1	they said that he was a god	This can be stated as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “they said, ‘This man must be a god.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
3138	ACT	28	6	d1rj		ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν	1	they said that he was a god	Perhaps there was a belief that someone who lived after a poisonous snake bite was divine or a god.
3139	ACT	28	7	f4sa	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the words “us” and we” refer to Paul, Luke, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3140	ACT	28	7	r95r		ἐν δὲ τοῖς περὶ τὸν τόπον ἐκεῖνον	1	Now in the area near that same place	Now is used to introduce a new person or event in the account.
3141	ACT	28	7	wx6t		τῷ πρώτῳ τῆς νήσου	1	of the most important man of the island	Possible meanings are (1) the main leader of the people or (2) someone who was the most important person on the island, perhaps because of his wealth.
3142	ACT	28	7	wh2d	translate-names	ὀνόματι Ποπλίῳ	1	named Publius	This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3143	ACT	28	8	g12t	writing-background	ἐγένετο δὲ, τὸν πατέρα τοῦ Ποπλίου πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον κατακεῖσθαι	1	And it happened that the father of Publius was lying sick, having been afflicted with fever and dysentery	This is background information about Publius’ father that is important to understanding the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
3144	ACT	28	8	m154	figs-activepassive	πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον	1	having been afflicted with fever and dysentery	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “was suffering from fever and dysentery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3145	ACT	28	8	fr46		δυσεντερίῳ	1	dysentery	Dysentery is an infectious intestinal disease.
3146	ACT	28	8	pwk5		ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῷ	1	having placed his hands on him	“having touched him with his hands”
3147	ACT	28	9	yk6u	figs-activepassive	ἐθεραπεύοντο	1	were being healed	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “he healed them too” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3148	ACT	28	10	ydg4		πολλαῖς τιμαῖς ἐτίμησαν ἡμᾶς	1	honored us with many honors	Probably they honored Paul and those with him by giving them gifts.
3149	ACT	28	11	jc5t	figs-explicit		0	General Information:	The Twin Brothers refers to Castor and Pollux, the twin sons of Zeus, a Greek god. They were thought to be protectors of ships. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3150	ACT	28	11	be1c			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul’s journey to Rome continues.
3151	ACT	28	11	qi6e		παρακεχειμακότι ἐν τῇ νήσῳ	1	that had wintered at the island	“that the crew left at the island for the cold season”
3152	ACT	28	11	cm2t		ἐν πλοίῳ…Ἀλεξανδρίνῳ	1	in an Alexandrian ship	Possible meanings are this refers to (1) a ship that came from Alexandria, or (2) a ship that was registered or licensed in Alexandria.
3153	ACT	28	11	em5p		παρασήμῳ Διοσκούροις	1	with a “Twin Gods” figurehead	On the bow of the ship, there was a carving of the two idols called “the Twin Gods.” Their names were Castor and Pollux.
3154	ACT	28	12	w5c6	translate-names	Συρακούσας	1	Syracuse	Syracuse is a city on the southeast coast of the modern-day island of Sicily, just southwest of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3155	ACT	28	13	se8v	translate-names		0	General Information:	The Market of Appius and The Three Taverns was a popular market and inn on the main highway called the Appian Way, about 50 kilometers south of the city of Rome. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3156	ACT	28	13	z2u4	translate-names	Ῥήγιον	1	Rhegium	This is the port city located at the southwestern tip of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3157	ACT	28	13	p633		ἐπιγενομένου νότου	1	a south wind having sprung up	“when the wind began to blow from the south”
3158	ACT	28	13	tz4h	translate-names	Ποτιόλους	1	Puteoli	Puteoli is located in modern-day Naples on the west coast of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3159	ACT	28	14	m1is		οὗ εὑρόντες ἀδελφοὺς	1	Having found brothers there	“When we met fellow believers there”
3160	ACT	28	14	n3tw	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοὺς	1	brothers	These were followers of Jesus, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3161	ACT	28	14	a2c5	figs-activepassive	παρεκλήθημεν	1	we were begged	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “they begged us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3162	ACT	28	14	bc3j		καὶ οὕτως εἰς τὴν Ῥώμην ἤλθαμεν	1	and in this way, we came to Rome	Once Paul reached Puteoli, the rest of the journey to Rome was on land. Alternate translation: “and after we stayed seven days with them, we went to Rome” or “and so our trip ended as we arrived in Rome”
3163	ACT	28	15	k754		ἀκούσαντες, τὰ περὶ ἡμῶν	1	having heard the things about us	“after they heard why we were there”
3164	ACT	28	15	m9tz	figs-metaphor	εὐχαριστήσας τῷ Θεῷ, ἔλαβε θάρσος	1	having thanked God, took courage	Here courage is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could take. Alternate translation: “thanked God and was encouraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3165	ACT	28	16	fib2	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the word “we” refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3166	ACT	28	16	hf2t			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul arrives in Rome as a prisoner but with the freedom to stay in his own place. He calls the local Jews together to explain what has happened to him.
3167	ACT	28	16	te8v	figs-activepassive	ἐπετράπη τῷ Παύλῳ μένειν καθ’ ἑαυτὸν	1	Paul was allowed to stay by himself	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the Roman authorities gave Paul permission to stay by himself instead of in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3168	ACT	28	17	vf7r		ἐγένετο δὲ	1	And it happened that	This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
3169	ACT	28	17	d77z		τῶν Ἰουδαίων πρώτους	1	the most important of the Jews	These were the Jewish civil or religious leaders present in Rome.
3170	ACT	28	17	e1dd		ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Here this means “fellow Jews.”
3171	ACT	28	17	g55i		ἐναντίον…τῷ λαῷ	1	opposed to the people	“against our people” or “against the Jews”
3172	ACT	28	17	hgk4	figs-activepassive	ἐγώ…δέσμιος ἐξ Ἱεροσολύμων παρεδόθην εἰς τὰς χεῖρας τῶν Ῥωμαίων	1	I was delivered as a prisoner from Jerusalem into the hands of the Romans	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews arrested me in Jerusalem and placed me in the custody of the Roman authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3173	ACT	28	17	x3r2	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὰς χεῖρας τῶν Ῥωμαίων	1	into the hands of the Romans	Here hands stands for power or control. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3174	ACT	28	18	fed7		τὸ μηδεμίαν αἰτίαν θανάτου ὑπάρχειν ἐν ἐμοί	1	there is no reason in me for a death penalty	“I had done nothing to cause them to execute me”
3175	ACT	28	19	lr96	figs-synecdoche	τῶν Ἰουδαίων	1	the Jews	This does not mean all of the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
3176	ACT	28	19	zk8f		ἀντιλεγόντων	1	objecting	“complaining about what the Roman authorities wanted to do”
3177	ACT	28	19	n6vf	figs-activepassive	ἠναγκάσθην ἐπικαλέσασθαι Καίσαρα	1	I was forced to appeal to Caesar	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I had to ask for Caesar to judge me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3178	ACT	28	19	e7gr	figs-metonymy	οὐχ ὡς τοῦ ἔθνους μου ἔχων τι κατηγορεῖν	1	not as if I have anything to accuse my nation	Here nation stands for the people. Alternate translation: “but it was not because I wanted to accuse the people of my nation before Caesar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3179	ACT	28	20	b1fd		τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ	1	the hope of Israel	Possible meanings are (1) the people of Israel confidently expect the Messiah to come or (2) the people of Israel confidently expect God to bring those who have died back to life.
3180	ACT	28	20	pgr8	figs-metonymy	τὴν ἅλυσιν ταύτην περίκειμαι	1	I am bound with this chain	Here bound with this chain stands for being a prisoner. Alternate translation: “I am a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3181	ACT	28	20	n3s7	figs-metonymy	τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ	1	of Israel	Here Israel stands for the people. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3182	ACT	28	21	x5d5	figs-exclusive		0	General Information:	Here the words “We,” “we,” and “us” refer to the Jewish leaders in Rome. (See: Acts 28:17 and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
3183	ACT	28	21	biz7			0	Connecting Statement:	The Jewish leaders respond to Paul.
3184	ACT	28	21	y4bx		οὔτε παραγενόμενός τις τῶν ἀδελφῶν	1	nor have any of the brothers come	Here brothers stands for fellow Jews. Alternate translation: “and none of our fellow Jews have come”
3185	ACT	28	22	kw1d		τῆς αἱρέσεως ταύτης	1	this sect	A sect is a smaller group within a larger group. Here it refers to those who believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “this group to which you belong”
3186	ACT	28	22	gy8t	figs-activepassive	γνωστὸν ἡμῖν ἐστιν	1	it is known to us	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “we know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3187	ACT	28	22	j12v	figs-activepassive	πανταχοῦ ἀντιλέγεται	1	it is spoken against everywhere	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “many Jews all over the Roman Empire are saying bad things about it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3188	ACT	28	23	u7pc			0	General Information:	Here the word “they” refers to the Jewish leaders in Rome. The words “him,” “his,” and “He” and refer to Paul (Acts 28:17).
3189	ACT	28	23	q4iv		ταξάμενοι…αὐτῷ ἡμέραν	1	when they had appointed a day for him	“when they had chosen a time for him to speak to them”
3190	ACT	28	23	dg5f	figs-metonymy	διαμαρτυρόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	testifying about the kingdom of God	Here kingdom of God stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “telling them about God’s rule as king” or “telling them how God would show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3191	ACT	28	23	peu1	figs-metonymy	τῶν προφητῶν	1	from the prophets	Here the prophets refers to what they wrote. Alternate translation: “from what the prophets wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3192	ACT	28	24	pmd6	figs-activepassive	καὶ οἱ μὲν ἐπείθοντο τοῖς λεγομένοις	1	And some were convinced about the things which he was saying	This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “And Paul was able to convince some of them by what he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3193	ACT	28	25	t5dq			0	General Information:	Here the word “they” refers to the Jewish leaders in Rome (Acts 28:17). The word “your” refers to the people to whom Paul had been speaking. In verse 26, Paul begins to quote the prophet Isaiah.
3194	ACT	28	25	i5xz			0	Connecting Statement:	As the Jewish leaders were ready to leave, Paul quotes the Old Testament scriptures that were appropriate for this time.
3195	ACT	28	25	n7pm	figs-metonymy	εἰπόντος τοῦ Παύλου ῥῆμα ἓν	1	after Paul had spoken one word	Here word stands for a message or statement. Alternate translation: “after Paul had said one more thing” or “after Paul had made this statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3196	ACT	28	25	b11n	figs-quotesinquotes	καλῶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐλάλησεν διὰ Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν	1	The Holy Spirit spoke well through Isaiah the prophet to your fathers.	This sentence contains quotations within quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3197	ACT	28	26	qj7q	figs-quotesinquotes	λέγων, πορεύθητι πρὸς τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον, καὶ εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε	1	saying, ‘Go to this people and say, “By hearing you will hear, but you will certainly not understand; and by seeing you will see, but you will certainly not perceive	This is the end of the sentence that begins with the words “The Holy Spirit spoke” in verse 25 and that contains quotations within quotations. You can translate one of the inner quotations as an indirect quotation, or you can translate two of the inner quotations as indirect quotations. “The Holy Spirit spoke well through Isaiah the prophet to your forefathers when the Spirit told Isaiah to go tell them that they will hear but will not understand and they will see but they will not perceive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
3198	ACT	28	26	pax8		ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε…βλέποντες βλέψετε	1	By hearing you will hear … by seeing you will see	The words hear and see are repeated for emphasis. Alternate translation: “When you listen you will hear … when you look you will see”
3199	ACT	28	26	s1ti	figs-parallelism	καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε…καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε	1	but you will certainly not understand … but you will certainly not perceive	Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. They emphasize that the Jewish people will not understand God’s plan. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
3200	ACT	28	27	fz42			0	General Information:	Translate Paul’s quotation of Isaiah as a direct quotation or indirect quotation according to how you translated it in Acts 28:25-26.
3201	ACT	28	27	qu6t			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul finishes quoting Isaiah the prophet.
3202	ACT	28	27	ts5a	figs-metaphor	ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου	1	For the heart of this people has become dull	People who stubbornly refuse to understand what God is saying or doing are spoken of as if their heart is dull. Here “heart” is a metonym for the mind. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3203	ACT	28	27	f5m4	figs-metaphor	τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν	1	with their ears they hardly heard, and they shut their eyes	People who stubbornly refuse to understand what God is saying or doing are spoken of as if they are unable to hear and are shutting their eyes so that they will see. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3204	ACT	28	27	lr99	figs-metonymy	τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν	1	might understand with their heart	Here heart stands for the mind. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3205	ACT	28	27	q8c2	figs-metaphor	ἐπιστρέψωσιν	1	might turn again	To start obeying God is spoken of as though the person were physically turning toward God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3206	ACT	28	27	vb9f		ἰάσομαι αὐτούς	1	I will heal them	This does not mean God will only heal them physically. He will also heal them spiritually by forgiving their sins.
3207	ACT	28	28	c575			0	Connecting Statement:	Paul finishes speaking to the Jewish leaders in Rome.
3208	ACT	28	28	b2za	figs-metaphor	τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	this salvation of God has been sent to the Gentiles	God’s message about how he saves people is spoken of as if it were an object that is sent. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God is sending his messengers to the Gentiles to tell them about how he will save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3209	ACT	28	28	d18n		αὐτοὶ καὶ ἀκούσονται	1	they also will listen	“some of them also will listen.” This response of the Gentiles is in contrast to the way the Jews of that time refused to listen to God.
3210	ACT	28	30	c56e	writing-endofstory		0	Connecting Statement:	Luke ends the story of Paul in the book of Acts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
3211	ACT	28	31	wv1l	figs-metonymy	κηρύσσων τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	proclaiming the kingdom of God	Here kingdom of God refers to God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “preaching about God’s rule as king” or “preaching about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])